NMS 5 Linux

NMS5LX
6.6.0
Network Management System 5 Linux
User manual
MN.00326.E - 001
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP, HP OpenView NNM and HPUX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Mozilla Firefox is a Mozilla Foundation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
NMS5LX
Contents
GENERAL DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................... 19
NMS5LX SYSTEM ................................................................................................................ 20
Main functionalities ....................................................................................................... 20
Modularity ................................................................................................................... 21
Maps .......................................................................................................................... 23
Equipment managed by NMS5LX .................................................................................... 24
System release ............................................................................................................ 24
Hardware/software requirements .................................................................................... 25
Maximum number of equipment managed by NMS5LX ....................................................... 25
Maximum number of NMS5UX users................................................................................ 25
LX MAP MANAGER WINDOW ................................................................................................ 26
Menu bar..................................................................................................................... 27
Title bar ...................................................................................................................... 27
Tool bar ...................................................................................................................... 28
Map area ..................................................................................................................... 29
View area .................................................................................................................... 30
New Object area........................................................................................................... 31
Objects ....................................................................................................................... 31
Graphic representation of the object: symbol.............................................................. 32
Symbol items: icon ................................................................................................. 32
Symbol items: name ............................................................................................... 34
Symbol items: check sign ........................................................................................ 34
Symbol items: notes ............................................................................................... 35
Symbol characteristics: behaviour............................................................................. 35
Symbol characteristics: colour .................................................................................. 36
Symbol characteristics: right button function .............................................................. 39
Highlight the remote equipment connected by the physical link ............................... 40
Find Remote window ......................................................................................... 40
Status bar ................................................................................................................... 41

Request Read-Write access to a map ......................................................................... 41
Platform Status bar....................................................................................................... 42

Display/hide the platform status bar.......................................................................... 42
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 1

Indication of the status of Dual Server functionality........................................................... 43
EQUIPMENT WINDOW ......................................................................................................... 44
ALPLUS NODAL WINDOW .................................................................................................... 45
ALCPLUS2 NODAL WINDOW................................................................................................. 46
RING MANAGER WINDOW ................................................................................................... 47
PACKET SERVICE MANAGER MAP WINDOW ............................................................................ 48
NMS5UX USER ................................................................................................................... 49
Relation between LINUX user and NMS5UX user ............................................................... 49
Predefined NMS5UX user ............................................................................................... 49
Characteristics of a NMS5UX user ................................................................................... 49

Username .............................................................................................................. 50
Password ............................................................................................................... 50
Map ...................................................................................................................... 51
Profile ................................................................................................................... 52
Superuser ........................................................................................................ 52
Privileged ........................................................................................................ 52
Advanced......................................................................................................... 52
Normal ............................................................................................................ 52
Entry............................................................................................................... 53
Internet................................................................................................................. 53
Ring/PSM............................................................................................................... 53
Expiry of a NMS5UX user ............................................................................................... 54
Manual login to LX Map Manager window ......................................................................... 54
Function of Inactivity Check - User.................................................................................. 54
ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ-WRITE/READ ONLY) ................................................................... 55
Update of LX Map Manager window in Read Only modality.................................................. 55
Passage from Read Only modality to Read-Write Modality .................................................. 56
Function of Inactivity Check - RW map ............................................................................ 56
Modality of access to the equipment window .................................................................... 56
Modality of access to the nodal window ........................................................................... 57
Modality of access to Ring Manager window ..................................................................... 57
Modality of access to Packet Service Manager Map window................................................. 58
SUPER MAP ....................................................................................................................... 59
DUAL SERVER CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................... 60
PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................................... 61
START/CLOSE THE GUI ....................................................................................................... 62
Start-up of NMS5LX GUI................................................................................................ 62
First start-up of NMS5LX GUI ......................................................................................... 64
Closing of NMS5LX GUI ................................................................................................. 65
Automatic closing of NMS5LX GUI ................................................................................... 65
GRAPHIC NETWORK REPRESENTATION ................................................................................. 66
2 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Objects predefined for the network representation ............................................................ 66
Container objects.................................................................................................... 66
Network Element objects ......................................................................................... 66
Real NE ........................................................................................................... 66
Virtual NE ........................................................................................................ 67
NE of ALplus Node type ..................................................................................... 67
NE of ALCplus2 Node type .................................................................................. 67
NE of WEB Generic type..................................................................................... 67
Generic Symbol objects ........................................................................................... 68
Link objects ........................................................................................................... 68
Label objects.......................................................................................................... 68
Ring objects ........................................................................................................... 68
PSM Map objects .................................................................................................... 68
Rules for the creation of the objects ................................................................................ 68

NE objects ............................................................................................................. 69
NE objects of ALplus Node type ................................................................................ 69
NE objects of ALCplus2 Node type............................................................................. 70
Container objects.................................................................................................... 70
Ring objects ........................................................................................................... 70
PSM Map objects .................................................................................................... 71
Objects creation - Edit menu .......................................................................................... 71

Examples of network graphical representation ............................................................ 71
Graphical representation of the network in a map.................................................. 72
Network subdivided in more maps....................................................................... 75
Objects creation - Add Network From File functionality ...................................................... 77

Create the file in csv format ..................................................................................... 77
Structure of the csv file ..................................................................................... 77
Rules of the compilation of the csv file ................................................................. 79
Compile the csv file starting from a model ............................................................ 80
Example of use of Add Network From File functionality................................................. 81
Object creation - Auto Discovery functionality................................................................... 83

Network Scan modality............................................................................................ 85
Setting of the parameters for the execution of the Network Scan mode .................... 85
Activation (deactivation) of the Network Scan modality .......................................... 86
NE Wake Up modality .............................................................................................. 87
Setting of the parameters for the execution of the NE Wake Up mode ...................... 87
Activation (deactivation) of the NE Wake Up modality ............................................ 88
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION ................................................................................................... 89
Connection procedure ................................................................................................... 89
Commands for the connection management ..................................................................... 89

Line Test command ................................................................................................. 89
Connect command .................................................................................................. 90
Disconnect command .............................................................................................. 90
Alarm Re-alignment command.................................................................................. 90
Configuration Upload command ................................................................................ 90
Connection status of the equipment ................................................................................ 91

Disconnected status ................................................................................................ 91
Connected status .................................................................................................... 91
Unreachable status ................................................................................................. 92
Maintenance status ................................................................................................. 92
Local management program WEB LCT ............................................................................. 93

Types of WEB LCT-equipment connection ................................................................... 93
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 3

Indication of the presence of the LCT user to the NMS5UX user..................................... 93
Enable/disable the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modality ........................ 94
Management via Command Line Interface (only for ALFOplus80HD) .................................... 94

Connection CLI-equipment ....................................................................................... 94
Indication of the presence of CLI user to the NMS5UX user........................................... 95
ALARM MANAGEMENT ......................................................................................................... 96
Acquisition of the alarms ............................................................................................... 96
Dynamic display of the alarms........................................................................................ 96
Display of the current alarms and of the alarm history ....................................................... 97
Alarm correlation.......................................................................................................... 97
Saving the alarms......................................................................................................... 97
Alarm severity.............................................................................................................. 98
Change of the alarm severity.................................................................................... 98
Change of the severity of User Input alarms ............................................................... 99
Enable/disable the alarms.............................................................................................. 99
Fleeting alarms ............................................................................................................ 99
Acknowledge the alarms ...............................................................................................100
Management of NE Log.................................................................................................101
PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT .........................................................................102
Activation/deactivation of the PM measures.....................................................................102
Acquisition of the results of the PM measures ..................................................................103

PM Polling and transmission of the commands ...........................................................103
PM Polling and activation of LCT-equipment connection ...............................................104
Display of the results of the PM measures .......................................................................104
Saving of the results of the PM measures........................................................................104
MENU AND COMMANDS ........................................................................................................ 105
MAP.................................................................................................................................106
Refresh ......................................................................................................................107
Refresh the LX Map Manager window........................................................................107
Map Properties ............................................................................................................108

Customizing the display settings in the map ..............................................................108
Submap Properties ......................................................................................................109

Associate/remove the background to a container .......................................................109
Import/Export .............................................................................................................110
Copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container ................................110
Copy the objects of a file to a map/container .............................................................111
Save the objects of a map/container to a file .............................................................111
Compare the objects of different maps/containers ......................................................112
Compare the objects of a file with the objects of a map/container ................................113
Import Export Map window .....................................................................................114
Change Map................................................................................................................115
Change map .........................................................................................................115
Add a map ............................................................................................................115
Delete a map ........................................................................................................116
4 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Change Map window ..............................................................................................117
Exit ...........................................................................................................................118
Close the LX Map Manager window...........................................................................118
EDIT................................................................................................................................119
Add ...........................................................................................................................120
Create Container objects ........................................................................................120
Create Network Element object................................................................................121
Create virtual Network Element objects ....................................................................122
Create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols)................................................................122
Create graphical Link objects...................................................................................123
Create Physical Links objects...................................................................................123
Create Label objects...............................................................................................124
Create Container, NE, graphical Link and Label objects described in a file ......................124
Add a map to a Super-map .....................................................................................125
Add Physical Link window .......................................................................................126
SNMP protocol (information) ...................................................................................127
SNMPv1/v2c....................................................................................................127
SNMPv3..........................................................................................................127
Delete........................................................................................................................128
Delete an object from the map ................................................................................128
Modify/View ................................................................................................................129
Verify/change the parameters of a Container object ...................................................129
Verify/change the parameters of a Network Element object .........................................129
Verify/change the parameters of a Generic Symbol object ...........................................130
Verify/change the parameters of a graphical Link object..............................................130
Verify/change the label of a Physical Link object ........................................................131
Verify/modify the E1 channels of a Physical Link object ...............................................131
Verify/modify a Label object ....................................................................................132
Information ................................................................................................................133
Verify the symbol information of a symbol.................................................................133
Manage the informative notes of a NE symbol............................................................133
Information window ...............................................................................................134
Graphical Symbol Properties .........................................................................................135

Display the symbol graphic parameters.....................................................................135
Find ...........................................................................................................................136
Search a symbol in the map ....................................................................................136
Arrange Symbols .........................................................................................................137

Align the symbols ..................................................................................................137
Generate Info for Web..................................................................................................138

Align the information in the databases of RAN and NMS ..............................................138
Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers.............................................................139

Set the size of the containers windows .....................................................................139
VIEW ...............................................................................................................................140
Show/Hide Graphical Links............................................................................................141

Show/hide the graphical links in the map ..................................................................141
Show/Hide Physical Links..............................................................................................142

Show/hide the physical links in the map ...................................................................142
Show Labels/Show Capacity ..........................................................................................143

Alternate the display of label and capacity on the links of the map................................143
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 5

Show/Hide Map Tree ....................................................................................................144
Show/hide the Map area .........................................................................................144
Show/Hide Platform Status ...........................................................................................145

Show/hide the platform status bar ...........................................................................145
Show/Hide Link Label...................................................................................................146

Show/hide the names of the Link objects ..................................................................146
Pan and Zoom.............................................................................................................147
PERFORMANCE..................................................................................................................148
Performance Monitoring Read........................................................................................149

Update the results of the PM measures of the equipment ............................................149
Performance Monitoring................................................................................................150
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour record) ....................................150
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute record) ................................151
Graphic Performance Monitoring window ...................................................................152
Old Performance Monitoring ..........................................................................................154

Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour records - Old PM)......................154
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute records - Old PM) ..................155
View/Modify P.M. Status ...............................................................................................156

Verify the operating status of the PM measure points for more NEs of the same type .....156
Activate the PM measures for NEs of the same type ...................................................156
Deactivate the PM measures for NEs of the same type ...............................................157
Activate/deactivate a PM measure point for one piece of equipment..............................157
Verify/modify the activation thresholds of PM alarms for one piece of equipment ............158
View/Modify P.M. Status window ..............................................................................159
Attributes Manager window .....................................................................................160
CONFIGURATION...............................................................................................................161
Equipment Info ...........................................................................................................162

Verify the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment ............................162
Software Inventory ......................................................................................................163

Verify the software version of equipment in the map ..................................................163
Verify the units list of equipment in the map ............................................................163
Save/print the list of the equipment/units .................................................................163
Open the equipment window ...................................................................................164
Verify the configuration/functional status of the equipment .........................................164
Update the equipment software ...............................................................................165
Switch the operation of the equipment controller memory benches...............................165
Require the update of the data to the equipment controller .........................................165
Filter/sort the list of the equipment/units ..................................................................166
Export the inventory data in csv format ....................................................................167
NE Software Inventory window ................................................................................168
OAM Status ................................................................................................................169

Verify the characteristics of OAM-FM Domain .............................................................169
Define an OAM-FM Domain......................................................................................169
Remove the OAM-FM Domain ..................................................................................170
OAM Manager window ............................................................................................171
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (info) ........................................................................172
OAM Ethernet functionality ................................................................................172
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented for equipment managed by NMS5LX .....172
OAM-FM Domain ..............................................................................................173
MA.................................................................................................................173
6 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

MEP ...............................................................................................................173
MIP ................................................................................................................175
Remote MEPs ..................................................................................................175
CCM...............................................................................................................177
LBM ...............................................................................................................178
LTM ...............................................................................................................179
Example of configuration of an OAM-FM maintenance Domain ................................180
E1 Browser .................................................................................................................182
Verify the status of 2Mbit/s tributaries ......................................................................182
Verify/change the label of a tributary .......................................................................182
Activate/deactivate the use of 2Mbit/s tributaries .......................................................182
Activate/deactivate the loops of 2Mbit/s tributaries ....................................................183
E1 Tributaries management window .........................................................................184
Equipment Port Configuration........................................................................................185

Verify the settings of the communication ports of equipment ......................................185
Display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment..............185
Display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of the equipment ...........................186
Verify/change the IP access control list (ACL) ............................................................186
Add a rule to the IP access control list ................................................................186
Remove a rule from the IP access control list .......................................................187
Enable/disable the use of the IP access control list ...............................................187
ACL Management window .................................................................................188
IP access control list (more info) ........................................................................188
Enable/disable the management LAN ports................................................................189
Verify/change the parameters of the supervision ports................................................190
Execute the Ping of the equipment ...........................................................................190
Open a Telnet session ............................................................................................191
Display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different .............................191
Change the Logical Address of the equipment ............................................................191
Filter/sort the list of the equipment ..........................................................................191
Port Communication Browser window .......................................................................193
Set In - Band / Management Port window .................................................................194
NE PPP Interfaces ........................................................................................................195

Display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment..............195
NE Routing Table .........................................................................................................196

Display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of the equipment ...........................196
Add an element to the Routing Table ........................................................................196
Delete an element from the Routing Table.................................................................197
Set or change the IP address used as Default Gateway ...............................................197
Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway..........................................................197
Routing Table window ............................................................................................198
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info) .........................................................199
Routing Table (Running) ...................................................................................199
Stored Routing Table ........................................................................................199
Default Gateway ..............................................................................................199
Hw Inventory ..............................................................................................................200
Display the hardware of equipment in the map .........................................................200
Save the data to file...............................................................................................201
Save periodically the data to file ..............................................................................202
Deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file ........................................................202
HW Inventory window ............................................................................................203
NE Backup/Restore ......................................................................................................204
Display the backup files of equipment in the map ......................................................204
Restore the equipment configuration ........................................................................205
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 7

Save the equipment configuration (backup)...............................................................205
Lock/unlock a backup file........................................................................................206
NE Backup/Restore window .....................................................................................207
NE Backup/Restore functionality (more info)..............................................................209
Backup operation .............................................................................................209
Restore operation ............................................................................................210
LOCATE............................................................................................................................211
Equipment List Locate ..................................................................................................212

Display the list of the equipment..............................................................................212
Save/print the list of equipment...............................................................................212
Filter/sort the list of the equipment ..........................................................................213
Open the equipment window ...................................................................................214
Verify the configuration/operating status of the equipment ..........................................214
Verify the equipment information .............................................................................215
Verify in which map the symbol of the equipment is present ........................................215
Add/remove a prefix to the logical address of the equipment .......................................215
Delete and rewrite the equipment table ....................................................................216
Verify the results of the PM measures of the equipment ..............................................216
Activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time ..................................217
Update the equipment software (FAMxc)...................................................................218
Verify/change the status/severity of the alarms and the trap forwarding status ..............219
Verify/change the LCT users list of the equipment ......................................................220
Verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to the equipment ..........................................221
Verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test) ...................................................221
Connect one or more pieces of equipment .................................................................221
Disconnect one or more pieces of equipment .............................................................222
Re-align the alarms of one or more pieces of equipment .............................................223
Acquire the configuration of one or more pieces of equipment......................................223
Transfer the configuration of the equipment to another equipment of the same type.......224
Start the Command Executor application...................................................................224
Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window ..................................................................225
Proxy Equipment List ...................................................................................................227

Display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent ....................................227
Verify/change the Proxy configuration parameters of the equipment .............................227
Equipment Managed by Proxy window ......................................................................228
Physical Link Browser...................................................................................................229

Display the list of the physical links relevant to a NE or to a container...........................229
Change the name of a physical link ..........................................................................229
Delete a physical link .............................................................................................230
Find one of the NEs end of the physical link ..............................................................230
Filter the display of the physical link list ....................................................................230
Physical Link Browser window..................................................................................231
Filter window ........................................................................................................232
COMMAND........................................................................................................................233
Line Test ....................................................................................................................234

Execute the Line Test for one or more pieces of equipment .........................................234
Execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers ..............................235
Connect .....................................................................................................................236
Connect one or more pieces of equipment .................................................................236
Connect the equipment of one or more containers......................................................237
Disconnect..................................................................................................................238
Disconnect one or more pieces of equipment .............................................................238
8 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Disconnect the equipment of one or more containers ..................................................239
Force NE Disconnect ....................................................................................................240

Force the software disconnection of one or more pieces of equipment ..........................240
Ping...........................................................................................................................241
Execute the Ping of the equipment ...........................................................................241
Alarm Re-alignment .....................................................................................................242

Re-align the alarms of one or more pieces of equipment .............................................242
Re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers ..................................243
Configuration Upload....................................................................................................244
Acquire the configuration of one or more pieces of equipment......................................244
Acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers ..........................245
Configuration Download................................................................................................246
Transfer the configuration of equipment to one or more real pieces of equipment ...........246
Transfer the configuration of equipment to one or more virtual pieces of equipment .......247
Configuration Download window ..............................................................................248
Reset Equipment Controller...........................................................................................249

Execute the software reset of the equipment .............................................................249
PMP Clear Alarm Table .................................................................................................250

Transfer to the PMP the default table of the alarms ....................................................250
FAULT..............................................................................................................................251
Network Alarm History .................................................................................................252

Display the history of the alarms in the map..............................................................252
Save/print the alarms list........................................................................................252
Copy the alarms list to a text editor .........................................................................253
Delete the alarms ..................................................................................................253
Acknowledge the alarms .........................................................................................254
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm .......................................................254
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update ..........................................................255
Filter the alarms list ...............................................................................................255
Highlight the symbol of the equipment in the map......................................................256
Verify the time interval between two different alarms .................................................257
Verify the configuration/operating status of the equipment ..........................................257
Sort the alarms list ................................................................................................257
Alarm History Browser window ................................................................................258
Data update modality .............................................................................................259
Modality of recording of the alarms ..........................................................................260
Network Current Alarms ...............................................................................................261

Display the alarms active in the equipment of the map ...............................................261
Acknowledge the alarms .........................................................................................262
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update ..........................................................262
Verify the configuration/functional status of the equipment .........................................264
Current Alarm Browser window................................................................................265
Data update modality .............................................................................................266
Old Alarm History ........................................................................................................267

Display the alarm history in the Old History table .......................................................267
Copy the alarms list in a text editor..........................................................................268
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 9

Display the acknowledge information of an alarm .......................................................271
Old History Browser window ....................................................................................272
NE Alarm History .........................................................................................................274
NE Current Alarms .......................................................................................................275
NE History Log ............................................................................................................276

Display the list of the NE Log of the equipment ..........................................................276
Create a NE Log ....................................................................................................276
Create more NE Logs at the same time .....................................................................277
Display the content of a NE Log ...............................................................................277
Delete a NE Log.....................................................................................................278
Delete all the NE Logs of the equipment....................................................................278
Delete the alarms stored in the controller of the equipment .........................................278
Copy the alarms list to a text editor .........................................................................279
Equipment History Log Management Main Window .....................................................282
NE Logger Browser window .....................................................................................283
NE Command Log ........................................................................................................284

Display the list of the Command Log of the equipment................................................284
Create a Command Log ..........................................................................................284
Create more Command Logs at the same time...........................................................285
Display the content of a Command Log .....................................................................286
Delete a Command Log ..........................................................................................286
Delete all the Command Logs of the equipment .........................................................287
Delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of the equipment......................287
Equipment History Command Log Management Main window.......................................288
NE Command Log (more info) .................................................................................289
Alarm Summary ..........................................................................................................290

Display the summary of the map alarms subdivided by severity ...................................290
Display the alarms stored in the alarm history ...........................................................292
Reset the indication of status change........................................................................292
Set the automatic data update ................................................................................292
Siae Alarm Summary window ..................................................................................293
Event Statistics ...........................................................................................................295

Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval ....................................295
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment .......................................296
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarm ..............................................296
Delete the alarms ..................................................................................................297
Filter the alarms ....................................................................................................298
NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window .............................................................................299
Transaction Log...........................................................................................................300
Display the list of the operations executed by NMS5UX users .......................................300
Save/print the list of operations...............................................................................300
Delete the operations .............................................................................................301
Filter the list of operations ......................................................................................301
Transaction Browser window ...................................................................................303
10 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Operation recording modality ..................................................................................304
Silenced eq.................................................................................................................307
Display the list of the equipment in silenced status.....................................................307
Force the equipment to exit from silenced status........................................................307
Highlight the symbol of a NE in the map ...................................................................308
Silenced Equipment List window ..............................................................................309
Alarm storm (more information) ..............................................................................310
TOOLS .............................................................................................................................311
Alarm Not. via e-mail - Conf..........................................................................................312

Display the operators enabled to receive alarm notifications via e-mail .........................312
Add an operator ....................................................................................................312
Change the characteristics of the operators ...............................................................313
Delete an operator .................................................................................................314
Activate/deactivate an operator ...............................................................................314
Acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail .....................................314
Create a filter for the alarm notifications via e-mail ....................................................314
Alarm notification - Operator Management window .....................................................316
Alarm Notification via e-mail .........................................................................................317

Acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail .....................................317
Alarm Notification via e-mail functionality .................................................................318
Command Executor .....................................................................................................319

Execute series of SNMP commands stored on file .......................................................319
Display the content of a file of SNMP commands ........................................................320
Display the files of scheduled SNMP commands..........................................................320
SNMP Command Executor window ...........................................................................321
NE Monitoring .............................................................................................................322
Display the list of the measures ...............................................................................322
Create a measure ..................................................................................................322
Display the characteristics of a measure ...................................................................323
Delete a measure ..................................................................................................323
Activate a measure ................................................................................................324
Deactivate a measure.............................................................................................324
Display the results of a measure ..............................................................................324
Save the results of a measure .................................................................................325
Display the results of a measure stored in a file .........................................................325
Save the results of a measure stored in a file ............................................................326
Delete a file ..........................................................................................................326
NE Monitoring window ............................................................................................329
NE Monitoring functionality (more info).....................................................................330
Auto Discovery ............................................................................................................331

Verify the settings of Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up) .....................331
Configure and activate the Network Scan modality .....................................................332
Deactivate the Network Scan modality......................................................................333
Configure and activate the NE Wake Up modality .......................................................333
Deactivate the NE Wake Up modality........................................................................334
Save the Auto Discovery configuration......................................................................334
Load the Auto Discovery configuration ......................................................................335
Display the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Discovery table).....................335
Search the equipment in the Auto Discovery table......................................................335
Delete one or more pieces of equipment from the Auto Discovery table.........................336
Create manually the object of the equipment present in the Auto Discovery table...........336
Scan Configuration window .....................................................................................337
Network Element Captured window ..........................................................................339
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 11

Rmon.........................................................................................................................340
Verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of equipment (RMON statistics).........................341
Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics .....................................341
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics ...............................342
Capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant .............................342
Save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant ....................343
Display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port ......................................343
Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics ..................344
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON statistics ............345
Save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port .........................................345
Display the history of the RMON 15 min statistics of an Ethernet port ...........................345
Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of RMON 15 min statistics .............347
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of RMON 15min statistics........347
Save the history of the RMON 15 min statistics of an Ethernet port...............................348
Display the history of the RMON 15 min (Priority/VLAN) statistics of an Ethernet port .....348
Save the history of the RMON 15 min (Priority/VLAN) statistics of an Ethernet port.........349
Verify the enabling and the activation criteria for a RMON counter ................................350
Enable and define the activation criteria for a RMON counter .......................................350
Disable an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics) ............................................351
Rmon Statistics Viewer window................................................................................352
Captured Statistics window .....................................................................................354
Rmon History View window .....................................................................................355
Rmon Aggregate History View window ......................................................................358
Rmon Service & Priority History View window ............................................................361
RMon standard (info) .............................................................................................364
RMON Standard ...............................................................................................364
Outline on the operation of RMON standard .........................................................364
Management via NMS5LX of statistics counters foreseen by RMon standard .............364
Statistics (Statistics group) ...............................................................................365
History of the statistics (History group) ...............................................................365
History of the statistics aggregated on 15 minutes (History (SIAE) group) ...............366
Management of RMON alarms (group: Alarm) ......................................................366
Ethernet counters (RMON) ................................................................................368
XML Export .................................................................................................................370

Save the equipment configuration to a XML file..........................................................370
Display the active cronjobs (XML Export) ..................................................................371
Create a cronjob (XML Export).................................................................................371
Delete one or more cronjobs (XML Export) ................................................................372
Display the list of the XML files in a given directory ....................................................372
Display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files...............................373
Display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files .........................373
Convert a XML file to a HTML file..............................................................................373
Display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file...........................................................374
Delete the XML, Log or HTML files ............................................................................376
Send emails with XML, Log or HTML .........................................................................376
XML Configuration Data Export window.....................................................................377
Scheduled Cron Jobs window...................................................................................378
XML Files window...................................................................................................379
Function XML Export (more info)..............................................................................380
Equipment supporting the function XML Export ....................................................380
Data saved in XML file ......................................................................................380
Modality of creation of XML files .........................................................................380
Log File ..........................................................................................................382
Management of XML files ..................................................................................382
Cfg File Download ........................................................................................................383

Download a configuration file on pieces of equipment of the same type .........................383
12 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Configuration Files Download window .......................................................................384
OPTIONS..........................................................................................................................385
Network Severity Code .................................................................................................386

Verify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment type..............386
Change the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment type ...........386
Siae Events Manager window ..................................................................................387
Equipment Severity Code..............................................................................................388

Verify the alarms characteristics .............................................................................388
Enable/disable and configure the alarms ...................................................................388
Equipment Severity Code window ............................................................................390
NMS5LX System Users .................................................................................................391

NMS5LX System Users - Superuser ..........................................................................392
Display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps......................392
Dreate a new map ...........................................................................................392
Add a NMS5UX user .........................................................................................392
Change the characteristics of the NMS5UX users ..................................................393
Delete a NMS5UX user......................................................................................393
Add a NMS5UX user .........................................................................................394
User Management (Superuser) window ...............................................................395
NMS5LX System Users - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged user ...............................396
Display the characteristics of the user who opened the map...................................396
Change the password associated to one's NMS5UX user ........................................396
User Management (Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged) window ...........................397
NMS5LX Logged Users..................................................................................................398

Display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open ........................................398
Require the logout of a NMS5UX user .......................................................................398
Force the logout of a NMS5UX user ..........................................................................399
Send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users........................................................399
Filter the NMS5UX users list ....................................................................................400
Display the list of the applications active in NMS5LX system ........................................400
Require the closure of an NMS5LX application............................................................400
Force the closure of a NMS5LX application.................................................................401
Filter the NMS5LX applications list............................................................................401
Nms5lx: Logged Users (users list) window ................................................................403
Nms5lx: Logged Users (applications list) window........................................................404
LCT Equipment Users (NEs of series ALS, ALFOplus, ALFOplus80)......................................405

Display the LCT users list of equipment.....................................................................405
Add a user ............................................................................................................405
Modify a user ........................................................................................................406
Delete a user ........................................................................................................406
LCT User Manager window ......................................................................................407
User management for NEs of series ALS, ALFOplus and ALFOplus80 (more info) ............408
LCT Equipment Users (ALFOplus80HD and AGS20)...........................................................409

Display the list of user groups .................................................................................409
Add a user group ...................................................................................................409
Modify a user group ...............................................................................................410
Delete a user group ...............................................................................................411
Display the user list ...............................................................................................411
Add a user ............................................................................................................411
Modify a user ........................................................................................................412
Delete a user ........................................................................................................412
NE User Manager window........................................................................................413
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 13

User management for ALFOplus80HD and AGS20 (more info) ......................................415
LCT Logged Users ........................................................................................................417

Display the list of the users (WEB LCT and NMS5UX) connected to equipment................417
Force the logout of a LCT user .................................................................................417
Logged Users window .............................................................................................418
LCT and NMS5UX users (more info)..........................................................................418
Remote Element Table .................................................................................................419

Display the remote equipment list of equipment.........................................................419
Add a station to the remote equipment list ................................................................420
Rename a station of the remote equipment list ..........................................................420
Delete a station from the remote equipment list.........................................................420
Add one piece of equipment to the remote equipment list ...........................................421
Add more pieces of equipment at the same time to the remote equipment list ...............421
Change the characteristics of the equipment of the remote equipment list .....................423
Delete equipment from the remote equipment list ......................................................423
Move the equipment within the remote equipment list ................................................424
Save the remote equipment list ...............................................................................424
Restore the remote equipment list from file ...............................................................424
Remote Element Table window ................................................................................425
Remote equipment list (more info) ...........................................................................426
Example of definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list ..................427
Example of definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list ...............428
NE Sw/Fw Download ....................................................................................................429

Update the WEB LCT application ..............................................................................430
Software Download window.....................................................................................431
Equipment software (more info) ..............................................................................432
WEB LCT application (more info)..............................................................................433
Scheduled Sw Dwl Status .............................................................................................434

Display the list of equipment scheduled for the software update ...................................434
Delete one or more NEs from the list .......................................................................434
Stop the software update........................................................................................435
Save the list of the scheduled equipment ..................................................................435
Schedule the software download ..............................................................................435
Re-read the release of NE firmware ..........................................................................435
Re-execute the software update ..............................................................................436
Switch the memory bench.......................................................................................436
Filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment ...........................................................437
Scheduling Download window ..................................................................................438
Bench Switch window .............................................................................................440
NE Sw/Fw Release .......................................................................................................441

Display the software version of the equipment ...........................................................441
Update the software of equipment ...........................................................................441
Switch the operation of the memory benches of the controller (equipment) ...................442
Delete the software in the standby memory bench ....................................................443
RelSw window .......................................................................................................444
FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download ..........................................................................................445

Update the equipment software (FAMxc)...................................................................445
Insert (FAMxc) window ...........................................................................................447
Equipment software (FAMxc) (more info) ..................................................................448
FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status ...................................................................................449

Display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software update ...................................449
Delete one or more pieces of equipment from the list (FAMxc) .....................................449
14 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

FAMxc Scheduled Software Download window............................................................450
FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release .............................................................................................451

Display the software version of FAMxc equipment ......................................................451
Switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc ............................451
Equipment Bench Releases window ..........................................................................452
NMS5UX - Secure Management .....................................................................................453

Verify the equipment security configuration ...............................................................453
Change the security protocols managed by the equipment ..........................................453
Set the security parameters of the equipment in Secure mode .....................................454
Set the file transfer protocol....................................................................................455
Save the configuration of the security parameters ......................................................455
NE Security Configuration window ............................................................................456
NMS5UX - Read PM Server Status..................................................................................458
NMS5UX - Feature Keys Mngt........................................................................................459

Display the feature keys present on the NEs of the current map ..................................459
Download the file of the feature keys to equipment ....................................................459
Feature Keys Manager window.................................................................................461
MISC ...............................................................................................................................462
Alarm History Backup...................................................................................................463

Backup the alarm history ........................................................................................463
Alarm History Restore ..................................................................................................464

Restore the alarm history from disk..........................................................................464
Restore the alarm history from tape .........................................................................464
Alarm History Delete Backup .........................................................................................465

Delete the backup files of the alarm history ...............................................................465
Performance Monitoring Backup.....................................................................................466

Save the PM measures (backup) ..............................................................................466
Performance Monitoring Restore ....................................................................................467

Restore the PM measures from disk..........................................................................467
Restore the PM measures from tape .........................................................................467
Performance Monitoring Delete ......................................................................................468

Delete the backup files of the PM measures ...............................................................468
NMS5LX Global Database Backup...................................................................................469

Save the database (backup)....................................................................................469
NMS5LX Global Database Restore ..................................................................................470

Restore the database .............................................................................................470
Proxy Configuration Parameters.....................................................................................471

Add a destination of the SNMP traps.........................................................................471
Delete a destination of the SNMP traps .....................................................................471
Change the password for the SNMP traps ..................................................................472
Proxy Configurator window .....................................................................................473
RING MANAGER ................................................................................................................474
Edit > RM-Add Ring .....................................................................................................475

Create Ring objects................................................................................................475
Edit > RM-Delete Ring..................................................................................................476

Delete a Ring object from the map ...........................................................................476
Edit > RM-Modify/View Ring..........................................................................................477

Verify/change the parameters of a Ring object...........................................................477
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 15

Fault > RM-Network Alarm History.................................................................................478
Display the alarm history of the equipment in the Rings ..............................................478
Save the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .......................................................479
Delete the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) ..........................................................479
Acknowledge the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History).................................................479
Align the RM alarms to those of NMS5LX (RM-Network Alarm History) ..........................480
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (RM-Network Alarm History) ..................480
Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .......................................................480
Sort the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) ........................................................482
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Alarm History)...............482
RM - Alarm History window .....................................................................................484
Acknowledge Information window (RM - Alarm History) ..............................................486
Data update modality (RM-Network Alarm History).....................................................487
Alarm recording modality (RM-Network Alarm History) ...............................................487
Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm ................................................................................488

Display the alarms active in the Ring equipment ........................................................488
Save the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) ......................................................488
Acknowledge the alarms (RM-Network Current Alarm) ................................................489
Align the RM alarms to those of NMS5LX (RM-Network Current Alarm) ..........................489
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (RM-Network Current Alarm) .................489
Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) ......................................................490
Sort the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) .......................................................491
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Current Alarm) ..............492
RM - Current Alarms window ...................................................................................493
Acknowledge Information window (RM - Current Alarms) ............................................494
Data update modality (RM-Network Current Alarm) ....................................................495
Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary .............................................................................496

Display the summary of the alarm of Ring equipment subdivided by severity .................496
Filter the alarm list (RM-Network Alarm Summary).....................................................496
Open the filter file (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ......................................................498
Save a filter file (RM-Network Alarm Summary) .........................................................498
Delete the filter file (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ....................................................498
Display the alarm history (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ............................................499
Reset the indication of status change (RM-Network Alarm Summary)............................499
Change the title of RM - Alarm Summary window .......................................................499
RM - Alarm Summary window .................................................................................500
Fault > RM-Element Alarm History .................................................................................502
Fault > RM-Element Current Alarm ................................................................................503
Fault > RM-Element Alarm Summary .............................................................................504
Locate > RM-Ring Browser............................................................................................505

Display the list of the Rings managed by the system ..................................................505
Open the Ring Manager window ...............................................................................505
Search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring .................................................505
Ring Browser window .............................................................................................506
Locate > RM-Path Browser............................................................................................507

Display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map ..............................507
Save the list of the Path .........................................................................................507
Delete one or more Paths .......................................................................................508
Delete the protection of a Path ................................................................................508
Add the protection to a Path....................................................................................509
Activate the management of a Path..........................................................................509
Deactivate the management of a Path ......................................................................509
Switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection ............................................509
16 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Display the active alarms in the Path equipment ........................................................510
Display the alarm history relevant to the Path equipment ............................................510
Display/change/save the information relevant to a Path ..............................................510
Display/change the configuration of a Path ................................................................511
Display/change the configuration of a Path protected..................................................512
Highlight a Path in Ring Manager window ..................................................................513
Highlight the Ring symbol containing a Path in the map window ...................................513
Filter/sort the list of the Path...................................................................................513
RM - Path Browser window......................................................................................515
RM - Path Description window .................................................................................517
Path: Configuration Parameters window ....................................................................518
Path: Protection Parameters window ........................................................................519
Locate > RM-Equipment Browser ...................................................................................521

Display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map ......................521
Filter the equipment list (RM-Equipment Browser) ......................................................521
Highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager window ..........................522
RM - Equipment Browser window .............................................................................523
PSM.................................................................................................................................524
Edit > Add PSM Map ....................................................................................................525

Create PSM Map objects .........................................................................................525
Edit > Delete PSM Map .................................................................................................526

Delete a PSM Map object from the map ....................................................................526
Edit > Modify/View PSM Map .........................................................................................527

Verify/change the parameters of a PSM Map object ....................................................527
Fault > PSM-Network Alarm History ...............................................................................528

Display the alarm history of the equipment in PSM Map objects ...................................528
Save the alarms list (PSM-Network Alarm History) .....................................................528
Delete the alarms (PSM-Network Alarm History) ........................................................529
Acknowledge the alarms (PSM-Network Alarm History) ...............................................529
Align the alarms of Packet Service Manager to those of NMS5LX (PSM-Network Alarm
History)................................................................................................................530
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (PSM-Network Alarm History) ................530
Filter the alarms list (PSM-Network Alarm History) .....................................................530
Sort the alarms list (PSM-Network Alarm History) ......................................................532
Display the alarm acknowledge information (PSM-Network Alarm History) .....................532
PSM - Alarm History window ...................................................................................533
Acknowledge Information window (PSM - Alarm History).............................................535
Data update modality (PSM-Network Alarm History) ...................................................536
Alarm recording modality (PSM-Network Alarm History) ..............................................536
Fault > PSM-Network Current Alarm ..............................................................................537

Display the alarms active in the equipment in PSM Map objects ...................................537
Save the alarms list (PSM-Network Current Alarm).....................................................537
Acknowledge the alarms (PSM-Network Current Alarm) ..............................................538
Align the alarms of Packet Service Manager to those of NMS5LX (PSM-Network Current
Alarm) .................................................................................................................538
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (PSM-Network Current Alarm) ................538
Filter the alarms list (PSM-Network Current Alarm) ....................................................539
Sort the alarms list (PSM-Network Current Alarm)......................................................540
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (PSM-Network Current Alarm) ............540
PSM - Current Alarms window .................................................................................541
Acknowledge Information window (PSM - Current Alarms)...........................................542
Data update modality (PSM-Network Current Alarm) ..................................................543
Fault > PSM-Element Alarm History ...............................................................................544
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 17

Fault > PSM-Element Current Alarm...............................................................................545
Locate > PSM-Map Browser ..........................................................................................546

Display the list of PSM Map objects managed by NMS5LX ............................................546
Open the Packet Service Manager Map window ..........................................................546
Search and highlight in the map the symbol of a PSM Map object .................................546
Filter the list of PSM Map objects .............................................................................547
Service Map Browser window ..................................................................................548
Locate > PSM-Equipment Browser .................................................................................549

Display the list of equipment present in the PSM Map objects of the system...................549
Filter the equipment list (PSM-Equipment Browser) ....................................................549
Highlight the equipment symbol in PSM Manager map ................................................550
PSM - Equipment Browser window ...........................................................................551
HELP ...............................................................................................................................552
About NMS5LX ............................................................................................................553
License Information .....................................................................................................554

Display the detail of the codewords ..........................................................................554
Display Legend............................................................................................................555
Display the legend of the object colours ....................................................................555
NMS5LX Software Module .............................................................................................556

Display the programs constituting the NMS5LX software .............................................556
Print the list of programs ........................................................................................556
NMS5UX Version window ........................................................................................557
System Administrator...................................................................................................558
Overview....................................................................................................................559
Manager .................................................................................................................560
APPENDICES ........................................................................................................................ 561
MENUS AND COMMANDS ....................................................................................................562
OPERATIONS LIST .............................................................................................................567
ASSISTANCE SERVICE .......................................................................................................577
18 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
NMS5LX system
LX Map Manager window
Equipment window
ALplus nodal window
ALCplus2 nodal window
Ring Manager window
Packet Service Manager Map window
NMS5UX user
Access to the map (Read-Write/Read Only)
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 19

NMS5LX SYSTEM
The NMS5LX system (Network Management System 5 LinuX) has been developed to monitor and manage
telecommunications equipment.
The user can communicate to the supervision system by means of LX Map Manager window, which repre-
sents the NMS5LX GUI at general level.
The NMS5LX system runs on the LINUX operating system.
Main functionalities
The main functionalities of NMS5LX system are the following:
Monitoring of the equipment connected to the system: dynamic display of the alarm detection and
recording in the alarm history (resident on the machine disk).
The displays stored in the alarm history are related among them: the date/time of alarm detection
and clear are indicated in the same record. The alarm history can be saved and recovered later.
Management of the alarm Log stored in the controller of the equipment: storing of the Log on the
machine, deletion of the Log from the controller.
Management and change of the severity level coupled to every equipment alarm.
Notification via e-mail of the alarm detection.
Graphic or table representation of the network.
The representation of the network is executed by the user by means of a series of predefined ob-
jects. It is possible to add, delete, move or change the configuration parameters of the objects in
any moment.
The network can be represented in a single map, or subdivided in more maps. The objects of a map
can be saved to file and, then, imported in a different map.
The creation of the objects can be executed by the user by means of one of the following ways:
Creation of each single object by means of a specific command (see Edit > Add menu).
Creation of the objects by means of the Add Network From File functionality: automatic cre-
ation of the objects described in a file in csv format.
Creation of the NE objects by means of the Auto Discovery functionality: detection of the
equipment in the network and not managed yet by the supervision system, automatic crea-
tion and connection of the discovered NE objects.
Management of the measures of Performance Monitoring (PM) of all the pieces of equipment con-
nected to the system:
Activation/deactivation, even contemporary, of the measures for equipment of the same
type.
Check of the result of the measures in graphic format.
Store on disk/tape the results. Then, the data can be restored, displayed and saved (subdi-
vided by month) on a file. The saving operation can be executed for a single measurement
of a single equipment or for a measurement of all the pieces of equipment of the same type
in the map.
Management of equipment software: immediate or scheduled software update for the equipment
connected to the system, check of the software versions.
Management of the equipment configuration: saving of the equipment configuration to file. Possi-
bility to transfer the configuration to any equipment in the network.
Management of virtual equipment.
Automatic execution of predefined sequences of SNMP commands (provided by SIAE MICRO-

ELETTRONICA on customers demand).
Display of the applications (browser, manager, etc.) currently active in NMS5LX system.
Possibility to require or to force the closing of an application program on progress (browser, man-
ager, etc.) of NMS5LX system.
20 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Display of the list of the users connected with the supervisory system. Possibility to require for or
to force the disconnection procedure (logout) of a user. Possibility to forward messages to a single
user or to all the users connected with the supervisory system.
Management of the list of LCT users stored in every single equipment.
Access to the system with 5 different user profiles which determine the available commands and
the functions.
Management of Dual Server configuration of NMS5LX.
Multiple Map Manager: possibility to create a Super-map including views to more submaps.
Management of multiple Read-Write accesses to the same map.
Management of OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) functionality for the configura-
tion of an OAM Domain/Level for a multiple selection of NEs.
Creation and management of Ring objects by Ring Manager application.
Creation and management of Ethernet network services by Packet Service Manager (PSM) applica-
tion.
Management of the severity and of the forwarding mode of the traps from the Proxy Agents to the
higher level supervision systems.
Management of the physical links among equipment. Packet Service Manager and Ring Manager lay
over the same topological base managed by the physical link functionality.
Indication of the status (enabled/disabled) of the feature keys for the equipment managed in NMS.
Modularity
The NMS5LX supervision system is a modular system composed by a set of main applications which, de-
pending on the type of equipment it must manage or on the type of functionality you wish to implement,
one or more applications are added to.
The group of main applications manages the NMS5LX GUI at general level (LX Map Manager window)
through which the user can represent graphically the network, manage the connection, check the operating
status, the results of the measures of Performance Monitoring, etc. of the equipment. At this level, the
equipment is considered on its whole.
This manual describes the use of NMS5LX GUI at general level (LX Map Manager window).
The use of equipment GUI changes depending on the equipment type and is reported in the relevant user
manuals.
For the description and use of the additional application:
RM, PSM, RAN and GR, refer to relevant documentation.
PM Data Export, refer to the relevant technical specifications.
Proxy Agent, refer to Create Network Element object (setting of the Proxy address of the equip-
ment) and to the administrator manual (management of the Proxy Agent application).
Equipment Manager
The equipment additional application (named <equipment type> Manager) has the task to pro-
vide, to NMS5LX GUI, commands and functions typical of the equipment type to manage.
Every equipment additional application manages a specific equipment GUI (Equipment window/
ALplus nodal window/ALCplus2 nodal window) through which the user can, besides checking the
equipment operating status, directly operate in its management checking or changing the con-
figuration parameters and verifying the signal quality parameters. The supervision system
NMS5LX can be provided with one or more Manager applications according to the equipment
types in the managed network.
The access to the GUI at general level takes place at the opening of the LX Map Manager window.
The access to the GUI at equipment level takes place opening the equipment window relevant
to equipment itself. The opening of the equipment window is subjected to the opening of the LX
Map Manager window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 21

Ring Manager
The additional application Ring Manager (RM) has the task to provide the NMS5LX GUI with the
commands and the functions specific for the configuration and the management of the network
paths (Path) among the PDH and SDH telecommunications equipment.
The application Ring Manager is composed by a part integrated in the menus of NMS5LX GUI
(menu Ring Manager). It allows representing, by means of the Ring objects, the subnetworks of
equipment implementing Paths directly in the maps, verifying the operating status of the NEs/
Links/Paths of the Ring objects and displaying the list of the objects Ring, Path and NE. At this
level, the Ring object is considered as a whole.
From the graphical object Ring, you can access the Ring Manager window which allows repre-
senting and managing the single equipment, Links and Paths of a specific Ring object.
The opening of a Ring Manager window is subjected to the opening of the LX Map Manager win-
dow. Moreover, a Ring Manager window can be opened by more users at the same time only if
the multi Read-Write modality is active (Multi Read write access function).
Packet Service Manager

The additional application Packet Service Manager (PSM) has the task to provide the NMS5LX
GUI with commands and specific functions for the configuration and the management of network
services among the radio equipment with Ethernet switch.
PSM application is composed by a part integrated in the menus of NMS5LX GUI (menu PSM)
which allows representing, by means of the PSM Map objects, the subnetworks of equipment
which implement the network services directly in the maps, verifying the functional status of
NEs in PSM Map objects and displaying the list of the PSM Map and NE objects. At this level, the
PSM Map object is considered as a whole.
From the graphical object PSM Map, you can access the Packet Service Manager Map window
which allows representing and managing the equipment, the (graphical and physical) links and
the Ethernet services belonging to PSM Map object.
The opening of a Packet Service Manager Map window depends on the opening of the LX Map
Manager window. Moreover, a Packet Service Manager window can be opened by more users at
the same time only if the multi Read-Write modality is active (Multi Read write access function).
The Packet Service Manager Map window can be opened only by enabled NMS5UX users (see
Characteristics of a NMS5UX user).
Remote Access NMS5UX

The additional application Remote Access NMS5UX (RAN) allows a NMS5UX user controlling and
managing the equipment connecting, via Internet, to the NMS5LX system through his own PC
and using the installed O.S. and the browser.
The servlet RAN carries out the connection with the NMS5LX system and displays the Web page
Remote Access NMS5UX which allows monitoring/managing the map equipment connected to
ones supervision system.
The access to the servlet RAN takes place opening the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX, which
can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see Characteristics of a NMS5UX user).
Geographical Redundancy
The additional application Geographical Redundancy (GR) allows managing the redundancy of
the maps among the different NMS5LX systems in order to keep the supervision/management
of the maps of a malfunctioning system through a different NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX system.
With map redundancy we mean the management, by a NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX system, of all
pieces of equipment associated to that specific map.
The GM application has been designed to work as part of NMS5LX, in fact its GUI is integrated
in the TMNMENU window (start menu) of NMS5LX GUI.
P.M. Data Export

The additional application P.M. Data Export allows exporting the results of the Performance Mon-
itoring measures relevant to all the pieces of equipment managed by NMS5LX system.
Data are exported directly from the tables of the NMS5LX database to a file in TLFF format. This
operation can be performed both manually by the user and set as periodic operation.
Moreover the application allows importing the data previously saved to file to the Oracle table
of PM.
22 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The P.M. Data Export application is not provided with a GUI. It is implemented by typing specific
commands entered on the command line of a system terminal window.
Proxy Agent
The additional application Proxy Agent allows dispatching the alarm traps, relevant to the equip-
ment managed by NMS5LX system, to an higher level Central Element Manager.
The application Proxy Agent is, in part, integrated in NMS5LX GUI (for the single piece of equip-
ment, the address of the machine is set, which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming from
the equipment to) and, in part, integrated in the TMNMENU window (start menu) of NMS5LX GUI
(activation, deactivation and management of the application Proxy Agent).
Maps
The NMS5LX system allows associating a map to every single NMS5UX user. More users can be associated
to the same map.
At the opening of the LX Map Manager window, the map opens associated to the user that executed the
operation.
A map can correspond to the whole equipment network or to a portion of it. In this second case, the user
which the map is associated to, will receive notifications only from equipment contained in his portion of
network.
To manage equipment, it is necessary to create a graphic symbol that represents it. The same symbol can
be created in more maps (creation of more copies of the symbol). In this way, the equipment data are not
duplicated in the database, but all the copies access to the same information.
Moreover, it is possible to save objects of a map in a file and export/import object between maps.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 23

Equipment managed by NMS5LX
The supervision system NMS5LX release 6.6.0 is able to manage the following equipment:
ALS series radio with ALS IDU (ALS)
ALS series radio with ALS-C IDU (ALS-C)
ALS series radio with AL IDU (AL)
ALS series radio with ALC IDU (ALC)
ALS series radio with AL IDU plus (ALplus)
ALS series radio with ALC IDU plus (ALCplus)
ALS series radio with ALplus2 IDU (ALplus2)
ALS series radio with ALCplus2 IDU (ALCplus2)
ALS series radio with ALCplus2e IDU (ALCplus2e)
ALS series radio with ALCplus2e IDU in XPIC 1+1 configuration (ALCplus2eX)
EL series radio
US series radio
ELFO radio
ALFO radio
ALFOplus radio
ALFOplus80 radio
ALFOplus80HD radio
SDH N+1 radio
ALplus node
Set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 ALplus pieces of equipment connected by Nodal Bus.
ALCplus2 node
Set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 ALCplus2 and/or ALCplus2e (with Ethernet Enhanced functionality
active) pieces of equipment connected by a TDM Nodal Bus and/or by Ethernet Nodal Bus.
FAMxc 5 RU multiplexer
FAMxc 2.5 RU multiplexer
ADM1 multiplexer
EXP63 multiplexer
ADMC multiplexer
PMP system - Point to MultiPoint

By means of a single PMP object, one PMP sector is controlled and managed (together with the master
station, the peripheral station and the optional equipment).
CommServerS (CS)
IPBOX
AGS10
AGS20
Switch Loop
Liberator V1000
WARNING For Liberator V1000 equipment, the operations possible via NMS are limited to the manage-
ment of the graphic symbol in the maps, to the connect/disconnect/line test/operations, to the alarm
management and to the opening of WEB interface.
System release
The information contained in this manual refers to system NMS5LX release 6.6.0. The release can be
checked at the opening of the GUI (Login window) or selecting the Help > About NMS5LX.
24 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Hardware/software requirements
The detail of the hardware and software requirements required by the NMS5LX system is reported in the
administrator manual.
Maximum number of equipment managed by NMS5LX
The maximum number of equipment that can be contemporarily managed by the NMS5LX system depends
on the code-word required by the customer.
Maximum number of NMS5UX users
The maximum number of NMS5UX users that can open the LX Map Manager window, using the same map
or different maps, depends on the code-word required by the customer.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 25

LX MAP MANAGER WINDOW
When the NMS5LX GUI is started, the LX Map Manager window is displayed.
Fig.1 shows an example of LX Map Manager window.
First time the LX Map Manager window of a new map opens, the Map and View areas are empty (unless
the system has been configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA).
In this case, before connecting the equipment, it is necessary to graphically represent the network in their
own map (Graphic network representation).
The NMS5LX GUI has been developed to be used in Linux environment, therefore it respects the conven-
tions - relevant to the menu arrangement, the window style, the use of the keyboard, of the mouse and
so on - typical of this operating system.
Fig.1 LX Map Manager window
2
1
3 10
7
7
4 7 5
9
6
(1) Menu bar

(2) Title bar
(3) Tool bar
(4) Map area
(5) View area
(6) New Object area
(7) Objects
(8) Status bar
(9) Platform Status bar
(10) Indication of the status of Dual Server functionality (if installed)
26 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Menu bar
Map. It contains the commands for the management of the map: to update the data, to resize the sym-
bols, to manage the background, to change/delete the map, to export/import the elements of a map
to/from another one and to save on a file all the symbols (container, NE, etc.) of the map.
Edit. It contains the commands for the management of the objects: creation, change, deletion, search,
alignment.
View. It contains the commands to hide/show the elements of the LX Map Manager window.
Performance. It contains the commands for the management of the measures of Performance Monitor-
ing (PM) of the equipment.
Configuration. It contains the commands to check the status/operation of one piece of equipment and
the configuration of the software/hardware of the equipment.
Locate. It contains the commands to display and manage, in table format, the equipment and the phys-
ical links.
Command. It contains the commands for the management of the connection between equipment and
NMS5LX system and for the execution of the download of the configuration of one piece of equipment
to another equipment.
Fault. It contains the commands for the management of the equipment alarms and for the display of
the history of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users.
Tools. It contains the commands to start the Command Executor application, for the management of
the alarm notification via e-mail, to manage the periodic monitoring of parameters, to manage the sta-
tistics of the Ethernet tributaries, to manage the Auto Discovery and XML Export functionality, to man-
age the configuration files of the equipment.
Options. It contains the commands for the management of the alarm severity, of the NMS5LX/LCT us-
ers, of the list of remote equipment and the commands for the equipment software update.
Misc. It contains the commands to save/recover/delete from disk/tape the alarm history, the results of
the PM measures and the system database and to set the configuration parameters of the SNMP Proxy.
Ring Manager. It contains the commands for the management of the Ring objects. The menu is avail-
able only if Ring Manager application is installed. For the use, refer to the relevant documentation.
PSM. It contains the commands for the management of the PSM Map objects. The menu is available
only if Packet Service Manager application is installed. For the use, refer to the relevant documentation.
Help. It contains the commands to open the on-line manuals of the supervisory system and to check
the list of the software programs that constitute the NMS5LX software package.
The selection of a menu item opens a menu that lists a series of commands. Some commands immediately
execute the associated action, others open further menus (items followed by ).
A command displayed white is available. A command displayed grey is not available.

The deactivation of a command can depend on the type of Access to the map (Read-Write/Read Only), on
the equipment type or on the user Profile, which does not foresee the use of the command, or on the fact
that the availability of command available requires to execute first another action as, for example, to select
a symbol.
Title bar
This bar shows the window name (can be configured by the superuser). By default, the name is <company
name - LX Map Manager>.
For description convenience, in this manual the main window of NMS5LX GUI is identified by the wording
LX Map Manager.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 27

Tool bar
Tab.1 Push-buttons (LX Map Manager window)
Description Equivalent command
Closes the LX Map Manager window Map > Exit
Displays the objects at Map level (Map area) -
Displays the objects at parent level (Map area) -
Displays the objects in the last selected container. -
Searches a symbol in the map Edit > Find
(1)
Aligns two or more objects vertically Edit > Arrange Symbols > Vertical
(1)
Aligns two or more objects horizontally Edit > Arrange Symbols > Horizontal
Hides/displays the labels of Link objects View > Show/Hide Link Label
Hides/displays the Map area View > Show/Hide Map Tree
Hides/displays the Platform Status bar View > Show/Hide Platform Status
Creates new equipment Edit > Add > Network Element
Creates a new container Edit > Add > Container
(2)
Creates a physical link Edit > Add > Physical Link
Displays the list of NEs Locate > Equipment List Locate
Displays the results of the PM measures for the selected NE (3) Performance > Performance Monitoring
Displays the alarm history Fault > Network Alarm History
Displays the list of the alarms active on the NE Fault > Network Current Alarms
Executes the Line Test for the selected NE (4) Command > Line Test > Network Element
(4)
Connects the selected NE Command > Connect > Network Element
(4)
Disconnects the selected NE Command > Disconnect > Network Element
(4)
Aligns alarms and configuration for the selected NE Command > Configuration Upload > Network Element
(4)
Aligns the alarms for the selected NE Command > Configuration Upload > Network Element
Decreases the size of the symbols (Zoom 40%) Map > Map Properties (20 pixel)
Sets the size of the symbols to Zoom 70% Map > Map Properties (38 pixel)
Increases the size of the symbols (Zoom 100%) Map > Map Properties (50 pixel)
(1) Push-button available only if at least two objects are selected.

(2) Command available only when exactly two NEs are selected.
(3) Push-button available only if one NE is selected.
(4) Push-button available only if at least one NE is selected.
28 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Map area
Overview
Pass from one level to another in the Map area
Objects of the Map area
Display/hide the Map area
Overview
The Map area is the part of the LX Map Manager window where the map objects, created by the
user to represent the equipment network, are displayed (except for Link (graphical), Physical
Link and Label objects).
The display of the map is of tree type, in order to represent also the hierarchical links among
the different items.
The level Map: test map (see Fig.2) represents the highest hierarchical level: Map level. It is
automatically created on the creation of the map and its name corresponds to the name as-
signed by the user to the map. This level cannot be deleted using the commands of the LX Map
Manager window, but it is automatically deleted on the deletion of the map.
The lower levels are represented by containers that can contain more Network Element objects,
Generic Symbol objects, Link objects, Label objects, Container objects), Ring objects and PSM
Map objects. The presence of a Container object automatically creates a hierarchically lower lev-
el (child level) with respect to the current level (parent level), as shown in Fig.2.
The subdivision of the equipment network in containers, and then in levels, allows creating areas
where grouping the equipment and items related by some characteristics, for example geo-
graphical or other.
In this way, when a Container object is selected, in the View area (Map area) only the elements
of the container will be displayed and not all the network elements.
The selection of a container (or of an element contained in it) changes the content of the View
area.
All the objects at the same level are listed in the area Map in alphanumeric order.
Every container (except for the Map level) has one symbol on its side (see Fig.2). Symbol:
+. The elements of the container are not displayed in the Map area under the container
itself (collapsed list).
-. The elements of the container are displayed in the Map area under the container itself
(expanded list).
It is possible to expand/collapse a list selecting the +/- symbol.
The user (independently from his own profile or type of access to the map) can choose to Dis-
play/hide the Map area in any moment.
Fig.2 Map area (LX Map Manager window)
1
3
2
4
(1) Container Map.
(2) Containers of lower level.
(3) Child level of container Map.
(4) Child level of container Map. Parent level of container Cologno M.
(5) Child level of container Milan.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 29

Pass from one level to another in the Map area
To pass to the:
Higher level (parent level), with respect to that selected and represented in View area,
press or select the container that represents the wished higher level.
Lower level (child level), with respect to that selected and represented in the View area,
select the container that represents the wished lower level.
To pass to the main window of the map (Map level) press or select the Map: container.
Objects of the Map area

The characteristics of the objects in the Map area: symbol, check sign, note sign, colour, etc.
are described in the par. Objects.
Display/hide the Map area

To hide the Map area, select View > Show/Hide Map Tree or press .
To display the Map area, when hidden, select View > Show/Hide Map Tree or press .
View area
Overview
Pass from one level to another in the View area
Objects of View area
Background of View area
Overview
The View area is the part of the LX Map Manager window where the objects of the container,
selected in the Map area, are displayed.
For example, if the container Venice is selected in the Map area (Fig.1), the NE objects ADM1,
AL E/W, AL-P1 and the possible Link (graphical), Physical Link and Label objects (not displayed
in the Map area) will be displayed in the View area.
The selected container, once selected the level displayed in the View area, is indicated above
the area itself in the Contents of Map: field.
The symbol / separates the levels. For example (Fig.1), the Contents of Map: test map/Venice
field indicates that the objects represented in the View area are present in the test map (parent
level) and in the Venice container (current level).
Pass from one level to another in the View area

To pass to the:
Higher level (parent level), with respect to that represented in the View area, press .
Lower level (child level), with respect to that represented in the View area, double click
on the container representing the level you wish to access.
To pass to the main window of the map (Map level) press .
Objects of View area

The characteristics of the objects in the View area: symbol, check sign, note sign, colour, etc.
are described in the par. Objects.
Background of View area

It is possible to Associate/remove the background to a container in such a way that, when the
container is selected, the corresponding background is displayed in the View area besides the
symbols of the container.
A different background can be associated to every container of the same map.
30 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

New Object area
The new objects are displayed in this area after their creation, before being moved by the user in the View
area.
Objects
An object is the representation, in NMS5LX GUI, of a network element.

The NMS5UX user must consider each part of the network as an object. For example, the network on its
whole is an object, the container (sub network, station, sub-station) where the equipment is located is an
object, each single equipment is an object.
All the created objects and the relevant values of the parameters are stored in the database of the NMS5LX
system. They will be stored until the user deletes them.
Operations
An object can be:
Created - see commands Edit > Add, Tools > Auto Discovery, Ring Manager > Edit >
RM-Add Ring and Packet Service Manager > Edit > Add PSM Map.
Deleted - see commands Edit > Delete, Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Delete Ring and
Packet Service Manager > Edit > Delete PSM Map.
Changed - see commands Edit > Modify/View, Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Modify/View
Ring and Packet Service Manager > Edit > Modify/View PSM Map.
Moved. To move an object, it is sufficient to select it and, keeping pressed the left mouse
button, move it to the new position.
In the Map area, it is possible to move the objects from a container to the other. In the
View area it is possible to put the object in a new position inside the area (container).
Furthermore, it is possible to select an object in the View area and drag it in a container
of the Map area or vice versa.
On the creation/deletion/change/movement of an object:

Container, NE, Generic Symbol, Ring or PSM Map, the object is represented/deleted/
changed/moved both in the Map area and in the View area.
Link (graphical), Physical Link or Label, the object is represented/deleted/changed/
moved only in the View area.
Predefined objects
The NMS5LX system has a series of predefined objects, which allow the user drawing his net-
work and providing to the system all the information necessary for the supervision and the mon-
itoring of every single equipment: Container objects, Network Element objects, Generic Symbol
objects, Link objects, Label objects, Ring objects and PSM Map objects.
Symbol
The graphic representation of the object is the symbol (Graphic representation of the object:
symbol). A symbol is composed by the following elements:
icon (Symbol items: icon)
name (Symbol items: name)
check sign (Symbol items: check sign)
notes (Symbol items: notes)
and it is characterized by
behaviour (Symbol characteristics: behaviour)
colour (Symbol characteristics: colour)
function of the mouse right button (Symbol characteristics: right button function).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 31

Graphic representation of the object: symbol
When an object is created, its graphic representation in the map is the symbol.
More symbols can correspond to the same object. In fact, if the same object is created more times, no new
object is created, but simply a copy of its graphic representation: that is a new symbol is created. The
symbol of the same object can be created more times in the same map or in other maps as shown in Fig.3.
In the system database, on the creation of the object, the relevant parameter are stored. On the creation
of the next copies (symbols) of the object, the values of the parameters are not inserted again, but the
values already present in the database are used.
To execute an operation, often it is necessary to select the symbol (or the symbols) which you wish to
operate on. The selected symbol is characterized by a dark grey square. A symbol remains selected until
the user selects another symbol.
It is possible to select one or more symbols at the same time clicking the left mouse button and drawing
an area containing the interested symbols or keeping pressed the Ctrl key selecting the symbols.
Fig.3 Relation between object and symbol
Map 1 Map 2 Map 3
Container 1 Container 1
Graphic
representation of Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol
object A in the maps A A A A
Symbol Symbol
A A
Information
about object A in
the database Object A
Symbol items: icon
The icon is the graphic representation of the symbol. Every object of NMS5LX system, except for the Label
object, has its own icon.
Tab.2 displays the symbol and the relevant icons represented in Map area and View area.
If a NE is connected by a physical link to one or more NEs present in containers different from the current
one, the system displays the symbol next to the icon of the local NE.
Tab.2 Icon (LX Map Manager window)
Symbol Icon Icon (View area)

(Map area)
Container -
Super-map
Container -
Map
Container
...
Generic
Symbol
.....
32 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Symbol Icon Icon (View area)
(Map area)
Link (graphi- -
cal)
Physical Link -
Label -
Ring
PSM Map
Network ALS series radio with ALS series radio with ALS series radio with ALS series radio with ALS series radio with
Element ALS IDU/ALS-C IDU AL IDU/ALC IDU AL IDU plus ALC IDU plus ALplus2 IDU
ALS series radio with ALplus ALCplus2 EL US

ALCplus2 IDU node node series radio series radio
ELFO radio ALFO radio SDH N+1 radio FAMxc 5 RU Mult. FAMxc 2.5 RU Mult.
ADM-C Multiplexer ADM-1 Multiplexer EXP63 Multiplexer PMP System COMM. SERVER-S
IPBOX WEB Generic ALS series radio with AGS10 ALFOplus radio
ALCplus2e IDU
ALS series radio with Switch Loop ALFOplus80 radio Radio ALFOplus80HD AGS20
ALCplus2e XPIC 1+1
Liberator V1000
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 33

Symbol items: name
The name (or label) is the string of characters displayed under the icon (View area) or next to the icon
(Map area).
All the objects of the NMS5LX system has a name defined on the creation of the object. For all the objects
the name can be changed later.
For the (graphical and physical) Link objects, it is possible to hide the name (see Create graphical Link
objects/Create Physical Links objects/Verify/change the parameters of a graphical Link object).
For Ring objects, the name represents the title of the window opened by the double click on the relevant
symbol.
For PSM Map objects, the name represents a part of the title of the window opened by the double click on
the relevant symbol (window title <PSM Map object name> - PSM Map).
Symbol items: check sign
The check sign is an item that characterizes only the Container and Network Element objects, except for
the virtual Network Elements.
WARNING The display of the check sign, as consequence of given events, in the graphical interface of the
supervision system can be configured during the system installation.
Network Element objects

Check sign present:
At least one alarm (current and/or in the alarm history) relevant to the equipment has
not been acknowledged.
To remove the symbol , acknowledge the current alarms (Acknowledge the alarms)
and/or in the alarm history (Acknowledge the alarms).
The WEB LCT program has connected to the NE at least once in Configuration modality
from the last time that the Equipment window of the equipment has been opened.
WARNING Only for ALFOplus80HD equipment, this condition is valid even of the operator
executes the connection via CLI.
To remove the symbol , open the NE equipment window.
The last operation of Configuration Upload towards the considered equipment is failed or
presents some errors.
The symbol is automatically removed at the first correctly executed operation of Con-
figuration Upload.
The check sign next to the icon indicates that there is at least ONE of the listed condition. It is
possible to check the status of each condition in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window
and Information window.
By default, the symbol indicates the status of the condition listed above.
It is possible to change the list of the conditions associating the presence (or absence) of the
symbol to two or to only one of the above mentioned conditions. For example, it is possible
to associate to the check sign only the condition of failed Configuration Upload. The change can
be made only by the Superuser. More information is reported in the administrator manual.
Check sign absent:

All the (current or historic) alarms of the equipment have been acknowledged.
WEB LCT has not been connected in Configuration modality from the last time that the
NE equipment window has been opened.
WARNING Only for ALFOplus80HD equipment, this condition is valid even of the operator
executes the connection via CLI.
The last operation of Configuration Upload to the equipment has been successfully exe-
cuted.
Network Element of ALplus Node type or ALCplus2 Node type objects

Check sign present: at least one NE with is present in the node.
Check sign absent: no equipment with is present in the node.
34 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Container objects
Check sign present: at least a NE or Container object with is present in the relevant con-
tainer.
Check sign absent: no NE or Container object with is present in the relevant container.
Symbol items: notes
The note symbol ( ) is an item that characterizes only the Network Element objects. In detail:
The presence of the note symbol indicates that there is an informative note written by the user
associated to the symbol.
It is possible to see (change/delete) the note opening the Information window.
The absence of the note symbol indicates that there is no informative note associated to the
symbol.
Symbol characteristics: behaviour
The behaviour represents the action executed when the user executes a double click on Map area or View
area area. Tab.3 displays for each object the relevant behaviour.
Tab.3 Behaviour of symbol (LX Map Manager window)
Symbol Behaviour (Map/View area)
Container It displays in the View area the objects of the container (child level)
NE (real) If connected at least once, the Equipment window opens
NE ALplus Node type If connected at least once, the ALplus nodal window opens
NE ALCplus2 Node type If connected at least once, the ALCplus2 nodal window opens
The default browser opens the WEB page available at the address set for
NE WEB Generic type
the specific object.
NE (virtual) The Equipment window opens *
Generic Symbol No action is executed
Link (graphical) No action is executed
Physical Link No action is executed
Label No action is executed
Ring The Ring Manager window opens
PSM Map The Packet Service Manager Map window opens
* For virtual equipment, the equipment window is opened only if the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE
of the same type has been transferred to the considered virtual equipment (see Network Element objects
and Configuration Download).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 35

Symbol characteristics: colour
The colour of the icon identifies the connection status or the alarm status of the symbols contained in it.
Tab.4 displays, for each object, the colours that be assumed by the relevant icon and the description of
the condition represented by them.
Tab.4 Colour of symbol (LX Map Manager window)
Symbol Colour Description
Container * Blue In the container:

There is no equipment in connected status
There are one or more pieces of equipment in connected status which the pro-
gram LCT is connected in Configuration modality to.
There are one or more pieces of equipment in maintenance status.
Green In the container there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status.
No NE is alarmed.
Light blue In the container there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where
at least one alarm of Warning severity is active.
Yellow In the container there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where
at least one alarm of Minor severity is active.
Orange In the container there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where
at least one alarm of Major severity is active.
Red In the container there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where
at least one alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.
NE (real) ** Brown The equipment is in Disconnected status
Green The equipment is in Connected status and does not present any alarm.
Light blue The equipment is in connected status and at least one Warning alarm is present.
Yellow The equipment is in connected status and at least one Minor alarm is present.
Orange The equipment is in connected status and at least one Major alarm is present.
Red The equipment is in connected status and at least one Critical alarm is present.
Red with X The equipment is in Unreachable status
Pink *** The equipment is in Maintenance status
White *** LCT is connected to the equipment in Configuration mode.
Only for ALFOplus80HD equipment: at least one user has opened the CLI for the
equipment or is connected to the equipment via LCT.
36 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NE ALplus Node Brown All the pieces of equipment in the node are in disconnected status
type*
Green All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status. No equipment has
alarm.
Light blue All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Warning.
Yellow All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Minor.
Orange All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Major.
Red All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Critical.
Or
In the node there is at least one equipment in unreacheable status.
Red with X All the pieces of equipment in the node are in unreachable status.
Pink *** In the node there is at least one piece of equipment in maintenance status.
White *** In the node there is at least one piece of equipment which the LCT program in Con-
figuration modality is connected to.
NE ALCplus2 Node Brown All the pieces of equipment in the node are in disconnected status
type*
Green All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status. No equipment is
alarmed.
Light blue All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Warning.
Yellow All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Minor.
Orange All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Major.
Red All the pieces of equipment in the node are in connected status.
The most serious alarm on the equipment of the node is Critical.
Or
In the node there is at least one equipment in unreacheable status.
Red with X All the pieces of equipment in the node are in unreachable status.
Pink *** In the pieces of node there is at least one equipment in maintenance status.
White *** In the node there is at least one piece of equipment which the LCT program in Con-
figuration modality is connected to.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 37

Radio NE of ALS series Brown The two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in disconnected status.
with ALCplus2e IDU in
XPIC 1+1 configura- Green The two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in connected status.
tion* No equipment is alarmed.
Light blue The two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in connected status.
The most serious alarm among the two equipment is Warning.
Yellow The two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in connected status.
The most serious alarm among the two equipment is Minor.
Orange The two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in connected status.
The most serious alarm among the two equipment is Major.
Red The two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in connected status.
The most serious alarm among the two equipment is Critical.
Or
At least one of the two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration is in unrea-
cheable status.
Red with X Both the equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration are in unreachable status.
Pink *** At least one of the two pieces of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration is in mainte-
nance status.
White *** LCT program is connected in Configuration modality to at least one of the two pieces
of equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration.
NE WEB Generic type Brown The colour is fixed and does not represent any status condition.
NE (virtual) Brown The colour is fixed and does not represent any status condition.
Generic Symbol Blue The colour is fixed and does not represent any status condition.
Link (graphical) Black The colour is fixed and does not represent any status condition.
Physical Link Blue The colour is fixed and does not represent any status condition.
Label Black The colour is fixed and does not represent any status condition.
Ring * Blue In the Ring:

There are one or more pieces of equipment in connected status which the LCT
program in Configuration modality is connected to.
Green In the Ring there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status. No NE has
alarms.
Light blue In the Ring there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Warning severity is active.
Yellow In the Ring there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Minor severity is active.
Orange In the Ring there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Major severity is active.
Red In the Ring there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at least
one alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.
38 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

PSM Map * Blue In PSM Map:

There are one or more pieces of equipment in connected status which the LCT
program in Configuration modality is connected to.
Green In PSM Map there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status.
No NE is alarmed.
Light blue In PSM Map there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at
least one alarm of Warning severity is active.
Yellow In PSM Map there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at
least one alarm of Minor severity is active.
Orange In PSM Map there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at
least one alarm of Major severity is active.
Red In PSM Map there is at least one piece of equipment in connected status where at
least one alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.
* By default the color of the icon always reflects the colour of the (contained) object with the most serious
condition.
** By default, the colour of the icon always reflects the colour of the most serious alarm on the equipment.
*** This condition is not propagated to the icons of the Containers that contain the NE.
Symbol characteristics: right button function
WARNING The Map: and SUPER-MAP:... containers (Map level) in the Map area of the LX Map Manager
window is not provided with the right button function.
Selecting a symbol and pressing the right mouse button, a context menu is displayed with the following
commands:
Open. If selected a:
Real NE (connected at least once) opens the Equipment window.
NE ALplus Node type (connected at least once) opens the ALplus nodal window.
NE ALCplus2 Node type (connected at least once) opens the ALCplus2 nodal window.
NE WEB Generic type opens the WEB page (via the default browser) available at the ad-
dress set for the specific object.
Virtual NE opens the Equipment window.
Container in the View area, displays the objects of the container in the View area.
Ring opens the Ring Manager window.
PSM Map opens the Packet Service Manager Map window.
Command available only if a NE, Container, Ring or PSM Map object is selected.
Delete. It deletes the selected object.
Properties. It displays/allows modifying the properties of the selected object. The displayed
window changes depending on the considered object.
Information. It opens the Information window.
Command not available if a Label or (graphical or physical) Link object is selected.
Equipment Information. It opens the Equipment Information window (see par. Verify the
characteristics and the functional status of the equipment).
Command available only if a NE object is selected.
NE Current Alarm. It opens the Current Alarm Browser window.
NE History Alarm. It opens the Alarm History Browser window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 39

LAN Port Management. It allows configuring the equipment management ports.
Command not available only if a NE object of type ALFOplus80HD is selected.
Ping. It executes the Ping in order to check the presence and reachability of the selected equip-
ment.
Each Ping command sends the test packet three times. After the selection of the command, the
Ping window is displayed, where the operation progress and the final statistics (number of sent
and received packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.) are displayed.
Open CLI. It opens the command line interface. For more information about this
Command available only if a NE object of type ALFOplus80HD is selected.
Find Remote Equipment. It allows to Highlight the remote equipment connected by the phys-
ical link.
Outgoing Physical Link. It opens the Physical Link Browser window.
The heading of the context menu displays the name of the selected symbol.
Highlight the remote equipment connected by the physical link
System access | Read Only, ReadWrite

User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
1. Select the equipment for which you wish to highlight the remote NE connected by the physical link.
2. Press the right button of the mouse and select Find remote equipment.
If the NE has:
no remote connection, the system displays the message No remote equipment available.
only one remote connection, the command opens the map window where the remote NE is and
selects it. If the remote NE is in the current map window, the command simply selects the re-
mote equipment
more than one remote connection (even to the same remote NE), the command opens the Find
Remote window. Select the interested remote equipment and press Highlight remote on Map
(or double click on the corresponding row). The system opens the map where the remote equip-
ment is and selects it.
Find Remote window
This window allows highlighting, in the corresponding map, the remote equipment of a physical link.
Parameters
Local Equipment. Logical address (label) of the local NE from which the command has been
launched.
Link Type. Type of physical link.
Local Interface. Physical interface of the link on the local equipment.
Remote Equipment. Logical address (label) of the remote equipment.
Remote Interface. Physical interface of the link on the remote equipment.
Map. Name of the map containing the remote equipment of the link.
Option push-buttons
All. Select to display in the table all the types of physical links present on the local equipment.
Radio. Select to display in the table all and only the physical links of Radio type present on the
local equipment.
40 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Ethernet. Select to display in the table all and only the physical links of Ethernet type present
on the local equipment.
STM-1. Select to display in the table all and only the physical links of STM-1 type present on
the local equipment.
E1. Select to display in the table all and only the physical links of E1 type present on the local
equipment.
NBUS. Select to display in the table all and only the physical links of NBUS type present on the
local equipment.
Push-buttons
Highlight Remote on Map. It opens the map containing the equipment selected in the table
and highlights it.
Cancel. It closes the window without executing any operation.
Status bar
This bar displays:

Name of the currently open map (Map:or SUPER-MAP).
Type of access to the map (Read-Write or Read Only).
Push-button Read-Write Request: for users not connected in Read Only modality to the map,
it allows Request Read-Write access to a map.
Name of the user who opened the map (User:).
Display status of the name of the (graphical and physical) link objects. In detail:
Wording [Link Label Off] present: the names of the links are not displayed.
Wording [Link Label Off] absent: the View area displays the names of the links with pa-
rameter Show Label active (see Create graphical Link objects and Create Physical Links
objects).
The user (independently from his operating level or from the type of access to the map) can-
Show/hide the names of the Link objects in any moment.
WARNING At the opening of the LX Map Manager window, independently from its previous setting, the dis-
play of the names of the link objects is active (the wording [Link Label Off] is not present).
Request Read-Write access to a map
WARNING Push-button available only if the current access to the map is in Read Only modality and ones
user has profile Privileged, Advanced or Superuser.
1. Press Read-Write Request. If:
Functionality Multi Read-Write active (default)

The map is closed and then re-opened with the Read-Write access.
Functionality Multi Read-Write inactive

no other user is connected to the same map in Read-Write modality, the modality of map access
immediately changes from Read Only to Read-Write,
another user is connected to the same map in Read-Write modality, the request message will
be displayed to him. If:
This second user accepts the request, ones access modality immediately changes from
Read Only to Read-Write (push-button Read-Write Request is not displayed any more)
and the access modality of the user who has confirmed the request immediately changes
from Read-Write to Read Only.
This second user does not accept the request, the refusal message will be displayed on
ones screen (push-button Read-Write Request remains displayed).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 41

Platform Status bar
At the opening of the LX Map Manager window, independently from its previous setting, the platform status
bar is NOT displayed.
The user (independently from its operating level or access type) can display or hide the platform status
bar in any moment.
Push-buttons
NMS5UX. Opens the window with the status of the processes of NMS5LX system.
PROXY. Opens the window with the status of the processes which manage the Proxy Agent.
RING. Opens the window with the status of the processes which manage the Ring Manager ap-
plication.
PSM. Opens the window with the status of the processes which manage the PSM Manager ap-
plication.
Boxes
Alr History Usage. Status and occupation percentage of the alarms in the table Alarm History
of NMS5LX.
Transaction Log Usage. Status and occupation percentage of the list of the operations exe-
cuted by the NMS5UX users in the table Transaction Log of NMS5LX.
The colour of the boxes Alr History Usage and Transaction Log Usage displays the occupation status
of the records in the relevant tables with respect to the maximum available status.
The maximum available status, considered as number of records which can be stored in each table,
and the occupation thresholds which determinate the status can be set by the Superuser. With ref-
erence to the default values of the thresholds, the meaning assumed by the status colours are the
following:
Green. The records in the specific table occupy less than 70% of the available space.
Blue. The records in the specific table occupy more than 70% but less than 75% of the avail-
able space.
Yellow. The records in the specific table occupy more than 75% but less than 80% of the
available space.
Orange. The records in the specific table occupy more than 80% but less than 90% of the
available space.
Red. The records in the specific table occupy more than 90% of the available space.
In this condition a message is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation.
The display of the message and the frequency which it is displayed at can be configured by
Superuser. Default: message display active, frequency: 60 seconds.
Messages
Alarm History occupation exceeded 100%. The Alarm History table has reached the maxi-
mum capacity limit.
In this case, the table stores all the alarms sent by the equipment (even if the limit has been
exceeded). At midnight, the system will delete, only among the alarms raised and then cleared,
the oldest records.
If the table Alarm History contains all alarms active and not cleared yet, the system will NOT
delete any record, even if their number exceeds the maximum set number.
Transaction Log occupation exceeded 100%. The Transaction Log table has reached the
maximum capacity limit.
In this case, all the operations will be stored in the table (even if the limit has been exceeded).
At midnight the system will delete the oldest records.
Display/hide the platform status bar
If the platform status bar is:
42 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

hidden, select View > Show/Hide Platform Status or press to display it;
displayed, select View > Show/Hide Platform Status or press to hide it.
Indication of the status of Dual Server functionality
WARNING This indication is displayed in the main window only if the Dual Server functionality is installed
in the system (see Dual Server Configuration).
The Dual Server box displays the status of PM server:

colour green and label Running: PM server works properly.
All the functionalities installed on PM server are available.
colour red and label Stopped: PM server has stopped its operation.
All the functionalities installed on PM server are not available, an error message is displayed to
inform the operator about this condition.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 43

EQUIPMENT WINDOW
The double click on the symbol of a Network Element object allows accessing to the GUI at equipment level
(equipment window), which is characteristic for every single type of equipment managed by NMS5LX.
At this level, the user can enter in the equipment to check and change the configuration parameters, to
execute maintenance and test operations.
The detailed description of each single equipment window and of the objects which it contains is reported
in the relevant Equipment user manual (see Manager).
The management of each single equipment window is made from a specific application, called <equipment
type> Manager. These application are part of the NMS5LX system and are provided on request.
For AGS-H, AGS10, AGS20, ALCplus2e equipment and all the pieces of equipment of ALFOplus family, the
command to open the equipment window displays the WEB Craft Terminal window dedicated to the specific
equipment.
For all the other equipment types, the <equipment type> Manager window is displayed.
The equipment window of a NE can be opened by more users at the same time (see Modality of access to
the equipment window).
The first user that opens the window can verify/change the configuration parameters (Read-Write access).
The other users can only check the parameters (Read Only access).
WARNING What just said is valid only for the Superuser and the users with privileged or advanced profile.
The normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the equipment window, even if they are the
first to open it.
In the equipment window with Read Only access, the alarms are not be dynamically updated. The operator
must request the update, selecting a proper command.
The equipment window can be opened only if the NE has been connected at least once.
What just said is valid only for the objects that represent real equipment.
For the virtual NEs, the equipment window can be opened after having transferred, at least once, the con-
figuration of a (real or virtual) NE of the same type to the considered virtual equipment.
WARNING The selection of a NE of WEB Generic type does not open the equipment window, because this
object does not represent a real equipment.
44 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

ALPLUS NODAL WINDOW
The double click on the symbol of a Network Element object of ALplus Node type allows accessing the GUI
at level of ALplus nodal system.
At this level, the user can enter in the node to verify the status and execute operations on the single equip-
ment constituting the ALplus nodal system as some commands, generally available for the NE objects in
the LX Map Manager window, are present in the nodal window for the node equipment.
Moreover, it is possible to access to the GUI of the single equipment only via the nodal window. In fact, it
is not possible to create in the map a NE object of one piece of equipment which is part of a nodal system.
It is automatically created in the database of the NMS5LX system when the ALplus Node NE object is cre-
ated.
WARNING The definition of node (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) MUST be carried
out at local level via the SCT/LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.
The nodal window can be opened:

By one user at a time (see Modality of access to the nodal window).
Only if the node (and then all the pieces of node equipment) have been connected at least once.
The detailed description of the ALplus nodal window is reported in the user manual ...ALplus Node Manager
(see Manager).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 45

ALCPLUS2 NODAL WINDOW
The double click on the symbol of a Network Element object of ALCplus2 Node type allows accessing the
GUI at level of ALCplus2 nodal system.
At this level, the user can enter in the node to verify the status and execute operations on the single equip-
ment constituting the ALCplus2 nodal system as some commands, generally available for the NE objects
in the LX Map Manager window, are present in the nodal window for the node equipment.
Moreover, it is possible to access to the GUI of the single equipment only via the nodal window. In fact, it
is not possible to create in the map a NE object of one piece of equipment which is part of a nodal system.
It is automatically created in the database of the NMS5LX system when the ALCplus2 Node NE object is
created.
WARNING The definition of node (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) MUST be carried
out at local level via the SCT/LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.
The nodal window can be opened:

By one user at a time (see Modality of access to the nodal window).
Only if the node (and then all the pieces of node equipment) have been connected at least once.
The detailed description of the ALCplus2 nodal window is reported in the user manual ...ALCplus2 Node
Manager (see Manager).
46 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

RING MANAGER WINDOW
The double click on the symbol of a Ring object allows accessing to the GUI of the Ring Manager applica-
tion: Ring Manager window.
This application has been developed to create, configure and manage the paths among SDH and PDH
equipment. A Path is a bidirectional connection between a source node and a destination node and is iden-
tified by an input channel on the source node and an output channel on the destination node.
The Ring Manager application is integrated in the NMS5LX system and supports the equipment (Network
Element) already managed by the supervision system.
The Ring Manager window, relevant to the same Ring object, can be opened by:
only one user at the same time, if the Multi Read-Write modality is not enabled.
more users at the same time, only if the Multi Read-Write modality is enabled (default).
For more information, see Multi Read write access function.
The detailed description of the Ring Manager window and of the objects contained in it is reported in the
relevant user manual.
WARNING The Ring Manager application is optional and is provided on demand.
The Ring Manager window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see Add a NMS5UX user/
Change the characteristics of the NMS5UX users).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 47

PACKET SERVICE MANAGER MAP WINDOW
The double click on the symbol of a PSM Map object allows accessing to the GUI of the Packet Service Man-
ager application: Packet Service Manager Map window.
This application has been developed to create, configure and manage network services among radio equip-
ment with Ethernet tributaries.
PSM application is integrated in the NMS5LX system and supports equipment (Network Element) of series
ALS (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2, ALCplus2e), AGS10, AGS20 and
ALFOplus80HD equipment, and equipment of series ALFO and ALFOPlus already managed by the supervi-
sion system.
The Packet Service Manager Map window, relevant to the same PSM Map object, can be opened by:
The detailed description of the Packet Service Manager application is reported in the relevant user manual.
WARNING The Packet Service Manager application is optional and provided on demand.
The Packet Service Manager Map window can be opened only by enabled NMS5UX users (see Add a
NMS5UX user/Change the characteristics of the NMS5UX users).
48 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NMS5UX USER
The NMS5LX GUI can be started at the same time on more PCs or terminals connected by an Ethernet
connection.
In this way, the display of the information relevant to the equipment network is contemporaneous for all
the terminals and the insertion of the data or the sending of the commands by one user is possible from
all the terminals.
To open a copy of NMS5LX GUI, it is necessary to have a NMS5UX user.

The supervision system is provided with a Predefined NMS5UX user. In a second moment, it will be possible
to create all the wished NMS5UX users (see Add a NMS5UX user).
Relation between LINUX user and NMS5UX user
The NMS5LX system has been developed to be used with the Linux operating system.
For each NMS5UX user you want to create, it is necessary to create a Linux user. There is a specific con-
nection between them: it is possible to associate a single NMS5UX user to a Linux user.
Then, before creating the NMS5UX user, it is necessary to create the relevant Linux user.
The username and the password defined at the creation of the Linux user will be automatically used by the
supervision system during the creation of the NMS5UX user.
WARNING It is not necessary to create a Linux user for the Superuser (Predefined NMS5UX user provided
with the supervision system) because during the installation of the NMS5LX system a Linux user with
nms5ux username and password is created, which a NMS5UX user with username nms5ux and password
nms5ux is associated to.
Predefined NMS5UX user
During the installation of the system, a NMS5UX user is created with the following characteristics:
Username - nms5ux
Password - nms5ux
map - nms5ux
Profile - Superuser
Timeout password - Not expired
Internet - Active (if required by the user the RAN application - see Modularity).
Ring/PSM - Active (if required by the user the relevant application: Ring Manager/Packet Service
Manager - see Modularity).
Characteristics of a NMS5UX user
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by an Username, a Password, a Map, a Profile, the enabling of Internet
use and Ring/PSM.
Username and password allow the system acknowledging the user as NMS5UX user authorized to start
the GUI.
The same NMS5UX user can open more NMS5LX graphic interfaces (on different PCs/terminals or on the
same) using the same username and password.
A map is associated to each user. The supervision system, at the start-up of NMS5LX GUI, automatically
opens the map associated to the user that executed the operation.
The profile allows starting the NMS5LX GUI and having determinate commands and functions available.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 49

The Internet enabling allows the use of the RAN application (optional) (see Modularity).
The Ring/PSM enabling allows the use of the (optional) applications Ring Manager and/or Packet Service
Manager (see Modularity).
Username
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by a name.

The name of the NMS5LX Superuser is defined during the installation of the system.
The name of the other NMS5UX users is automatically set by the system during their creation: the NMS5UX
user is assigned the same name of the Linux user which is associated to.
WARNING If for ones system the Manual login to LX Map Manager window is active, at the creation of the
NMS5UX user, a username different from that of the relevant Linux user can be defined. Moreover, in this
condition the name of the NMS5UX user can be changed (operation available only to Superuser).
Password
Every NMS5UX user is characterized by a password.

The password of the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of the system.
The password of the other NMS5UX users is automatically set by the system during the creation of the
user: the NMS5UX user is assigned the same password of the Linux user which is associated to.
WARNING If for ones system the Manual login to LX Map Manager window is active, at the creation of the
NMS5UX user the user password must be defined.
Then the Superuser can change its password and the passwords of all other NMS5UX users. If a user should
forget his password, it is necessary to call SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
The privileged, advanced, normal or entry users can change their own password. If a user should forget
his password, the Superuser can define a new one.
Expiry of the password

The expiry of the password is managed by the operating system Linux according to the modes reported in
the relevant documentation.
WARNING Only if the Manual login to LX Map Manager window is active, the management of the expiry of
the password is executed, only for the NMS5UX users, by the NMS5LX system as described here below.
The NMS5LX system manages the periodic password change, which consists in asking the user the change
of his own password each N days (for example, each 6 months).
The functionality can be activated/deactivated by the system administrator who, if activates the function-
ality, sets the interval between a password change and the next one.
If the functionality is active, 5 days before the expiry of the password, a message is displayed at the open-
ing of NMS5LX GUI, which allows the user changing his own password. In detail, the message:
Your Password is going to expire on <date>. Please change it, signals that ones password is
expiring.
This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be displayed each
time the user will start the GUI, until when he changes the password or this one expires.
Password expired. Please change it to login, signals that ones password is expired.
To open the NMS5LX GUI, it is necessary to change the password.
The activation of the periodic password change does not influence the expiry date of the user, which can
be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user. The two functionalities are independent and can coexist at
the same time.
50 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Map
The map corresponds to a network or to the network part graphically represented and managed by the
system. It can be arranged by the user according to his needs. Each map has its own LX Map Manager
window.
The NMS5LX system can manage more maps at the same time.
Map - user association

It is possible to associate, on the creation of the user, to each NMS5UX user, a map that will
constitute the default map of the user, where he can work.
The access to a map is made via the start of NMS5LX GUI: automatically, the system opens the
map associated to the NMS5UX user who required the start of the GUI.
The Superuser and the users with privileged profile can open their own default map and, then,
change map choosing among those managed by the system (see Change map).
The users with advanced, normal and entry profile can open only one's default map.
More NMS5UX users, who can open and use the map at the same time, can be associated to the
same map (more users can have the same default map).
Multi Read write access function

By default, for the management system the Multi Read-Write access function is enabled: the
Superuser or all the users with privileged or advanced profile can access at the same time to the
same map with Read-Write privileges.
The changes to the map made by an operator will be dynamically displayed to the other opera-
tors connected to the same map. This behaviour is defined during the system installation and
can be configured by SIAE.
If the Multi Read-Write access function is enabled, only the first user who accesses to the map
will have the Read-Write access, all the other users will have Read Only access (see Access to
the map (Read-Write/Read Only)).
WARNING What just said is valid only for the Superuser and the users with privileged or ad-
vanced profile. The normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the map, even if
they are the first to open it.
The max number of NMS5UX users who can access at the same time to the same map depends
on the codeword required by the customer.
The same NE object can be created in more map and/or more times in the same maps. In this
way, on the creation of the first copy of the object in a map, all the parameters of the object
must be set.
On the creation of the successive copies, it will be sufficient to enter the physical or logical ad-
dress and, automatically, the system will set the parameter and will associate the status of con-
nection of the twin object already present in the map.
nms5ux map
During the installation of the system, the nms5ux map is created, associated to the Superuser,
named nms5ux (the name of the Superuser can be changed by the user itself).
This map will result the default map of the nms5ux user but, as all the other maps, it can be
opened also by privileged users and be assigned, as default map, to other users. Then, it will be
possible to create a new map (see Dreate a new map).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 51

Profile
The NMS5LX system can be started at different operating level.

A group of enabling of commands, execution of operations, etc. corresponds to each level (also called pro-
file).
The profile that characterizes each NMS5UX user is determined on the creation of the user himself.
After his creation, it is possible to change the profile of each NMS5UX user, except for the Superuser.
The NMS5LX system has 5 operating levels (profiles):
Superuser
Privileged
Advanced
Normal
Entry
WARNING The availability of the commands of the LX Map Manager window depends on the profile of the
NMS5UX user who opened the map.
Superuser
The Superuser can start the NMS5LX GUI relevant to all the maps managed by the system.
In each map, the Superuser can access both in Read-Write and Read Only modality and can verify/set/
change all the parameters.
The detail of the operations that the Superuser can execute in the equipment window is reported in the
specific equipment User Manual.
The NMS5LX system manages ONLY one Superuser. It is created during the installation of the system. In
a second moment, it will not be possible to delete the user or change his profile.
Privileged
The privileged user can start the NMS5LX GUI relevant to all the maps managed by the system.
In each map, the privileged user can access both in Read-Write and Read Only modality.
The detail of the operations that the privileged user can execute in the equipment window is reported in
the specific equipment User Manual.
At system installation, there is no privileged user. Then, it is possible to create more privileged users.
Advanced
The advanced user can start the NMS5LX GUI relevant to the only map associated to his NMS5UX user
(default map).
The advanced user can access to his map both in Read-Write and Read Only modality.
The detail of the operations that the advanced user can execute in the equipment window is reported in
the specific equipment User Manual.
At system installation, there is no advanced user. Then, it is possible to create more advanced users.
Normal
The normal user can start the NMS5LX GUI relevant to the only map associated to his NMS5UX user (de-
fault map).
The normal user can access to his map only in Read Only modality.
52 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The detail of the operations that the normal user can execute in the equipment window is reported in the
On the installation of the system, there is no normal user. Then, it is possible to create more normal users.
Entry
The entry user can start the NMS5LX GUI relevant to the only map associated to his NMS5UX user (default
map).
The entry user can access to his map only in Read Only modality.
In his map, the user can only verify the parameters.
The detail of the operations that the entry user can execute in the equipment window is reported in the
On the installation of the system, there is no normal user. Then, it is possible to create more normal users.
Internet
Every NMS5UX user is characterized by the Internet option.

Setting this option determines if the user can use the Remote Access NMS5UX (RAN) application or not
(see Modularity). In detail, if the options is:
Active. The NMS5UX user can open the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX.
Inactive. The NMS5UX user cannot open the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX.
The setting of the Internet option for the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of the
system and depends on the presence or not, in the installation packet, of the RAN application.
The setting of the Internet option for the other NMS5UX users is defined during the creation of the relevant
user. After the creation of the user, it is possible to change the setting of the Internet option of any NMS5UX
user (operation available only to the Superuser).
Ring/PSM
Every NMS5UX user is characterized by the Ring/PSM option.

The setting of this option determines if the user can use the Ring Manager and/or Packet Service Manager
application or not (see Modularity). In detail, if the option is:
Active. The NMS5UX user can open the Ring Manager window and/or Packet Service Manager
Map window.
Inactive. The NMS5UX user cannot open the Ring Manager and/or Packet Service Manager Map
window.
The setting of the Ring/PSM option for the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of the
system and depends on the presence or not of the Ring Manager and/or Packet Service Manager application
in the installation packet.
The setting of the Ring/PSM option for the other NMS5UX users is defined during the creation of the rele-
vant user. After the creation of the user, it is possible to change the setting of the Ring/PSM option of any
NMS5UX user (operation available only to the Superuser).
The application:
Ring Manager, besides the Ring Manager window, is constituted by a part integrated in the men-
us of the NMS5LX GUI (menu Ring Manager).
The use of commands of Ring Manager menu is not affected by the possible use of the Ring/
PSM option: any NMS5UX user, independently from his setting of the Ring/PSM option, can cre-
ate, delete, etc. a Ring object.
Packet Service Manager, besides the Packet Service Manager Map window, is constituted by a
part integrated in the menus of the NMS5LX GUI (menu PSM).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 53

The use of commands of PSM menu is not affected by the possible use of the Ring/PSM option:
any NMS5UX user, independently from his setting of the Ring/PSM option, can create, delete,
etc. a PSM Map object.
Expiry of a NMS5UX user
During the creation of a NMS5UX user, it is possible to assign a validity of n days to the relevant user (ac-
count) (see Add a NMS5UX user).
At the expiry of this period, when the NMS5LX GUI is started, the system displays the message Your Ac-
count is expired. Please contact the system administrator.
The display of the message forbids the opening of the LX Map Manager windows.
In order to change ones user or validity period, contact the Superuser.

If the message is displayed when the Superuser opens the LX Map Manager window, it is necessary to call
SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
Manual login to LX Map Manager window
As rule, the username and the password of the Linux user with which the terminal is started, determine
even the NMS5UX user with which the NMS5LX GUI is started.
In fact, at his creation the NMS5UX user automatically gets the username and the password of the relevant
Linux user.
This involves the user, in order to access the LX Map Manager window, is asked to enter the username and
the password only at the start-up of the terminal (see Start-up of NMS5LX GUI).
The NMS5LX system manages the function of manual login to the LX Map Manager window.
This function, is active, allows defining, at the creation of the NMS5UX user, a username and a password
different from those defined for the relevant Linux user.
In this case, the user shall enter, at the start-up of the terminal, the username and the password of the
Linux user and, for the start of the LX Map Manager window, will be asked to enter the username and the
password of the NMS5UX user.
WARNING The function can be activated on demand when the system is installed.
Function of Inactivity Check - User
The NMS5LX system depends on the function Inactivity Check - User.
The function, if active, allows defining a continue inactivity period which must pass during a NMS5LX ses-
sion, before the suspension of this session for inactivity.
Before closing the LX Map Manager window (NMS5LX session) due to inactivity, the message INACTIVITY
CHECK!! If you dont acknowledge this dialog in x min your session will automatically be closed is displayed.
If the user confirm his presence pressing OK, the session is not closed.
The continue inactivity period (frequency with which the inactivity message is displayed) and the period
during which the warning message is displayed on the screen (value x displayed in the message) can be
configured by Superuser. These settings are valid for ALL the NMS5UX users.
WARNING The function Inactivity Check (User and RW Map) can be activated on demand when the super-
vision system is installed.
54 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ-WRITE/READ ONLY)
The NMS5LX GUI relevant to a specific map can be started on more PCs/terminals at the same time.
In order to avoid conflicts between the graphic interfaces started on different terminals that use the same
map, it is possible to open the LX Map Manager window in two different modalities:
Read-Write. The user who accesses the map in this modality can add, delete, move the sym-
bols contained in the map and change the characteristics of the symbols.
Read Only. The user who accesses the map in this modality can control the status of the map
and of the contained symbols, but he cannot create, delete or move any symbol or execute any
change on the symbols.
WARNING The map can be opened in Read Only modality by all the user.
By default, the Superuser and all the users with privileged or advanced profile can access to the same map
in Read-Write modality at the same time. The users with normal and entry profile has always access in
Read Only modality.
If the Multi Read-Write access modality to the map is not enabled, only one user at a a time can access in
Read-Write modality.
This user corresponds to the first authorized NMS5UX user who opens the NMS5LX GUI (then the associ-
ated map) on any of the PCs/terminals.
The users who will connect in a second moment to the same map will have the access in Read Only mo-
dality.
The access modality is displayed in the lower bar of the LX Map Manager window.
WARNING The map can be opened in Read-Write modality only by the Superuser and by the user
with privileged or advanced profile. A normal or entry user, even if he is the first user that ac-
cess to the map, will open the map in Read Only modality.
The availability of the commands of the LX Map Manager window depends on the modality of access to the
map.
Update of LX Map Manager window in Read Only modality
All the changes executed by Read-Write user in a map, are dynamically displayed also in the LX Map Ma-
nager window of the users, who have access to the same map, in Read Only modality.
The deletion of a container object from the map is allowed only if the container object is empty.
In this case, if an operator is in the window of the container object when this one is deleted by a second
operator, the first operator is returned back to the root level of the map.
The system does not display any warning message.
An operator can move a container object A (even empty) into another container object B of the same map
even if a second operator has executed the access to the container object A.
In this case, the second operator will see his own working path changed in the string Contents of Map:
above the View area.
The system does not display any warning message.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 55

Passage from Read Only modality to Read-Write Modality
The NMS5LX system is provided with the Multi Read-Write function.
The passage from the Read Only modality to the Read-Write modality for a user in a map is different de-
pending on the activation or not of the Multi Read-Write functionality.
Functionality Multi Read-Write attiva (default)

The user with Read Only access to the map and Privileged, Advanced profile or Superuser can
request in any moment the passage to the Read-Write modality pressing Read-Write Request
in the map window. The map is closed and re-opened with Read-Write access.
Funzionalit Multi Read-Write non attiva

If the user, with access to the map of Read-Write type, closes his LX Map Manager window, the
Read-Write access becomes available to all the other users (Read Only) who have opened the
LX Map Manager window relevant to the same map.
The user who wants to change his modality from Read Only to Read-Write must select Map >
Refresh. The first users who updates the map changes his access from Read Only to Read-Write.
WARNING The availability of the Read-Write access is not signalled to the Read Only users.
It is possible Require the logout of a NMS5UX user, Force the logout of a NMS5UX user or Re-
quest Read-Write access to a map whose access is Read-Write. If the user accept the request,
his map is closed and the Read-Write access will be available.
Function of Inactivity Check - RW map
The NMS5LX system is provided with the function Inactivity Check - RW Map.
The function, if active, allows defining a continue inactivity period which must pass during a NMS5LX ses-
sion with Read Write access to the map (see Access to the map (Read-Write/Read Only)), before the sus-
pension of this session due to inactivity.
Before closing the LX Map Manager [Read-Write] window (NMS5LX session with access to the RW map)
due to inactivity, the message INACTIVITY CHECK!! If you dont acknowledge this dialog in x min your ses-
sion will automatically be closed is displayed.
If the user confirm his presence pressing OK, the session is not closed.
The continue inactivity period (frequency with which the RW inactivity message is displayed) and the period
during which the RW warning message is displayed on the screen (value x displayed in the message) can
be configured by Superuser. These settings are valid for ALL the NMS5UX users with Read Write access.
WARNING The function Inactivity Check - RW Map can be activated on demand when the supervision sys-
tem is installed.
Modality of access to the equipment window
The equipment window can be opened by more user at the same time.
In this window, the Read-Write access modality is acquired by the first user who opens the window itself
(independently if his access to the map is Read-Write or Read Only).
All the users, who open later the same equipment window, will have the access in Read Only modality.
WARNING What reported above is valid only for the Superuser and the users with privileged, advanced or
normal profile. The entry users have always Read Only access to the equipment window, even if they are
the first to open it.
The closure of the equipment window is not signalled on video.
56 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

It is not possible to request or to force the closure of the equipment window in Read-Write modality, but
it is possible Require the closure of an NMS5LX application or to force the closure of the relative Manager
application (Force the closure of a NMS5LX application).
For the managers which open the Web Craft Terminal page, the Access box displays the access modality
to the WEB CT Manager page:
Read & Write (green box). The user who accesses the page in this modality can:
Verify the equipment configuration parameters.
Change the equipment configuration parameters (only if the equipment is in connected
status and the WEB LCT program is not connected in Configuration mode).
Read Only (orange box). The user who accesses to the page in this modality can:
Verify the equipment configuration parameters.
The access in Read & Write modality for every WEB CT page relevant to the same equipment is assigned
to only one user at a time.
This user corresponds to the first NMS5UX user who opens the WEB CT page in any map managed by the
supervision system.
All the users who will open later the WEB CT page of the same equipment will have the access in Read Only
modality.
WARNING The user will open the relevant WEB CT page in Read Only modality, even if he was the first user
to open the page, when the equipment is in status: disconnected, unreachable, maintenance or connected
with the local connection WEB LCT equipment active in Configuration modality.
For the managers which open the Web Craft Terminal page, the contextual help on-line function is availa-
ble.
Modality of access to the nodal window
The nodal window (ALplus or ALCplus2) can be opened by one user at the same time.
It is not possible to request or to force the closure of the nodal window, but it is possible Require the closure
of an NMS5LX application or Force the closure of a NMS5LX application.
Modality of access to Ring Manager window
The Ring Manager window, relevant to the same Ring object, can be opened by:
Moreover, more Ring Manager windows relevant to different Ring objects can be opened at the same time
by the same user.
It is not possible to request or to force the closure of a Ring Manager window, but it is possible Require the
closure of an NMS5LX application or Force the closure of a NMS5LX application.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 57

Modality of access to Packet Service Manager Map window
The Packet Service Manager Map window, relevant to the same PSM Map object, can be opened by:

Moreover, more Packet Service Manager Map windows relevant to different PSM objects can be opened at
the same time by the same user.
It is not possible to request or to force the closure of a Packet Service Manager Map window, but it is pos-
sible to Require the closure of an NMS5LX application or Force the closure of a NMS5LX application.
58 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

SUPER MAP
The super-map is a tool which allows grouping more maps at logical level.
For example, if a telecommunication service provider has more pieces of equipment installed in different
regions of the same country, he can logically subdivide the equipment in as many maps as the regions are
and, to have a global vision, group the maps into a single super-map.
The super-map is a map of maps. The access to the super-map is read-only and the only objects which
can be inserted into a super-map are the container objects map.
The content of super-map, and then of the maps contained in it, is dynamically updated according to the
changes made in the source maps.
To create a super-map, the operator can use:

the button Add Map in the Change Map window.
the menu command Edit > Create Map in the User Management window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 59

DUAL SERVER CONFIGURATION
The configuration of the NMS5LX system to work in Dual Server modality is proposed for the management
of big telecommunication networks, including a great number of NEs (more than 12000) and of users who
access at the same time (more than 25 operators).
The Dual Server architecture consists in two HP-UX servers (Main and PM), connected by a dedicated LAN
cable, where the work load is subdivided in the following way:
Functionality installed on the Main server:
Operator login and graphical applications
Connection to NEs
Alarm Management (reception, storing and management)
NE polling
Firmware download
Network Discovery
Ring Manager and Packet Service Manager
RAN access
Collection of backup files
Functionality installed on PM server:
Collection of PM TDM
Collection of PM RMON
North Bound Interfaces (NBI): Proxy Agent Alarms, Export Tool, TDM/ETH provisioning.
The software installed on the two servers is the same, but only a specific subset of functionalities is acti-
vated on each server.
The presence of the PM server is completely transparent to the operator, except when, ceasing to operate,
the functionalities on the PM server themselves become not accessible to the operator.
The status of the PM server can be displayed by means of the menu command Options > NMS5UX - Read
PM Server Status.
WARNING For more information about the Dual Server configuration and the architecture of the Main and
PM servers, refer to the administrator manual of the NMS5LX system.
60 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

PROCEDURES
Start/close the GUI

Graphic network representation
Equipment connection
Alarm management
Performance Monitoring management
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 61

START/CLOSE THE GUI
First time the NMS5LX GUI is launched, after the installation of the system, follow the procedure First start-
up of NMS5LX GUI, next times follow the procedure Start-up of NMS5LX GUI.
The start-up of NMS5LX GUI corresponds to the opening of LX Map Manager window.
It is possible to start more NMS5LX GUI on more machines or on the same machine.
The maximum number of NMS5LX GUIs that can be started at the same time depends on the codeword
required by the user.
Start-up of NMS5LX GUI
WARNING The following procedure presumes that the NMS5LX system has been already installed on the
machine and that the processes necessary for the start-up of the GUI have been started. The procedure
for the installation and the start-up of the NMS5LX system is reported in the administrator manual.
We assume that the Linux user and the corresponding NMS5UX user, which you wish to use for the start-
up of the GUI, have been created.
1. Start the machine up (pc, terminal, etc.).

The login window of the Linux operating system opens.
2. Type the name and the password of the Linux user in the relevant boxes.
If you have two or more Linux users, use the name/password of the Linux user associated to the
NMS5UX user that you wish to use to open the map.
3. Press the confirmation push-button.

If the typed data are correct, one's Linux operating system is started-up.
4. Open a terminal window.
5. On the command line, type:

cd /opt/nms5ux/start
./nmsWinMenu
6. Press Enter.
7. In the MNMENU window (Fig.4), double click on the icon:
NMS5LX Login, to start the NMS5LX GUI.
If the user, used to start the GUI, has profile:
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user to access the default map rele-
vant to one's user, this one is opened in Read-Write modality.
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user to access to the default map
relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read Only modality.
Normal or entry, the default map relevant to one's user is opened in Read Only modality.
NMS5LX Login R/O, to start the NMS5LX GUI; the default map, relevant to one's user, is opened
in Read Only modality.
The Login window opens and then the LX Map Manager window opens with the default map associated
to its user.
The Superuser and the users with privileged profile can change the map any time (Change map).
If the system displays the Your Account is expired. Please contact the system administrator message,
the relevant account is expired. Contact the Superuser to set a new user or change the current validity
period.
If the Manual login to LX Map Manager window is active, in the Login window it is necessary to:
a. Type the username of one's NMS5UX user in the Login box.

If you have two or more NMS5UX users, type the username of the NMS5UX user associated to
the Linux user used to start the operating system.
b. Type the password of the NMS5UX user in the Password box.
62 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

c. Press OK.
The LX Map Manager window opens with the default map associated to ones user.
If the system displays the message:
Incorrect Login, the typed name of the NMS5UX user is incorrect.
Wrong Password, the typed password of the NMS5UX user is incorrect.
Wrong Linux User, the used NMS5UX user is not compatible with the Linux user used for
the start-up of the operating system.
Your Password is going to expire on <data>. Please change it, one's password is expiring.
To change it:
Type, in the Old password box, the current password.
Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string, mini-
mum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters).
Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password and press Ok.
If you press Cancel, the password is not changed and the LX Map Manager window
opens. On the next start of the NMS5LX GUI, the window for the change of the password
will be displayed again.
This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be dis-
played each time the user starts the GUI until the user changes the password or this one
expires.
Password expired. Please change it to login, one's password is expired. To change it:
Type, in the Old password box, the current password.
Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string, mini-
mum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters).
Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password and press Ok.
If you press Cancel, the password is not changed and the LX Map Manager window
opens. To change the password and start the GUI, execute the procedure of step 7 again.
If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login, Wrong Password or Wrong Linux User message is
displayed for three times consecutively, the Login window is automatically closed. To start the
GUI, it is necessary to execute again the procedure of the step 7.
The Your Password is going to expire on <data>. Please change it and Password expired. Please
change it to login message are displayed ONLY if the periodical password change functionality
IS ACTIVE. It consists in requiring to the user to change his own password each N days (for ex-
ample each 6 months).
The functionality can be activated/deactivated by the Superuser, who, if he activates the func-
tionality, sets the interval between a password change and the successive one.
The activation of the periodical password change does not influence the expiry date of the user,
which can be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user. The two functionalities are independent
and can coexist at the same time.
Fig.4 TMNMENU window
2
1
(1) Icons for the start of NMS5LX GUI. The double click on the icon:
NMS5LX Login, allows starting the NMS5LX GUI.
If the user used to start the GUI has profile:
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 63

Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user that access to the default
map relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read-Write modality.
Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user that access to the default
map relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read Only modality.
Normal or entry, the default map relevant to one's user is opened in Read Only mo-
dality.
NMS5LX Login R/O, allows starting the NMS5LX GUI; the default map relevant to one's user
is opened in Read Only modality.
(2) Icons for the management of the database and of NMS5LX. The description and the use of these
icons are reported in the administrator manual of the NMS5LX system.
First start-up of NMS5LX GUI
WARNING The following procedure supposes that the NMS5LX system has been already installed on the
machine and that the processes necessary to the start-up of the GUI have been already activated.
The procedure for the installation and the start-up of the NMS5LX system is reported in the administrator
manual.
1. Start-up the machine (PC, terminal, etc.).

The login window of the Linux operating system opens.
2. Type the name of the Linux user: nms5ux.
3. Type the password of the Linux user: nms5ux.
4. Press the confirmation push-button.

If the typed data are correct, one's Linux operating system is started.
6. At the command line, type:

cd /opt/nms5ux/start
./nmsWinMenu
7. Press Enter.
8. In TMNMENU window, double click on NMS5LX Login.

The Login window opens and then the LX Map Manager window opens with the nms5ux map, which is
empty if the system has not been pre-configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
The NMS5UX user, which the GUI has been started with, is assigned with the Superuser. As first oper-
ation, it is suggested to change the password associated to this user (Change the characteristics of the
NMS5UX users).
If the Manual login to LX Map Manager window is active, in the Login window it is necessary to:
a. Type, in the Login box, the name of the user: nms5ux.
b. Type, in the Password box, the user password: nms5ux.
c. Press OK.
The LX Map Manager window opens with the nms5ux map.
The display of the Incorrect Login message indicates that the typed name or password are in-
correct. If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login message is displayed for three times con-
secutively, the Login window is automatically closed. To start the GUI, it is necessary to execute
again the procedure of the step 7.
64 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Closing of NMS5LX GUI
Closing the NMS5LX GUI corresponds Close the LX Map Manager window.
WARNING Closing the LX Map Manager window causes the automatic closing of all the possible open win-
dows of NMS5LX (Alarm History Browser, Equipment Information, etc.).
Automatic closing of NMS5LX GUI
The LX Map Manager window is automatically closed when:

The system displays the WARNING!! Force Logout from Superuser message. The Superuser user
has forced the disconnection of the user from the map (see Force the logout of a NMS5UX user).
The user closes the operation system.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 65

GRAPHIC NETWORK REPRESENTATION
After the installation of the NMS5LX system, it is necessary to represent the network graphically.
The network configuration can be executed both by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA and by the user. If the net-
work has been configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA, go to the Equipment connection. Instead, if the
network must be represented, follow the indication reported here below.
The network representation is made using a series of Objects predefined for the network representation.
To create them, some general Rules for the creation of the objects must be respected.
The creation of the objects can be executed using:

Specific commands - Edit > Add menu (Objects creation - Edit menu)
Add Network From File functionality (Objects creation - Add Network From File functionality)
Auto Discovery functionality (Object creation - Auto Discovery functionality)
Objects predefined for the network representation
Container objects
Generic Symbol objects
Link objects
Label objects
Ring objects
PSM Map objects
Container objects
These objects are used as containers of equipment, symbols or other containers.

No special meaning is assigned to these objects by NMS5LX. They have been introduced to help the user
arranging the network to rapidly locate the equipment.
Container objects gives a better overview of the network, as they allow grouping the items according to
geographical or logical criteria: for example, they group equipment belonging to the same department or
located in the same area.
Container objects can be compared to folders in the arrangement of the files on a PC.
These objects are used to identify the real or virtual equipment: Radio SDH, Radio PDH, etc.
Real NE
Real equipment means objects with the corresponding equipment physically present in the network.
WARNING A real NE is not automatically managed by the NMS5LX system when the relevant object is cre-
ated, but it is necessary to connect it. The only exception is when the created NE is already present in a
map in connected status: in this case, the NE acquires the condition of the same symbol present in the
other map just after its creation.
66 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Virtual NE
Virtual equipment means objects without corresponding equipment physically present in the network.
When virtual equipment is created, its configuration database is empty. In order to configure virtual equip-
ment, it is necessary to copy the configuration of one piece of equipment of the same type (real or virtual
with an already configured database) to the virtual equipment just created by means of the Configuration
Download command.
Select the symbol of the virtual NE to open the relevant equipment window and set the configuration pa-
rameters, the user inputs, the user outputs, the control parameters for the PM measures, etc. More infor-
mation are reported in the equipment Manual.
Then the configuration of the virtual equipment can be transferred, always by means of the command Con-
figuration Download, to any equipment compatible with the considered virtual equipment.
NE of ALplus Node type
With NE object of ALplus Node type we do not mean single equipment but a set of minimum 2 and maxi-
mum 3 ALplus pieces of equipment (nodal matrix) interconnected by Nodal Bus (Node).
These pieces of equipment are not managed one by one by the NMS5LX system, but are managed as a set
represented by the object of ALplus Node type, which has not a corresponding real object in the network
but works as container for the equipment of the nodal system.
WARNING Node equipment is not automatically managed by the NMS5LX system when the relevant ALplus
Node object is created, but it is necessary to connect it. The only exception is if the created node is already
present in a map in connected status: in this case, the equipment of the node will automatically acquire
the condition of the same ALplus Node symbol present in the other map.
NE of ALCplus2 Node type
With NE object of ALCplus2 Node type we do not mean a single piece of equipment but a set of minimum
2 and maximum 8 ALCplus2 and/or ALCplus2e (with Ethernet Enhanced functionality active) pieces of
equipment connected by a TDM Nodal Bus and/or by Ethernet Nodal Bus (Node).
This equipment is not managed one by one by the NMS5LX system, but as a set represented by the object
of ALCplus2 Node type, which has not a corresponding real object present in the network but works as
container for the equipment of the nodal system.
WARNING Node equipment is not automatically managed by the NMS5LX system when the relevant
ALCplus2 Node object is created, but it is necessary to connect it. The only exception is if the created node
is already present in a map in connected status; in this case, the equipment of the node will automatically
acquire the condition of the same ALCplus2 Node symbol present in the other map.
NE of WEB Generic type
This object is used to identify equipment, not managed by NMS5LX, which are provided with a WEB GUI.
In fact, these objects can be assigned an IP address (as for the creation of a normal NE to manage with
the NMS5LX system). The double click on the symbol of these objects starts the default system browser
with the WEB page, available at the set address, active.
These objects were born in never connected (disconnected) status and their status do not change for the
rest of their life because, differently from other NE objects, the objects of WEB Generic type must not be
connected to start the connection.
In fact, for this type of object, not all the commands available for the NE objects are meaningful, for ex-
ample Connect, Disconnect, Network Alarm History, etc.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 67

These objects are used to graphically represent network elements (e.g. PC and modem).
WARNING The Generic Symbol objects, even if they have a physical match in the network, do not allow
managing the physical element which they are referred to, as they are a simple graphical representation.
Link objects
The system manages two types of link objects:

Graphical links (Link). They are simply used to graphically represent a connection between two
objects, but do not allow managing the connections which they refer to.
Physical Link. They are real connections between physical interfaces of network equipment.
Equipment can be in the same map or in different maps.
Label objects
These objects are used to type a text string in the map.
Ring objects
These objects are used to identify subnetworks of PDH and SDH equipment, managed by the NMS5LX sys-
tem, which implement Paths.
The double click on a Ring object opens the relevant GUI represented by the Ring Manager window.
The use of the Ring Manager window is reported in the relevant user manual.
PSM Map objects
These objects are used to identify subnetworks of radio equipment with Ethernet tributary, managed by
the NMS5LX system, which implement network services.
The double click on a PSM Map object allows accessing to the relevant GUI represented by the Packet Ser-
vice Manager Map window.
The use of the Packet Service Manager Map window is reported in the relevant user manual.
Rules for the creation of the objects
All the predefined objects must be created by the user.

It is possible to add, delete, move or change the configuration parameters of the objects anytime.
The network can be represented in a single map, or subdivided in more Maps.
The objects of a map can be saved to file and, then, imported in a different map (see Import/Export).
To avoid contemporaneous operations on the same object, only one user at a time can change the network
configuration in a map. This one has the access to the map in Read-Write modality: Read-Write user.
WARNING More users can access to the map at the same time. Only the Read-Write user can change the
network configuration. The changes made by the Read-Write user are not dynamically displayed by the
Read Only users.
68 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

To update the information of a map in Read Only modality, it is necessary to update the LX Map Manager
window selecting Map > Refresh.
Besides the general instructions described above, for some objects the rules described here below must
be respected.
NE objects
It is possible to create all the pieces of equipment in a network in a single map or to subdivide the network
in two or more parts and to associate two or more maps to these parts.
In this case, at the opening of each map, only the part of network associated to this map will be visible
and manageable.
A NE object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that one piece of equip-
ment is present in two different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps.
If the created NE symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the status of the already
existing object. For example, if the NE-1 symbol in connected status is in the map A, when the NE-1 symbol
(same IP/Physical address) is created in the map B, the symbol will result connected as it inherits the status
of the twin symbol.
The same NE object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map.
It is possible to create new NE objects even if these have not been physically installed in the network, for
example because they are foreseen for a future installation. In this case, the relevant equipment window
can be opened only after the first connection, then only after the equipment has been physically installed
in the network and connected.
It is, instead, possible to create virtual NE objects, that is objects not having a corresponding equipment
present in the network, but which can be configured as a normal NE. Then this configuration can be trans-
ferred to any (real or virtual) equipment compatible with the virtual NE (see Network Element objects).
The NE objects of WEB Generic type (see NE of WEB Generic type), after their creation, do not require any
operation (line test, connection) to be used.
NE objects of ALplus Node type
For the NE objects of ALplus Node type, besides the rules defined for the NE objects, it is necessary to
follow the indications reported here below for their creation:
Before creating an ALplus Node object, it is necessary that the ALplus node has been already
defined (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) locally by means of SCT/LMT
application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.
The ALplus node term indicates the set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 ALplus pieces of equip-
ment with nodal matrix interconnected by Nodal Bus.
If in the map there are already one or more copies of NE objects relevant to equipment belong-
ing to a node, before creating the relevant node it is necessary to DELETE all the copies of these
objects. This because the management of one piece of equipment belonging to a node is sup-
ported by the NMS5LX system only through the relevant nodal window.
After the creation of a node, it is not possible to create NE objects relevant to the equipment
forming the node. Their management is carried out from the nodal window and not directly from
the map.
During the creation of the node, the system requires the IP address of the node. This corre-
sponds to the IP address of the main equipment forming the node.
General rule for the node management: all the commands in the map menu and executed selecting the
node are automatically executed for all the node pieces of equipment (for example Connect, Disconnect,
etc.), while the commands not available in the map menu, but available in the nodal window, are executed
selecting the single equipment of the node (for example Configuration Download, NE Sw/Fw Release).
The connection/alarm status of the node always reflects the most severe status/alarm condition of the
node equipment.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 69

NE objects of ALCplus2 Node type
For the NE objects of ALCplus2 Node type, besides the rules defined for the NE objects, it is necessary to
follow the indications reported here below for their creation:
Before creating an ALCplus2 Node object, it is necessary that the ALCplus2 node has been al-
ready defined (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) locally by means of SCT/
LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.
The ALCplus2 node term indicates the Set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 ALCplus2 and/or
ALCplus2e (with Ethernet Enhanced functionality active) pieces of equipment connected by a
TDM Nodal Bus and/or by an Ethernet Nodal Bus.
If in the map there are already one or more copies of NE objects relevant to equipment belong-
ing to a node, before creating the relevant node it is necessary to DELETE all the copies of these
objects. This because the management of one piece of equipment belonging to a node is sup-
ported by the NMS5LX system only through the relevant nodal window.
After the creation of a node, it is not possible to create NE objects relevant to the equipment
forming the node. Their management is carried out from the nodal window and not directly from
the map yet.
During the creation of the node, the system requires the IP address of the node. This corre-
sponds to the IP address of the main equipment forming the node.
As general rule for the node management.
General rule for the node management: all the commands in the map menu and executed selecting the
node are automatically executed for all the node pieces of equipment (for example Connect, Disconnect,
etc.), while the commands not available in the map menu, but available in the nodal window, are executed
selecting the single equipment of the node (for example Configuration Download, NE Sw/Fw Release).
The connection/alarm status of the node always reflects the most severe status/alarm condition of the
node equipment.
Container objects
The container map windows allow subdividing the network in hierarchical levels, in such a way to arrive
from a general view to the display of the single elements, passing through intermediate levels.
In fact the network, made by the objects that the supervision system must manage and control, can be
considered from different points of view.
It can be observed taken as a whole, as distribution of elements in a geographical area (for example sub
networks), or you can decide to study a single object to see its configuration; the user can decide at which
level, and then which detail, to access to the network information. In this way, subdividing the network in
containers, it is possible to easily pass from a general overview to a more and more detailed view.
The user is totally free in the creation of the number and type of levels that best fits to the structure of
ones network.
Ring objects
A Ring object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that a Ring is in two
different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps.
If the created Ring symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the configuration of
the already existing object.
For instance, if in the map A there is the symbol Ring-1, where are configured the equipment NE-A, NE-B
and NE-C and the relevant Paths/Links, when the Ring1 symbol (same physical address) is created in the
map B, the equipment NE-A, NE-B and NE-C and the relevant Paths/Links will result configured in the sym-
bol because the new symbol inherits the configuration of the twin symbol.
The same Ring object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map.
The commands for the creation/change/deletion of the Ring objects are in Ring Manager menu.
The menu is present in the LX Map Manager window only if the Ring Manager application, optional and
provided on demand, is installed.
70 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

PSM Map objects
A PSM Map object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that a PSM Map is
present in two different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps.
If the PSM Map symbol you are creating is already present in another map, it will automatically acquire the
configuration of the already existing object.
For instance, if in the map A there is the symbol PSM Map-1, where are configured the equipment NE-A,
NE-B and NE-C and the relevant services/Links, when the PSM Map1 symbol (same physical address) is
created in the map B, the equipment NE-A, NE-B and NE-C and the relevant services/Links will result con-
figured in the symbol because the new symbol inherits the configuration of the twin symbol.
The same PSM Map object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map.
The commands for the creation/change/deletion of PSM Map objects are in PSM menu. The menu is present
in the LX Map Manager window only if the Packet Service Manager application is installed (optional and
provided on demand).
Objects creation - Edit menu
By means of the commands available in the LX Map Manager window, it is possible to create all predefined
objects available in the NMS5LX system.
In detail for the creation of the objects:
Container, NE, Generic Symbol, Link, Physical Link and Label, select Edit > Add.
Ring, select Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Add Ring.
PSM Map, select PSM > Edit > Add PSM Map.
Here below a series of examples of graphic representation of a hypothetical network in one or more maps,
using the commands of Edit menu, is reported.
Examples of network graphical representation
Let us suppose to have to graphically display a certain Italia network shown in Fig.5, in such a way to be
able to execute its supervisory operations by means of the NMS5LX system.
The network is composed by Radio SDH, Radio PDH and PMP equipment.
The NMS5LX system is loaded on a PC connected to one piece of equipment by means of an Ethernet LAN.
A specific IP address has been locally assigned to each equipment by means of LCT.
Fig.5 Example of network
Lan
Radio SDH Radio PDH Equipment

10.10.10.20 10.10.10.30 type
PMP
10.10.10.40
Radio SDH
Radio PDH Local IP
10.10.10.21
10.10.10.31 address of the
equipment
Radio SDH Radio PDH
10.10.10.22 10.10.10.32
Radio PDH
10.10.10.33
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 71

Before creating the objects that will allow to the system the management of the equipment, it is necessary
to subdivide the network in containers, objects, etc. Doing this, it is suggested to consider as the equip-
ment is connected and where they are located on the field.
In the first example (Graphical representation of the network in a map) the network is subdivided and
graphically represented in the same map.
In the second example (Network subdivided in more maps) the network is subdivided and represented
graphically in two maps. In this case, at the opening of this map, only the part of the network associated
to the specific map will be visible and manageable.
Graphical representation of the network in a map
In this example, we suppose that all the pieces of equipment of the Italia network (Fig.5) are created in
the same map: Italia map.
A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.6.
Fig.6 Subdivision of the network in objects
Italia (map)
Nord Italia (container) 1
Milano (container) 3
Sud Italia
Torino
(container) 2
(container) 4
Lan
9 5
Radio SDH Radio PDH
10.10.10.20 10.10.10.30 12
10 PMP
6 10.10.10.40
Radio SDH
10.10.10.21 Radio PDH
10.10.10.31
11 7
Radio SDH Radio PDH
10.10.10.22 10.10.10.32
8
Radio PDH
10.10.10.33
In Fig.6, a name identifying a geographic area or a town has been associated to the containers. It is pos-
sible to assign any name to the Container objects, but it is suggested to set a name having a geographic
reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of the equipment just from the name
of the symbol of the container.
An IP address and a logical address, different for each created NE object, have been assigned to each NE
object.
The IP Address must coincide with the IP Address locally set (by means of the LCT program) for the relevant
equipment. If the values do not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the equip-
ment.
The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon.
Also in this case, as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign
a name that makes easy the acknowledgement of the equipment.
Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (Dreate a new map) or
during the creation of a new user privileged or advanced (Add a NMS5UX user).
72 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Open the LX Map Manager window with a user associated to the Italia map (Start-up of NMS5LX GUI).
Now proceed in the creation of the objects (Add).

In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality.
During the operation, follow a determinate order because it is not possible to create an object, for example
NE, if the Container object that must contain it has not been previously created.
The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Nord Italia and Sud Italia.
Then open, for example, the Nord Italia container and create the objects present in it, and so on.
In Fig.6, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the Italia
network can be managed by NMS5LX, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the upper right
corner.
In Tab.5, for each object in Fig.6 and identified by a number, some information is reported that allows un-
derstanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication of the type of
object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the object and in which
container the symbol must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects respects a possible creation
order that assures the creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects contained in
them. The Generic Symbol, Link and Label objects can be added in any container.
In Tab.5, not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation
of the object.
Tab.5 Subdivision of the network in objects
Object Type of object that must Container where the Setting of the values of the
be created object must be created main parameters
1 Container Italia * Label: Nord Italia
2 Container Italia * Label: Sud Italia
3 Container Nord Italia Label: Milano
4 Container Nord Italia Label: Torino

IP Address: 10.10.10.30
5 Network Element Milano Logical Address: PDH 30 **
Type: Radio PDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.31
Type: Radio PDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.32
Type: Radio PDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.33
Type: Radio PDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.20
9 Network Element Torino Logical Address: SDH 20 **
Type: Radio SDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.21
Type: Radio SDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.22
Type: Radio SDH
IP Address: 10.10.10.40
12 Network Element Sud Italia Logical Address: PMP 40 **
Type: PMP
* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name.
** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 73

The creation of an object implies the display of the relevant symbol on video. By means of the Container
symbol, it is possible to display the detail of the network where the equipment is contained, for example
as shown in Fig.7, for the PMP 40 equipment of the Italia network.
Fig.7 Example of network (LX Map Manager window)
Now the NMS5LX system knows all the information that allows managing each single equipment when it
will be connected.
74 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Network subdivided in more maps
In this example, we suppose that the Italia network (Fig.8) is subdivided and graphically represented in
two map, in such a way that at the opening of the map only the part of network associated to the specific
map will be visible and manageable.
A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.8.
Fig.8 Example of network subdivided in more maps
Nord Italia
(container) 1
Milano
(container)
Sud Italia
Torino (map)
(container) 2
Lan
7 3 10
Radio SDH Radio PDH Radio PDH

10.10.10.20 10.10.10.30 10.10.10.30
8
4
Radio SDH
Radio PDH
10.10.10.21
10.10.10.31
9
5
Radio SDH
Radio PDH
10.10.10.22
10.10.10.32
6
Radio PDH
10.10.10.33
In Fig.8, a name identifying a geographical area or town has been associated to the maps and to the con-
tainers. It is possible to assign any name to the maps and to the Container objects, but it is suggested to
set a name that has a geographical reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of
the equipment just from the name of the map and of the container symbol.
An IP address and a logic address, different for each created NE object, have been assigned to each NE.
The IP Address must coincide with the locally set IP Address (via LCT program) for the relevant equipment.
If the values do not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the equipment.
The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon.
Also in this case, as for the Container object, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign a
name that makes easy the acknowledging of the equipment.
Now proceed in the following way:
1. Create the Nord Italia and Sud Italia maps.

Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (Dreate a new map)
or during the creation of a new user privileged or advanced (Add a NMS5UX user).
2. Open the LX Map Manager window with a user, which the Nord Italia map is associated to (Start-up of
NMS5LX GUI).
3. Create some objects (Add).

In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality.
During the operation, a specific order must be followed as it is not possible to create an object, for ex-
ample NE, if before the Container object that must contain it has not been created.
The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Milano and Torino. Then, open the
Milano container and create the objects present in it, and so on.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 75

In Fig.8, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the
Nord Italia map can be managed by NMS5LX, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the upper
right corner.
In Tab.6, for each object in Fig.8 and identified by a number, some information is reported that allows
understanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication of the type
of object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the object and in
which container the symbols must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects list reflects a pos-
sible creation order that ensures the creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects
which these must contain.
The Generic Symbol, Link, Physical Link and Label objects can be added in any container.
In Tab.6 not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation
of the object.
4. Close the Nord Italia map.
5. Open the LX Map Manager window with a user which the Sud Italia map is associated to.
6. Create the objects as displayed in Tab.6.
Only the portion of network associated to the opened map can be managed.
It is possible to create a NE symbol in two different maps. In this case, it is necessary to create the symbol
in both the map, assigning to it the same characteristics (IP address, type, etc.). At the creation of the
second symbol, given that the object is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the status
of the already existing twin symbol.
Tab.6 Objects of a network subdivided in more maps
Object Map where the Type of object that Container where the Setting of the values of the
object must be must be object must be cre- main parameters
created created ated
1 Nord Italia Container Nord Italia * Label: Milano
2 Nord Italia Container Nord Italia * Label: Torino
3 Nord Italia Network Element Milano IP Address: 10.10.10.30

Logical Address: PDH 30 **
Type: Radio PDH

Type: Radio PDH

Type: Radio PDH

Type: Radio PDH
7 Nord Italia Network Element Torino IP Address: 10.10.10.20

Logical Address: SDH 20 **
Type: Radio SDH

Type: Radio SDH

Type: Radio SDH
10 Sud Italia Network Element Sud Italia * IP Address: 10.10.10.40

Logical Address: PMP 40 **
Type: PMP
* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name.
** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one.
76 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Objects creation - Add Network From File functionality
The Add Network From File functionality allows automatically adding a group of predefined objects whose
characteristics have been edited in a file (csv format) to a map of the NMS5LX system.
The predefined objects, which can be automatically created by the considered functionality, are:
Container objects
Link objects
Label objects
The use of the functionality is structured in the following phases:
1. Create the file in csv format.
2. To copy the file (.csv) to the server where NMS5LX system is installed (default directory opt/nms5ux/
data/files).
The file must be transferred in ASCII format.
3. To open the LX Map Manager window:

Relevant to the map defined in the file (see Rules of the compilation of the csv file).
The map must be opened in Read-Write mode.
With a user whose profile is Advanced, Privileged or Superuser.
4. To open the file (.csv) by means of Edit > Add > Network From File.
Opening the file involves the automatic creation of the objects in the LX Map Manager window.
At the end of the operation, the result of the creation is shown for each object.
The use of the Network From File command is described in par. Create Container, NE, graphical Link
and Label objects described in a file.
An Example of use of Add Network From File functionality can be read.
Create the file in csv format
The Add Network From File functionality supports files in csv format with a predefined structure.
The user can create the file in the wished mode, but always respecting:
The format (.csv)
The Structure of the csv file.
The Rules of the compilation of the csv file.
It is possible Compile the csv file starting from a model in xls format.
Structure of the csv file
Tab.7 shows the structure of a row of csv file. The column:

Parameter, displays the fields of the row.
According to the csv format, each field is separated from the next one by the character ";".
Possible values, displays the valid values.
Entering a different value or a value not in compliance with what displayed prevents the creation
of the object.
Fig.11 shows an example of structure of a csv file opened by a text editor.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 77

Tab.7 File structure (Add Network From File functionality)
Parameter Possible values
Category If you wish to create an object:

(Category of the object you Label, type 1 or LABEL
wish to create) Container, type 2 or CONTAINER
NE, type 3 or NE
Link, type 100 or LINK
Type The possible values for this parameter change depending on the value set for the
Category parameter.
(Type of object, within the
category, you wish to cre- In detail, if you wish to create a:
ate) Container object of type:
Subnetwork, type 501 or Subnetwork
Station, type 502 or Station
SubStation, type 503 or Substation
Radio Station, type 504 or Radio Station
Small Station, type 505 or Small Station
NE object of type
EL series radio, type 1 or Radio PDH
US series radio, type 2 or Radio SDH
PMP system, type 3 or PMP
CommServerS equipment, type 4 or CS
ADMC multiplexer, type 5 or ADM-C
ALS series radio with AL IDU/ALC IDU, type 7 or Radio PDH-AL
ELFO radio, type 8 or ELFO
ADM1 multiplexer, type 9 or ADM-1
ALS series radio with ALS IDU/ALS-C IDU, type 11 or ALS
ALFO radio, type 12 or ALFO
ALS series radio with AL IDU plus, type 14 or ALplus
SDH N+1 radio, type 15 or SDH N+1
ALS series radio with ALC IDU plus, type 16 or ALCplus
ALS series radio with ALplus2 IDU, type 17 or ALplus2
ALS series radio with ALCplus2 IDU, type 18 or ALCplus2
ALS series radio with ALCplus2e IDU, type 19 or ALCplus2e
FAMxc 5RU multiplexer, type 22 or FAMxc
FAMxc 2.5RU multiplexer, type 24 or FAMxc 2.5
IPBOX equipment, type 40 or IP-BOX
AGS10 equipment, type 20 or AGS10
AGS20 equipment, type 29 or AGS20
EXP63 multiplexer, type 41 or EXP63
ALplus node, type 64 or ALplus Node
ALCplus2 node, type 61 or ALCplus2 Node
Web Generic, type 94 or WEB Generic
Switch Loop, type 46 or SwitchLoop
Liberator V1000, type 47 or LiberatorV1000
ALFOPlus radio, type 25 or ALFOPlus
ALFOplus80 radio, type 26 or ALFOplus80
ALFOplus80HD radio, type 27 or ALFOplus80HD
Link (graphical) object of type:
Generic line, type 1 or GENERIC
Dashed line, type 2 or DASHED
Dotted line, type 3 or DOTTED
Dotdash line, type 4 or DOTDASH
Label object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type -
78 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Parameter Possible values
IP-ADDRESS If you are creating a NE object, type the IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment.
(Parameter meaningful only For the NE object type:

for the NE object) ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node, type the IP address of the main equipment
of the node.
PMP, type the IP address of the Proxy interface used for the connection to
the master station.
If you are creating a Label, Container or (graphical) Link object, compiling this field
is not meaningful. Type "-"
Name If you are creating an object:
(Object name) NE, type an alphanumeric string of max 32 characters

Container, type an alphanumeric string of max 48 characters
Link (graphical), type an alphanumeric string of max 40 characters
Label, type an alphanumeric string of max 50 characters
Map Type the name of the map where you wish to create the object.
(Map name)
Path If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the complete path where
(Position of the map where you wish to create the object.
the object must be created) Use the symbol / to indicate the different level.
Example. If you are creating a NE object and you type the path Europe/Italy/Rome,
this means that the equipment must be created in the container Rome, contained in
the container Italy contained, in its turn, in the container Europe.
If you are creating a (graphical) Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful.
Type -
x If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the position X (range 0-
(Position X of the object in 10) the object must take in the View area of the LX Map Manager window.
the View area. If X = 0 and Y = 0, the graphic symbol is created in the New Object area.
An 10x10 hypothetical grid
is taken as reference)
Type -
y If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the position Y (range 0-
(Position Y of the object in 10) the object must take in the View area of the LX Map Manager window.
the View area. If X = 0 and Y = 0, the graphic symbol is created in the New Object area.
An 10x10 hypothetic grid is
taken as reference)
Type -
Rules of the compilation of the csv file
Every Container, NE, Label or (graphical) Link object you wish the Add Network From File functionality au-
tomatically creates must be inserted in the csv file.
Every object corresponds to a row.
All the object parameters (Category, Type, etc.) must be compiled as shown in Tab.7. If a parameter is
not meaningful for the considered object, type the character - (hyphen) in the relevant field.
Besides the general indications described above, some of the rules described below must be respected.
Parameter Map
All the objects inserted in a file must have the same value for the Map parameter.
This means that you must insert in a csv file only the objects you wish to create in a specific map.
WARNING This map is the map the user shall open (in Read-Write mode) (see step 3 of the pro-
cedure Objects creation - Add Network From File functionality).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 79

If you wish to create the objects of a network which must be represented in more maps, the
objects shall be subdivided according to the belonging map and a csv file shall be created for
each map.
Parameter Path
The Path parameter represents the position, within the map, where the object must be created.
To indicate the containing levels, use the symbol /.
Example. If you are creating a NE object, typing the path:
Europe/Italy/Rome, means that the equipment must be created within the container
Rome, contained in the container Italy, in its turn contained in the container Europe.
/, means that the equipment must be created within the main container (level Map - see
Fig.2).
If the container name includes the character / the container name must be enclosed between
inverted commas (" ") in the description of the Path. For example, in the description of a path
the container Station A/B must be inserted in the following way /Europe/Italy/StationA/B.
If an object must be created in a container, this container must be already present in the map
or must be defined in the csv file (then created) before the object it must contain.
Example. Suppose to have to create the object NE1 in the container Italy and this container is
not already present in the map. In the csv file, the row defining the container Italy must be
placed before the row defining the NE object.
Definition of Graphical link object

For the creation of a graphical Link object, the parameters Category, Type, Name and Map must
be shown.
In this case, even the parameters Path, X, Y are not meaningful as the position of a Link object
is determined by the position of the two objects Container and/or NE and/or Label which it must
end.
This position is determined by the following rule:
A Link object is created as connection between the two Container/NE/Label objects
described in the two previous rows.
If an object of Link type is present in the two rows before (e.g., in row 8) the row of a Link (e.g.,
in row 10), the creation of the Link (e.g. in row 10) will not be carried out.
Compile the csv file starting from a model
A model file, which can be used as starting point for the creation of the file, is available in the server where
ones NMS5LX system.
The considered path/model file is the following:

opt/nms5ux/data/files/AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls.
The model is in xls format and the user must have an application program supporting this format (e.g., MS
Excel) to use it.
For the creation of the csv file through the model AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls, carry out the fol-
lowing operations:
1. If ones machine is not provided with an application program supporting the xls format, copy the file
AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls to a PC provided with this application program.
2. Open the AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls file and rename it as you wish.
3. Define every single object you wish insert in the file typing the relevant characteristics in the specified
column of the table named TEMPLATE.
Each row represents an object.
Tab.7 reports, for every column, the list of values you can insert.
Before compiling the file, it is suggested to read the Rules of the compilation of the csv file.
80 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The rows, whose first character is #, have been inserted only to help the user in the file compilation.
The information in these rows WILL NOT be considered in the automatic creation of the objects, then
it is not necessary to remove them at the end of the compilation of the file.
The only information used for the automatic creation of the objects are those of the TEMPLATE table.
4. Save the file in csv format.
Example of use of Add Network From File functionality
Suppose to wish to graphically represent an hypothetical link ALplus1 - ALplus2 in the map nms5ux using
the Add Network From File functionality.
Before compiling the csv file, it is necessary to define if the link must be placed at the main level in the LX
Map Manager window or if it must be inserted in a container and which auxiliary objects (Link and Label)
you wish to create.
A possible representation of the link is depicted in Fig.9.
Fig.9 Representation of the link (example Add Network From File)
Example (container)
Station A (container)
ALplus 1
(NE)
ALplus1 - ALplus2 (Link)
Remote ALplus2 (Label)
Station A - Station B (Link)
Remote ALplus1 (Label)
ALplus1 - ALplus2 (Link)
ALplus 2
(NE)
Fig.9 indicates, for every item to insert in the csv file, the object category (between brackets) and the
name.
At this point, the csv file can be created.
Taking the model AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls (see Compile the csv file starting from a model) as
reference and following the rules shown in par. Rules of the compilation of the csv file and in Tab.7, the
AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file, depicted in Fig.10, has been created.
Fig.11 shows the same file opened by means of a text editor.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 81

Fig.10 AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file (Add Network From File example)
Fig.11 AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file (test editor)
At this point, it is necessary to copy the file AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv to the server where the
NMS5LX system is installed (directory opt/nms5ux/data/files).
Then open the LX Map Manager window with the map nms5ux in Read-Write mode using a user with profile
Advanced, Privileged or Superuser (Start-up of NMS5LX GUI).
Select Edit > Add > Network From File and open the opt/nms5ux/data/files/
AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file.
The Add From File Report...AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv window is displayed (Fig.12).
82 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Fig.12 Add From File Report window (Add Network From File example)
The automatic creation of each objects implies the display of the relevant symbol on LX Map Manager win-
dow as shown in Fig.13.
Fig.13 LX Map Manager window (Add Network From File example)
Object creation - Auto Discovery functionality
WARNING Auto Discovery functionality is available only for equipment managed by SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
The Auto Discovery functionality allows detecting equipment in the network and not managed yet by the
supervision system.
When a new equipment is detected, NMS5LX automatically carries out the following actions:
It inserts the detected equipment in the Auto Discovery table.
It creates the corresponding object in a given map/container (optional operation).
It connects the NE object (optional operation).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 83

Moreover the functionality can detect and notify the user if the type of an object, already managed by
NMS5LX, is changed.
Auto Discovery functionality provides the user with two modalities to detect new network equipment:
Network Scan modality
NE Wake Up modality
In order to work, the two modalities must be configured and activated by the user and can be active at the
same time or one at a time.
84 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Network Scan modality
The Network Scan modality has the purpose to detect new equipment in the network, not managed by
NMS5LX yet, and equipment whose type is changed (equipment described in the DB of the supervision
system, but of a type not corresponding to the real one).
The search is executed by a cyclic scanning of the network, executing a SNMP get on all the IP addresses
belonging to given intervals (configurable by the user).
When one piece of equipment answers to the SNMP get, if the equipment:
Is NOT managed by NMS5LX yet, it is inserted in the list of the detected equipment and the rel-
evant NE object, if configured by the user, is created and connected.
Is already managed by NMS5LX but with a type different from that indicated in the network for
the specific IP Address, a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
Example. Suppose that an EL series equipment with address 172.22.13.6 is managed by
NMS5LX. At a given moment, the EL equipment in the network is replaced by an ALplus piece
of equipment. The address 172.22.13.6 is assigned to the new equipment.
If the user activates the Network Scan modality and defines that the address 172.22.13.6 is in-
cluded in the scanned IP address, on the detection of the 172.22.13.6 address a notify of type
change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
The equipment captured by the Network Scan and NE Wake Up modalities and the notify of the equipment
whose type is changed are inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
The table can be displayed any time by the user opening the Network Element Captured window. For the
new captured equipment, besides the characteristics, the action automatically executed by the system on
the detection are displayed.
In order to work, the Network Scan modality must be activated by the user. Before activating it, it is nec-
essary to define the operating parameters of the modality.
Then it will be possible to change, in any moment, one or more parameters and establish if activating im-
mediately the new configuration or, if the modality is already active, waiting for the expiry of the current
scanning in progress.
Moreover, it is possible Save the Auto Discovery configuration and retrieve it in a second moment.
Setting of the parameters for the execution of the Network Scan mode
The parameters, which must be defined by the user and must be used by the Network Scan modality, are
the following:
IP addresses which must be scanned. One or more ranges of addresses and/or single IP address
can be defined.
Scheduling of execution of the cyclic scanning: once per day or continuous each X (hours:min-
utes) and number of IP addresses which must be scanned at the same time each X (seconds).
Example. Suppose that the cyclic scanning is set to be continuous each 3 hours and that, at each
scanning, 5 equipment must be scanned each 4 seconds. The IP addresses to scan in total count-
ing groups and single addresses are 15.
The scheduling of the cyclic scanning will take place as displayed in the following figure.
Interrogation Interrogation
4s 4s 4s 4s
5 IP Add. 5 IP Add. 5 IP Add. 3h 5 IP Add. 5 IP Add. 5 IP Add.
Action to execute automatically on the detection of a new equipment. It is possible to choose

among one of the following actions:
Insertion in the Auto Discovery table, creation and connection of the relevant NE symbol.
Insertion in the Auto Discovery table and creation of the NE symbol.
In this case, the equipment can be connected in a second moment.
Only insertion in the Auto Discovery table.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 85

In this case, it will be possible then Create manually the object of the equipment present
in the Auto Discovery table or by the command Edit > Add (Create Network Element
object) and to connect it.
Map where the NE symbol must be possibly created.
When the NE is created (automatically or manually by means of command of the Auto Discovery
table), if the map where the object must be created (map A) is different from that currently open
(map B), the creation of the NE object will take place in the following way:
If the map A is open in Read-Write modality, the object is created and dynamically dis-
played in the map.
If the map A is open in Read Only modality, the object is created but not displayed. It is
necessary to execute a Refresh command on the map in order to display it.
Container where the NE symbol must be possibly created.
If the container is not present in the set map, it will be created at the creation of the NE object.
The NE object is not directly created in the container set by the user, but in the following path:
/ <container set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year>
Example. Suppose to have set the container Station-A. On June 23th 2009 the equipment AL24
is created (automatically or manually by means of the command of the Auto Discovery table)
and the corresponding symbol will be created in the container:
Station-A / 2009 / 06/2009 / 23/06/2009
Fig.14 displays an example.
Fig.14 Path containing the NE (example Auto Discovery)
The procedure to set the parameters for the execution of the Network Scan modality is reported in par.
Configure and activate the Network Scan modality.
Activation (deactivation) of the Network Scan modality
Once the execution parameters have been defined, it is necessary to activate the Network Scan modality.
The modality is automatically activated if at least one IP address or a group of IP addresses has been set
and the configuration has been saved by means of the Save as Active Conf command (Fig.20).
The Network Scan modality remains active until when the user deactivates it removing all the values in the
areas Range IP Addresses and Specific IP Addresses (Fig.20) and saving the new setting by means of Save
as Active Conf command.
The procedure to activate and deactivate the Network Scan modality is respectively reported in par. Con-
figure and activate the Network Scan modality and Deactivate the Network Scan modality.
86 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NE Wake Up modality
The NE Wake Up modality has the purpose to detect new equipment in the network not managed yet by
NMS5LX.
In this modality, the supervision system intercepts the Wake Up notifications sent by the equipment and
containing the information necessary to the connection and the management of the equipment itself.
When a Wake Up trap is intercepted, the NMS5LX system carries out the following actions:
It disables the sending of Wake Up traps by the equipment (trap switch-off).
If the equipment which sent the trap:
Is NOT managed yet by NMS5LX, this inserts it in the list of detected equipment and, if
configured by the user, creates and connects the relevant NE object.
Is already managed by NMS5LX but with a type different from that shown in the network
for the specific IP Address, a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
Example. Suppose that an EL series equipment with address 172.22.13.6 is managed by
NMS5LX. At a given moment, the EL equipment in the network is replaced by an ALplus
piece of equipment. The address 172.22.13.6 is assigned to the new equipment.
If the user activates the NE Wake Up modality and defines that the address 172.22.13.6
is included in the scanned IP addresses, on the detection of the 172.22.13.6 address a
notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
The Wake Up notification is a SNMP trap sent by the equipment to the supervision system to notify its pres-
ence in the network.
The configuration of the Wake Up trap (activation or not of the trap, IP address of the machine which the
trap must be sent to, modality of trap sending, etc.) MUST be executed by the local management program
LCT. For more information, see the relevant documentation.
The equipment captured by the Network Scan and NE Wake Up modalities and the notify of the equipment
whose type is changed are inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
The table can be displayed any time by the user opening the Network Element Captured window. For the
new captured equipment, besides the characteristics, the action automatically executed by the system on
the detection are displayed.
In order to work, the NE Wake Up modality must be activated by the user. Before activating it, it is nec-
essary to define the operating parameters of the modality.
Then it will be possible to change, in any moment, one or more parameters and establish if activating im-
mediately the new configuration or, if the modality is already active, waiting for the expiry of the current
scanning in progress.
Moreover, it is possible Save the Auto Discovery configuration and retrieve it later.
Setting of the parameters for the execution of the NE Wake Up mode
The parameters, which must be defined by the user and must be used by the NE Wake Up modality, are
the following:
Action which must be automatically executed on the detection of a new equipment. It is possible
to choose among one of the following equipment:
Insertion in the Auto Discovery table, creation and connection of the relevant NE symbol.
Insertion in the Auto Discovery table and creation of the NE symbol.
In this case, the equipment can be connected in a second moment.
Only insertion in the Auto Discovery table.
In this case, the equipment can be created in a second moment by means of the com-
mand in the Auto Discovery table (Create manually the object of the equipment present
in the Auto Discovery table) or by the command Edit > Add (Create Network Element
object) and connect it.
Map where the NE symbol must be possibly created.
When the NE is created (automatically or manually by means of command of the Auto Discovery
table), if the map where the object must be created (map A) is different from that currently open
(map B), the creation of the NE object will take place in the following way:
If the map A is open in Read-Write modality, the object is created and dynamically dis-
played in the map.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 87

If the map A is open in Read Only modality, the object is created but not displayed. It is
necessary to execute a Refresh command on the map in order to display it.
Container where the NE symbol must be possibly created.
If the container is not present in the set map, it will be created on the creation of the NE object.
The NE object is not directly created in the container set by the user, but in the following path:
/ <container set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year>
Example. Suppose to have set the container Station-A. On June 23th 2009 the equipment AL24
is created (automatically or manually by means of the command of the Auto Discovery table)
and the corresponding symbol will be created in the container:
Station-A / 2009 / 06/2009 / 23/06/2009
Fig.14 displays an example.
The procedure to set the parameters for the execution of the NE Wake Up modality is reported in par. Con-
figure and activate the NE Wake Up modality.
Activation (deactivation) of the NE Wake Up modality
Once the execution parameters have been defined, it is necessary to activate the NE Wake Up modality.
The modality is activated (deactivated) activating (deactivating) the Manage Wake-up trap option and sav-
ing the configuration by means of the Save as Active Conf command (Fig.20).
The procedure to activate and deactivate the NE Wake Up modality is reported respectively in par. Config-
ure and activate the NE Wake Up modality and Deactivate the NE Wake Up modality.
88 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
After having graphically represented the network, it is necessary to activate the connection, that is the
communication, between the NMS5LX system (logic NE objects created by the users) and the peripheral
area (physical equipment).
Doing this, we suppose that the correct operation of the physical connection is ensured by the TCP/IP net-
work.
Connection procedure
When the user sends the connection command, the NMS5LX system sends a test message to verify the
reach ability of the equipment (Line Test).
If the test has result:

NEGATIVE, the procedure is stopped: the equipment is not connected.
POSITIVE, the system sends the global network parameters and then reads/acquires from the
equipment the current configuration and the alarms: the equipment is connected.
At the first connection the system, having no information stored in the database, acquires all the informa-
tion from the NE.
Then the equipment itself will spontaneously inform the supervisory system about possible changes con-
cerning the configuration or the status of the alarms (SNMP trap).
A polling cycle from the supervisory system is kept only to check the reachability status of the equipment.
The connection of one piece of equipment causes the automatic insertion of the equipment itself in the
specific polling cycle.
WARNING Only after that the equipment has been connected at least once, it is possible to open the rele-
vant equipment window.
Commands for the connection management
In order to change the connection status of one piece of equipment or to execute some tests or to re-align
the information stored in the database, the following commands are available:
Line Test command

Connect command
Disconnect command
Alarm Re-alignment command
Configuration Upload command
Line Test command
The Line Test command checks the real reachability of the equipment.
The check consists in the request by NMS5LX system to one NE of the value of the chosen parameter: if
the NE answers, the test has successful result, otherwise it fails.
All the NEs, independently from their type or connection status, are programmed to answer to the test
message. Furthermore, the sending of the command does not influence the connection or alarm status of
the Network Element.
For the use of the command, refer to the par. Line Test.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 89

Connect command
The Connect command activates the connection between the NMS5LX system and the remote equipment.
At the end of the procedure, if the result is positive, the system will be able to communicate with the NE,
it will have all the information relevant to the current status of the alarms and to the configuration and will
have sent the network time to the equipment.
It is not possible to connect one piece of equipment in connected status. Furthermore, the connection com-
mand towards one piece of equipment in unreachable status is automatically sent by the system at regular
intervals.
For the use of the command, refer to par. Connect.
Disconnect command
The Disconnect command deactivates the connection between NMS5LX and the remote equipment: the
system stops managing the NE.
The disconnection of the equipment does not involve the deletion of the relevant information from the da-
tabase; they stay stored, even if the equipment is disconnected; the user can open the relevant equipment
window where the last acquired configuration is displayed.
For the use of the command, refer to par. Disconnect.
The Alarm Re-alignment command aligns the current equipment alarms.
The aligning procedure makes the system deletes the information of the current alarms table relevant to
the selected NE. Then the system requires to the NE the status of its alarms and stores them in the current
alarms table. The content of the current alarms table can be displayed opening the Current Alarm Browser
window.
This operation does not influence the connection status of the NE or its configuration.
It is suggested to select the command only when you suppose that a misalignment between the alarm
information known by the NMS5LX system and the real alarm situation on NE has occurred. In fact this
command does not represent the normal procedure to acquire the equipment operating status.
For the use of the command, refer to par. Alarm Re-alignment.
The Configuration Upload command aligns the information, relevant to the configuration and the alarms,
stored in the database to that really present in the equipment.
The procedure execution modality is fundamentally equal to the execution of the alarm aligning procedure
(Alarm Re-alignment command). The only difference is that the system requires to the equipment the sta-
tus of the alarms and also the configuration information relevant to all the objects known by the equipment
itself. Even in this case, the information replaces the one recorded in the database.
This operation does not influence the status of connection of the NE.
It is suggested to select the command only when you suppose that a misalignment between the alarm
information known by the NMS5LX system and the real configuration and operating status of the NE oc-
curred. In fact this command does not represent the normal procedure to acquire the information relevant
to a piece of equipment.
For the use of the command, refer to par. Configuration Upload.
90 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Connection status of the equipment
The connection status of a piece of equipment shows to the user if the equipment is managed by NMS5LX
and, if managed, its operating status (alarms). The status of the equipment can be:
Disconnected status
Connected status
Unreachable status
Maintenance status
In LX Map Manager window, the current status of a piece of equipment is represented by the colour of the
relevant NE symbol. In fact, one or more colours correspond to every status (Symbol characteristics: col-
our).
The colour of the NE symbol influences even the colour of the Container symbols containing the equipment
in the following way. If a container:
Contains at least one connected NE, the Container object will assume the colour relevant to the
connected status: green (if NE is not alarmed) or light blue/yellow/orange/red (if the NE is
alarmed).
Contains more connected NEs or other Container objects, the colour of the Container object will
be determined by the colour of the NE or Container symbol with the most serious alarm.
The colour of the NE icon in maintenance status does not affect the colour of the Container icons containing
the NE itself. For instance, if in a Container object there is a piece of equipment in connected status (green
colour) and a piece of equipment in maintenance status (pink colour), the Container icon will get the colour
relevant to the connected status (green).
Disconnected status
Initial status of one NE just after its creation; then it is the status reached after a disconnection command.
In this condition, the equipment is not managed by the system: no message is sent or received and no
polling procedure is executed.
OPERATIONS that the user can execute when equipment is disconnected

Send the Line Test, Connect.
Delete an object from the map.
It is possible to open the equipment window only if the NE has been connected at least once.
The disconnection does not involve the deletion of the database of the information on the equip-
ment configuration. In this case, however, the status and the values of the attributes of the ob-
jects contained in the window are not referred to the current condition of the equipment but to
the last known configuration.
Conditions/commands that determine the PASSING FROM ONE STATUS TO THE OTHER
After the sending of the Connect command:
If the operation is successfully, the equipment passes to connected status.
If the operation fails, the equipment passes in an unreachable status.
COLOUR of the NE symbol

The colour of the icon associated to the disconnected status is BROWN.
Connected status
Status reached after a connection procedure has gone well. In this condition, the equipment correctly an-
swers to the system polling.
During the period when the equipment is connected, the user can send commands and require information.
Only exception to this rule is the presence of LCT in Configuration modality (pag.93).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 91

OPERATIONS that the user can execute when equipment is connected
Open the equipment window and verify/change the NE configuration.
The configuration/operating status of the NE corresponds to the real situation of the equipment.
Send the commands for the management of the equipment.
Condition/commands that determine the PASSAGE FROM ONE STATUS TO THE OTHER
After:
The user sends the disconnection command, the equipment switches to disconnected status.
A system polling, if the equipment does not send any answer, the status from connected be-
comes unreachable.

The colour of the symbol of a connected NE depends on the alarms of the equipment itself. Depending on
the severity of the current alarms, the colour can be:
Green. The equipment is not alarmed.
Light blue. At least one alarm of Warning level is present on the equipment (simple signal).
Yellow. At least one alarm of Minor level is present on the equipment (alarm).
Orange. At least one alarm of Major level is present on the equipment (serious alarm).
Red. At least one alarm of Critical level is present on the equipment (very serious alarm).
If there are more alarms of different severity on the equipment at the same time, the colour of the NE
symbol will represent the most serious alarm.
Unreachable status
This is the status reached when the equipment, thought the automatic repetition of the messages, does
not answer to the polling of NMS5LX or sends unknown messages. In this condition, the NE is not managed
by the system, which however sends a connection command at regular interval.
OPERATIONS executable by the user when equipment is unreachable

Sending the Disconnect, Line Test, Connect.
The equipment window can be opened only if the equipment has been connected at least once.
The status and the values of the attributes of the objects contained in the window will not be
referred to the current condition of the equipment but to the last known configuration.
Conditions/commands that cause the PASSAGE FROM ONE STATUS TO ANOTHER ONE
After the user or the NMS5LX system has sent the connection command (automatic reconnection):
If the operation is successful, the equipment passes to connected status.
If the operation fails, the equipment remains in unreachable status.
After a user has sent the disconnection command:
If the operation is successful, the equipment passes to disconnected status.
If the operation fails, the equipment remains in unreachable status.

The colour of the NE icon associated to the unreachable status is RED with an X on the symbol.
Maintenance status
The maintenance status indicates a transient condition.

The equipment assumes this status during the execution of an operation, for example during the connec-
tion. At the end of the operation, the NE will assume the status associated to its condition (connected, dis-
connected, unreachable).
OPERATIONS executable by the user when equipment is unreachable

When the NE is in maintenance status, no operation can be executed.
92 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The colour of the NE icon associated to the maintenance status is RED.
Local management program WEB LCT
The term WEB LCT means the software application, developed to manage/control locally the equipment:
WEB Local Craft Terminal, Local Operator Manager, Local Craft Terminal.
The operations that can be executed via WEB LCT are basically those that can be executed via NMS5LX.
More information on the use of the WEB LCT program is reported in the specific documentation. Here below
only some indications are reported about the relationships between WEB LCT and NMS5LX:
Types of WEB LCT-equipment connection

Indication of the presence of the LCT user to the NMS5UX user
Enable/disable the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modality
Types of WEB LCT-equipment connection
The local user can activate the WEB LCT-equipment connection in Monitoring modality (the user can only
verify the equipment configuration) or in Configuration modality (the user can both verify and change the
equipment configuration).
The local activation of a WEB LCT-equipment connection in modality:
Monitoring, does not influence the acquisition of the alarms or the sending of commands by the
system: the NMS5UX user can open the equipment window and verify/change the equipment
configuration itself.
Configuration, influences the acquisition of the alarms or the sending of the commands by the
system.
The NMS5UX user can open the equipment window (except for the equipment of PMP type) but
it cannot change the configuration and send commands with the following exceptions:
Execute the software reset of the equipment
Transfer the configuration of equipment to one or more real pieces of equipment
Update the equipment software
Force the logout of a NMS5UX user
During the period when the connection is active, no change relevant to the alarms is signalled
to the NMS5LX system.
When the local WEB LCT-equipment connection is deactivated, the NMS5LX system automati-
cally re-aligns the configuration (sending of the Configuration Upload command) to control pos-
sible changes executed by the local user and to acquire the current alarms.
If the local user has changed the configuration of the remote equipment, the new values are
acquired and replace those previously stored in the database.
The connection of a SCT/LMT user with profile:

Read Only or Read&Write is considered by NMS system as a WEB LCT connection in Monitoring
mode
Station Operator or System is considered by NMS system as a WEB LCT connection in Configu-
ration mode.
Indication of the presence of the LCT user to the NMS5UX user
The activation and the deactivation of the local connection, both in Monitoring and Configuration modality,
are spontaneously communicated by the equipment to the NMS5LX system and signalled to the user:
In the map, a check sign is indicated next to the NE icon ( ) is indicated next to the NE icon.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 93

This information is forwarded also to the Container objects containing the NE.
Furthermore, the activation of the local connection in Configuration modality is signalled to the
user in the map: the NE icon assumes the white colour.
This information is not forwarded by the Container objects that contain the NE symbol. For ex-
ample, if a Container object contains a connected NE (green colour) and equipment which the
LCT program in Configuration modality is connected (white colour), the Container symbol will
assume the colour relevant to the connection status (green).
In the Alarm History Browser window, Current Alarm Browser window, Equipment Browser [List/
Locate] window, Information window.
In the equipment window of the NE.
Enable/disable the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modality
The NMS5UX user can enable/disable the LCT user to connect to the equipment in Configuration modality
setting the LCT Config.
This operation is not possible for equipment of type ALFOplus80HD.
If the parameter has value:

Enabled, indicates that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment both in
Monitoring and Configuration modality.
Disabled, indicates that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment only in
Monitoring modality.
Independently from the previous setting, when the equipment is switched off and switched on or reset, the
LCT Config parameter is automatically set to the Enabled value.
The command to set the LCT Config parameter is in the equipment window. Besides the status of the LCT
Config parameter is displayed in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window.
Management via Command Line Interface (only for ALFOplus80HD)
The term CLI refers to the application Siae Microelettronica Operating System, which can be started se-
lecting the command Open CLI present in the contextual menu of the NE symbol.
The use of CLI allows the complete control of the Ethernet switch installed on the ALFOplus80HD equip-
ment. For more information about the use of CLI, refer to the relevant documentation.
Here below only some indications are reported about the relationships between CLI and NMS5LX:
Connection CLI-equipment
Indication of the presence of CLI user to the NMS5UX user
Connection CLI-equipment
The activation of the connection CLI-equipment influences the acquisition of the alarms or the sending of
the commands by the system.
The NMS5UX user can open the equipment window (except for the equipment of PMP type) but it cannot
change the configuration and send commands with the following exceptions:

During the period when the connection is active, no change relevant to the alarms is signalled to the
NMS5LX system.
94 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

When the CLI-equipment connection is deactivated, the NMS5LX system automatically re-aligns the con-
figuration (sending of the Configuration Upload command) to control possible changes executed by the lo-
cal user and to acquire the current alarms.
If the local user has changed the configuration of the remote equipment, the new values are acquired and
replace those previously stored in the database.
Indication of the presence of CLI user to the NMS5UX user
The activation and the deactivation of CLI connection are spontaneously communicated by the equipment
to the NMS5LX system and signalled to the user:
In the map, the activation of the connection is signalled to the user in the map: the NE icon
assumes the white colour.
This information is not forwarded by the Container objects that contain the NE symbol. For ex-
ample, if a Container object contains a connected NE (green colour) and equipment which the
LCT program in Configuration modality is connected (white colour), the Container symbol will
assume the colour relevant to the connection status (green).
In the Alarm History Browser window, Current Alarm Browser window, Equipment Browser [List/
Locate] window, Information window.
In the equipment window of the NE.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 95

ALARM MANAGEMENT
Functionality of primary importance of the NMS5LX system is the detection, visual signal and centralized
storing of the alarm/status/event signals of the managed equipment.
The alarm term defines the fault signal generated by an error or by a bad operation of the NE or of any
element that composes it.
The status and event terms identify the signals which display not a wrong operation, but a status change,
a running operation or an operation condition. In detail, the signals of:
Status, are communicated spontaneously from the NE to the system, as for example:
The activation/deactivation of the LCT-equipment connection.
The start/end of the equipment software update.
The activation/deactivation of the manual operations.
The status of active/stand-by of duplicated parts of NE.
Event, are generated by the system itself, as for example the start of an operation of alarm re-
alignment.
In the following of the chapter, the alarm generic term indicates the alarm/status/event signal.
Acquisition of the alarms
The detection and reset signals of an alarm are spontaneously forwarded to the supervisory centre by the
equipment (trap SNMP).
A polling process executed by the supervisory centre is kept only to check the reachability status of the
equipment.
The equipment in disconnected or unreachable status are not cyclically subjected to polling.
It is possible to force the acquisition of the equipment alarms using the Alarm Re-alignment or the Config-
uration Upload command.
Dynamic display of the alarms
At each change of the alarm status on the equipment in the network, the NMS5LX system informs the user
by means of the LX Map Manager window, executing the following operations:
If present in the open map, the NE symbol where the alarm has been detected changes colour
according to the severity associated to the alarm.
If an alarm more serious than the detected one is present on the equipment, the icon does not
change colour, because it is determined by the alarm more serious present on the equipment.
The NE icon displays even the information if an alarm has not been acknowledged yet.
The status of the NE (change of colour and presence of a not yet checked alarm) is signalled
also by the Container symbols that have, inside them, this NE (the colour of the Container icons
changes).
The colour of the Container symbol is determined by the colour of the symbol of the contained
NE with the highest severity.
If open, in the Alarm History Browser window, the record relevant to the detected alarm is add-
ed.
If open, in the Current Alarm Browser window, the record relevant to the detected alarm is add-
ed.
If open, in the equipment window relevant to the NE, where the alarm has been detected, the
NE symbol is graphically changed.
96 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

If the equipment window has Read Only access the alarm is not signalled, as the window is not
dynamically updated. To update the alarms, it is necessary to require a new reading of the table
relevant to the current alarms.
In the Alarm History Browser and Current Alarm Browser window if:
Some filters are active, a record could be not displayed as it does not match the filter criteria.
The freezing of the window is activated, the record is not added.
Display of the current alarms and of the alarm history
The user can, in any moment, display:

The history of the alarms relevant to all the pieces of equipment (Network Alarm History com-
mand) or only to the selected equipment (NE Alarm History command).
The alarm history term means the list of alarms, acquired and recorded by the supervision sys-
tem in the time. The alarm history records both the detection signal and the clearing signal of
the alarm.
In the alarm history, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records (value that can
be set by the Superuser) that can be stored.
During the day, all the alarms sent by the equipment are stored in the table (even if their num-
ber exceeds the maximum value of records). At midnight, the number of record is checked; if
this exceeds the maximum set number, the system will delete, only among the raised and
cleared signals, the oldest records.
If the alarm history contains all active and not cleared alarms and their number exceeds the
maximum set value, the system will NOT delete any record.
When the maximum number of records in the table is exceeded, the message Alarm History oc-
cupation exceeded 100% is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation. The dis-
play of the message and the frequency at which it is displayed can be configured by Superuser.
Default: display of the message active; frequency: every 60 seconds.
The list of the alarms currently active on all the pieces of equipment (Network Current Alarms
command) or only in the selected equipment (NE Current Alarms command).
Alarm correlation
The term alarm correlation means the functionality that puts in relationship, in the alarm history, the
activation of an alarm with that of its clearing.
In detail, in the Alarm History Browser window the notification of the activation of the alarm is displayed
by a record where the date/time of activation of the alarm activation is displayed. The clearing of the same
alarm is indicated adding, to the already existing record, the indication of the deactivation date/time.
After a forced alignment of the alarm status, not all the notifications of the alarms active on the equipment
are recorded, but only the possible new alarms.
Furthermore, after the forced realignment, for the alarms that are not active anymore, the deactivation
date/time will be inserted in the relevant record.
WARNING If equipment is disconnected, all the (detected and detected/cleared) alarms relevant to that
equipment are removed by the alarm history.
Saving the alarms
It is possible to save the alarm history stored in the NMS5LX database. In detail, it is possible to:
Save all the alarm history of the database to tape and/or to disk (Alarm History Backup).
Then, it will be possible to restore the data (Alarm History Restore) and display them in the Old
History Browser window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 97

Save to file the whole alarm history (or a part) from the system database (Copy the alarms list
to a text editor).
Save to file the whole alarm history (or a part) recovered from tape or disk (Copy the alarms
list in a text editor).
Alarm severity
Every alarm, acknowledged and managed by the NMS5LX system, has associated a severity which deter-
mines the alarm importance.
Every severity is identified by a name and a colour, as indicated in Tab.8.
Tab.8 Alarm severity
Severity Name Color
Very serious alarm Critical Red
Serious alarm Major Orange
Alarm Minor Yellow
Minor alarm Warning Light blue
The alarm severity is the criterion used by NMS5LX to represent graphically the operational status of the
equipment.
When an alarm raises in a connected equipment, the icon that represents the equipment changes its colour
according to the severity of the active alarm.
The colour of the Container symbols containing the NE reflects the condition of current alarm.
If more alarms of different severity are present at the same time, the colour of the icon will represent the
alarm with highest severity; the same occurs for the container icons.
The alarm severity is reported also in the Alarm History Browser window and Current Alarm Browser win-
dow.
Change of the alarm severity
The NMS5LX system allows changing, for each alarm, the severity of network and the local severity.
Network severity means the severity that characterizes the alarm when displayed by the NMS5LX system.
For each alarm, the network severity is COMMON to all the NEs of the same type present in all the maps.
To change the network severity of an alarm, use the Network Severity Code command (available only to
the Superuser).
Local severity means the severity that characterizes the alarm when stored by the controller of the NE and
displayed by the local management system (LCT); this severity is not used by NMS5LX. For the same
alarm, it is possible to define a local severity different from NE to NE. To change the local severity of an
alarm, use the Equipment Severity Code command.
Example
Suppose that two types of SDH Radio are connected to the NMS5LX system: NE-A and NE-B.
By means of the Equipment Severity Code command, it is defined that, locally, the alarm x for NE-A has
severity Major, while for the NE-B has severity Minor.
Instead, using the Network Severity Code command, it is defined that the alarm x for all the NEs of SDH
Radio type of Critical severity.
98 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

In NE-A, the detection (or cleared) of the alarm x will be stored in the controller of the NE and seen by LCT
with Major severity, while it will be seen by NMS5LX with Critical severity.
Instead, in NE-B, the detection (or clearing) of the alarm x will be stored in the controller of the NE and
seen by LCT with Minor severity, while it will be seen by NMS5LX with Critical severity.
Change of the severity of User Input alarms
What described below is valid for all the alarms (of all the types of equipment) with the exception of the
alarms used by the user input.
The severity of User Input alarms is defined by a specific command in the equipment window.
This severity constitutes both the network and the local severity.
For example, if the User Input x alarm for the equipment is defined having a Critical severity, on its detec-
tion the alarm will be stored in the controller of the NE, seen by LCT and by NMS5LX with Critical severity.
The setting of the severity is independent for each alarm of User Input, and local to the NE selected for the
operation. This means that the setting must be executed for each single alarm of user Input of each single
NE.
More information on the user inputs and on the command to change the severity is reported in the equip-
ment manual of the NMS5LX.
Enable/disable the alarms
The NMS5LX system allows enabling/disabling the alarms and/or the sending of the relevant traps. In de-
tail, it is possible to:
Disable the alarm; in this case the detection (or clearing) of the alarm is not recorded in the
controller of the NE and it is not communicated to the supervision program: as the alarm has
never occurred.
Disable the sending of traps; in this case, the detection (or clearing) of the alarm is recorded in
the controller of the NE, but it is not communicated to the supervision system.
If the Configuration Upload or Alarm Re-alignment command is sent to NE, also the alarms,
whose trap sending is disabled, will be acquired.
Enable the alarm and the sending of trap; in this case the detection (or clearing) of the alarm is
recorded in the controller of the NE and communicated to the supervision system (with the send-
ing of the relevant trap) that display it in the current alarms and in the alarm history (default
condition).
The enabling/disabling of the alarm and of the trap sending is independent for each alarm, and local to the
selected NE for the operation. This means that the setting must be made for each single alarm of each
single NE.
To enable/disable the alarms and the sending of traps of a piece of equipment, use the Equipment Severity
Code command.
It is possible to verify the list of the NEs that have at least one disabled alarm/trap opening the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window and configuring properly the filter.
The severity level with which the same alarm is seen by NMS5LX system is defined by means of the Equip-
ment Severity Code command.
Fleeting alarms
Sometime, on equipment, an alarm is detected and is cleared many times in a brief period.
The instability that characterizes these alarms, defined fleeting, causes a such number of alarms to sat-
urate the network. In fact, each time the alarm raises/clears, the system records a signal.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 99

For this cause, before recording an alarm, the stability of the alarm itself is verified.
The criterion used to determine if an alarm is fleeting or not is the following: an alarm is considered fleeting
when NMS5LX, during a period of time t, records that the number of activation of the alarm is higher than
the thr_in threshold.
An alarm will not be considered fleeting anymore if, during the successive period of time t, the number of
activation of the alarm is lower than the thr_out threshold.
Example
Suppose that the values t=120, thr_in=3, thr_out=1 are set.
The alarm A, within 120 seconds, activates and clears twice and, on its third activation, (thr_in=3) the
supervision system acknowledges it as fleeting alarm: the successive activation/clearing are not recorded
in the Alarm History table.
At the successive period of 120 seconds, if the alarm A activates and clears only once (thr_out=1), the
supervision system does not consider the alarm A as fleeting anymore.
The parameter t and the thr_in and thr_out thresholds can be changed by the Superuser. Their default
values are: t = 120 sec., thr_in = 3, thr_out =1.
In the Alarm History Browser window, when an alarm exits from the fleeting status and the last signal came
to the equipment indicating the deactivation of the alarm, the management of the alarm signal will take
place without differences with respect to a normal signal of cleared alarm: the alarm is correlated to the
previous signal.
Differently, when an alarm exits from the fleeting status and the last signal came to the equipment indi-
cating the activation of the alarm, the management will take place in the following way: first a signal of
cleared alarm will be forwarded, which will be correlated with the previous signal of fleeting alarm, and
then a new signal of active alarm of active alarm will be forwarded: in the Alarm History Browser window,
a record of fleeting alarm will be displayed, followed by a record of active alarm.
WARNING The fleeting condition of an alarm is not deleted at the forced realignment of the status of the
alarms (Alarm Re-alignment command).
Acknowledge the alarms
The current alarms and those present in the alarm history can be acknowledged: in the relevant window
there is the indication that the user acknowledged the detection or/and the clear of the alarm.
For the alarms stored in the alarm history and listed in the Alarm History Browser window or in the Old
History Browser window, it is possible to acknowledge both the detection and the clear of the alarm (Ac-
knowledge the alarms).
An alarm:
Detected and acknowledged is identified by the letter S in the Ack column of the Alarm History
Browser or Old History Browser window.
Detected/cleared and acknowledged is identified by the letter C in the Ack column of the Alarm
History Browser or Old History Browser window.
When the list of alarms is filtered or in the windows where the total number of acknowledged alarms, the
rules to define if an alarm is considered acknowledged or not are the following.
A acknowledged alarm is:

An alarm detected and not yet cleared, for which the user has acknowledged the detection (pres-
ence of the letter S).
An alarm detected and cleared, for which the user has acknowledged the clearing (presence of
the letter C).
A not acknowledged alarm is:

An alarm detected and not yet cleared, for which the user has not acknowledged the detection
(absence of the letter S).
An alarm detected and cleared, for which the user has not acknowledged the clearing (absence
of the letter C).
100 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

In this case, even if the user has acknowledged the detection of the alarm (presence of the letter S), it is
considered as not acknowledged because the user has not acknowledged its clearing.
For the current alarms, listed in the Current Alarm Browser window, there is not the above mentioned dis-
tinction, because it is possible to acknowledge only the detected alarms (Acknowledge the alarms).
Management of NE Log
With NE Log (Network Element Log) we mean a file where are recorded the signals of alarm/status (alarms)
stored in the controller of equipment.
The Log read by the equipment (NE Log) is stored in the machine disk, available for the next reading by
the user.
The creation of a NE Log can be manually done by the user and/or automatically by the system.
The manual creation of the NE Log of one or more pieces of equipment can be done by the user by means
of the command Fault > NE History Log.
By means of the commands, it is even possible to manage the NE Logs (delete, display the content) and
delete the alarms stored in the controller of equipment.
The automatic creation of the NE Logs, if the relevant function is active, consists in the automatic creation
of the NE Log for the equipment which pass from the unreachable status to the connected status.
The function for the automatic creation of the NE Logs can be activated/deactivated by the system admin-
istrator during the installation of the NMS5LX system itself.
The NE Logs can be displayed only through the Equipment History Log Management Main Window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 101

PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT
The quality of the signal of the telecommunication equipment can be controlled via measures of Perfor-
mance Monitoring (PM).
A measure of PM consists in recording, during a set time period (observation period), the values of deter-
minate control parameters (BER, alarm count, etc).
Threshold limits (that can be changed by the Superuser) have been assigned to these parameters.
The exceeding of threshold limit indicates a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condition
generates an alarm, which is recorded and managed by the equipment and by the NMS5LX system as any
other alarm.
WARNING The number and the type of measures of PM and the relevant control parameters are specific
for each type of NE. For their description, refer to the relevant equipment Manuals.
The considered control parameters changes according to the type of equipment and of measures that this
equipment supports. Generally, all the executed measures refer to Recommendations of ITU-T (for exam-
ple G.826, G.821, etc.).
Activation/deactivation of the PM measures
Activation/deactivation
It is possible to activate/deactivate the measures for a single piece of equipment at a time or
for more pieces of equipment (of the same type) at the same time.
Furthermore, for each equipment, it is possible to activate/deactivate each single measure in-
dependently.
The command to activate/deactivate a single PM measure is in the specific equipment window.
The description of the equipment window and the procedure for the activation/deactivation of
the PM measures are contained in the equipment Manual relevant to the type of considered NE.
The command to activate/deactivate the measures for more pieces of equipment (of the same
type) at the same time is View/Modify P.M. Status.
Measure storing
When a PM measure is activated, the controller of the equipment begins the storing of the values
of the control parameters.
The results of the measures are subdivided in records. Each record contains the values recorded
in a specific time interval (observation period).
If, at the end of the observation period, the measure has not been deactivated, another obser-
vation period begins and so on until the measure is not stopped.
When the system interrogates the equipment, this will send to it the records (daily and primary)
that stored.
Observation period
The equipment managed by NMS5LX group the results of the PM measures in observation period
of 15 minutes (primary records) and 24 hours (daily record).
The observation periods are not synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated,
but refer, for the primary records, to the quarter (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the daily
records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated).
For example, if a measure starts at time 11.40, the first primary record will have, as observation
period, 11.40...11.45 (corresponding to the interval 11.30...11.45), while the first daily record
will have, as observation period, 11.40...00.00.
For each type of measure, the equipment keeps in memory the last 16 primary records (corre-
sponding to the last 4 hours) and the last 2 daily records (corresponding to the last 2 days). The
previous records are overwritten.
102 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

If the equipment has PM measures running and it is restarted or switched off, then, when it re-
starts to it is switched on, the measures active before the switching off will be automatically re-
started.
The (daily and primary) records relevant to the period when the measure has been interrupted
will be empty and, if reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily record, will overwrite
the previous ones.
Acquisition of the results of the PM measures
The results of PM measures are acquired by the NMS5LX system by means of a polling process (PM polling),
executed at regular intervals which change depending on the equipment type. In detail, two modalities
configurable during the installation are possible:
for all the pieces of equipment but type ALCplus2, ALCplus2e and AGS10: every 2 hours.
for the equipment of type ALCplus2, ALCplus2e and AGS10: automatically every 24 hours via FTP
(for the equipment supporting this protocol).
Requirements
The process of PM polling is managed by a dedicated program which, besides executing the poll-
ing, has the function to determinate which equipment must be polled.
The rules that equipment must match to be polled are the following:
Equipment type. Not all the pieces of equipment managed by the NMS5LX system sup-
ports the PM function. This equipment are not considered in the PM polling cycle.
Equipment status. Only the equipment in connected status are polled. The equipment in
disconnected or unreachable status are not polled.
Status of the PM measures. Only the equipment that have at least one measure active in
progress when the PM polling is executed.
Acquisition of measures
After a PM polling, the polled equipment sends the daily and primary records relevant to the
measures in progress.
If the measure is deactivated, when the NMS5LX system executes the polling, the equipment
sends all the (primary and daily) records calculated until that moment, except the last one.
For example, if the measure is activated at 9.27 and deactivated at 18.42, the record relevant
to the observation period 9.15...9.30 is transferred to the system in incomplete status, while
the record relevant to the period 18.30...18.45 is not sent.
If the measure is activated and deactivated more times during the same observation period, the
record containing the results of the last executed measure will be sent to the NMS5LX system.
For example, if the measure is activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it is re-activated
at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.00...9.15 will contain the results of the
measures relevant to the period 9.09...9.15, while the results relevant to the period 9.02...9.07
will not be sent.
PM Polling and transmission of the commands
The PM polling is totally transparent to the user: it is automatically executed without affecting the opera-
tions executed by the NMS5UX user.
Being the only connection line between the system and the equipment, the transmission of a command by
the centre is prioritary with respect to the process of cyclic polling.
For example, when a command is sent to the equipment A during the polling of the equipment B, the sys-
tem waits for the end of the polling in progress. After this, it executes the command towards the equipment
A and, then, it restarts the polling procedure from the point it has been suspended on the equipment B.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 103

PM Polling and activation of LCT-equipment connection
The activation of the local LCT-equipment connection does not affect the automatic acquisition of the re-
sults of the PM measures for the considered equipment.
Display of the results of the PM measures
The NMS5UX user can anytime display the results of the PM measures of a given piece of equipment, sub-
divided in daily or primary records of the last 180 days.
To display the daily and primary records, select the equipment in the map and choose the Performance
Monitoring command.
It is also possible to display the results of the PM measures, previously saved to disk by means of the Old
Performance Monitoring command.
Saving of the results of the PM measures
It is possible to save the results of the PM measures stored in the database of the system. In detail, it is
possible to:
Save to tape and/or disk all the results of the PM measures relevant to a month present in the
database (Save the PM measures (backup)).
Then, it will be possible to recover the data (Performance Monitoring Restore) and display them
in the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window (Old Performance Monitoring).
104 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

MENU AND COMMANDS
Some commands are optional, therefore they can miss in the specific menu of NMS5LX system.
For each command, the type of access to the system (Read Only, Read-Write) and the user profile (Entry,
Normal,...) necessary to use the command or execute the relevant procedures are described.
WARNING In NMS5LX graphical interface, the pressure of the button:

OK, execute the operation/configuration set by the operator and closes the relevant window.
Apply, execute the operation/configuration set by the operator without closing the relevant win-
dow.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 105

MAP
Refresh. It updates the LX Map Manager window.

Map Properties. It changes the dimension of the symbols of the map.
Submap Properties. It associates/remove the background from a container.
Import/Export. It compares/imports/exports the objects from a map to another. It saves the objects
of a map in a file.
Change Map. It changes or deletes the map.
Exit. It closes the LX Map Manager window (NMS5LX GUI).
106 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Refresh
The Refresh command update the LX Map Manager window.
Operations
Refresh the LX Map Manager window
Refresh the LX Map Manager window

1. Select Map > Refresh.

The LX Map Manager window is closed and then opened again.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 107

Map Properties
System access | ReadWrite
User profile | Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The Map Properties command allows customizing the display settings of the symbols in the View area of
LX Map Manager window (equipment, containers, links, etc.).
Operations
Customizing the display settings in the map
Customizing the display settings in the map

WARNING Function not available if you are working within a Super-map.
1. Select Map > Map Properties.
2. In the Symbol Size (Pixel) area of the Map Properties window, set the wished size (in pixel) of the sym-
bols in the map.
3. In the Physical Link View area of the Map Properties window, select the check-boxes relevant to the
types of links (Radio, ETH, STM-1, E1, NBUS) you wish to display in the map. The multiple selection is
allowed.
4. In the Physical Link Capacity View area of the Map Properties window, select the check-boxes relevant
to the information (Link Type, Ethernet Bandwidth, TDM Bandwidth) you wish to display for every link
in the map. The multiple selection is allowed.
5. Press OK or Apply.
The View area of the map changes the display type according to the selected settings.
108 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Submap Properties
The Submap Properties command associates a background to the container in such a way that, on its
selection in the View area, the background is displayed besides the symbols present in the container.
It is possible to associate a different background to each container in the same map.
Operations
Associate/remove the background to a container
Associate/remove the background to a container

1. Select, in the Map area, the container which you wish to associated the background to.
2. Select Map > Submap Properties.
3. In the Submap Properties window, to add the background type, in the Background Pixmap box, the
path/name of the file and press OK.
The system acknowledges, as background, the files in GIF format.
Press Browse to search the wished file in the disk.
The background is displayed in the View area.
4. To remove the background, delete the file specified in the Background Pixmap box and press OK.
The background is removed in the View area.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 109

Import/Export
The Import/Export command imports/exports/compares the objects from a map to another and saves
the objects of a map in a file.
Operations
Copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container
Copy the objects of a file to a map/container
Save the objects of a map/container to a file
Compare the objects of different maps/containers
Compare the objects of a file with the objects of a map/container
Related Topics
Import Export Map window
Copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container

1. Select Map > Import/Export.

The Import Export Map window opens.
2. Select, in the Operation area, the Copy data option.
3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From Map/Submap to Map/Submap option.
4. Set the source map/container:

a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box.
The Select Submap window opens.
b. Select the wished map in the Map area.

c. If you wish to copy only the objects of a container of the map, select the container in the Submap
area.
d. Press OK.
The source map/container is displayed in the Source box.
5. Set the destination map/container:
a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box.

The destination map must be different from the source map.
c. If you wish that the objects of the source map or container are pasted in a container of the des-
tination map, select the container in the Submap area.
d. Press OK.
The destination map/container is displayed in the Destination box.
6. Select, in the Mode area, the option:

Clear and Copy All, if you wish that the objects in the source map/container replace the objects
in the destination map/container.
110 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Copy Only Differences, if you wish to add only the different objects in the source map/container
to the destination map/container. The identical objects will not be added.
7. Press Apply.
The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each
deleted and/or created object.
Copy the objects of a file to a map/container


3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From File to Map/Submap option.
4. Set the file from which you wish to copy the objects:

The File Selection window opens.
b. Type the name of the file in the Selection box.

The system proposes the files of the default directory. Change the path, if necessary.
c. Press OK.
The Source box displays the path/name of the source file.

c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are pasted in a container of the destination map,
select the container in the Submap area.
d. Press OK.
6. Select, in the Mode area, the option:

Clear and Copy All, if you wish that the objects in the file replace the objects in the destination
map/container.
Copy Only Differences, if you wish to add only the different objects in the file to the destination
map/container. The identical objects will not be added.
7. Press Apply.
deleted and/or created object.
Save the objects of a map/container to a file

NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 111

3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From Map/Submap to File option.

area.
d. Press OK.
5. Set the file where saving the objects:

The File Selection window opens.
b. Type the name of the file in the Selection box.

c. Press OK.
The Destination box displays the path/name of the destination file.
6. Press Apply.
saved object.
Compare the objects of different maps/containers

2. In the Import Export Map window, select the Compare data option in the Operation area.
3. Select in the box:

View all data. Compares all the objects in the source map/container with those in the destination
map/container. The Messages area displays all the objects in the maps/containers.
View aligned data. Compares the objects in the map/container with those in the destination
map/container. The Messages area displays only the objects in both the maps/containers.
View not aligned data. Compares the objects in the source map/container with those in the des-
tination map/container. The Messages area displays only the different objects.
4. Select the From Map/Submap to Map/Submap option in the Import/Export area.
b. In the Select Submap window, select the wished map in the Map area.
area.
d. Press OK.
112 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are compared with the objects in a container of the
destination map, select the container in the Submap area.
d. Press OK.
7. Press Apply.
compared object.
Compare the objects of a file with the objects of a map/container


2. Select, in the Operation area, the Compare data option.
3. Select the wished value in the box:

View all data. Compares all the objects in the file with those in the destination map/container.
The Messages area displays all the objects in the file and in the maps/containers.
View aligned data. Compares the objects in the file with those in the destination map/container.
The Messages area displays only the objects in the file and in the map/container.
View not aligned data. Compares the objects in the file with those in the destination map/con-
tainer. The Messages area displays only the different objects.
4. Select the From File to Map/Submap option in the Import/Export area.
5. Set the file containing the objects to compare:

b. In the File Selection window, type the name of the file in the Selection box.
c. Press OK.
The Source box displays the path/name of the source file.

c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are compared with the objects in a container of the
destination map, select the container in the Submap area.
d. Press OK.
7. Press Apply.
compared object.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 113

Import Export Map window
The window manages the configuration parameters for the operations of map import and export.
Parameters
Operation. Type of executed operation:
Copy Data. It copies the objects from a file or map/container to a different file or map/
container.
Compare Data. It compares the objects of a file or map/container to a different map/con-
tainer.
View all data. It compares all the objects in the source map/container with those
in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays all the objects in
the maps/containers.
View aligned data. It compares the objects in the map/container with those in the
destination map/container. The Messages area displays only the objects in both
the maps/containers.
View not aligned data. It compares the objects in the source map/container with
those in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays only the dif-
ferent objects.
Import/Export. Options of import/export:

From Map/Submap to Map/Submap. It copies/compares the objects in a map/container
in a different map/container.
From File to Map/Submap. It copies/compares the objects in a file to a map/container.
From Map/Submap to File. It copies the objects in a map/container to a file.
Mode. Data copy mode:

Clear and Copy All. It replaces the objects in a file or map/container with those in a dif-
ferent file or map/container.
Copy Only Difference. It compares the objects in two different files or maps/containers
and copies in the destination map/container only the different objects.
Source. File or map/container from which the objects are copied (source).
Destination. File or map/container to which the objects are pasted (destination).
Messages. Each record identifies an object involved in the operation. Depending on the type of
executed operation, one or more fields will be present displaying the operation type, the object
involved in the operation and the result of the operation itself.
Push-buttons
Apply. It applies the settings.
Cancel. It closes the window without applying the settings.
Browse. It opens the system window for the file selection.
Menu bar
File > Close. It closes the window.
114 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Change Map
User profile | Privileged, Superuser
The Change Map command allows managing the system maps.
Operations
Change map
Add a map
Delete a map
GUI
Change Map window
Change map

1. Select Map > Change Map.
2. In the Change Map window, select a map from the list. If the map has access:
Read-Write, press:
Open Map READ/WRITE to open the map in Read-Write access.
Open Map READ/ONLY to open the map in Read Only access.
Read, press Open Map READ/ONLY to open the map in Read Only access.
The Open Map READ/WRITE push-button is not available.
The current map is closed and the new map is opened.
One's user and operating level are kept also in the new map.
Add a map

User profile | Superuser
2. In the Change Map window, press Add Map.
3. In the Add Map window, type the name of the map you wish to create in the Map Name text box.
4. If you wish to create a Super map, select the Super Map.
5. Press Ok.
The name of the just created map is displayed in the Change Map window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 115

Delete a map

WARNING It is not possible to delete a map with Read access or the current map.
2. In the Change Map window, select a map with Read-Write access from the list.
3. Press Delete Map and confirm.

The map is removed from the list.
116 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Change Map window
Parameters
Map name. Name of the map.
Permission. Type of available access:
Read/Write: the map can be opened with Read-Write or Read Only access.
Read: the map can be opened only with Read Only access (Read-Write access already
occupied).
Comment. Additional notes. The wording (Current Map) indicates the currently open map.
Push-buttons
Open Map READ/WRITE. It opens the selected map in read-write access. Push-button not
available if the selected map is a Super map.
Open Map READ ONLY. It opens the selected map in read-only access.
Add Map. It creates a new empty map.
Delete Map. It deletes the selected map.
Close. It closes the window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 117

Exit
The Exit command closes the LX Map Manager window and then the NMS5LX GUI.
Operations
Close the LX Map Manager window
Close the LX Map Manager window

1. Select Map > Exit or press .
2. Press Ok in the confirmation window.
WARNING The closure of LX Map Manager window causes the automatic closure of all the possible open
window of NMS5LX (Alarm History Browser, Equipment Information, etc.).
118 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

EDIT
Add. It creates objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map.
Delete. It deletes the objects from the map.
Modify/View. It displays and/or changes the characteristics of the objects.
Information. It displays the information of the symbol.
Graphical Symbol Properties. It displays the graphic parameters of the symbol.
Find. It searches an object of the map.
Arrange Symbols. It aligns vertically/horizontally the symbols.
Generate Info for Web. It checks the database information necessary to the RAN (Remote Access
NMS5UX) application.
Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers. It sets the size of the containers windows such as
the size of the window where the command is selected.
These commands are used to represent graphically the equipment network in the maps and to provide to
NMS5LX the parameters to manage and control each single object.
Before using them, it is suggested to read the Graphic network representation where the modalities to con-
figure correctly and rapidly one's supervision system are described.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 119

Add
WARNING Before creating an object, it is suggested to read the Rules for the creation of the objects.
The Add command creates objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map.
Operations (map)
Create Container objects
Create Network Element object
Create virtual Network Element objects
Create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols)
Create graphical Link objects
Create Physical Links objects
Create Label objects
Create Container, NE, graphical Link and Label objects described in a file
Operations (super-map)
Add a map to a Super-map
GUI
Add Physical Link window
See also
Container objects
Link objects
Label objects
Create Container objects

WARNING It is possible to create all the wished Container objects.
1. In the LX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you
wish to create the container.
2. Select Edit > Add > Container or press .
3. In the Add Container window, type the name of the container (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 char-
acter and maximum 48 characters) in the Label box.
The name will be displayed under the symbol of the container.
4. In the Type area, select the type of container you wish to create among: Subnetwork, Station, Substa-
tion.
5. In the Comment area, type possible information relevant to the object (max 100 characters).
The setting of this parameter is optional.
120 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The container is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window. Move the symbol in
any point of the View area.
Create Network Element object

WARNING The maximum number of equipment objects that can be created depends on one's codeword.
wish to create the NE.
2. Select Edit > Add > Network Element or press .
3. In the Add Equipment window, type the IP address of the NE in the IP Address box.
If you wish to create a:
ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node object, type the IP address of the main equipment of the node.
PMP object, type the IP address of the Proxy interface used for the connection to the master
station.
The IP address set in this field must CORRESPOND to the IP address of the NE, locally defined. If the
address do not coincide, it will not possible to send commands to the NE itself.
After the creation of the NE, the IP address cannot be changed.
It is not possible to assign the same IP address to two different NEs, even of different type.
If a NE object with the IP address is already present in the map, the values assigned to the same object
present in the other map will be automatically displayed in all the other fields of the Add Equipment
window.
4. Type, in the Logical Address box, the logical address of the NE (alphanumeric string of max. 32 char-
acters).
The logical address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE.
The same value of IP Address can be assigned to the logical address, but the same logical address to
cannot be assigned to two different NEs.
5. Execute one of the following operations, in alternative:

Select, in the Type area, the type of equipment you are adding to the map (see Tab.2).
Press Siae Generic Equipment. The system automatically selects, in the area Type, the icon
...... During the first operation of Line Test of the system towards the equipment, the system
will automatically assign the correct equipment type to the equipment.
WARNING This operation is not available for equipment belonging to a nodal configuration and
for equipment in XPIC configuration.
6. ONLY if the equipment is managed by Proxy Agent and the Proxy Agent application is installed, activate
the Proxy Address box.
The box aside displays the default address, configured by the system administrator, used by the Proxy
Agent to identify the equipment.
In order to change the address, type in the box the new address of the machine to which the Proxy
Agent sends the traps coming from the equipment.
For the ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node objects, if the Proxy Address box is activated, the addresses by
which the equipment belonging to the node are acknowledged by the Proxy Agent are configured.
7. Set, in SNMP Protocol box, the type of SNMP protocol used to communicate with the equipment: SNMP
V1, SNMP V2 or SNMP V3.
The selected value must be coherent with that set previously set on the equipment.
WARNING The communication protocol SNMP V3 is available only for ALCplus2e and ALFOplus equip-
ment. It is possible to migrate from the SNMPv1/SNMPv2c protocol to the SNMPv3 protocol and vice
versa only by means of WEB LCT application. For more information, refer to the manual of the equip-
ment Manager.
8. Type possible additional information (max 100 characters) in the Comment area.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 121

The NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window. Move the symbol in any
point of the View area.
If the created NE symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the status of the ex-
isting object.
Create virtual Network Element objects

WARNING It is possible to create all the wished SNMP virtual NE objects.
wish to create the virtual NE.
2. Select Edit > Add > Virtual Network Element.
3. In the Add Equipment window, type the logical address of the virtual NE (alphanumeric string of max
32 characters) in the Logical Address box.
The logical address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE.
It is not possible to assign the same logical address to two virtual NEs.
4. In the Type area, select the type of virtual equipment you wish to create (see Tab.2).
5. Type additional information (max 100 characters) in the Comment area.

The virtual NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window. Move the symbol in
any point of the View area.
Create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols)

WARNING It is possible to create all the wished Generic Symbol objects.
wish to create the Generic Symbol.
2. Select Edit > Add > Generic Symbol.
3. In the Add Generic Object window, type the name of the generic symbol (alphanumeric string of max
40 characters) in the Label box.
The name will be displayed under the generic symbol.
It is possible to assign the same name to more graphic symbols, even of different type.
4. In the Group area, select the group where the generic symbol is contained.
5. In the Object area, select the generic symbol you wish to create.
The Generic Symbol is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window. Move the sym-
bol in any point of the View area.
122 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Create graphical Link objects

WARNING It is possible to create all the wished graphical Link objects.
wish to create the Link.
2. Select the two objects among which you wish to create the connection.
The operation is not executed if selected:
A container and a NE or Generic Symbol
Two containers
A single object
More than two objects
3. Select Edit > Add > Link.
4. In the Add Generic Object window, type the name of the connection (alphanumeric string of max 40
characters) in the Label box.
It is possible to assign the same name to more graphical Links even of different type.
5. Activate the Show Label box if you wish that the name of the connection is displayed in the map.
The display of the names of the Link objects is influenced even by the command View > Show/Hide
Link Label (see Show/hide the names of the Link objects/Tab.10).
6. In the Connection type area, select the type of connection.

7. Type additional information (max 100 characters) in the Comment area.
The connection line is displayed between the selected objects.
If one of the two object is moved, the line automatically adapted according to the move.
Create Physical Links objects

1. In the LX Map Manager window, select the two NEs between which you wish to configure the physical
link.
The command Physical Link is not available if the operator has not selected the two NEs in the map.
The operation is not executed if selected:
A container and a NE or Generic Symbol
Two containers
A single object
More than two objects
2. Select Edit > Add > Physical Link.
3. In the Add Physical Link window, type an alphanumeric string of at most 50 characters in the Link Label
box. This string constitutes the name of the link.
4. Select the option push-button Link Type corresponding to the type of link you are creating.
Depending on the type of selected link, the available channels are selected.
If the label [In Use] is displayed next to the name of a channel, this means that the channel is already
occupied by another link and cannot be used.
5. In the Channels area of the boxes Source and Destination, select the channels on the source and des-
tination equipment between which create the physical link.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 123

The number of channels selected in the Source area and in the Destination area must be the same,
otherwise the system does not execute the operation and answer with an error message.
If more channels are selected in the Source and Destination area, the system makes the first channel
selected in the Source area corresponds to the first channel selected in the Destination area and so on.
6. Press OK.
If the operation is successful, the symbol of the link is displayed in the map window (if the two NEs are
in the same map) or not depending on the display settings of the map (Customizing the display settings
in the map).
The physical links of radio type are represented in the map window by a blue dashed line, all the other
types of links by a blue continue line.
After the creation, it is only possible to Verify/modify the E1 channels of a Physical Link object. Only
for the physical links of E1 type, the operator can even Verify/modify the E1 channels of a Physical Link
object.
Create Label objects

WARNING It is possible to create all the wished Label objects.
wish to create the wording.
2. Select Edit > Add > Label.

3. In the Add Label window, type an alphanumeric string of max 50 characters in the Label box.
It is possible to create the same label more times.
The object is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window. Move the symbol in any
Create Container, NE, graphical Link and Label objects described in a file

WARNING Before executing the operation, it is necessary:

Create the file in csv format you wish to use for the automatic creation of the objects.
To copy the file (.csv) to the server where the NMS5LX system is installed (default directory opt/
nms5ux/data/files).
1. Select Edit > Add > Network From File.
2. In the Add Network From File window, select the wished file (csv format) in the Files list.
The list displays the files of the predefined directory (displayed in the Selection box). Change the path,
if necessary.
3. Press Ok.
The Add From File Report - <path/name of the selected file> window, for every created object, shows
in the column:
Category and Type. Object type.
Name. Logical address (NE) or name of the object.
Message. Self-explanatory message about the result of the object creation.
If the total operation of object creation:
Was successful, the objects described in the file will be present in the LX Map Manager.
124 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Was failed, the message SYNTAX ERROR - operation ABORTED is displayed in the Add From File
Report... window.
Add a map to a Super-map

WARNING Function available ONLY if you are working within a Super-map.
1. Select Edit > Add Map.
2. In the Add Remote Map window, select the wished map in the Available Maps area.
3. Press Ok. The Add Remote Map window closes and the selected map is placed into the New Object Area
of the Super-map window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 125

Add Physical Link window
The window allows creating a physical link between equipment.
Parameters
Link Label. Name of the Link. When the window is opened, if two NEs are selected in Packet
Service Manager Map window, the Link Label box indicates the default name given to the Link
with the following format: <source NE logic address> - <destination NE logic address>.
Link Type. Type of physical link composing the physical connection (Radio, E1, ETH, STM-1,
NBUS). Depending on the selected radio button, the channels displayed in the Channels boxes
change.
Channels. List of channels present on the NE of the type selected in Link Type parameter. For
every channel, the name (for example LAN-1...) and the status are displayed:
<no wording>. The port is available for a connection of the considered Link.
[In Use]. The port is already used for a connection by a different Link.
Equipment Information. Area with the following read-only data (displayed when one port is
selected in the Channels area):
NE Name. Logical name of the selected NE.
NE Type. Type of selected equipment.
IP Address. Physical address of the selected equipment.
Max Eth. Capacity, equipment Ethernet capacity available at the maximum modulation.
Min Eth. Capacity, equipment Ethernet capacity available at the minimum modulation.
Maximum and minimum modulations are meaningful only in case of radio links managing the
ACM functionality. In all the other cases, the maximum modulation and minimum modulation
coincide.
Push-buttons
OK. Applies the changes and closes the window.
Apply. Applies the changes and does not close the window.
Cancel. Closes the window without applying the changes.
126 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

SNMP protocol (information)
SNMP protocol is available in 3 versions: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c and SNMPv3.
The main difference between the SNMPv1/SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 protocols consists in the management of
the message security and of the access control.
SNMPv1/v2c
SNMPv3
SNMPv1/v2c
Versions 1 and 2 of SNMP protocol uses a security model based on community: the messages are trans-
mitted not encrypted and can be copied or modified.
SNMPv3
SNMPv3 protocol, instead, foresees a security model based on the management of the users for the pro-
tection of the messages and the control of the accesses.
In SNMPv3, every user is provided with his own authentication password and packet encryption password.
SNMPv3 protocol uses the algorithms HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA1 to authenticate the packets. The user
password is used as secret key to calculate the HMAC code. The packet, in order to be authenticated, must
contain, besides the HMAC code, even the user name.
Moreover, SNMPv3 protocol foresees the possibility to encrypt the part of the packet containing the OIDs
of the MIB objects and the relevant values, using the encryption algorithm DES56. The key used for the
encryption is different from the key used for the HMAC authentication.
This allows defining if the user is given an access:
without authentication (noAuthPriv)
with authentication (AuthNoPriv)
with authentication and encryption (AuthPriv)
For more information, refer to RFC 3410, 3411, 3412, 3413, 3415 and 3584.
Tab.9 Security mechanisms in SNMPv1/v2c and SNMPv3
Security Security level Authentication Encryption Description

model
SNMPv1/v2c noAuthNoPriv String No Authentication based on Community: the
Community passwords are transmitted not encrypted
and displayed in the traces
SNMPv3 noAuthNoPriv Username No Authentication based on user name
AuthNoPriv MD5 or SHA No Authentication based on algorithms
HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA
AuthPriv MD5 or SHA DES 56 Authentication based on algorithms
HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA and encryption
with algorithms CBC-DES (DES-56) be-
sides authentication
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 127

Delete
The Delete command deletes an object from the map.
Operations
Delete an object from the map
Delete an object from the map

1. Select the object you wish to delete in the LX Map Manager window.
In a map, it is possible to delete the following objects:

Container. It can be deleted only if it does not contain objects.
Network Element. If present only in one map, can be deleted only if it is in disconnected status
(brown symbol).
If the object is present in more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol even if it is in connected
status, except for the last copy for which the above mentioned rule is valid: it can be deleted
only if in disconnected status.
The virtual NE and NE WEB Generic type can be always deleted.
If the object is managed even by the Ring Manager and/or Packet Service Manager application,
first it must be deleted from the Ring Manager and/or Packet Service Manager Map window and
then it can be deleted from the map.
Generic Symbol, graphical Link, Physical Link or Label. It can be always deleted.
A connection is automatically deleted even when one of the two symbols, which is connected to,
is removed.
In a Super-map, it is possible to delete the object:

Map. There is no restriction to the deletion of a map contained into a Super-map.
2. Select Edit > Delete or press the right mouse button, select Delete and confirm.
The object is removed from the map.
128 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Modify/View
System access | ReadOnly, ReadWrite
User profile | ReadOnly: Entry, Normal; ReadWrite: Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
WARNING The values of some parameters cannot be changed. If it was necessary to modify these param-
eters, it is suggested to delete the object and then create it again assigning the new values to the param-
eters.
If the same object has been created in two different maps, when the values of the object parameters in
the first map are changed, the system automatically changes the values of the corresponding object pa-
rameters in the second map.
The Modify/View command displays/modifies the characteristics of the objects.
Operations
Verify/change the parameters of a Container object
Verify/change the parameters of a Network Element object
Verify/change the parameters of a Generic Symbol object
Verify/change the parameters of a graphical Link object
Verify/change the label of a Physical Link object
Verify/modify the E1 channels of a Physical Link object
Verify/modify a Label object
Verify the symbol information of a symbol
Verify/change the parameters of a Container object

1. Select the wished Container object.
2. Select Edit > Modify/View > Container or press the right mouse button and select Properties.
The Container Properties window displays the following parameters:
Label. Container name.
Type. Container type.
Comment. Additional information
It is possible to change the all parameters. The modality to set the parameters is the same described
in par. Create Container objects.
Verify/change the parameters of a Network Element object

1. Select the wished NE or Virtual NE object.
2. Select Edit > Modify/View > Network Element or press the right mouse button and select Prop-
erties.
In the Equipment Properties window, if the selected object is:
Network Element, the box/area shows:
IP Address, the IP address of the NE
Logical Address, the logical address of the NE
Type, the type of NE
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 129

Proxy Address, address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming
from the NE.
SNMP Protocol, version of the SNMP protocol used to communicate with the equipment.
The selected value must be coherent with that set previously set on the equipment.
WARNING The communication protocol SNMP V3 is available only for ALCplus2e and AL-
FOplus equipment. It is possible to migrate from the SNMPv1/SNMPv2c protocol to the
SNMPv3 protocol and vice versa only by means of WEB LCT application. For more infor-
mation, refer to the manual of the equipment Manager.
Comment, additional information
It is always possible to change the Logical Address, Type, Proxy Address, Comment parameters.
The modality to set the parameters is the same described in par. Create Network Element ob-
ject.
The change of the Logical Address parameter involves the change of the name even for the cop-
ies of the same NE present in the additional applications of the supervision system (for example,
Ring Manager, Packet Service Manager, RAN, etc.).
The Ip Address parameter can be modified only if the equipment is disconnected even on NMS
side.
Virtual Network Element, the box/area shows:
Logical Address, the logical address of the NE
Type, the type of NE
Comment, additional information
It is possible to change the all parameters. The modality to set the parameters is the same de-
scribed in par. Create virtual Network Element objects.
Verify/change the parameters of a Generic Symbol object

1. Select wished Generic Symbol.
2. Select Edit > Modify/View > Generic Symbol or press the right mouse button and select Proper-
ties.
The Generic Symbol Properties window displays the parameters:
Label. Generic symbol name.
Group. Group containing the symbol.
Object. Symbol.
in par. Create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols).
Verify/change the parameters of a graphical Link object

1. Select the wished graphical Link object.
2. Select Edit > Modify/View > Link or the command Properties in the menu that opens selecting the
right button of the mouse.
The Link Properties window displays the boxes/areas:
Label and Show Label. Name of the connection and if this is displayed in the map are respectively
indicated.
The display of the names of the Link objects is influenced even by the command View > Show/
Hide Link Label (see Show/hide the names of the Link objects/Tab.10).
130 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Connection type. Type of displayed graphical connection.
Comment. Additional information.
in par. Create graphical Link objects.
Verify/change the label of a Physical Link object

1. Select the wished physical Link object.
3. Type the new label of the link in the text box Link Label of the Modify Physical Link window.
WARNING The Modify Physical Link window is equal to the Add Physical Link window. All the parameters
are read-only, except for the name of the link (Link Label). The only allowed operations are the change
of the link name and the addition of E1 channels to the link (only for links of E1 type).
4. Press Update Label.
Verify/modify the E1 channels of a Physical Link object

WARNING Procedure available only for Physical Link objects of E1 type.
1. Select the wished Physical Link object.
3. In the Modify Physical Link window, press Configure E1 connections.
WARNING The Modify Physical Link window is equal to the Add Physical Link window. All the parameters
are read-only, except for the name of the link (Link Label). The only allowed operations are the change
of the link name and the addition of E1 channels to the link (only for links of E1 type).
4. In the Modify Physical Link window, to:

add E1 channels to the selected link of E1 type:
select, in the Source and Destination boxes of the FREE CHANNELS area, the E1 channels
you wish to add.
The number of channels selected in the Source area and in the Destination area must be
the same, otherwise the system does not execute the operation and answer with an error
message.
If more channels are selected in the Source and Destination area, the system makes the
first channel selected in the Source area corresponds to the first channel selected in the
Destination area and so on.
press Add Connection.
remove an E1 connection from the selected link of E1 type:
select, in the CONNECTIONS area, the E1 link you wish to remove.
press Remove Connection.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 131

Verify/modify a Label object

1. Select the wished Label object.
2. Select Edit > Modify/View > Label or press the right mouse button and select Properties.
In the Label Properties window, the wording is displayed in the Label box.
3. To modify the label, type the new value (alphanumeric string of max 50 characters) in the Label box.
132 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Information
WARNING Command not available for Generic Symbol, Label, Physical Link or Link objects.
The Information command displays the information of the symbol.

In detail, it is possible to:
Manage the informative notes of a NE symbol
The selection of the command displays the Information window.

1. Select the wished object.

2. Select Edit > Information or press the right mouse button and select Information.
The Information window opens, where the symbol information is displayed (acknowledge status of the
alarms, of the signal of LCT presence, Incorrect Upload and the notes).
Manage the informative notes of a NE symbol

1. Select the wished NE object.

2. Select Edit > Information or press the right mouse button and select Information.
3. In the Information window, add/change/delete the text (max 50 characters) in the Note area.
4. Press OK.
If some notes are present, the symbol , is added next to the equipment symbol.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 133

Information window
This window displays the information about the symbol selected in the map.
Parameters
Acknowledge Information. Acknowledge status of the alarms, of the LCT presence signal
and of the Incorrect Upload signal. If the selection is an object:
Network Element. Box:
Ack Alarm - active ( ). In the selected NE, there is at least a not acknowledged
alarm (current and/or in the alarm history).
To acknowledge the alarm, open the Alarm History Browser window and/or the
Current Alarm Browser window.
Ack Alarm - inactive. All the possible alarms are acknowledged.
Ack LCT - active ( ). From the last time the equipment window of the selected
NE has been opened, the LCT connected to the NE at least once in Configuration
modality (LCT presence signal).
To acknowledge the signal, open the equipment window relevant to the NE.
Ack LCT - inactive. From the last time the equipment window of the selected NE
has been opened, LCT has not connected in Configuration modality.
Incorrect Upload - active ( ). The last Configuration Upload is failed or ended
with problems.
The signal is automatically removed as soon as the Configuration Upload opera-
tion is successfully executed.
Incorrect Upload - active. The last Configuration Upload ended successfully.
For the virtual NE the Acknowledge Information area is not meaningful.
Network Element of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type. Box:
Ack Alarm - active ( ). At least one NE of the selected node has at least one not
acknowledged alarm.
Ack Alarm - inactive. No NE of the selected node has not acknowledged alarms.
Ack LCT - active ( ). At least one NE of the selected node has the signal of LCT
presence.
Ack LCT - inactive. No NE of the selected node has the signal of LCT presence.
Incorrect Upload - active ( ). At least one NE of the selected node has the signal
of Incorrect Upload.
Incorrect Upload - inactive. No NE of the selected node, has the signal of Incorrect
Upload.
Container. Box:
Ack Alarm - active ( ). At least one NE in the selected container has at least one
not acknowledged alarm.
Ack Alarm - inactive. No NE in the selected container has unacknowledged alarms.
Ack LCT - active ( ). At least one NE in the selected container has the signal of
LCT presence.
Ack LCT - inactive. No NE in the selected container has the signal of LCT presence.
Incorrect Upload - active ( ). At least one NE in the selected container has the
signal of Incorrect Upload.
Incorrect Upload - inactive. No NE in the selected container has the signal of In-
correct Upload.
Acknowledge Information. If a NE object is selected, it displays possible informative notes

edited by the user.
Push-buttons
OK. Saves possible informative notes written by the operator and closes the window.
Cancel. Closes the window without saving the written notes.
134 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Graphical Symbol Properties
WARNING Command not available for the Link and Physical Link symbols.
The Graphical Symbol Properties command displays the graphic parameters assigned by the system to
the symbol.
Operations
Display the symbol graphic parameters
Display the symbol graphic parameters

1. Select the wished symbol.
2. Select Edit > Graphical Symbol Properties.

In the Graphical Symbol Properties window, the box:
Selection Name, shows the graphic name of the symbol.
Object Properties, shows the graphic parameters of the symbol.
The parameters cannot be changed.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 135

Find
The Find command searches a symbol in the map using, as search criterion, part or the whole name of
the NE, the IP address of the NE or notes relevant to the NE.
Operations
Search a symbol in the map
Search a symbol in the map

1. Select Edit > Find.
2. In the Find window, type in the Text to find: box the alphanumeric string relevant to the symbol you
wish to find.
It is possible to use the asterisk wild-card character (*). For example, typing in the box:
p, the equipment with name, address or notes equal to p will be searched.
p*, the NEs with name, address or notes starting with p will be searched.
p*o, the NEs with name, address or notes starting with p and ending with o will be searched.
The search of the IP address containing the wild-card character asterisk (*) is available only in the cur-
rent map.
3. Select, in the Search for area, the field where the alphanumeric string must be searched:
Symbol Name. Name of the symbol.
IP Address. IP address of the symbol (parameter valid only for NE objects).
Note. Additional notes for the symbol (parameter valid only for NE objects).
4. Select, in the Search for area, the map where the alphanumeric string must be searched:
Current Map. The alphanumeric string is searched in the current map.
All Maps. The alphanumeric string is searched in all the system maps.
5. Press Find.
In the Search result area, there are as many rows as the map objects matching search conditions. For
each object, the name and the position (map/container/) of the relevant symbol.
6. In order to bring the LX Map Manager window with a a highlighted symbol in foreground, select the
relevant row in the Search result area and, then, press Highlight or double click on the row itself.
136 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Arrange Symbols
WARNING Command not available for the Super-map.
The Arrange Symbols command aligns the symbols.
Operations
Align the symbols
Align the symbols

1. Select the symbols you wish to align.

The first selected symbol is taken as reference for the alignment.
2. To align:
the symbols vertically, select Edit > Arrange Symbols > Vertical or press .
the symbols horizontally, select Edit > Arrange Symbols > Horizontal or press .
According to the selected command/push-button, the symbols are aligned vertically or horizontally.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 137

Generate Info for Web
The Generate Info for WEB command checks the database information necessary to RAN to ensure the
congruity between NMS5LX and RAN application.
For more information about RAN application, refer to the specific documentation.
Operations
Align the information in the databases of RAN and NMS
Align the information in the databases of RAN and NMS

1. Select Edit > Generate Info for WEB.

The system download the information of NMS database to RAN database, deleting the information con-
tained in this one.
138 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers
The Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers command allows to set the size of the contain-
ers windows such as the size of the window where the command is selected.
Operations
Set the size of the containers windows
Set the size of the containers windows

1. To resize the LX Map Manager window as you wish.
2. Select Edit > Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers.
When a container is selected, the LX Map Manager window will keep the size set at step 1.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 139

VIEW
Show/Hide Graphical Links. It hides/shows the graphical links in the View area of the map.
Show/Hide Physical Links. It hides/shows the physical links in the View area of the map.
Show Labels/Show Capacity. It alternates the display of label and capacity on the links of the map.
Show/Hide Map Tree. It hides/shows the Map area.
Show/Hide Platform Status. It hides/shows the platform status bar.
Show/Hide Link Label. It hides/shows the labels of the Link objects.
Pan and Zoom. It allows zooming a specific portion of the map window.
140 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Show/Hide Graphical Links
The Show/Hide Graphical Links command hides/shows the graphical links in the View area of the map.
Operations
Show/hide the graphical links in the map
Show/hide the graphical links in the map

1. If the graphical links in the map are:

displayed, select View > Show/Hide Graphical Links to hide them
hidden, select View > Show/Hide Graphical Links to display them.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 141

Show/Hide Physical Links
The Show/Hide Physical Links command hides/shows the physical links in the View area of the map.
Operations
Show/hide the physical links in the map
Show/hide the physical links in the map

1. If the physical links in the map are:

displayed, select View > Show/Hide Physical Links to hide them
hidden, select View > Show/Hide Physical Links to display them.
142 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Show Labels/Show Capacity
The Show Labels/Show Capacity command alternates the display of label and capacity on the (graphical
and physical) links of the map.
Operations
Alternate the display of label and capacity on the links of the map
Alternate the display of label and capacity on the links of the map

1. If on the link in the map, is displayed:

the label, select View > Show Labels/Show Capacity to display the link capacity
the capacity, select View > Show Labels/Show Capacity to display the link label.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 143

Show/Hide Map Tree
The Show/Hide Map Tree command shows/hides the Map area.
Operations
Show/hide the Map area
Show/hide the Map area

1. If the area Map is:

displayed, select View > Show/Hide Map Tree or press to hide it
hidden, select View > Show/Hide Map Tree or press to display it.
144 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Show/Hide Platform Status
The Show/Hide Platform Status command hides/shows the Platform Status bar.
Operations
Show/hide the platform status bar
Show/hide the platform status bar

1. If the platform status bar is:

displayed, select View > Show/Hide Platform Status or press to hide it.
hidden, select View > Show/Hide Platform Status or press to display it.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 145

Show/Hide Link Label
The command Show/Hide Link Label hides/shows the names of the Link objects in the View area of the
LX Map Manager window.
The display status of the names of the Link objects is described by the presence of the wording [Link Label
Off] in the status bar.
In detail, if the wording is:
Present, indicates that the names of the Link objects ARE NOT displayed in the View area.
Not present, indicates that the names of the Link objects ARE displayed in the View area.
The display of the name of a Link object is influenced even by the setting of the relevant parameter Show
Label.
This parameter is set during the procedure Create graphical Link objects e Create Physical Links objects.
Then, it can be changed in any moment (see Verify/change the parameters of a graphical Link object).
Tab.10 indicates the interaction between the setting of the parameter Show Label and the display status
of the names of the Link objects in a map for an hypothetical object Link A.
Tab.10 Display of the name of the Link objects in the map
Object Link A - Display of the names of the Display of the name of the object
parameter Show Label Link objects in the map * Link A in the map
Active Active Name displayed
Inactive Active Name not displayed
Active Inactive * Name not displayed
Inactive Inactive * Name not displayed
* The wording [Link Label Off] is present in the status bar of the LX Map Manager window.
Operations
Show/hide the names of the Link objects
Show/hide the names of the Link objects

1. Select View > Show/Hide Link Label or press .

If the link labels were displayed, after the transmission of the command they are hidden and the word-
ing [Link Label Off] is displayed in the status bar of the LX Map Manager window.
If the link labels were hidden, after the transmission of the command they are displayed and the word-
ing [Link Label Off] disappear from the status bar of the LX Map Manager window.
146 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Pan and Zoom
The command Pan and Zoom allows zooming a specific area (selected by the user) of the map window.
When the command is selected, a box is displayed at the right bottom corner of the map window (area
Pan and Zoom). The box contains a little display of the whole View area of the map window.
A selection is cancelled by the successive selection.
Within the box, the user can define a specific area (delimited by a red dotted line) clicking with the left
button of the mouse and dragging. When the left button is released, the area View of the map window will
display only the selected part of the map.
The box contains three push-buttons:

View All: when pressed, the area View of the map window displays the whole map. The dotted
line is removed from the box Pan and Zoom.
Minimize/Expand: when pressed, the box Pan and Zoom is minimized/opened in the bottom
right corner of the window. The push-buttons Minimize and Expand are displayed alternative-
ly.
Close: when pressed, it closes the box Pan and Zoom and restores the area View to the normal
display.
and is provided, on every side, with a direction button to move the area delimited by the red dotted line
within the box itself. The area View of the map window changes accordingly.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 147

PERFORMANCE
Performance Monitoring Read. It updates the results of the PM measures of the equipment.
Performance Monitoring. It displays the results of the PM measures of the equipment.
Old Performance Monitoring. It displays the results of the PM measures of the equipment, saved and
restored from tape or disk.
View/Modify P.M. Status. It displays the status and allows activating/deactivating the PM measures of
one or more pieces of equipment of the same type contemporarily.
148 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Performance Monitoring Read
The Performance Monitoring Read command updates the results of the PM measures of the equipment.
The update request is sent to the controller of the equipment.
Operations
Update the results of the PM measures of the equipment
Update the results of the PM measures of the equipment

WARNING Operation meaningful only for the NE in connected status.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the operation is executed for all the pieces of
equipment of the node.
1. Select the wished NE.
2. Select Performance > Performance Monitoring Read.

At the end, a message is displayed with the result of the operation.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 149

Performance Monitoring
WARNING The command is not available for the virtual NE objects and the NE objects of ALplus Node or
ALCplus2 Node type (for the equipment of a nodal system, the command is present in the ALplus nodal
window/ALCplus2 nodal window).
The Performance Monitoring command displays the results of the PM measures of the equipment.
Operations
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour record)
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute record)
See also
Performance Monitoring management
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour record)

1. Select the NE.

If the type of selected NE does not support the PM measures, a warning message will be displayed.
2. Select Performance > Performance Monitoring or press .

The Graphic Performance Monitoring window requires the period of time for which you wish to verify
the results of the PM measures.
In the boxes:
Date Reference, the start date (day/month/year) is displayed (default: current day).
Day Previous, the number of days before the set date, constituting the duration of the period
(default: 30 days) is displayed.
3. Set the Date Reference and Day previous boxes to the wished values.
It is possible to set a value within 10 and 180 days.
Remember that it is possible to display at most the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting
from the current day). The results of the PM measures are stored in the system database (Performance
Monitoring table). They are available for a period of 6 months, then they are automatically removed.
4. Set the Auto Select box. In detail:

Activate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter of a measure point,
even the other control parameters are automatically selected, compatible with the measure unit
of the selected item (see step 7).
Deactivate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter
is selected.
5. Press OK.
6. In the Graphic Performance Monitoring window select TPC menu.

All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - yellow wordings) and the measure points
(where the control parameters are really measured) (TP - Termination Point - orange wording) available
for the selected equipment are selected.
The control parameters are contained in the pop-up menu that opens on the side of the measure point.
Generally, more control parameters refer to the same TP.
7. Select the control parameters, for which you wish to display the results of the PM measures.
All the control parameters of a TP cannot be displayed in the same graphic. They have been subdivided
according to the measure unit used for their count: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window displays the results of the selected control parameters.
150 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour from orange to red. The
selected control parameter is characterized by a led on its left side.
When a control parameter is selected, it is possible to select all the parameters that have the same
measure unit present in the same TP or in any of the other TPs.
The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter are not avail-
able (wording of grey colour).
In order to display the results of the parameters with measure unit different from the currently selected
one, it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command) and,
then, select the new parameters.
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute record)

1. Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring window (see Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE
(24 hour record)).
2. Double click on the record relevant to the day whose primary records you wish to display.
Another Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens.
In this window, it is possible to verify the results of the PM measures of all the primary records of the
selected day.
3. To return to the display of the primary records, double click in any point of the window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 151

Graphic Performance Monitoring window
This window displays, in graphic format, the performance measures of the equipment.
Information bar
Type and logic address of the equipment.
Start date and End date.
Type of displayed record (Daily, Primary).
Type of graph (Histogram, Chart, Chart Comp).
Menu bar
File > Exit. It closes the window.
Option > Deselect all TPC. It deselects all the selected control parameters.
Option > Thresholds. It displays in the graph a broken line that represents the threshold value
of each selected control parameter. Each broken line has the colour representing the parameter
in the graph.
Option > Type image. It changes the type of graph. In detail:

Histogram, graph with histograms.
Chart, line graph.
Chart Comp., compressed line graph.
TPC. List of the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - wordings in yellow) and of
the measure points (TP - Termination Point - wordings in orange) available for the selected type
of equipment.
Help > Index. It opens the on-line manual.
Graph area
The window displays the records contained in the set time period. They are displayed from the
oldest to the newest one. Use the scroll-bar to move among the records.
Each control parameter, within the record column, is identified by a colour. The colour legend is
displayed in the Legend and measure.... area.
Record
(3) Every record is identified by the relevant date (day/month/year). The result of all the active meas-
ures is indicated by a coloured wording under the date of the record. In detail:
Not available. The record is not available, as in the observation period under examination
no measure was active.
No error (green). The record has been completely acquired and the measures are not er-
rored.
Above Thrs (red). The record has been completely acquired and at least a control param-
eter has exceeded the relevant threshold value.
Besides the record, in this case, the NE sends an alarm of exceeding of the daily record
that is stored in the alarm history.
Below Thrs (yellow). The record has been completely acquired and the measured control
parameters have not exceeded their threshold value.
Lost (black). The record is not arrived to the main controller of the NE for example be-
cause the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before sending
the record itself or due to generic hardware/software troubles.
Incompl (yellow). The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding
observation period.
The record of measure start is always in this status. The daily record assumes this status
also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status.
The daily record of the current date will be always incomplete as the daily records are
acquired at 23.59 of each day.
Restarted (black). The record was lost due to a reset of the NE.
152 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

When the NE has a software restart and verifies that, for a given measure point, the
measure is active, all the records of that measure point will result in this status.
Parameters
Value. Value of the control parameter. The colour of the number representing the value indi-
cates the exceeding of the threshold:
Red. Value greater than the set threshold value.
Yellow. Value lower than the set threshold value.
White. Threshold value not set (threshold inactive).
The dash (-) indicates that the value is not available.
Col. Colour that represents the parameter within the graph.
State Rec. Status of the record relevant to the control parameter. For the description of the
different statuses, see note Record.
Threshold. Threshold level over which the relevant alarm is activated. The wording Disable in-
dicates that the threshold is inactive.
Description. Name of the measure point (TP) and relevant to the control parameter.
The control parameters changes according to the TP. Their description is reported in the
equipment user Manual relevant to the type of NE which the measure is referred to.
The window displays contemporarily all the records relevant to the period set at the begin-
ning of the procedure.
RLT (dbm). Power threshold level. The field is displayed and it is meaningful only for power
control parameters (e.g. RLTS, RLTM, etc.).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 153

Old Performance Monitoring
WARNING Command not available for virtual NE objects and NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node
type.
The Old Performance Monitoring command displays the results of the PM measures of the equipment,
saved and restored from tape or disk.
In the Old Performance Monitoring table are stored the results of the PM measures saved (see Performance
Monitoring Backup) and restored (see Performance Monitoring Restore) from tape or disk.
Operations
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour records - Old PM)
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute records - Old PM)
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour records - Old PM)

1. Select the NE.

If the type of selected NE does not support PM measures, a warning message will be displayed.
2. Select Performance > Old Performance Monitoring.

The Graphic Performance Monitoring window requires the time period, for which you wish to verify the
results of the PM measures.
In the boxes:
Date Reference, the date (day/month/year) of period start (default: current day) is displayed.
Day Previous, the number of days, previous to the set date, that constitute the period duration
is displayed (default: 30 days).
Remember that it is possible to display, at most, the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting
from the current day).

Activate the box if you wish, on the selection of a control parameter of a measure point, also
the other control parameters, compatible with the measure unit of the selected item (see step
7) are automatically selected.
Deactivate the box if you wish that, on the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter
is selected.
5. Press OK.
If, at the opening of the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window, the table is empty, it is nec-
essary to restore from the backup file saved before the list of the wished measures (see Performance
Monitoring Restore).
They will remain available in the Old Performance Monitoring table and in the Graphic Performance
Monitoring - OLD window, until a different list of measures is not restored.
6. Select TPC menu.

All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - wordings in yellow) and the measure points
(TP - Termination Point - wordings in orange) available for the selected equipment are listed.
7. Select the control parameters for which you wish the display the results of the PM measures.
154 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

In the same graph not all the control parameters of a TP can be displayed. They have been subdivided
according to the measure unit used for their counting: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window displays the results of the selected control param-
eters.
The items of the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window and their description are the same
shown in Graphic Performance Monitoring window.
When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour from orange to red. The
selected control parameter is characterized by a led on its left.
measure unit present in the same TP or in any of the other TP.
The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter will not be
available (wording in grey colour).
In order to display the results of parameter with measure unit different from the currently selected one,
it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command) and,
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute records - Old PM)

1. Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window (see Verify the results of the PM measures of
a NE (24 hour records - Old PM)).
2. Double click on the record relevant to the day for which you wish to display the primary records.
In the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window, it is possible to verify the results of the PM meas-
ures of all the primary records of the selected day.
The items of the window and their description are the same shown in Graphic Performance Monitoring
window, the only difference is that, instead of the daily records, each column will represent a primary
record (15 minutes).
3. In order to return to the display the primary records, double click on any point of the window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 155

View/Modify P.M. Status
User profile | Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
WARNING Command not available for the virtual NE objects.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the operations will be executed on all the pieces
of node equipment.
The View/Modify P.M. Status command displays the status and allows activating/deactivating the PM
measures of one or more pieces of equipment of the same type contemporarily.
Operations
Verify the operating status of the PM measure points for more NEs of the same type
Activate the PM measures for NEs of the same type
Deactivate the PM measures for NEs of the same type
Activate/deactivate a PM measure point for one piece of equipment
Verify/modify the activation thresholds of PM alarms for one piece of equipment
GUI
View/Modify P.M. Status window
Attributes Manager window
Verify the operating status of the PM measure points for more NEs of the same type

1. Select the real NEs of the same type.
2. Select Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status.

The View/Modify P.M. Status window displays the operating status of the measure points.
If more NE objects of different type are selected, the PM measures relevant to the first type of selected
NE are displayed. For example, if selected in order, one NE of SDH type, one NE of FAM type and one
NE of PDH type, on the selection of the command, the PM measures that characterize the SDH equip-
ment are displayed.
Activate the PM measures for NEs of the same type

WARNING The maximum number of PSM termination point instances which can be enabled at the same
time per port is 32.
3. In the View/Modify P.M. Status window, to activate:

All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select Action > Start
> All.
The measures relevant to all the measure points in the Termination Point area select Action >
Start > Filtered.
The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select Ac-
tion > Start > Selected.
In the Message area, the result of the operation is displayed.
156 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Deactivate the PM measures for NEs of the same type

3. In the View/Modify P.M. Status window, to deactivate:

All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select Action > Stop
> All.
The measures relevant to all the measure points in the Termination Point area, select Action >
Stop > Filtered.
tion > Stop > Selected.
In the area Message, the result of the operation is displayed.
Activate/deactivate a PM measure point for one piece of equipment

WARNING This functionality is available only for equipment managed via WebLCT (AGS10, ALCplus2e,
ALFOplus80HD, AGS20 and following).
1. Select a real NE.

The View/Modify P.M. Status window displays the status of the measure points.
3. Select Action > Attributes Manager.

The command is displayed only if a NE has been selected in the map.
The Attributes Manager window allows managing the PM measure points for the selected equipment.
The groups of measure points for the selected equipment are reported in the left column of the window.
4. Select the group of PM measure points containing the specific measure point you wish to activate/de-
activate (to do this, click on the group name or on the symbol +).
The group expands and displays the single measure points belonging to it. The symbol next to the group
name becomes -.
5. Select the wished PM measure point.

In the right area of the window, the field Instance Selection displays the name of the selected measure
point and the box Start Stop displays the activation status of the measure point:
Start. The selected measure point is active.
Stop. The selected measure point is deactivated.
6. To activate the measure point, select the box Start Stop and then the value Start.
To deactivate the measure point, select the box Start Stop and then the value Stop.
The selected value becomes red to signal that the setting has not been communicated to the equipment
yet.
7. Press Send Set to execute the configuration.

The set value becomes black again.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 157

Verify/modify the activation thresholds of PM alarms for one piece of equipment

WARNING This functionality is available only for equipment managed via WebLCT (AGS10, ALCplus2e,
ALFOplus80HD, AGS20 and following).
1. Select a real NE.

3. Select Action > Attributes manager.
The command is available only if a NE has been selected in the map.
The Attributes Manager window allows managing the PM measure points for the selected equipment.
The groups of PM measure points available for the selected equipment are reported in the left column
of the window.
4. Select the group of PM measure points containing the specific measure point you wish to activate/de-
activate (to do this click on the name of the group or on the symbol +).
The group expands and displays the single measure points belonging to it. The symbol next to the name
becomes -.
5. Select the wished PM measure point.
In the right area of the window, the field Instance Selection displays the name of the selected measure
point and the cursors ... Threshold points out the alarm thresholds for every measure parameters.
6. To change the value of a threshold, use the arrow keys to increase or decrease the value or drag and
drop the cursor on the wished value. The threshold value becomes red (not communicated to the equip-
ment yet).
7. To make the change effective, press Send Set.
158 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

View/Modify P.M. Status window
This window allows activating/deactivating the measure of the equipment performances.
Area View
This area allows filtering the measure points displayed in the Termination Point area. Area:
Equipment. List of names of the equipment selected in the map before opening the win-
dow. Select:
All Equipment, to display in the Termination Point area the measure points rele-
vant to all the equipment.
Selected Equipment, to display in the Termination Point area the measure points
relevant only to the equipment selected in this area. The option is available only
after having selected at least one equipment.
Termination Point Class. Types of measures relevant to the type of equipment selected
in the map. Select the measures you wish to display in the Termination Point area.
The option push-button All TP Class displays all the TP Classes at the same time.
The option push-button Selected TP Class displays only the selected TP Classes.
Termination Point Instances. Status of the measure point. Activate the box:
Running Counters to display the active measure point in Termination Point area.
Not Running Counters to display the inactive measure point in Termination Point
area.
Activate both the boxes at the same time to display all the measure points independently
from their activation status.
Termination Point area

Logical Addr. Logical address of the equipment.
TP Class. Name of the type of measure.
TP Instance. Name of the measure point.
Status. Status of the measure: active (wording: Running), inactive (wording Not running).
Menu bar
Action > Start. It activates the PM measures.
Action > Stop. It deactivates the PM measures.
Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window.
Action > Attributes manager. It opens the Attributes Manager window to activate/deactivate
the reading of PM and to configure the intervention thresholds of the relevant alarms for a spe-
cific piece of equipment. This functionality is available only for equipment managed via WEB LCT
(AGS10, ALCplus2e, AGS20 and following).
Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.
Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.
Area Messages
It displays the result of the operations executed by the user.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 159

Attributes Manager window
This window allows managing the points of PM measures for the selected equipment.
Menu bar
File > Close. Closes the window.
Area Set of PM measure points

This area displays with the symbol of a:
blue diamond: the physical address of the equipment selected in the map
blue square: the group of PM measure points. Next to every group, a sign + is displayed
if the group is compressed (press the symbol + to expand it) or a sign - if the group is
expanded (press the symbol - to compress it). The expansion of a group displays the sin-
gle PM measure points (blue circles) belonging to the group itself, the compression of a
group hides them.
The selection of a PM measure point displays, in the right area, the activation status (note 3)
and the current alarm thresholds of the measure point itself (note 4).
Available PM measure points change depending on the type of considered equipment.
Measure point
Instance Selection. Measure point currently selected.
Start Stop. Activation status of the selected PM measure point.
Start. The selected measure point is activated.
Stop. The selected measure point is deactivated.
...Threshold. Sliders indicating the alarm threshold for every control parameter. If the number
is red, it means that the threshold value has been changed, but not communicated to the equip-
ment yet (press Send Set to transmit it).
Push-buttons
Send Set. Communicates the change of the parameters to the equipment.
Refresh. Updates the data displayed in the window.
160 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

CONFIGURATION
Equipment Info. It displays the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment.
Software Inventory. It displays the software version and the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is
present) of the equipment in the open map.
OAM Status. It manages the OAM Domain/Level configuration for a multiple selection of NEs.
E1 Browser. It manages the 2 Mbit/s tributaries of equipment in the open map.
Equipment Port Configuration. It displays the settings of the communication ports of the equipment in
the open map.
NE PPP Interfaces. It displays the settings relevant to the PPP communication ports of the equipment.
NE Routing Table. It displays the Routing Table and the Default Gateway address of the equipment.
Hw Inventory. It displays the hardware version of equipment in the open map.
NE Backup/Restore. It displays the backup files of equipment in the open map.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 161

Equipment Info
The Equipment Info command displays the characteristics and the operating status of the equipment.
Operations
Verify the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment
Verify the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment

2. Select Configuration > Equipment Info or press the right mouse button and select Equipment In-
formation.
The Equipment Information window displays the following information.
Physical Address. Physical address of the NE.
Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
Type. Type of NE.
Equipment status. Status of the connection between the NE and the supervision system.
Alarm status. Functional status (alarms) of the NE.
The severity level of the NE alarms is displayed. In case of more alarms with different severity,
the highest severity will be displayed.
LCT Presence. Status of the connection between the local program and the NE. Value:
Absent. The LCT user is not connected to the equipment.
LCT Config. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Configuration modality.
LCT Monitor. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Monitoring modality.
Alarm history. Number of alarms relevant to the NE, stored in the alarm history. Box:
Total. Total number of alarms.
Ack. Number of acknowledged alarms.
Not Ack. Number of not acknowledged alarms.
Current alarms. Number of alarms currently on NE.
3. Press Refresh to update the data displayed in the window or Close to close the window.
If a NE object of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type is selected, the displayed information is referred
in part to the node (Physical Address, Logical Address and Type) and in part to the sum of the infor-
mation of the equipment belonging to the node (Equipment status, Alarm status, LCT Presence, Alarm
history and Current alarms).
Selecting more NE symbols and choosing this command, more Equipment Information windows open, one
for every selected NE.
162 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Software Inventory
The Software Inventory command displays the software version and the units list (with controller or FP-
GA) of the equipment (except FAMxc, ELFO and SDH N+1) in the open map.
Operations
Verify the software version of equipment in the map
Verify the units list of equipment in the map
Save/print the list of the equipment/units
Open the equipment window
Verify the configuration/functional status of the equipment
Switch the operation of the equipment controller memory benches
Require the update of the data to the equipment controller
Filter/sort the list of the equipment/units
Export the inventory data in csv format
GUI
NE Software Inventory window
Verify the software version of equipment in the map

1. Select Configuration > Software Inventory.

2. In the NE Software Inventory window, select NE Software Inventory. The information in the window
refers to the moment when the command is selected or the refresh is executed.
The window displays the list of the NEs and the software detail.
Verify the units list of equipment in the map

2. In the NE Software Inventory window, select the Unit Software Inventory option.
The window displays the list of the units.
Save/print the list of the equipment/units


The NE Software Inventory window opens.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 163

2. Select:
NE Software Inventory, to display the list of the equipment.
Unit Software Inventory, to display the list of the units.
3. To print or save to a file:

All the records stored in the database, select File > Print/Save > All items.
The displayed records, select File > Print/Save > Filtered Items. If the filters are not active,
the displayed records correspond to the record stored in the database.
A group of records, select the records and then File > Print/Save > Selected Items.
4. In the Output Device Selection window:

To print the data:
a. Select the Output To Printer option.
In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer).
If you want to print to another peripheral device, type the name of the wished printer in the box.
b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option.
c. Press OK.
The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it.
To save the data to a file:
a. Select the Output To File option.
b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be
saved.
Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

2. In the NE Software Inventory window, press the NE Software Inventory option.
3. Select the equipment.
4. Select Action > Open Equipment.

The equipment interface opens.
Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more equipment windows at the same time.
It is possible that, on the selection of the command, a message is displayed.
The description of the equipment window and of the messages that can be displayed at its opening are
reported in the specific equipment user manual.
The equipment window can be opened also by a double click on the record of the equipment.

2. In the NE Software Inventory window, select the NE Software Inventory option.
164 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

4. Select Action > Equipment Info.
The Equipment Information window opens.
Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more windows at the same time.


Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more windows at the same time.
4. Select Action > Software Download.

The Software Download window opens.
Switch the operation of the equipment controller memory benches

WARNING It is not possible to switch the memory benches when the software update is in progress and
when the software is not on the bench.
The operation causes an automatic disconnection and reconnection of the NE. If the reconnection fails, the
NE assumes the unreachable status and the reconnection command will be sent, at regular intervals, by
the supervision system.

4. Select Action > Bench Switch and confirm.
At the end, a message displays the result of the operation. If the operation was successful, the bench
in running status is forced to loaded status and vice versa.
Require the update of the data to the equipment controller

3. Select the wished equipment in connected status.
4. Select Action > Read Data From NE.

At the end a message displays the result of the operation.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 165

Filter/sort the list of the equipment/units

2. In the NE Software Inventory window, select:

NE Software Inventory, to display and filter the list of the equipment.
Unit Software Inventory, to display and filter the list of the unit.
3. Select View > Set Filter.

In the View Filter window, select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.
The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options:
Match Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.
To set the criterion, type the address of the NE in the text field.
It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character (*). For example, typing in the box the let-
ter:
p, the NE with logic address p will be displayed in the window.
p*, the NEs whose logic address start with p will be displayed.
p*o, the NEs whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the win-
dow.
Match equipment type. Type of equipment.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment.
Match IP Address. IP address of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the wished IP Address in the text fields. It is possible to use the wild-
card asterisk character (*).
Match connection status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5LX.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status.
Match Bench Release. Version and/or usage status of the software on the equipment memory
benches.
To set as criterion the version of the software, select the wished release from the list (the list
displays the releases of the software on the equipment indicated in the NE Software Inventory
window). The selected item is displayed in the text field.
To set as criterion the usage status of the software, activate the option:
Not Loaded, to display the NEs whose memory benches have not the software loaded.
This option is not available if the software release is selected.
Loaded, to display the NEs whose software version corresponds to that set in the box,
whose software is in Loaded status (software is on the memory bench, but is not used).
Running, to display the NEs whose software version corresponds to that set in the box,
whose software is in Running status (software is on the memory bench and is used).
The filter is available only when the NE Software Inventory option is active in the NE Software Inventory
window.
Match Object. Unit and/or element of the unit.
To set the criterion:
Select the unit in the Unit Type list.
It is possible to select only one unit or all the units selecting All Units.
Select the element (controller, programmable logic, etc.) in the Element Type list.
It is possible to set only one element or all the elements of the unit set in the Unit Type
box, selecting All Elements.
The filter is available only when the Unit Software Inventory option in the NE Software Inventory
window is active.
Match Actual Release. Version of the software of one element (controller, programmable logic,
etc.).
To set the criteria, select from the list the wished release (the list displays the releases of the
software on the equipment indicated in the NE Software Inventory window). The selected item
is displayed in the box.
166 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The filter is available only when the Unit Software Inventory option in the NE Software Inventory
window is active.
The NE Software Inventory window displays only the records matching the active criteria.
Each time the list is filtered, both the displayed and the hidden records are considered.
In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the com-
plete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) push-buttons.
Closing the NE Software Inventory window automatically removes the possible active filters.
Export the inventory data in csv format
System access | ReadOnly, Read-Write

2. In NE Software Inventory window, select Export CSV > Inventory Export CSV.
3. Select the path and the name of the file where the data relevant to the selected software inventory
must be exported in csv.
4. Press Ok.
All the data displayed in the window will be exported to file in csv format.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 167

NE Software Inventory window
The window allows managing the parameters of the software inventory relevant to the equipment in the
open map. The list displays all the equipment in the open map, except for FAMxc, ELFO and SDH N+1.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system
is displayed. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
<node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
<node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).
Parameters
Type. Type of equipment.
Ip Address. IP address of the equipment.
Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and NMS5LX.
Release Bench 1 (only with option NE Software Inventory selected). File name and version
of the software on the memory bench 1.
Bench 1 Status (only with option NE Software Inventory selected). Operating status of the
memory bench 1:
Running. The software of the considered memory bench is running.
Loaded. The software is present on the bench, but is not currently running (standby).
Not loaded. The software is not present on the memory bench.
Downloading. The software update of the memory bench is running.
Release Bench 2 (only with NE Software Inventory selected). File name and version of the
software on the memory bench 2.
Bench 2 Status (only with NE Software Inventory selected). Operating status of the memory
bench 2. The detail of the wordings is the same indicated by the Bench 1 Status parameter.
Unit (only with option Unit Software Inventory selected). Name of the unit.
Element (only with option Unit Software Inventory selected). Name of the unit element,
where the software is loaded: controller, programmable logic, etc.
Actual Release (only with option Unit Software Inventory selected). Name of the file and
software version on the element.
Status bar
xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If they are not
active filters, the number of displayed records corresponds to the total number of records.
View. Activation of one or more filters.
Text in yellow. Date and the time when the window has been opened or refreshed.
Push-buttons
NE Software Inventory. It displays the list of NEs and the detail of the equipment software.
Unit Software Inventory. It displays the list of the units.
Menu bar
File > Print/Save. It prints/saves the information to file.
Action > Open Equipment. It opens the equipment interface.
Action > Equipment Info. It displays the configuration/operation status of the equipment.
Action > Software Download. It updates the software of a piece of equipment.
Action > Read Data From NE. It sends a request for the information update to the controller
of the selected NE.
Action > Bench Switch. It switches the memory benches of the controller of the selected NE.
View > Set Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria.
168 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

OAM Status
WARNING Command available only for the equipment supporting OAM functionality.
The OAM Status command allows the configuration of OAM-FM Domain/Level for a multiple selection of
NEs.
Operations
Verify the characteristics of OAM-FM Domain
Define an OAM-FM Domain
Remove the OAM-FM Domain
WARNING Every equipment manages only a single OAM-FM Domain. The name or the level of
an OAM-FM Domain associated to one or more pieces of equipment cannot be changed. In order
to change one of the two parameters, it is necessary to remove the current Domain and to define
a new one.
GUI
OAM Manager window
See also
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (info)
Verify the characteristics of OAM-FM Domain

1. In the open map, select the equipment whose characteristics of OAM-FM Domain you wish to verify.
2. Select Configuration > OAM Status.
The OAM Manager window displays the selected equipment in the box Equipment.
Define an OAM-FM Domain

WARNING An OAM-FM Domain can be associated only to equipment without any Domain associated.
1. In the open map, select the equipment which you wish to define an OAM-FM Domain for.
3. In the OAM Manager window, select the rows relevant to the equipment in the box Equipment or the
option push-button All Equipment (if the domain must be assigned to all the pieces of equipment).
4. If the field Domain is empty, type the name of the Domain you wish to associate to the equipment (al-
phanumerical string with minimum length of 1 character and maximum length of 45 characters).
5. Select, in the combo-box Level, the level of the Domain you wish to associate to the equipment (value
0: level with lowest priority, 7: level with highest priority).
6. Press:
Create Filtered to associate the OAM-FM Domain with the above mentioned characteristics to the
equipment in the equipment display area.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 169

Create Selected to associate the OAM-FM Domain with the above mentioned characteristics to the
equipment selected in the equipment display area.
Remove the OAM-FM Domain

WARNING It is not possible to remove an OAM-FM Domain containing at least one MA.
1. In the open map, select the equipment which you wish to remove an OAM-FM Domain for.
3. In the OAM Manager window, select the rows relevant to the equipment in the box Equipment or Press
All Equipment (if you wish to remove the domain from all the pieces of equipment).
4. Press Delete Selected.
170 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

OAM Manager window
This window allows managing the OAM domain for the equipment selected in the map.
Menu bar
File > Close. Closes the OAM Manager window.
Action > Refresh info... Updates the data displayed in the window.
Help > On Usage. Opens the user manual relevant to system NMS5LX.
Help > About Application. Information relevant to NMS5LX version.
View area
It allows selecting which equipment will be listed in the equipment display area. The Equipment
box displays the name of considered equipment. Selecting the option push-button:
All Equipment, the equipment display area shows the considered equipment.
Selected Equipment, the equipment display area shows the equipment selected in the
Equipment box. If no equipment is selected in area Equipment, this push-button is not
available (greyed out).
Status Filter area

It allows filtering the display of the equipment depending on their association to an OAM-FM Do-
main. In detail, if the operator selects the check-box:
Absent, the equipment display area shows the considered equipment only if this is not
associated to any OAM-FM Domain.
Present, the equipment display area shows the considered equipment only if this is as-
sociated to an OAM-FM Domain.
Domain/Level Setting area

It allows associating an OAM-FM Domain to the equipment selected/displayed in the equipment
display area. In detail, the parameter:
Domain, is used to enter the name of OAM-FM Domain which must be associated.
Level, is used to select the level (0-7) to assign to the OAM-FM Domain (value 0: level
with lowest priority, 7: level with highest priority).
Push-buttons
Create Filtered. Associates the OAM-FM Domain with the above mentioned characteristics to
the equipment in the equipment display area.
Create Selected. Associates the OAM-FM Domain with the above mentioned characteristics to
the equipment selected in the equipment display area.
Delete Filtered. Removes the OAM-FM Domain from the equipment in the equipment display
area.
Delete Selected. Removes the OAM-FM Domain from the equipment selected in the equipment
display area.
Equipment display area

Logical Addr. logical address (name) of the equipment.
Domain. OAM-FM Domain which the equipment is associated to. The symbol - means that the
equipment is not associated to any OAM-FM Domain.
Level. level of the OAM-FM Domain. The symbol - means that equipment is not associated to
any OAM-FM Domain.
Status. Status of association of the equipment to a given OAM-FM Domain. The wording:
Absent, indicates that equipment is not associated to any OAM-FM Domain.
Present, indicates that equipment is associated to an OAM-FM Domain.
Area Message
It displays the result of the operations.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 171

OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (info)
OAM Ethernet functionality

OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented for equipment managed by NMS5LX
Elementi OAM-FM
OAM-FM Domain
MA (Maintenance Association)
MEP (Maintenance End Point)
MIP (Maintenance Intermediate Point)
Remote MEPs
CCM (Continuity Check Message)
LBM (LoopBack Message)
LTM (Link Trace Message)
Example of configuration of an OAM-FM maintenance Domain
OAM Ethernet functionality
OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) Ethernet functionality represents the set of processes,
activities, rules, etc. which allow managing the operation, the monitoring and the fixing of troubles in the
Ethernet networks.
These services are defined by the following reference specifications, which you must refer to for the de-
tailed description of OAM Ethernet functionality:
Recommendation ITU-T Y.1731 - OAM Functions and Mechanisms for Ethernet based Networks.
Standard IEEE 802.1ag - IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Virtual
Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault Management.
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented for equipment managed by NMS5LX
Among the above mentioned specifications, Siae equipment implements the functionality relevant to Con-
nectivity Fault Management (CFM).
This functionality has the purpose to monitor, in a Layer-2 Ethernet network, the end to end availability of
a service (implemented by a VLAN) and to monitor, in case of out-of-service, tools (LoopBack and Link
Trace) helping the operator in the analysis of the troubles.
By means of NMS5LX application, it is possible:
To define the network segment to monitor:

To define the OAM-FM Domain of maintenance (name and level).
To define, for each VLAN (service) configured on the equipment, the maintenance points necessary
to diagnostic the connection troubles within a maintenance Domain:
To define, for every service (VLAN), a Maintenance Association (MA) to monitor.
To define the end points to monitor the maintenance area (MEP).
To define the intermediate monitoring points of the maintenance area (MIP).
To manage, for every local MEP, the relevant table of Remote MEPs (RMep table).
To manage the Continuity Check messages (CCM) which allow end-to-end monitoring of a service
instance (VLAN) indicating any interruption.
To manage the LoopBack messages (LBM) which, after the detection of a fault, allow isolating the
point where the fault occurred.
To manage the Link Trace messages (LTM) which allow tracing the path followed by an OAM-FM
packet between two different MEPs within the same VLAN.
172 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

OAM-FM Domain
The term OAM-FM Domain defines a network or a part of a network owned and managed by a single entity
(operator) and where the connection troubles can be managed.
The OAM-FM Domain is characterized by a name and a layer.
The name identifies the Domain. The layer is used to define the hierarchical relationship among domains.
Greatest is the Domain, highest will be the layer. In fact, the layer corresponds to a value from 0 to 7,
where 0 represents the lowest layer (lowest priority) and 7 the highest layer (higher priority).
All the other entities defined by OAM refer to the Domain: MA/MIP and MEP.
Every equipment manages a single OAM-FM Domain.
The OAM-FM Domain must be defined in any equipment you wish to belong to the same OAM-FM mainte-
nance segment.
Once an OAM-FM Domain has been defined, its name or layer cannot be changed. To do this, the Domain
must be removed and a new one must be created with the new values.
An OAM-FM Domain cannot be removed if at least one VLAN exists, which one MA has been defined for.
This Domain is transparent as regards the OAM-FM messages with higher priority (messages to/from the
higher domains), while stops all the messages with lower priority (messages to/from lower domains).
MA
The term MA (Maintenance Association) identifies the service (VLAN) you wish to monitor.
A Maintenance Association is associated to a user-defined VLAN. Creating a MA means enabling the control
of the specified VLAN.
Within a specific OAM-FM Domain, there are as many MAs as the VLANs the user wishes to monitor.
The equipment manages one MA per single VLAN.
On the equipment the definition of a MA can be executed:

By the user through a specific command or
Automatically by the system, after that the user has defined a MEP.
For the description of the above mentioned operations, refer to the user manual of single equipment.
The definition of a MA in a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic definition
of a MIP per every single port of the Switch which the specific VLAN is enabled for.
Once a MA has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, the MA must be removed from the
VLAN and a new MA must be created with the new values.
The removal of a MA involves even the automatic removal of the MEP (if present) from the VLAN.
MEP
The term MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines the entity, associated to a specific service instance (VLAN),
representing the end point of a MA.
Fig.15 shows an example.
MEP can generate and terminate OAM-FM messages regarding the fault management and the performance
monitoring.
MEP is the entity intended for the control of the service (VLAN) as, within the OAM-FM maintenance seg-
ment, the set of MEPs created in the end points of a VLAN allows controlling the correct end to end oper-
ation of the VLANs.
The control is achieved by means of the periodic transmission, by each MEP, of the CCM messages and of
the control of the reception of the same messages by the Remote MEPs.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 173

The equipment manages a single MEP per each MA (VLAN) and a maximum of 32 MEPs (32 MA/VLAN).
MEP must be defined only in the equipment acting as end points of the same VLAN (see equipment user
manual).
The definition of a MEP for a VLAN involves even the automatic definition of the MA, if not already done.
The definition of a MEP requires the setting of:
A numeric identifier, which must be univocal within the network for the specific VLAN.
The name of the relevant MA (only if not already defined).
The time interval used for the transmission of the continuity check messages (CCM).
Once MEP has been created, the transmission of the CCM messages is disabled. They must be en-
abled by the user (see equipment user manual).
The port of the Ethernet Switch, where you wish to map the MEP, and the direction to which you
wish to send CCMs. Possible directions:
Direction UP. CCM messages are sent as they were in input from the considered port to the
other ports of the Switch interested by the considered VLAN.
Direction DOWN. CCM messages are sent in output from the selected port.
Once a MEP has been defined, its configuration cannot be changed. To do this, remove the MEP from the
VLAN and create a new one with the new configuration.
The removal of a MEP involves event the automatic removal of the relevant MA from the VLAN.
The equipment, for every single MEP, manages the following alarms:
MEP Fail - OAM-FM MA: <MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Fail Alarm
The alarm becomes active when at least one of the remote MEPs in the RMep table of the specific
local MEP is in status Start or Failed.
MEP Configuration Mismatch - OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Config. Mis-
match Alarm.
The alarm becomes active when the local MEP receives at least one CCM message, containing con-
figuration data different from those set for the local MEP itself, from one of the remote MEPs.
With configuration data we mean: Domain name, MA name, CCM interval.
When this alarm is active, the remote MEP, which has raised the alarm, cannot be enabled in the
RMep table.
Fig.15 OAM-FM functionality - Maintenance points
Domain: Test
A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4

MEP 10 MEP 11
Switch Switch MIP Switch Switch
1 1 1 1
2 VLAN Id:20 2 2 2
A MA: Vlan 20 A A A
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
A.5 A.6 A.7

MEP 12
Switch MIP Switch Switch
1 1 1
2 2 2
A A A
3 3 3
4 4 4
174 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

MIP
The term MIP (Maintenance Intermediate Point) defines a passive entity, associated to a specific service
instance (VLAN).
MIPs are defined on transit equipment for the monitored VLAN, intermediate among the MEPs.
MIP can reply to the LoopBack messages (LBM), sent in unicast by a MEP (MAC Address), and to the Link
Trace messages (LTM), sent by a MEP, but it cannot generate requests of LoopBack and Link Trace towards
other MIP or MEP.
MIP is defined by the operator in equipment which acts as intermediate points of the same VLAN and the
same OAM-FM maintenance segment.
The definition of a MIP takes place after the definition of the MA.
The definition of a MA, within a VLAN for which a MEP is not defined, corresponds to the automatic definition
of a MIP for every single port of the Switch for which the specific VLAN is enabled.
Once a MA/MIP has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, remove the MA/MIP from the
VLAN and create a new one with the new name.
Remote MEPs
The term Remote MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines entities which represent the other end points (re-
mote points) of a VLAN with respect to the local MEP.
The recording of remote MEPs in the RMep table consists of two parts: the entry in the table and the ena-
bling of the remote MEP (operation necessary so that the remote MEPs are acknowledged as valid end
points by the local MEP).
Example 1
With reference to Fig.15, if you are connected by the supervision system to the equipment A.1,
the local MEP will be MEP 10 while the remote MEPs will be MEP 11 and MEP 12.
Otherwise, if you are connected by the supervision system to the equipment A.4, the local MEP
will be MEP 11 while the remote MEPs will be MEP 10 and MEP 12.
A table of the remote MEPs (RMep table) is associated to every local MEP (then to every MA/
VLAN).
This table records the remote MEPs from which the local MEP is waiting for a CCM message.
If the CCM message does not arrive within a timeout period equal to 2,5 CCM interval set for
the local MEP, the remote MEP is set to status Failed and the relevant alarm is activated (OAM-
FM MA:... MEP Id:... Fail Alarm).
Example 2
With reference to Fig.15, if you are connected by the supervision system to the equipment A.1,
MEP 11 and MEP 12 will be recorded in the RMep table (relevant to MEP 10).
The transmission of CCM messages is enabled at intervals of 10 sec between a transmission and
the next one.
If, after 25 sec. (2,5 times the CCM interval), MEP 10 does not receive a CCM message, for ex-
ample from MEP 11, in the RMep table MEP 11 will be set to status Failed and the alarm OAM-
FM MA: Vlan 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm will be activated, indicating that a Remote Mep in Failed
is present in the RMep table of the local MEP 10.
The remote MEP remains in status Failed until the local MEP receives a valid CCM message from
the remote MEP or the user removes the remote MEP from the table.
Entry in table and enabling

The entry of MEP in the table takes place:
AUTOMATICALLY, after the reception of the first CCM sent by a remote MEP.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 175

For these remote MEPs, the table displays the identifier of the remote MEP and the MAC
Address of the equipment which the remote MEP belongs to.
The enabling for this type of remote MEPs must be executed manually by the operator
(see Fig.16).
MANUALLY, after a command of the operator, who adds the remote MEP.
For these remote MEPs, the table displays the identifier of the remote MEP (provided by
the operator) while the MAC Address is set to zero.
The enabling for this type of MEP takes place automatically when the equipment receives
the first CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP.
When the first CCM is received, the field MAC Address gets the value of the MAC Address
of the remote equipment, source of CCM.
Status
The status of a remote MEP is displayed in the table by the parameter MEP State and can be:
Idle. Initial status of the remote MEP after its manual insertion in the table.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Idle are indicated in
Fig.16.
Start. Initial status of the remote MEP after its automatic insertion in the table or status
assumed by remote MEP after it has been disabled.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Start and the condi-
tions which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one change
depending on the type of insertion of the MEP in the RMep table (automatic or manual)
as depicted in Fig.16.
Conn. Status the remote MEP reaches from the status Start after an enabling command
or at the reception of the first CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP, if previously
recorded by the operator (see Fig.16).
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Conn and the condi-
tions which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are de-
picted in Fig.16.
Failed. Status the remote MEP reaches when the local MEP does not receive (for a period
of 2,5 times the CCM interval) a CCM message from the specific remote MEP, as de-
scribed at the beginning of the chapter.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Failed and the condi-
tions which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are de-
picted in Fig.16.
After the (automatic or manual) insertion of a remote MEP in the table, it can be removed only
manually by the operator.
In NMS5LX, the RMep table of a local MEP can be displayed only after the local MEP has been
associated to a VLAN.
176 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Fig.16 OAM-FM - Management of Remote MEP status in the RMep table
The remote MEP is automatically inserted in The remote MEP is manually

RMep table when the local MEP receives the first inserted in the RMep table by the user (1).
CCM message sent by remote MEP Remote MEP status: Idle
The user enables

the remote MEP
(2)
Remote MEP status Remote MEP status

Start Start
The user The user

The user enables Local MEP
disables the disables the
the remote MEP receives the first
remote MEP remote MEP
(2) CCM sent by the
(3) (3) remote MEP
The user
deletes the
Conn. Conn.
remote MEP
Local MEP does (4)
Local MEP Local MEP does Local MEP
not receive the not receive the
receives receives
CCMs from remote CCMs from
again the again the
MEP anymore remote MEP
CCMs from CCMs from anymore
remote MEP remote MEP
Failed Failed
The user deletes The user deletes

the remote MEP (4) the remote MEP (4)
Removal of remote MEP Removal of remote MEP

from the RMep table from the RMep table
CCM
The term CCM (Continuity Check Message) defines the messages which constantly monitor the path of the
service instance showing the connection troubles.
CCMs are multicast messages sent by a MEP entity to the other MEP entities belonging to the same MA
(Remote MEPs), are unidirectional messages (do not need a reply) and are periodically sent.
Within a MA which n MEPs belongs to, every MEP periodically sends a CCM in multicast; every MEP waits
to periodically receive n-1 CCMs.
The missed reception of a CCM by a MEP means the presence of a fault in the path of the service instance
(VLAN).
When a MEP does not receive a CCM message, it goes to status Failed: this status is notified to the other
MEPs setting the field RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) in the sent CCM message.
In this way, all the MEP entities know the existence of a fault along their own path.
The remote MEP is automatically inserted in the RMep table when the local MEP receives the first CCM mes-
sage sent by the remote MEP.
The CCM management in the equipment is strictly bound to the MEP management.
In fact, the configuration parameters of the CCM messages must be set when MEP is created. The user has
to define:
The interval used for the transmission of CCMs (CCM interval).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 177

For a correct operation of the CCM messages, the CCM interval must be the same for all the MEPs
of the same VLAN.
The direction you wish to send the CCM messages to.
Once the MEP has been defined, the enabling of the transmission of CCMs is required.
Then, the user can disable and enable again the transmission of the CCM messages as he wishes and
change the transmission interval (see equipment user manual).
The transmission direction of CCMs cannot be changed. To do this, remove the MEP from the VLAN and
create a new one with the new values.
In the equipment, the CCM messages (OAM-FM packets) are routed on the VLANs only if the control of Tag
VLan Id is active (parameter Ingress Filtering Check - set value Fallback or Secure - see equipment user
manual).
In the CCM messages sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets) is used as:
Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3x with x from 0 to 7 according

to the layer of OAM-FM Domain.
Source address (Source MAC address): physical address of the equipment which has generated the
CCM message (MAC Address associated to the management LAN port of the controller).
LBM
The term LBM (LoopBack Message) defines the LoopBack messages which, once a fault has been detected
through the CCM messages, allow isolating the point where the fault has occurred.
The operation modality of OAM-FM LoopBack is similar to IP ping.
From a MEP an OAM-FM packet is sent in unicast with a request of Echo Request (LoopBack Message) to a
MIP or MEP belonging to the same MA. The MEP waits for the relevant reply Echo Reply (Loopback Replies)
sent in unicast from the remote maintenance point.
The missing reply to a LBM message indicates the presence of a fault between the MEP which has sent the
message and the maintenance point which has not replied to the message.
The LBM messages are sent after a command from operator (see equipment user manual).
The transmission of LoopBack messages requires the setting of:
The local MEP, which you wish to send the messages from.
The remote maintenance point, belonging to the same Domain and the same MA of the local MEP,
which you wish to send the messages to. The setting of a:
MEP can be done choosing the MEP in the RMep table or setting the MAC Address of the
equipment where the remote MEP is defined.
MIP can be done setting the MAC Address of the equipment where MIP is defined.
Number of messages (OAM-FM packets - Echo Request) you wish to send in sequence with a single
sending confirmation (minimum 1 maximum 5).
At the end of the operation, a statistics is available with the number of sent packets (Sent messages), the
number of received correct packets (Valid), the number of packets received out of sequence (Out Of Order)
and the number of packets received with unknown format (Bad Msdu).
Equipment, in the LBM messages sent in unicast, uses as:
Destination address (Destination MAC address): physical address of the addressee of the LoopBack
message.
LoopBack message.
178 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

LTM
The term LTM (Link Trace Message) defines the Link Trace messages which allow determining the path
covered by an OAM-FM packet between the end-points of a service instance (VLAN).
The operating modality of OAM-FM Link Trace is similar to TraceRoute IP.
A Link Trace message is sent in multicast from a MEP (local) to a remote MEP, whose physical address must
be known.
In the Link Trace messages, the TTL (Time To Live) field, which displays the number of pieces of equipment
of the specific OAM-FM Domain the packet can pass through before being declared expired, is properly con-
figured.
The LTM messages are captured by all the MEPs-MIPs (defined on the same VLAN) on the equipment
crossed to reach the destination MEP.
Every MEP-MIP, once the message has been intercepted, decreases the TTL field, replies to the source MEP
with an unicast message and forwards the LTM message to the destination MEP.
This operation is repeated until the packet arrives to the addressee remote MEP.
At the end of the operation, the local MEP has acquired the list of the physical addresses (MAC Address) of
the equipment where the Link Trace messages have passed.
The LTM messages, to trace the path between two different MEPs of the same VLAN, are sent after a com-
mand by operator (see equipment user manual).
To trace a path, the operator must set the two path ends:
Local MEP.
Remote MEP. This setting can be done choosing the MEP from the RMep table or setting the MAC
Address of the equipment whose remote MEP has been defined.
The remote MEP, to make the operation being successful, must be in status Conn. (see Fig.16).
Then the operator must send the LTM message (Run Test).
At the end of the operation, will be displayed the list of the MAC Addresses of the MIPs-MEPs crossed to
reach the remote MEP with the indication of the distance in Hops from the source MEP.
The LTM messages are sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets), use as:
Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3y with y from 8...0xF accord-
ing to the layer of the OAM-FM Domain.
Link Trace message.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 179

Example of configuration of an OAM-FM maintenance Domain
Fig.17 shows an example of configuration of a maintenance OAM-FM area including four ALCplus2 pieces
of equipment (A.1, A.2, A.3 and A.4). This area is used to monitor the end to end availability of VLAN 20.
Fig.17 OAM-FM - Example of configuration of a maintenance area
Domain: Test
A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4

MEP 10 MEP 11
Switch Switch MIP Switch Switch
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
A A A A
3 3 3 3
4 VLAN Id:20 4 4 4
MA: Vlan 20
The steps to execute through NMS5LX application on every single equipment are the following:
1. Configure the VLAN with identifier 20 on the 4 pieces of equipment (see equipment user manual).
The VLAN must be operating so, besides creating it, it is necessary:
To execute the proper physical connections.
To activate the Ethernet ports interested by the VLAN (see equipment user manual - parameter
Rate Control).
To configure properly the transit of the messages in input from the Ethernet port (see equipment
user manual - parameter Port Based VLAN).
To activate the control of Tag VLan Id (see equipment user manual - parameter Ingress Filtering
Check).
2. Define the OAM-FM Domain with name Test (see Define an OAM-FM Domain) and level 5.
OAM-FM Domain must be defined in every equipment of the Domain Test. The name and the level of
the Domain must be the same for all equipment.
3. Associate the MA with name Test to the VLAN (see equipment user manual).
MA must be associated to VLAN 20 in every equipment of Domain Test. The name of MA must be the
same for all equipment.
4. Define the MEP (see equipment user manual) in the following way:
Only for equipment A.1, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:
Identifier: 10
CCM interval: 10 sec.
Ethernet port: LAN 3
Direction of CCMs: Down - The CCM messages are sent in output from LAN 3.
Only for equipment A.4, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:
Identifier: 11
CCM interval: 10 sec.
Ethernet port: LAN 1
Direction of CCMs: Down - The CCM messages are sent in output from LAN 1.
5. Enable the transmission of CCM messages for the MEPs created in the previous step (see equip-
ment user manual).
After some seconds, the RMep table (see Remote MEPs) relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1) records
the MEP 11 in status Start and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm becomes active.
At the same time, the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4) records the MEP 10 in status
Start and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm becomes active.
6. In RMep tables, enable the remote MEPs (see equipment user manual).
In the RMep table relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1), the remote MEP 11 changes to status Conn and
the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.
180 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

In similar mode, in the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4), the remote MEP 10 changes
to status Conn and the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.
The configuration of the maintenance area depicted in Fig.17 is completed and the end to end monitoring
of VLAN 20 is active.
At this point:
When a fault is detected (activation of the alarm OAM-FM... Fail Alarm) or in order to execute checks
on the OAM-FM path, the operator can use the LTM messages to verify the path of the VLAN.
When the Fail alarm is detected, the operator can use the LBM messages to detect the interruption
point of the VLAN.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 181

E1 Browser
User profile | Read Only: Entry. Read-Write: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The E1 Browser command allows managing the 2Mbit/s tributaries of equipment selected in the open
map.
Operations
Verify the status of 2Mbit/s tributaries
Verify/change the label of a tributary
Activate/deactivate the use of 2Mbit/s tributaries
Activate/deactivate the loops of 2Mbit/s tributaries
GUI
E1 Tributaries management window
Verify the status of 2Mbit/s tributaries

1. Select the equipment which you wish to verify the status of 2 Mbit/s tributaries for.
2. Select Configuration > E1 Browser.
The E1 Tributaries management window shows the status of tributaries, loops and alarms.
Verify/change the label of a tributary

1. Select the equipment which you wish to change the label of one or more 2Mbit/s tributaries for.

3. In the E1 Tributaries management window, to change the label of a tributary, click on the corresponding
text box. The cursor for the editing of the text is displayed in the box.
4. Type an alphanumeric string of 40 characters at most.
5. Press Send New Setting and confirm.
Activate/deactivate the use of 2Mbit/s tributaries

WARNING If the symbol of a tributary is not available (greyed), this means that the tributary cannot be
configured because already used for other functions (as, for example, synchronization). For more informa-
tion, refer to the user manual of the specific equipment.
1. Select the equipment for which you wish to activate/deactivate the use of one or more 2 Mbit/s tribu-
taries.
182 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

3. In the E1 Tributaries management window, select the tributary you wish to enable (or disable).
The tributary gets the status complementary to the previous one (if enabled, it changes to disabled and
vice versa) and the symbol assumes colour yellow (configuration not communicated yet to the equip-
ment). Pressing:
Ok, LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with E1 disabled, the signal is however connected.
No, LOS alarm is raised if, with E1 disabled, the signal is however connected.
When the tributary is disabled, the management status of LOS alarm can be changed in the following
way. If the box LOS Inv. is:
, LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with E1 disabled, the signal is however connected.
, LOS alarm is raised if, with E1 disabled, the signal is however connected.
Select the box to enabled or disable the management of the alarm. On every selection, the box gets
the status complementary to the previous one (if enabled, it changes to disabled and vice versa).
4. Press Send New Setting and confirm.

The tributary takes the new status and the corresponding symbol becomes white again.
Activate/deactivate the loops of 2Mbit/s tributaries

WARNING Maintenance operation (MAN. OP).
1. Select the equipment which you wish to activate/deactivate one or more tributary loop for.

3. In the E1 Tributaries management window, select the loop you wish to activate (or deactivate).
The loop gets the status complementary to the previous one (if active, it changes to inactive and vice
versa) and the symbol becomes yellow (configuration not communicated yet to the equipment).
The activation of the loop on internal side automatically enables the tributary, if this is not already en-
abled.
4. Press Send New Setting.

If you are activating one loop at least, a message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows
the current setting of timeout.
5. Press Yes to continue the operation.

The tributary loop assumes the new status and the symbol becomes white.
The activation of one loop at least raises the alarm MAN. OP. If the equipment is switched off and then
switched on, the loops are inactive independently from the setting before the switch off.
If the message Operation fail! ...Wrong user profile! is displayed, verify that the used user profile can
enable the tributary.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 183

E1 Tributaries management window
This window allows managing the status of E1 tributaries on the equipment. Select the box on the right
top side of the window to display the groups of wished tributaries. The number of available tributaries de-
pends on the equipment type.
Menu bar
File > Exit. Closes the window.
Tributary area
Status of use of the tributary. Symbol:
, the tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this condition, alarms are inhib-
ited and LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of box LOS Inv (see note 4).
, the tributary is active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller does not
inhibit alarms.
If the symbol of a tributary is not available (greyed), this means that the tributary cannot be
configured because already used for other functionalities (as, for example, synchronization). For
more information, refer to the user manual of the single equipment.
Label. Read-only parameter which identifies the tributary in univocal way.

LOS Inv. Management of LOS alarm when the tributary is not used. If the box is:
, alarms are not inhibited and LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the
2Mbits/s signal is however connected.
, alarms are inhibited and LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbits/s
signal is however connected.
The status of box LOS Inv IS MEANINGFUL ONLY if the tributary is not used.
Loop. Indication of loop operation:
, loop on line side is active.
, loop on internal side is active.
, loop is inactive.
Push-buttons
Refresh. Updates the information in the window.
Send New setting. Transmits the new settings to the equipment.
184 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Equipment Port Configuration
The Equipment Port Configuration command displays the settings of the communication ports of the
equipment (except FAMxc and SDH N+1) in the open map.
Operations
Verify the settings of the communication ports of equipment
Display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment
Display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of the equipment
Verify/change the IP access control list (ACL)
Enable/disable the management LAN ports
Verify/change the parameters of the supervision ports
Execute the Ping of the equipment
Open a Telnet session
Display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different
Change the Logical Address of the equipment
Filter/sort the list of the equipment
GUI
Port Communication Browser window
Set In - Band / Management Port window
Verify the settings of the communication ports of equipment

1. Select Configuration > Equipment Port Configuration.

The Port Communication Browser window opens.

WARNING Operation not available for equipment of type ALFOplus80HD.
2. Select the equipment in the Port Communication Browser window.
3. Select Commands > NE PPP Interfaces.

The PPP Interface Browser window opens, where the setting of the PPP communication ports available
for the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal is displayed.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 185


3. Select Commands > NE Routing Table.

The Routing Table window opens, where the setting of the Routing Table and the Default Gateway ad-
dress currently used by the equipment is displayed.
Verify/change the IP access control list (ACL)

WARNING The command ACL is available only for equipment of type ALCplus2, ALCplus2e and AGS10.

3. Select Commands > ACL.
By means of the commands in the ACL Management window, it is possible to:
Add a rule to the IP access control list
Remove a rule from the IP access control list
Enable/disable the use of the IP access control list
For more information, go to par. IP access control list (more info).
Add a rule to the IP access control list
WARNING A maximum of 32 rules can be inserted in the list.
4. In the ACL Management window press Add. The Inserts Parameters window is displayed.
5. In the Name box, set the name of the rule.
6. In the IP box, set the IP subnetwork or the single IP address which the rule refers to.
7. In the Mask box set the netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork/IP address which the rule refers to (if
a single IP is set, the mask is 255.255.255.255).
8. Select the usage condition of the rule:

Deny. The IP subnetwork/IP address is not allowed accessing the equipment.
Allow. The IP subnetwork/IP address is allowed accessing the equipment.
9. If you wish the equipment allows or denies the access to any IP address, activate the check-box Any.
In detail, if you activates the check-box Any with selected the option:
Deny, the equipment will refuse packets sent by any IP address (with the exception displayed
in par. IP access control list (more info)).
Allow, the equipment will accept packets sent by any IP address.
186 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Selecting the check-box Any is equivalent to setting IP address to 0.0.0.0 and netmask to 0.0.0.0.
10.Press Create.
The rule is inserted in the list in alphanumerical order with respect to the name (column Name).
11.Press Close.
Remove a rule from the IP access control list

The ACL Management window is displayed.
4. Select the row relevant to the rule you wish to delete from the list. A check sign is displayed next to
the rule name.
Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
5. Press Remove and confirm.

The rule is removed from the list.
Enable/disable the use of the IP access control list

4. In the ACL Management window select respectively:
Enable, to enable the use of the IP Access Control List.
Disable, to disable the use of the IP Access Control List.
5. Press Apply and confirm.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 187

ACL Management window
The ACL Management window shows the list of the rules for the access to the equipment. Every row cor-
responds to one rule. The rules in the list are sorted in alphanumeric order with respect to their name (col-
umn Name).
List of rules:
Name. Name of the rule. The check sign next to the rule name indicates that the rule has been
selected to be removed.
IP Address. IP subnetwork or single IP network which the rule refers to.
Mask. Netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork or to the IP address which the rule refers to.
Permission. Use conditions of the rule:
Allow. The IP subnetwork/IP address is allowed accessing the equipment.
Deny. The IP subnetwork/IP address is not allowed accessing the equipment.
Options (Status of use of the access control list):

Enable. The use of the IP Access Control List is enabled: the access to the equipment by other
elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is allowed only if the IP address of the element matches the rules
displayed in the list.
Disable. The use of the IP Access Control List is disabled: the access to the equipment by other
elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is not defined by the rules indicated in the list.
Push-buttons:
Add. It opens the window for the creation of a new rule.
Remove. It deletes the selected rule from the list.
Refresh. It refreshes the display of the window.
IP access control list (more info)
The IP Access Control List is a mechanism used to control and filter the source IP addresses which are al-
lowed accessing to the equipment.
This mechanism consists in a list of rules (Access Control Entry) which determine if an IP subnetwork or a
single IP address is allowed accessing to the selecting equipment.
Every rules are composed by a descriptive part and a decision-making part. The descriptive part of the rule
is represented by the IP address (or by a set of IP addresses) source of the packet. The decision-making
part is the action to execute: making the packet passes (Allow) or refusing it (Deny).
The analysis of the packet consists in considering the following conditions:
1. ACL rules are considered only if the use of ACL itself is enabled.
2. The control is applied only to the packets destined to the local equipment.
3. The access to the equipment is always allowed by the LCT PPP port.
4. The access is always allowed if the IP address coincides with that of a user who has executed a Login
procedure. The user is allowed changing ACL without involving the loss of the connection with the
equipment.
5. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is not contained in any deny rule.
6. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is contained in, at least, one allow rule.
7. If ACL does not contain rules, enabling it is equivalent to forbid the access to the equipment from the
Ethernet ports to every IP address.
188 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Enable/disable the management LAN ports

The enabling/disabling of the Apply push-buttons is defined by a configuration file. Two cases are possible:
Apply push-buttons always enabled and Cable Absent/Present is only an information.
Apply push-buttons enabled only if the condition Cable Absent is displayed.

3. Select Commands > Lan Port Manag Win.

The Management LAN-Port window is displayed, showing the status of the management LAN ports.
Area Lan x Mode (x = 1,2)

Alarm severity led. Severity status of the alarm missing/faulted connection cable of the Ethernet
LAN port. It can assume the colours:
Green, no alarm present.
Red, orange, yellow and light blue, to signal the presence of the alarm with severity re-
spectively Critical, Major, Minor and Warning.
Option box Cable Crossover. Enabling status of management LAN ports:

mdi. LAN management enabled: the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Net-
work Interface Card modality).
mdi-x. LAN management enabled: the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch
modality).
auto. LAN management enabled: the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in auto-
matic modality.
disable. LAN management disabled.
Option box Speed/Duplex. Enabling status of management LAN ports:

full duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.
half duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex
full duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex
half duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex
auto speed duplex. The auto negotiation is enabled.
Push-button Apply. It applies the executes changes. The status of the cable in the connector of
the Ethernet port is reported just below the push-button:
Cable Present. The cable is inserted in the connector.
Cable Absent. The cable is not inserted in the connector.
Push-buttons:
Refresh. Updates the data displayed in the window.
Close. Closes the window.
4. To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then the option from the list.
5. Press Apply.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 189

Verify/change the parameters of the supervision ports

If the in band supervision is active on the selected equipment, the area relevant to the management of
VLAN tag on the management port is not available and vice versa.
The availability of the Set push-buttons to confirm the changes made in the window can be defined in the
configuration file of the system. Contact Siae for more information.
1. Select Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration.
2. In Port Communication Browser window, select the equipment.
3. Select Commands > In Band / VLan Tag Mngt.
4. In the Set In - Band / Management Port window, to activate the in band supervision:
Select the equipment Ethernet port where you wish to activate the supervision.
Type the VLAN identifier reserved for the in band supervision in the VLan ID (0 - 4095) field.
Press Set.
If the message Warning! VLAN ID already defined in Virtual Lan list or Mac Learning disable is
displayed, at least one of the following condition is true:
The identifier set for the in band supervision corresponds to that already used by a traffic
VLAN. Change value in the VLan ID box.
The Ethernet port selected for the in band supervision has not enabled the automatic
learning of MAC Addresses within the MAC table. For this port set the parameter MAC
Learning to value Enable.
WARNING The ports where the in band supervision is enabled must have the option 802.1Q enabled in
order to properly manage the single VLANs.
5. To activate the management of the VLAN tag on the MNGT 1 (or MNGT 2) port:
Select the activation status of the procedure for the Tagging of the packets in input/output to/
from the specific management LAN.
Type the VLAN identifier reserved to the management of the tagging procedure in the VLan ID
(0 - 4095) field.
Press Set.
WARNING If the equipment belongs to one ALCplus2 node and is connected to the other node elements
via Ethernet Nodal bus, the in band supervision is not forwarded on the management LAN ports (MNGT/1
and MNGT/2).

3. Select Commands > Ping Check.

The Ping window opens, where the operation progress and the final statistics (number of sent and re-
ceived packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.) are displayed.
Every Ping command sends the test packet three times.
190 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Open a Telnet session

3. Select Commands > Telnet.

The window telnet is displayed, which allows establishing a telnet communication to the selected equip-
ment.
Display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different

2. In the Port Communication Browser window, select View > Show mismatched (Station Id - Logical
Address) only.
The window displays only the equipment whose value in the column Station Id is different from that of
the column Logical Address.
Change the Logical Address of the equipment

3. Select:
Commands > Set Station Id (like Logical Address). The value in the column Station Id is
changed. The new value corresponds to the logical address of the equipment (Logical Address).
Commands > Set Logical Address (like Station Id). The value in the column Logical Ad-
dress is changed. The new value corresponds to the equipment identifier (Station Id).

2. In the Port Communication Browser window, to SORT the list, select:

Order by > Logical Address. It sorts the list according to the logical address of the NE.
Order by > Address. It sorts the list according to the IP address of the NE.
Order by >Type. It sorts the list according to the NE type.
Order by > Status. It sorts the list according to the status of the connection between the NE
and the supervision system.
When the Port Communication Browser window is opened, independently from the previous setting, the
equipment is listed in alphabetical order according to the NE type.
3. To FILTER the list, select View > Filter.

In the Filter Selection window, select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 191

To set the criterion, type the address of the NE in the text field.
The use the wild-card asterisk character (*) is allowed. For example, typing in the box the letter:
p*o, the NEs whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the
window.
Match IP Address. IP address of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the wished IP Address in the text fields. It is possible to use the wild-
card asterisk character (*).
Match equipment type. Type of equipment.
Match Station Id. Local identifier of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the NE identifier in the text field.
The use the wild-card asterisk character (*) is allowed. For example, typing in the box the letter:
p, the NE with identifier p will be displayed in the window.
p*, the NEs whose identifier start with p will be displayed.
p*o, the NEs whose identifier starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the
window.
The Port Communication Browser window displays only the records matching the active criteria.
When the list is filtered, both the displayed and the hidden records are considered.
Closing the Port Communication Browser window automatically removes the possible active filters.
192 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Port Communication Browser window
The Port Communication Browser window is displayed, where the list of the NEs and the detail of the com-
munication ports is displayed. The information in the table refers to the moment when the command is
selected or the refresh is executed.
The list displays all the equipment in connected or unreachable status in the open map, except for FAMxc
and SDH N+1.
<node name>.X, where X can assume only the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).
<node name>.Y, where Y can assume only a value between 1 and 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).
Parameters
Logical Address. Logical address of the equipment (NE object).
Address. IP address of the equipment (NE object).
Type. Equipment type.
Station Id. Equipment identifier set locally (SCT or WEB LCT - Equipment Id parameter).
ip Address. IP address of the communication port with the equipment LAN network (LAN port).
ip Netmask. Mask for the network address definition (LAN port).
Mac Address. Physical address of the equipment.
In band. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to the supervision is
achieved by means of the traffic Lan tributaries). Value:
Disabled. The in band supervision is not active.
Enabled. The in band supervision is active.
---. The considered type of equipment does not support the supervision in band.
Mngt VLan Tag. Activation status of the procedure for the Tagging of the management packets
in input/output to/from the specific management LAN port and relevant value of VLAN tag.
Menu bar
View > Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria.
View > Show mismatched (Station Id - Logical Address) only. It displays only the equip-
ment whose equipment identifier (Station Id) is different from the Logical Address.
View > Show all equipment. It displays all the pieces of equipment (except from FAMxc and
SDH N+1) in the open map.
Commands > NE PPP Interfaces. It displays the PPP communication ports of the equipment.
Commands > NE Routing Table. It displays/changes the routing table of the equipment.
Commands > ACL. It displays/changes the IP access control list of the selected equipment.
Commands > Lan Port Manag Win. It displays/changes the configuration of the LAN commu-
nication ports of the equipment.
Commands > In Band / VLan Tag Mngt. It displays/changes the In Band management and
the VLAN tagging for the management port.
Commands > Ping Check. It executes the Ping to check the presence and the reachability of
the equipment.
Commands > Telnet. It opens a Telnet session to the equipment.
Commands > Set Station Id (like Logical Address). It changes the equipment identifier
(Station Id). The new value corresponds to the equipment logical address (Logical Address).
Commands > Set Logical Address (like Station Id). It changes the logical address of an
equipment (Logical Address). The new value corresponds to equipment identifier (Station Id).
Order by > Logical Address. It sorts the list according to the logical address of the NE.
Order by > Address. It sorts the list according to the IP address of the NE.
Order by >Type. It sorts the list according to the NE type.
Order by > Status. It sorts the list according to the status of connection between NE and
NMS5LX.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 193

Set In - Band / Management Port window
This window allows displaying/changing the operating parameters of the equipment supervision ports.
Parameters
VLan ID (area In Band Management). VLAN identifier reserved for the in band supervision:
0. No VLan is reserved for the in band supervision.
Value different from 0. the VLAN with the specific ID is reserved for the in band supervi-
sion.
When the in band supervision is active (at least one box LAN/Port active), IT IS NECESSARY to
reserve one VLan for this management.
To modify the parameter, set a value between 1 and 4095. The In Band Management function
is immediately activated on the activation of the box relevant to a port (restart not necessary).
VLan ID (area MNGT Port VLan Tagging). VLAN identifier reserved for the Tagging procedure:
0. No VLan is reserved for the Tagging procedure.
Value different from 0. The VLan with the specific ID is reserved for the Tagging proce-
dure.
When the Tagging procedure is active (at least one MNGT... box active), IT IS NECESSARY to
reserve a VLan for this management.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 4095. The Tagging procedure is immedi-
ately activated on the enabling of the box relevant to a port (restart not necessary).
If the in band supervision is active for the equipment (activation of one of the boxes in the In
Band Management area), the MNGT VLan Tagging area is not available.
Push-buttons
LAN x/Port x (area In Band Management). Activation status of the in band supervision (the
connection to supervision is realized through the traffic LAN tributaries and/or the Radio Ether-
net ports):
Inactive. The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is inactive.
Active. The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is active.
To modify the parameter, activate/deactivate the specific boxes.
The ports where the in band supervision is enabled must have the option 802.1Q enabled in or-
der to properly manage the single VLANs.
MNGT <number of management Lan> (area MNGT Port VLan Tagging). Activation status of
the procedure for the Tagging of the management packets in input/output to/from the manage-
ment LAN ports:
Disable. The Tagging procedure is not active: the TAG is not managed for the manage-
ment packets in input/output to/from the LAN port.
Enable. The Tagging procedure is active: the TAG is managed for the management pack-
ets in input/output to/from the LAN port.
All the management packets in output from the equipment controller are tagged with the
VID value for the Tagging procedure.
En. Secure. The Tagging procedure is active: the LAN accepts only the management
packets with VID value reserved for the Tagging procedure.
194 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NE PPP Interfaces
WARNING Command available only if a single equipment (except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO,
ALFOplus80HD) has been selected.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is in the ALplus nodal window/
ALCplus2 nodal window and requires to select a specific IDU from a list.
The NE PPP Interfaces command displays the settings relevant to the PPP communication ports available
for the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal.
Operations

WARNING If the equipment is in disconnected status, because it has been just created and the first con-
nection has not been executed yet, the window will result empty because the required information is not
present in the database of the supervision system.
1. In the LX Map Manager window, select the equipment.
2. Select Configuration > NE PPP Interfaces.

The PPP Interface Browser window displays the setting of the PPP communication ports available for
the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal.
The Equipment information area lists in order: NE logical address (NE type - NE IP address) - connection
status of NE.
Parameters
Interface. Name of the PPP communication port.
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the port.
IP Netmask. Mask for the definition of the network address.
Mode. Operation mode of PPP protocol.
Speed. Transmission rate of the port.
Signal Input. Type of signal in input to the port (e.g. E1, STM-1, ecc.).
2Mbit Selector. Setting of the tributary 2Mb
Slot Selector. Setting of the tributary 2Mb, timeslot
16Kbit Map. Mapping of 16Kbit (channel EOC E1).
The available values change depending on the type of selected equipment. For the detail of all the avail-
able ports for each type of equipment, refer to the equipment documentation.
The window displays the more meaningful characteristics for each communication ports.
The symbol- indicates that the value is not meaningful for the considered type of port.
Menu bar
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 195

NE Routing Table
WARNING Command available only if a single equipment (except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO) has
been selected.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is in the ALplus nodal window/
The NE Routing Table command displays the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address cur-
rently used by the equipment (Routing Table Running and Default Gateway).
Operations
Add an element to the Routing Table
Delete an element from the Routing Table
Set or change the IP address used as Default Gateway
Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway
GUI
Routing Table window
See also
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info)

WARNING If the equipment is in disconnected status, because it has been just created and the first con-
nection has not been executed yet, the window will result empty because the required information is not
present in the database of the supervision system.
2. Select Configuration > NE Routing Table.

The Routing Table window is displayed.
Add an element to the Routing Table


3. In the Routing Table window, select Commands > Add New Route.
The Add Route window opens.
4. In the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.
For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number between 0 and 255.
5. In the NetMask box, type the mask for the destination IP network.
196 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

6. In the Hop box, type the IP Address of the Gateway equipment for the destination network.
7. Press Add.
The new element is inserted in the table. The system records the new element in the currently used
Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and in the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table).
Delete an element from the Routing Table

3. In the Routing Table window, select the elements to delete.

Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Direct protocol) cannot be deleted.
4. Select Commands > Delete Route and confirm.

The system deletes the element in the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and in the
backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
Set or change the IP address used as Default Gateway


3. In the Routing Table window, type a number between 0 and 255 in each one of the four available spaces
of the Default Gateway area.
The supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment is automatically displayed be-
tween brackets.

The insertion of a new IP address used as Default Gateway can fail if the new IP address does not belong
to an IP network directly connected to the equipment interface.
Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway


3. In the Routing Table window, press Delete in the Default Gateway area and confirm.
The system deletes the Default Gateway IP address in the currently used Routing Table (Running Rout-
ing Table) and in the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 197

Routing Table window
The Routing Table window shows the setting of the Routing Table and the Default Gateway address cur-
rently used by the equipment.
Equipment information area. This area displays in order: Logical address of the NE (Type of NE-IP
Address of NE) - connection status of NE.
Elements of the Routing Table:

Destination. IP address of IP network or of destination element.
Net Mask. IP NetMask of IP network or of destination element.
Hop. IP address of the equipment acting as gateway.
Interface. Supervision port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment is connected
to. The available values change depending on the type of selected equipment. Here are reported
the ports generally present in all the pieces of equipment. For the detail of all the ports available
for each type of equipment, refer to the equipment documentation.
Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.
Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management pro-
gram or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
RS232. Serial port for the connection with other network elements.
Radio. Communication port represented by the radio signal.
2Mb/s. E1 communication port (2Mb/s).
- . Internal port (internal loopback).
Route-Type. Modality of connection (direct or indirect) between the specific port (Interface) and
the destination IP network:
Direct. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equipment interface.
The IP network or the element are automatically inserted by the equipment software.
Indirect. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable by the equipment in-
terface. The IP network or the element have been automatically inserted by the OSPF
protocol (dynamic element).
Area Default Gateway.

Default Gateway. IP Address of the equipment acting as gateway.
Interface. Supervision port of the local equipment which the equipment acting as Gateway is
connected to.
Apply. It applies the setting made by the user to the Default Gateway.
Delete. It deletes the IP Address of Default Gateway from the Routing Table currently used
(Routing Table Running) and from the backup memory of the equipment (Routing Table Stored).
Menu bar:
Commands > Refresh. It updates the information contained in the window.
Commands > Add New Route. It adds an element to the Routing Table.
Commands > Delete Route. It deletes an element from the Routing Table.
198 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info)
When all the pieces of equipment belong to the same IP network, it is not necessary to define the Routing
Table and the address of the gateway equipment because the network is able to manage its own inner
traffic. The setting of these parameters is necessary when the equipment belongs to different networks,
then, the traffic has to be routed again from a network to the other one.
The function of the Routing Table is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages exchanged
among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one network to the other
one.
Routing Table (Running)

Stored Routing Table
Default Gateway
Routing Table (Running)
Every equipment, when initialized (start-up operation), automatically sets the elements of the Routing Ta-
ble that identify the supervisory ports of the equipment (communication ports provided with the equipment
for the input/output of the supervisory signal).
These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port.
If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically change it in the
equipment Routing Table. It is necessary to execute a reset of the equipment, because the elements of the
Routing Table are set at the equipment start-up.
If it is necessary, the user can add to these elements (automatically set) some other ones.
The system records each new element (manually set) in the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing
Table) and in the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table); the system does not
record the elements (automatically set) in the backup memory of the controller because they are set again
at every equipment start-up.
The Running Routing Table is static. The system updates this table using the elements of the Stored Rout-
ing Table, at every equipment start-up.
Stored Routing Table
The equipment does not currently use the Stored Routing Table. This table becomes operative at the equip-
ment restart. In fact, in this case, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table in the Rout-
ing Table used by the equipment (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the elements
whose router equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface.
The setting of the Stored Routing Table is necessary, for instance, when the user wants to change an ad-
dress of the equipment supervisory ports. In this case, it is not possible to change the currently used Rout-
ing Table (Running Routing Table). The changes have to be made to the Stored Routing Table. At the next
equipment start-up, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table in the Routing Table used
by the equipment.
The Stored Routing Table can be displayed/changed through the local management program of the equip-
ment (SCT/LMT and/or WEB LCT).
Default Gateway
The system forwards to the equipment with the Default Gateway function the data that have a receiver
unreachable through the routes in the Routing Table.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 199

Hw Inventory
WARNING The Hw Inventory functionality is available only for the equipment of type EL, US, ADM-1,
EXP63, ALFO, ALFOPlus, AGS10, AGS20, ALFOplus80HD and ALS series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, AL-
Cplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2, ALCplus2e).
The HW Inventory command displays the hardware version of equipment in the open map (Hw Inventory
functionality).
Operations
Display the hardware of equipment in the map
Save the data to file
Save periodically the data to file
Deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file
GUI
HW Inventory window
Display the hardware of equipment in the map

1. Select Configuration > HW Inventory.

2. Select, in the Equipment Type area of the HW Inventory window, the NE types for which you wish to
display the hardware data.
3. Type, in the Max Rows box, the maximum number of records you wish to display.
4. Press Read.
The window displays the hardware data relevant to all the types of NE selected in the open map.
5. If you wish to display a specific detail of the data, execute one or more of the following settings, ac-
cording to the wished filter criteria:
To set the criterion, type the logical address of the NE in the text field and press Add.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only at the end of the alphanumeric string.
The values set in this way are inserted in the list above the text field.
It is possible to delete an item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, Del.
IP Address. IP address of the NE.
To set the criterion, type the wished IP address.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only for the final fields (the asterisk cannot
be before a numeric field). For example, the values 172.18.54.* or 172.18.*.* are allowed,
while the value 172.18.*.215 is not allowed.
Pressing IP Clear to delete the IP Address.
Unit Type. Type of unit of the equipment.
The filter is available and meaningful only if the Expansion display modality is selected.
To set the criterion, select the wished units. It is possible to select a maximum of three units.
To select the units, press the Ctrl key and the unit.
Moreover it is possible to define, for each type of equipment, which units must not be used in
the Unit Type in the following way:
Press Not managed unit type.
200 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

In the Select equipment type area of the FilterUnitType window, select the type of equip-
ment for which you wish to hide the units.
In the area below, the detail of the relevant units is displayed.
The highlighted units are already hidden.
In the Select not managed unit area, select the units you do not want to display in the
Unit Type list for the selected equipment type.
Select the Select All option to select all the units or the Deselect All option to deselect all
the units.
Press Apply.
Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
To set the criterion, type a 10 characters alphanumeric string in the text field.
HW Edition. Hardware version of the unit.
Bar Code. Bar code of the unit.
6. Press Read.
The hardware data, relevant to all the NEs in the open map matching the set criteria, are displayed.
7 Select the option:

Expansion, to display the data in expanded format: for each equipment, the hardware charac-
teristics of all the units are displayed.
Compact, to display the data in compact format: for each equipment, the hardware character-
istics of the controller unit are displayed.
8. To delete all the set option filter, press Reset Filter.
Save the data to file

2. In the HW Inventory window, filter the data you wish to save to file (see Display the hardware of equip-
ment in the map).
3. Press Export manual.
In the Export window, an hypertextual link shows the name/extension of the file where the data will be
saved.
By default, the name of the file has the following format HwInv <day-month-year> <hour-minute-sec-
ond>.zip. The name and the extension of the file can be configured by the Superuser. The formats of
the managed files are: csv, xml, zip (cvs zipped or xml zip).
4 Select the hypertextual link.
5. Set the path where you wish to save the file.
6. Confirm the operation.

The system saves in the file all the hardware data matching the set filter criterion and not only those
relevant to the displayed records.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 201

Save periodically the data to file

2. In the HW Inventory window, filter the data you wish to periodically save to file (Display the hardware
of equipment in the map).
3. Press Export timer.

The Filter description area of the ExpTimer window displays the filters which will be applied to every
periodic saving.
4. Type the name of the filter in the Filter Name box.
5. Type, in the Export periodicity day box, the periodicity in days of the data export and, in the Hour box,
the time when the export is executed.
6 Press Insert.
At the first set time interval, a file will be saved containing the hardware data of equipment matching
the filter criteria.
The file will be saved in the directory /opt/nms5ux/ExpHwInv, in the format .cvs and .xml, and will ba
named HwInv-filtername-<date_time>.
The files will be saved until when the user does not remove the filter (Deactivate the periodic saving of
the data to file).
Deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file


The HW Inventory window opens in the default browser.
2. Press Export timer.

The Delete Filter area of the ExpTimer window lists the filters defined by the user.
3. Select the filter you wish to deactivate.

The Select filter to be deleted area displays the detail of the filter.
4 Press Delete.
The filter is removed.
202 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

HW Inventory window
This window allows displaying and saving the data of hardware inventory of the equipment.
Filter area
Equipment Type. Type of equipment. The selection of this filter is mandatory to display the
hardware data. The setting of all the other data is optional.
Unit Type. Type of unit of the equipment. The filter is available only if selected the Expansion
display modality.
Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
HW Edition. Hardware version of the unit.
Display options
Expansion. Displays the data in expanded format: for each equipment, the hardware charac-
teristics of all the units are displayed.
Compact. Displays the data in compact format: for each equipment, the hardware characteris-
tics of the controller unit are displayed.
To switch from a display modality to the other, select the relevant option.
In case of compact display, it is also possible to switch to the expansion modality pressing the
Exp push-button next to each row of the table. In this case, the table will display only the hard-
ware data relevant to the expanded equipment (the IP address field is automatically set, as fil-
ter, the IP address of the expanded equipment).
Max Rows. Box indicating the maximum number of displayed records.

The x of y Rows field indicates the number of displayed records (x) with respect to the number
of total records (y) matching the set filter criteria.
To display all the records matching the set criteria, type the total number of records in the Max
Rows box.
Parameters
Eq. Type. Type of equipment.
Description. Description of the equipment.
Hw Edition. Hardware version of the unit.
Part Num. Part Number of the unit.
Serial Num. Serial number of the unit.
Selecting the heading of a column, a red arrow is displayed.

Select the arrow to sort the rows in alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column.
When the arrow is selected, the list is re-sorted in increasing order. At the next selection, the list is
sorted again in decreasing order and so on.
Push-buttons
Read. Reads the data stored in the database of the NMS5LX system and displays them accord-
ing to the set filter.
Reset Filter. Deletes the filter setting.
Export timer. Periodically saves the displayed data to file.
Export manual. Saves the displayed data to file.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 203

NE Backup/Restore
WARNING The equipment list for which the NE Backup/Restore functionality is configurable. Default: EL,
US, ADM-1, EXP63, ALFO, ALFOPlus, AGS10, AGS20, ALCPLUS2e, ALFOplus80, ALFOplus80HD and ALS se-
ries (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2).
The NE Backup/Restore command displays the backup files of equipment in the open map.
Operations
Display the backup files of equipment in the map
Restore the equipment configuration
Save the equipment configuration (backup)
Lock/unlock a backup file
GUI
NE Backup/Restore window
See also
NE Backup/Restore functionality (more info)
Display the backup files of equipment in the map

1. Select Configuration > NE Backup/Restore.
2. In the Equipment Type area of the NE Backup/Restore window, select the type of equipment for which
you wish to show the files.
3. If you wish to display a specific detail of the files, execute one or more of the following basic settings,
according to the wished filter criteria:
It is possible to set the logical addresses in one of the following ways:
Type the logical address of the NE in the text field and press Add.
Press Tree. A window opens, where are displayed the containers and the equipment in
the map. Select the wished equipment. The equipment is displayed in the text field. Press
Add.
The Tree push-button is only available in the page open with the Microsoft Internet Ex-
plorer browser.
The values set in this way are inserted in the list above the text field.
To delete a record from the list, select the address and press Del.
In order to set the criterion, type the wished IP address.
It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only for the final fields (the asterisk cannot
precede a field with numbers). For example, the value 172.18.54.* or 172.18.*.* are allowed,
while the value 172.18.*.215 is not allowed.
Pressing IP Clear to delete the IP Address.
File lock. Status of the file. Selecting the option:
All, the list will display all the backup files.
Unlocked, the list will display only the unlocked files.
Locked, the list will display only the locked files.
204 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Eligible, the list will display only the files matching all the following rules:
Last backup file of a NE for which no locked backup file already exists.
The backup file must not contain errors.
To set the criterion select the wished option.
4. Type, in the Max Rows box, the maximum number of files you wish to display.
5. Press Apply Filter.

The NE Backup/Restore window displays the backup files of the NEs in the open map which match the
set criteria.
6. Press the Info push-button relevant to a backup file to display its detail.
The File Property window displays the following information:
Logical Address. Logic address of the NE.
File Name. Name of the backup file. The format of the name of the file is the following: <Equip-
ment ID> <hours minutes seconds> <days months years>_U.bku.
File Date. Date/time of saving of the backup file.
Backup Result. Result of the operation of file saving.
Restore Date. Date/time when the operation of file restore has been executed.
Restore Result. Result of the operation of file restore.
The presence of the symbol - signals that the information is not available.
For the Backup Result and Restore Result the background colour:
Green, indicates that the operation was successful.
Red, indicates that the operation is failed.
Restore the equipment configuration

2. In the NE Backup/Restore window, Display the backup files of equipment in the map.
3. Press the relevant Restore push-button.

The NE Restore window displays the following information:
File Name. Name of the backup file.
4. Press Confirm.
The operation is scheduled to the process which manages the procedure of periodic file saving.
Save the equipment configuration (backup)

2. In the NE Backup/Restore window, continue in one of the following ways:
a. Display the backup file/files of the equipment whose configuration you wish to save (Display the
backup files of equipment in the map).
b. Press Backup near the file/files.

Or:
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 205

a. Press Switch to Equipment.
All the pieces of equipment, managed by the NE Backup/Restore functionality and present in the
map, are displayed.
The records with the available Backup push-button correspond to the equipment in connected
status, whose configuration can be saved.
b. Press the Backup push-button relevant to the equipment whose configuration you wish to save.
The NE Backup window opens with the following information:
3. Press Confirm.
The operation is scheduled to the process which manages the procedure of periodic file saving.
Lock/unlock a backup file


The NE Backup/Restore window opens in the default browser.
2. Display the backup files of equipment in the map you wish to lock/unlock.
3. To LOCK the file, press the relevant Lock push-button.

The file is locked (label Locked - column Lock).
Press Lock All to lock all the files in the NE Backup/Restore page.
To UNLOCK a file, press the relevant Unlock push-button.
The file is unlocked (column Lock empty).
206 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NE Backup/Restore window
This window allows managing the backup files of the equipment configuration.
Filter area
Equipment Type. Type of equipment. The selection of this filter is mandatory to display the
backup file. The setting of all the other filters is optional.
File lock. Status of file. If active the option:
All, the list will display all the backup files.
Unlocked, the list will display only the unlocked files.
Locked, the list will display only the locked files.
Eligible, the list will display only the files matching all the following rules:
Last backup file of a NE for which no locked backup file already exists.
The backup file must not contain errors.
Display options
Max Rows. Box indicating the maximum number of displayed files.
The x of y Rows field indicates the number of displayed records (x) with respect to the number
of total records (y) which match the set filter criteria.
In order to display all the records matching the set criteria, it is necessary to type the total num-
ber of records in the Max Rows box.
Backup records
Backup Date. Date/time of creation of the backup file.
Lock. Status of the file: Locked, <empty box> (unlocked).
Backup file name. Name of the backup file. The format of the name of the file is the following:
<Equipment ID> <hour minutes seconds> <days months years>_U.bku.
Operations available. Push-button:
Info. It displays the characteristics of the file. If the colour of the box backgrounds:
Green, there are not errors in the backup file.
Red, there are errors in the backup file.
Restore. It transfers the configuration stored in the file to the relevant equipment in the
map.
Backup. It saves the current equipment configuration to file.
Lock/Unlock. It locks/unlocks the file. The push-buttons are displayed one in alterna-
tive to the other, depending on the status of the file.
When a push-button is disabled, it means that the relevant function is not available.
Selecting the heading of a column, a red arrow is displayed.

Select the arrow to sort the rows in alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column.
When the arrow is selected, the list is sorted again in increasing order. At the next selection, the
list is sorted again in decreasing order and so on.
Push-buttons
Apply Filter. It reads the data stored in the database of the NMS5LX system and displays them
according to the set filters.
Switch to Equipment. It displays all the pieces of equipment, managed by the NE Backup/Re-
store functionality, in the map. The records with the available Backup push-button correspond
to the equipment in connected status, whose configuration can be saved. Push-button available
in alternative to Switch to Backup File.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 207

Switch to Backup File. It displays the backup files of the equipment, managed by the NE Back-
up/Restore functionality, in the map. Push-button available in alternative to Switch to Equip-
ment.
Reload. It re-reads the data stored in the database of the NMS5LX system.
Lock All. It locks all file in the list.
208 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NE Backup/Restore functionality (more info)
WARNING The equipment list for which the NE Backup/Restore functionality is configurable. Default: EL,
US, ADM-1, EXP63, ALFO, ALFOPlus, AGS10, AGS20, ALCPLUS2e, ALFOplus80, ALFOplus80HD and ALS se-
ries (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2).
The NE Backup/Restore functionality allows saving the complete configuration of the equipment (Backup
operation) to file, displaying the list of the available backup files and transferring the configuration stored
in a file to the relevant equipment (Restore operation).
Backup operation
Restore operation
Backup operation
Operation
The saving of the backup files is automatically executed by the supervision system or it can be
forced in any moment (see Save the equipment configuration (backup)).
The saving modalities by the supervision system are the following: NMS5LX periodically verifies
if, for each equipment, one of the following conditions has occurred:
No backup file is available.
A change (set) has been executed to the equipment configuration.
A connection in Configuration modality has been activated between LCT and the equip-
ment.
The connection between the supervision system and the equipment has been activated
or re-activated.
A new operation has been stored in the Command Log stored in the equipment controller.
Saved configuration
For each equipment, which at least one of the above mentioned conditions has occurred for, the
system saves the complete configuration in a file. At the successive check, if at least one of the
above mentioned conditions has occurred again, the complete configuration of the equipment
will be saved in a different file and so on.
With complete equipment configuration we mean:
Configuration of the equipment.
Configuration of the communication port (IP Ethernet, PPP RS-232, etc.) of the routing
tables and of the possible OSPF parameters.
List of remote equipment (Remote Element Table).
The periodicity of the control by NMS5LX can be configured by the Superuser.

A maximum of N files (N configurable - default=3) for each equipment is saved on the disk of
the machine where the supervision system is installed. The file successive to the maximum
number will overwrite the oldest backup file.
Lock file
It is possible to lock one or more files in such a way that the system does not overwrite them
(see Lock/unlock a backup file). These files will not enter in the count of the maximum number
of files saved for each managed equipment. This means they will not be overwritten until the
user unlocks them.
For example, suppose that the system saves a maximum of 3 files for each equipment. For the
equipment A, the files A1, A2 and A3 are automatically saved in this order. If the oldest file (A1)
is locked, when the fourth file is generated, this will not overwrite the file A1, but a new file (A4)
will be created. If no other file is locked, when a new file (A5) is generated, this will overwrite
the oldest file (A2). In this way, the locked files + the last three saved files will be always avail-
able to the user.
It is possible to lock as many files as you wish. The files will remain locked until the user unlocks
them.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 209

Operating systems
Two files with the same content will be available for each backup file in the system disk, one for
each formatting compatible with the O.S.:
LINUX. The path, where the file is saved, can be configured. The name of the file has the
following format: <Equipment ID> <hour minute second> <day month year>_U.bku.
WINDOWS. The path, where the file is saved, can be configured. The name of the file has
the following format: <Equipment ID> <hour minute second> <day month
year>_W.bku.
This file is compatible with the applications SCT, WEB LCT, SCT BKU Builder and is avail-
able on the disk of the machine where ones supervision system is installed.
By means of RAN (Remote Access NMS5UX) application, it is possible to copy a backup file to a
different machine or external disk by means of a proper push-button in the NE Backup/Restore
page.
Restore operation
The Restore operation (see Restore the equipment configuration) transfers to the equipment ONLY the con-
figuration parameters in the backup file.
The restore of the communication parameters (IP Address, routing tables, etc.) can be executed only
through the SCT or WEB LCT application. The restore of the Remote Element Table can be configured
through the Remote Element Table command or through the SCT/WEB LCT application.
210 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

LOCATE
Equipment List Locate. It displays the list of equipment managed by NMS5LX system.
Proxy Equipment List. It displays the list of equipment managed by Proxy Agent and the relevant Proxy
address.
Physical Link Browser. It displays the list of the physical links among the NEs in the network.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 211

Equipment List Locate
The Equipment List Locate command displays the list of the equipment managed by NMS5LX.
Operations
Display the list of the equipment
Save/print the list of equipment
Verify the configuration/operating status of the equipment
Verify the equipment information
Verify in which map the symbol of the equipment is present
Add/remove a prefix to the logical address of the equipment
Delete and rewrite the equipment table
Verify the results of the PM measures of the equipment
Activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time
Update the equipment software (FAMxc)
Verify/change the status/severity of the alarms and the trap forwarding status
Verify/change the LCT users list of the equipment
Verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to the equipment
Verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test)
Connect one or more pieces of equipment
Disconnect one or more pieces of equipment
Re-align the alarms of one or more pieces of equipment
Acquire the configuration of one or more pieces of equipment
Transfer the configuration of the equipment to another equipment of the same type
Start the Command Executor application
GUI
Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window
Display the list of the equipment

1. Select Locate > Equipment List Locate or press .

The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens.
Save/print the list of equipment


2. To print or save to a file:
212 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

All the pieces of equipment stored in the database, select File > Print/Save > All Items.
The displayed equipment, select File > Print/Save > Filtered Items. If the filters are not ac-
tive, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
A group of equipment, select the record and, then, File > Print/Save > Selected Items.

To print the data:

If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you
wish to use.
c. Press OK.
saved.
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.

2. In the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, select View > Set Filter.
Match Logical Address. Logic address of the NE.
To set the criteria, type the address of the NE in the text field.
It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character. For example, typing in the box the letter:
p*o, the NEs whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the win-
dow.
Match IP Address. Type (real or virtual) and IP address of equipment.
To set as criterion the equipment:
Real, activate the SNMP Equipment option, and type the IP address of the wished NE in
the text fields.
Virtual, activate the Virtual Equipment option.
Match connection status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5LX.
Match equipment type. Equipment type.
Match performance. Activation status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measures.
To set the criterion, select the option:
Enabled, the NEs with at least one PM measure will be displayed.
Disabled, the NEs with no active PM measures will be displayed.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 213

The box is not available if in the warning window, displayed at the opening of the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window, the No push-button has been pressed.
Match Alarm. Severity level of the alarms of the NE.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished severity.
Match Alarm Disabled. Enabling status of the alarms/trap sending of the equipment to NMS5LX.
Enabled, the NEs that have not alarms or enabled trap sending will be displayed.
Disabled, the NEs that have at least one alarm or one disabled trap sending will be dis-
played.
Match Gosip Address. Filter not available for the current version of the system.
Sort by. Sorts the records.
Logical Address, the equipment will be listed in alphabetical order, with respect to the
logic address.
Type, the equipment will be listed according to the type of equipment.
To expand/compress a filter criterion without affecting its activation/deactivation status, use the up/
down arrows on the right side.
The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window displays only the records matching the activated criteria.
plete list), Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) and Help (it opens the
on-line manual) push-buttons.
Closing the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window automatically removes the possible active filters.

2. In the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, select the equipment.

Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more equipment window contemporarily.
3. Select Actions > Open Equipment.

The equipment window opens.
It is possible that, when the command is selected, a message is displayed. The description of the equip-
ment window and of the possible message displayed at its opening is described in the specific equip-
ment User Manual.
The equipment window can be opened also by a double click on the equipment record.


Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more Equipment Information window at the same
time.
3. Select Actions > Equipment Info.

The Equipment Information window opens (see par. Verify the characteristics and the functional status
of the equipment).
214 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Verify the equipment information

2. In the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, select the wished equipment, with acknowledge signal
(symbol x in the column Ack).
3. Select View > Acknowledge Status.

The Information window opens.
Verify in which map the symbol of the equipment is present

3. Select View > Equipment Location (Map).

The Equipment Location window opens.
Box/column:
Type. Type of NE.
Ip/Ph Address. IP or physical address of the NE.
Map name. Maps containing the NE.
Add/remove a prefix to the logical address of the equipment


2. In the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window:
To add a prefix:
a. Select one or more pieces of equipment which you wish to add the same prefix to.
b. Select Actions > Location > Assign.
The Location window opens.
c. Type, in the New Location Name box, the prefix you wish to add to the logical address of the
equipment (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 maximum 10 characters).
d. Press Apply.
In the Logical Addr column of the selected equipment, the prefix is added (prefix - logic ad-
dress).
The prefix is furthermore added in all the windows where the <logic address> field is present.
The only exception is the label of the icon that represents the equipment in the map, where the
prefix is not displayed.
If the equipment was already provided with prefix, the new value replaces the previous one.
3. To remove a prefix:
a. Select one or more equipment which you wish to remove the prefix to.
b. Select Actions > Location > Remove.

The prefix is removed from the logic address of the equipment.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 215

Delete and rewrite the equipment table

WARNING The command must be used only in case of a supposed misalignment between the information
in the equipment table and the information of the equipment represented on video in the maps.
2. In the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, select Actions > Map Structure Rebuild.
Verify the results of the PM measures of the equipment

WARNING Operation not available for virtual NE objects and virtual NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2
Node type (for the equipment of a nodal system, the command is present in the nodal window - ALplus
nodal window/ALCplus2 nodal window).
2. Select the equipment in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window.

Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more Graphic Performance Manager windows at
the same time.
3. Select Actions > Performance Monitoring.

The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens, where the period of time for which you wish to
verify the results of the PM measures is required.
In the boxes:
Date Reference, the start date (day/month/year) is displayed (by default, the current day is
set).
Day Previous, the number of days before the set date, constituting the duration of the period
(default: 30 days) is displayed.
It is possible to display at most the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting from the current
day). The results of the PM measures are stored in the database of the system (Performance Monitoring
table). They are available for a period of 6 months, then they are automatically removed.

Activate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter of a measure point, also
the other control parameters are automatically selected, compatible with the measure unit of
the selected item (see step 7).
Deactivate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter
is selected.
6. Press OK.
7. Select TPC menu in the Graphic Performance Monitoring window.

All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - yellow wordings) and the measure points
(where the control parameters are really measured) (TP - Termination Point - orange wording) available
for the selected equipment are selected.
8. Select the control parameters, for which you wish to display the results of the PM measures.
Not all the control parameters of a TP can be displayed in the same graphic. They have been subdivided
according to the measure unit used for their count: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc.
The Graphic Performance Monitoring window displays the results of the selected control parameters.
216 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour from orange to red. While
the selected control parameter is characterized by a led on its left side.
measure unit present in the same TP or in any of the other TPs.
The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter are not avail-
able (wording of grey colour).
In order to display the results of the parameters with measure unit different from the currently selected
one, it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command) and,
Activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time

WARNING Operation not available for the virtual NE objects.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type, the operation will be executed on all the pieces
of node equipment.

Selecting two or more records of the same type, it is possible to activate/deactivate the PM measures
of all the selected NEs at the same.
3. Select Actions > View/Modify PM Status.

4. To activate:
All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select Action > Start
> All.
The measures relevant to the measure points in the Termination Point area select Action >
Start > Filtered.
tion > Start > Selected.
To deactivate:
All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select the Action >
Stop > All.
The measures relevant to the measure points in the Termination Point area, select Action >
Stop > Filtered.
tion > Stop > Selected.
In the area Message, the result of the operation is displayed.

WARNING Operation available only if a single equipment (except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO) has
been selected.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command can be done in ALplus nodal window/
ALCplus2 nodal window.

Selecting two or more records of the same type, it is possible to execute the operation for all the pieces
of equipment at the same type.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 217

3. Select Actions > NE Sw/Fw Download.
4. In the Selection file DWL box of Software Download window, set the file you wish to use for the update.
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Select (the Select file for download
window opens) and select the file among the available ones.
If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the /home/ftp/pub directory, it is necessary to copy
it in this directory as the supervision system needs, in order to execute correctly the download opera-
tion, to find the file for the update in the /home/ftp/pub directory.
Press Read to display a brief description illustrating the content of the selected file.
5. Set the type of download you wish to execute. Select the option:
Forced, to update the software of the equipment controller.
Only different or not present, to update the software of peripheral units (FPGA file and/or oper-
ating code).
6. Activate the Bench switch? box if you wish that, at the end of the download, a switching of the memory
bench is automatically executed in order to use the bench with the updated software.
7. Set the execution modality of the download. If you wish that the update is:
Immediately executed, activate the Immediate Download box.
The box can be activated only if a single NE is selected.
Scheduled to be executed in a second moment, set the date/time in the Scheduling data time
for Download area.
8. Press Start Dwl.

If, in the previous step, has been:
Activated the Immediate Download box, a window opens where the physical address, logic ad-
dress and the type of NE which is updating the software, and the status of the operation (Wait-
ing, Downloading, Complete, etc.) are displayed.
The operation takes some minutes.
Before starting the update of the NE controller, it executes a compatibility check between the
software that must be sent and the one on the controller itself.
The check consists in verifying the technology and the type of NE (indicated by the first 2 char-
acters of the file name). For some types of NEs, checks are executed also on the 3rd character
of the filename. More information is reported in the equipment user manual relevant to the spe-
cific type of NE.
If the parameters are compatible, the download starts. Otherwise, the software update will not
be executed.
If the operation is successful, opening the RelSw window, in the Release box relevant to the up-
dated memory bench, the new version of the software is displayed.
If it is not successful, the Status box relevant to the updated memory bench displays the old
version or the wording not loaded.
Set a date/time of execution for the software update, the Software Download window is closed.
One record for every NE in the Equipment list for download area is added in the list of the sched-
uled equipment for the download.


2. Select the wished FAMxc.
Selecting two or more records of the FAMxc type, it is possible to execute the operation for all the NEs
at the same type.
3. Select Actions > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download.
4. In the File Selection box of the Insert (FAMxc) window, set the file you wish to use for the update.
218 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Browse (the fileSelection... window
opens) and select the file among the available ones.
If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/tftpdir directory, it is necessary to copy
it in this directory because the supervision system needs, in order to execute correctly the download
operation, to find the file for the update in the home/tftpdir directory.
5. Set the date/time, when you wish to schedule the operation, in the Date/Time Scheduled for Download
box.
6. Activate the Switch Bench and Restart box if you wish that, at the end of the download, a switch of the
memory bench and a restart of the equipment are executed.
The setting is valid for all the pieces of equipment in the Equipment List area. If you wish to execute a
different setting for one piece of equipment of the list:
a. Select the equipment.
b. Select Action > Bench Info.
c. Activate/deactivate the Switch Bench and Restart box in the Equipment Bench Releases window
as you wish.
d. Press Ok.
The wording Modified (Equipment List area) is displayed in the record of the selected equipment.
During the execution of the operation for the selected equipment, the setting of the Switch Bench and
Restart parameter in the Insert window will not be considered; instead, the setting of the same param-
eter if the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered.
7. If enabled, type the access code of the equipment in the Password box.
If the Superuser has defined the equipment password in the configuration file of the system, it is not
necessary to insert the code to access the equipment. It is sufficient to activate the Password Default
box.
The set password is valid for all the equipment in the Equipment List area. If a piece of equipment has
a different password, it is necessary to set in the following way:
a. Select equipment.
c. Type the equipment access code in the Password box of the Equipment Bench Releases window.
d. Press Ok.
The wording Modified (Equipment List area) is displayed in the record of the selected equipment.
During the execution of the operation for the selected equipment, the setting of the Switch Bench and
Restart parameter in the Insert window will not be considered; instead, the setting of the same param-
eter if the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered.
8. Press OK.
The Software Download window is closed.
One record is added for every NE in the Equipment List to the list of equipment scheduled for the down-
load.
Verify/change the status/severity of the alarms and the trap forwarding status

WARNING Operation available only if a single equipment (except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc) has been
selected.
3. Select Actions > Equipment Severity Code.

The Equipment Severity Code window displays the list of the alarms relevant to the selected equipment.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 219

For each alarm, the status (enabled/disabled), the transmission status of the relevant trap from the NE
to the NMS5LX system and the local severity level of the alarm are displayed.
The list does not contain the alarms of the user inputs, which have a different Alarm severity manage-
ment.
4. To change the characteristics of an alarms double click on the wished alarm or select the alarm and
then Action > View/Modify Severity.
The View/Modify Severity Code window displays in the box/area:
Alarm Description. Name of the alarm.
Status. Status of the alarm and of the trap sending by the NE to the system. If active the option:
Enabled, the alarm and the sending of trap is enabled.
Trap Disabled, the sending of trap is disabled.
Alarm Disabled, the alarm is disabled.
Severity. Severity level associated to the alarm.
The label (NMS5LX default) indicates the default setting associated to that alarm by the super-
vision system.
5. To change the enabling status of alarm/trap sending and/or the severity level, select the push-button
relevant to the wished value respectively in the Status and/or Severity area.
If the Alarm Disabled option is selected (Status area), the severity level associated to the alarm cannot
be changed.
6. Press Modify.
The possible modification of the enabling status of alarm/trap sending is displayed in the Equipment
Severity Code window.
Verify/change the LCT users list of the equipment

selected.
3. Select Actions > LCT Equipment Users.

If the selected equipment is:
of type ALFOplus80HD, the NE User Manager window is displayed and the procedures to change
the list of the LCT users are the same displayed in the following paragraphs:
Add a user
Modify a user
Delete a user
of all the other types, except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, the LCT User Manager window is dis-
played and the procedures to change the list of the LCT users are the same displayed in the
following paragraphs:
Add a user
Modify a user
Delete a user
220 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to the equipment

selected.
Functionality available only for equipment managed by SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
3. Select View > LCT Logged Users.

The Logged Users window displays the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to the NE when
the command is selected.
Verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test)


3. Select Commands > Line Test.

The Command Scope area of the LINE TEST command window displays the selected NEs for which the
operation will be executed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and
type.
To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes in the Filter On Type area.
4. Press Execute.
Another LINE TEST command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
Address column. Logic address.
Type column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the operation:
OK. The operation was successful.
FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is dis-
played among brackets.
During the operation, press Stop to stop the procedure. For example, if the execution of the operation
has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the
next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the sys-
tem will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will dis-
play only the first two NEs.
To print the displayed information, press Print.

3. Select Commands > Connect.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 221

The Command Scope area of the CONNECT command window displays the selected NEs for which the
type.
4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in disconnected or unreachable status.
Another CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from brown it
becomes green, light blue, yellow, orange or red depending on the severity of the NE
alarms.

3. Select Commands > Disconnect.

The Command Scope area of the DISCONNECT command window displays the selected NEs for which
the operation will be executed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address
and type.
4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected or unreachable status.
Another DISCONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
Address field, logic address.
Type field, type of NE.
Status field, result of the operation:
OK, the operation was successful: the NE symbol changes colour from the current colour
to brown.
FAILED! ...., the operation is failed: a message is displayed among brackets explaining
the cause of the failure.
222 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001


3. Select Commands > Alarm Re-alignment.

In the Command Scope area of the ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window, the selected NEs, for
which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in
order: logic address and type.
4. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status.
Another ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
To print the displayed information press Print.

3. Select Commands > Configuration Upload.

In the Command Scope area of the UPLOAD command window, the selected NEs, for which the oper-
ation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic ad-
dress and type.
4. Press Execute.
Another UPLOAD command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 223

Transfer the configuration of the equipment to another equipment of the same type

selected.

3. Select Commands > Configuration Download.
4. In the Configuration Download window, depending on the operation you wish to execute, follow (from
the step 3) the procedure:
Transfer the configuration of equipment to one or more virtual pieces of equipment
Start the Command Executor application


2. In the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, select the equipment for which you wish to execute
the series of SNMP commands stored on file.
3. Select Commands > Command Executor.

If the message No Command available for the selected equipment is displayed, the supervision system
is not provided, for the selected equipment type, with files containing the sequences of SNMP com-
mands. SIAE MICROELETTRONICA provides, on demand, files containing specific sequences of SNMP
commands.
4. In the Select Command area of the Execute Command window, select the wished action.
5. Press Start Command Executor.

The SNMP Command Executor window opens.
6. Press Start Command.

In the Message area, the progress of the operations is displayed.
It is possible to stop the procedure pressing OK in the Command Executor window displayed at the
activation of the operation.
224 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window
If the profile of the user who has selected the command is:
Superuser, the information is referred to the equipment in ALL the map managed by NMS5LX.
Entry, Normal, Advanced or Privileged, the information is referred ONLY to the equipment in the
open map.
At the opening of the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, it is possible that a warning window opens,
indicating that the database contains a number of pieces of equipment higher than N.
For this cause, the user is asked if he wishes that the information about the active measures of PM is made
available (operation that can take a lot of time). Press:
Yes, the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens and, for each NE in the list, it will be
possible to verify the activation status of the PM measures (Perf. column).
No, the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens, but the information relevant to the ac-
tive measures of PM will be not available.
The N limit is, by default, 100. The value can be changed by the Superuser.
Parameters
Status. Status of the connection between equipment and NMS5LX.
Alarm. Operating status (alarms) of the equipment. The severity level of the alarm on the
equipment is displayed. In case of more alarms with different severity, the highest severity is
displayed.
Alr Disabled. Enabling status of the alarms and of the sending of the equipment traps to the
supervision system. Symbol:
X. At least an alarm or the sending of the equipment trap is disabled. To verify the disa-
bled alarms and the disabled sending of traps, open the Equipment Severity Code win-
dow.
. The equipment has not alarms or sending of traps disabled.
Lct Presence. Status of the connection between the LCT program and the equipment:
ABSENT. The LCT user is not currently connected to the equipment.
CONFIGURING. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Configuration modality.
MONITORING. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Monitoring modality.
Lct Config. Enabling status of the LCT for the possible connection to the equipment:
Enabled. The LCT user can activate the connection to the equipment both in Monitoring
and in Configuration modality.
Disabled. The LCT user can activate the connection to the equipment only in Monitoring
modality.
Perf. Activation status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measures. Symbol:
X. At least one measure of PM is active.
. No measure of PM is active.
. . . Information is not available. In the warning window, displayed at the opening of the
Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, the No push-button has been selected.
Ack. Acknowledge status of the following signals:
Alarm (current and/or in the alarm history).
Presence of LCT in Configuration modality.
Operation of Configuration Upload not correctly executed.
Symbol:
X. At least one not acknowledged signal is present.
-. Not acknowledged signals are not present.
IP Address. IP address of the equipment. The wording VIRTUAL EQ. indicates that the record
refers to a virtual NE.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 225

Status bar
xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is ac-
tive, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records.
Filter. Activation of one or more filters.
Timestamp. Date and time when the window has been opened or updated.
Menu bar
File > Print/Save. It prints or saves to file the information.
Actions > Open Equipment. It opens the equipment window.
Actions > Equipment Info. It displays the configuration/operation status of the equipment.
Actions > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window.
Actions > Performance Monitoring. It displays the results of the PM measures of one NE.
Actions > View/Modify PM Status. It activates/deactivates one or more PM measures at the
same time.
Actions > Cfg File Download. It allows to Download a configuration file on pieces of equip-
ment of the same type.
Actions > Add Physical Link. It creates a physical link between the two selected NEs.
Actions > NE Sw/Fw Download. It updates the equipment software.
Actions > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download. It updates the equipment software (FAMxc).
Actions > Equipment Severity Code. It displays/changes the status/severity of the alarms
and the status of the trap sending of the equipment.
Actions > LCT Equipment User. It displays/changes the LCT user list of the equipment.
Actions > Location. It adds/removes a prefix to the logic address of the equipment.
Actions > Map Structure Rebuild. It deletes and rewrites the table containing the information
relevant to the equipment in the map (equipment table).
Commands > Line Test. It verifies the real reach ability of the equipment.
Commands > Connect. It activates the connection between NMS5LX and the equipment.
Commands > Disconnect. It deactivates the connection between NMS5LX and equipment.
Commands > Alarm Re-alignment. It forces the acquisition of the equipment alarms.
Commands > Configuration Upload. It forces the acquisition of the equipment configuration.
Commands > Configuration Download. It transfers the configuration of the equipment to
another NE of the same type.
Commands > Communication Server Board. It activates/deactivates the connection be-
tween the NMS5LX and the CommServer-S equipment (CS objects).
Commands > Command Executor. Executes series of SNMP commands stored to file.
View > Acknowledge Status. It displays the acknowledge status of the alarms (current and/
or alarm history), of the presence of LCT in Configuration modality and of the not correctly ex-
ecuted Configuration Upload operation.
View > Equipment Location (Map). It lists the maps containing the symbol of selected NE.
View > LCT Logged Users. It displays the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to NE.
The information corresponds to the characteristics/operating status of the equipment when the Equipment
Browser [List/Locate] window has been opened or updated. The presence of the - symbol indicates that
the information is not available as not meaningful for the status and/or the type of equipment, which is
referred to.
226 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Proxy Equipment List
WARNING The Proxy Agent function is optional. The function and the relevant command are available only
on customers demand.
The Proxy Equipment List command displays the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent and
their Proxy address.
Operations
Display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent
Verify/change the Proxy configuration parameters of the equipment
GUI
Equipment Managed by Proxy window
Display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent

1. Select Locate > Proxy Equipment List.

The Equipment Managed by Proxy window opens, where the list of the equipment managed by the
Proxy Agent is displayed.
Verify/change the Proxy configuration parameters of the equipment

1. Select Locate > Proxy Equipment List.
2. In the Equipment Managed by Proxy window, select the wished equipment.
3. Select Actions > Modify Proxy Parameters.

The Modify Proxy Parameters window displays the parameters:
Equipment Proxy Address. Address used by the Proxy Agent to acknowledge the equipment.
Primary IP Address Trap Destination. Address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent forwards
the traps coming from the equipment.
Secondary IP Address Trap Destination. Address of an additional machine to which the Proxy
Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment.
4. To change one or more parameter, type the new value in the relevant boxes.
If a NE of type ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node is selected, the addresses used by Proxy Agent to rec-
ognize the equipment belonging to the node are automatically configured.
5. Press Apply.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 227

Equipment Managed by Proxy window
The information correspond to the characteristics of the equipment at the selection of the command.
<node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value between 1 and 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).
Parameters
Logical Addr. Logic address of the equipment.
Eq. Proxy Addr. Address of equipment acknowledged by the Proxy Agent: Proxy address of the
equipment (parameter defined by the user during the creation phases of the equipment - Add).
Status bar
View equipment. Activation of the filter. In detail, if the active check-box is:
Managed by Proxy Agent, the window displays the equipment managed by Proxy Agent.
Not Managed by Proxy Agent, the window displays the equipment not managed by the
Proxy Agent.
Managed by Proxy Agent and Not Managed by Proxy Agent, the window displays all the
equipment.
xx of yy. Number of the displayed records and number of total records (xx of yy). If no filter is
active, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the total number of records.
Menu bar
Actions > Refresh. It refreshes the information in the window.
Actions > Modify Proxy Parameters. It displays/changes the Proxy configuration parameters
of the selected equipment.
228 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Physical Link Browser
WARNING Optional command, available only on Customers demand.
The Physical Link List command displays the list of the physical links among the NEs of a network.
This functionality works on a rigid tree network structure organized on a maximum of two container levels
and allows understanding how the NEs in the different maps (or in the same map) are connected.
Operations
Display the list of the physical links relevant to a NE or to a container
Change the name of a physical link
Delete a physical link
Find one of the NEs end of the physical link
Filter the display of the physical link list
GUI
Physical Link Browser window
Display the list of the physical links relevant to a NE or to a container

1. Select a NE or a container in the map.

2. Select Locate > Physical Link Browser.
The Physical Link Browser window is displayed.
Change the name of a physical link

WARNING The command is available only if the user has selected a NE or a container in the map.
3. In the Physical Link Browser window, select the row corresponding to the link you wish to change.
4. Select Options > Modify.

5. In the Modify Physical Link window, type the new label in the Link Label field for the selected link.
6. Press Update Label.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 229

Delete a physical link

WARNING This operation deletes only the physical link at list level. It does not delete a possible graphic
link between the NEs and has no impact on the traffic among NEs.

The command is available only if the user has selected a NE or a container in the map.
3. In the Physical Link Browser window, select the row corresponding to the link you wish to delete.
4. Select Options > Delete Link.
5. Press Ok.
Find one of the NEs end of the physical link


3. In the Physical Link Browser window, select:
Options > Find Equipment > Source, to bring in foreground (or open, if closed) the map win-
dow containing the NE source of the link.
Options > Find Equipment > Destination, to bring in foreground (or open, if closed) the map
window containing the NE destination of the link.
The NE considered link source is the one selected as first during the creation of the link itself.
The NE considered link destination is the one selected as second during the creation of the link itself.
Filter the display of the physical link list


3. In the Physical Link Browser window, select View > Filter.

In the Filter window, the list of the link can be filtered on the basis of one or more criteria, correspond-
ing to the column of the Physical Link Browser window.
4. To activate a filter criterion, select the check-box next to the criterion itself.
A text box is displayed, where the user can type the string to use for the filter. It is possible to use the
character asterisk (*) as jolly character.
The function executes the logic AND of all the activated criteria, displaying only the rows which match
all the selected filter criteria.
Press next to a filter criterion to close the text box without deactivating the set criterion. Press
to display the text box again.
Deselect the check-box next to a filter criterion to close the text box and deactivate the set criterion.
5. Press OK.
230 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Physical Link Browser window
If the user has selected:

a container, the window displays the list of all the physical links relevant to all the NEs in the
selected container and in the possible containers of lower or upper level (the maximum depth
of the examined network structure is two level).
a NE, the window displays the list of all the physical links relevant to the selected NE (even to
the NEs in the containers of lower or upper level, for a maximum depth of two levels).
Parameters
Link Name. Label of the link generated during the creation of the physical link.
Link Type. Type of the corresponding physical link:
Radio, connection between two radio channels.
E1, connection between two E1 channels.
ETH, connection between two Ethernet LAN ports.
STM-1, connection between two STM-1 streams.
nBus, connection between two TDM or Ethernet nodal buses.
Source Equipment. IP address of the first NE selected during the link creation.
Source Port. Port of the source NE used in the link.
Destination Equipment. IP address of the second NE selected during the link creation.
Destination Port. Port of the destination NE used in the link.
Status bar
xx of yy. Number of displayed links and number of total links (xx of yy). If no filter is active,
the number of displayed links corresponds to the number of total links.
Menu bar
Edit > Link Properties. It allows changing the name of the link.
Edit > Delete Link. It deletes the selected link.
Options > Find Equipment > Source. It brings in foreground (opens the window, if closed)
the NE source of the selected link.
Options > Find Equipment > Destination. It brings in foreground (opens the window, if
closed) the NE destination of the selected link.
View > Filter. It filters the list of the physical links.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 231

Filter window
The window allows filtering the display of the links present in the system maps.
Parameters
Match Link Name. Select this box to filter the list of the links by the link name. Type in the
text box the name (or part of it) which the link must have to be displayed in the list. It is possible
to use the jolly character asterisk (*).
Match Equipment/Port. Select this box to filter the list of the links by IP address/port of the
NEs belonging to the link.
Equipment. IP address which the NE must have so that the link is displayed in the list.
Port. Port of the NE which must belong to the link so that the link is displayed in the list.
Source/Destination. The filter considers both the source NEs and the destination NEs of
the link.
Source Only. The filter considers only the source NEs.
Destination Only. The filter considers only the destination NEs.
Match Link Type. Select this box to filter the list of the links by link type. The list will display
the links of the selected type:
Radio. Connection between two radio channels.
E1. Connection between two E1 channels.
ETH. Connection between two Ethernet LAN ports.
STM-1. Connection between two STM-1 streams.
nBus. Connection between two TDM or Ethernet nodal bus.
Match Link on Map. Select this option push-button to filter the list of the links by the map con-
taining the NEs constituting the links ends. Depending on the selected push-button, the boxes
below display the available maps.
NMS5 Map. The NEs ends of the link are within a NMS map.
PSM Map. The NEs ends of the link are within a Packet Service Manager map.
Ring Manager Map. The NEs ends of the link are within a Ring Manager map.
Push-buttons
Add. Select a map in the right box of the Match Link on Map area and press this push-button
to allow the filter displaying the links present in it.
Remove Select. Select a map in the left box of the Match Link on Map area and press this
push-button to forbid the filter displaying the links present in it.
Remove all. It deletes all the maps from the left box of the Match Link on Map area: if the
box Match Link on Map is selected, the filter will not display any link when Apply/Ok is
pressed.
Apply. Confirms the settings and leaves the Filter window open.
OK. Confirms the settings and close the Filter window. The Physical Link Browser window will
display only the physical links which match one or more set filter criteria.
Clear. Resets all the filter criteria.
Cancel. Closes the window without applying any filter to the list of physical links.
232 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

COMMAND
Line Test. It verifies the real reach ability of the equipment.

Connect. It activates the connection between NMS5LX and equipment.
Disconnect. It deactivates the connection between NMS5LX and equipment.
Force NE Disconnect. It forces the software disconnection of the equipment.
Ping. It executes the Ping in order to check the presence and reachability of the selected equipment.
Alarm Re-alignment. NMS5LX acquires the equipment alarm status.
Configuration Upload. NMS5LX acquires the equipment current configuration.
Configuration Download. It transfers the configuration of equipment to another equipment of the same
type.
Reset Equipment Controller. It executes the software reset of the equipment.
PMP Clear Alarm Table. It transfers to the PMP the alarm default table stored in the NMS5LX database.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 233

Line Test
The Line Test command verifies the real reach ability of the equipment.
Operations
Execute the Line Test for one or more pieces of equipment
Execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers
See also
Line Test command
Execute the Line Test for one or more pieces of equipment

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs, for which you wish to execute the test.
2. Select Command > Line Test > Network Element or press .

In the Command Scope area of the LINE TEST command window, the selected NEs, for which the op-
eration will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic
address and type.
the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes of the Filter On Type area.
3. Press Execute.
Type field column. Type of NE.
Status column. Result of the test:
OK. The test was successful.
FAILED!... The test is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed
among brackets.
234 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbols containing the NEs for which you wish to execute the test.
2. Select Command > Line Test > Container.

In the Command Scope area of the LINE TEST command window, the selected NEs, for which the op-
eration will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic
address and type.
3. Press Execute.
OK. The test was successful.
FAILED!... The test is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed
among brackets.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 235

Connect
The Connect command activates the connection between NMS5LX and equipment.
Operations
Connect the equipment of one or more containers
See also
Connect command

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs you wish to connect.
2. Select Command > Connect > Network Element or press .

The Command Scope area of the CONNECT command window displays the selected NEs, for which the
operation will be execute. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and
type.
3. Press Execute.
becomes green, light blue, yellow, orange or red depending on the severity of NE alarms.
236 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Connect the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbols containing the NEs you wish to connect.
2. Select Command > Connect > Container.

The CONNECT command window opens.
The Command Scope area of the CONNECT command window displays the selected NEs, for which the
operation will be execute. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and
type.
3. Press Execute.
becomes green, light blue, yellow, orange or red depending on the severity of the alarms
present on the NE.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 237

Disconnect
The Disconnect command deactivates the connection between NMS5LX and equipment.
Operations
Disconnect the equipment of one or more containers
See also
Disconnect command

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs you wish to disconnect.
2. Select Command > Disconnect > Network Element or press .

The Command Scope area of the DISCONNECT command window displays the selected NEs, for which
the operation will be execute. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address
and type.
3. Press Execute.
OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from the current
colour it becomes brown.
238 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Disconnect the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbols containing the NEs you wish to disconnect.
2. Select Command > Disconnect > Container.

The Command Scope area of the DISCONNECT command window displays the selected NEs, for which
the operation will be executed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address
and type.
3. Press Execute.
OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes its current colour brown.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 239

Force NE Disconnect
The Force NE Disconnect command forces the software disconnection of the equipment.
With software disconnection we mean that the NMS5LX system set graphically the equipment in discon-
nected status (brown icon), but it does not communicate the operation to the equipment itself.
The use of this command is necessary if the equipment remains graphically blocked in maintenance status
(pink icon).
Operations
Force the software disconnection of one or more pieces of equipment
Force the software disconnection of one or more pieces of equipment

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs you wish to disconnect.
2. Select Command > Force NE Disconnect.

The Command Scope area of the FORCED DISCONNECT command window displays the selected NEs,
for which the operation will be executed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic
address and type.
3. Press Execute.
The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected, unreachable or maintenance status.
Another FORCED DISCONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from the current
colour it becomes brown.
240 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Ping
The Ping command executes the Ping in order to check the presence and reachability of the selected equip-
ment.
Operations


If an object of type ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node is selected, the ping will be sent to the IP address
of the main equipment of the node.
2. Select Command > Ping or press the right mouse button and select Ping.
The Ping window displays the operation progress and the final statistics (number of sent and received
packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.).
Each Ping command sends the test packet three times.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 241

Alarm Re-alignment
The Alarm Re-alignment command acquires the equipment alarm status.
Operations
Re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers
See also

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs for which you wish to re-align the alarms.
2. Select Command > Alarm Re-alignment > Network Element or press .

The Command Scope area of the ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window displays the selected NEs,
address and type.
3. Press Execute.
Another ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of:
242 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbols containing the NEs for which you wish the re-align the alarms.
2. Select Command > Alarm Re-alignment > Container.

The Command Scope area of the ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window displays the selected NEs,
address and type.
3. Press Execute.
Another ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 243

Configuration Upload
The Configuration Upload command acquires the current configuration of equipment.
Operations
Acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers
See also

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs, which you wish to acquire the configuration.
2. Select Command > Configuration Upload > Network Element or press .

The Command Scope area of the UPLOAD command window displays the selected NEs, for which the
type.
3. Press Execute.
Another UPLOAD command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
244 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbols containing the NEs, for which you wish to acquire the configuration.
2. Select Command > Configuration Upload > Container.

The Command Scope area of the UPLOAD command window displays the selected NEs, for which the
type.
3. Press Execute.
Another UPLOAD command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 245

Configuration Download
WARNING Command available only if a single equipment (except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc) has been
selected.
For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the ALplus nodal window/
The Configuration Download command transfers the configuration of the equipment to another equip-
ment of the same type.
Operations
GUI
Configuration Download window
See also

1. Select the equipment whose type/configuration correspond to the characteristics of the equipment
wished for the transferring of the configuration.
2. Select Command > Configuration Download.

3. Select, in the Source area of the Configuration Download window, the (real or virtual) NE having the
configuration you wish to transfer.
4. Activate, in the Destination area, the Real Equipment (download) option.
5. Press Parameter Selection to define the configuration parameters you wish to transfer.
In the View Download Parameter window, the area:
Group, displays the logic groups, which the configuration parameters of the type of the consid-
ered equipment are subdivided in.
Attributes, displays the attributes relevant to the selected group in the Group area.
Each group and parameter is characterized by a check box.
If the box is active, it indicates that the group/parameter will be transferred during the download. If
the box is inactive, it indicates that the group/parameter will not be transferred during the download.
6. Activate the check boxes relevant to the groups/parameters that you do not wish to transfer.
The activation of one group has priority with respect to the setting of the parameters contained in it.
For example, if the group A is activated, when the configuration will be transferred, the values of the
parameters associated to the group A will be transferred, even if the box of the single parameters is
not active.
In order to activate all the check boxes at the same time, press Select all. In order to deactivate all
the check boxes at the same time, press Deselect all.
7. Select, in the Destination area, the NE or the group of NEs to which you wish to transfer the configu-
ration.
8. Select Command > Download Configuration and confirm.

In the Messages area, the start and the end of the operation are displayed as messages.
246 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001


1. Select the equipment whose type/configuration correspond to the characteristics of the wished equip-
ment for the transfer of the configuration.
2. Select Command > Configuration Download.
3. Select, in the Source area of the Configuration Download window, the (real or virtual) NE having the
configuration you wish to transfer.
4. Activate, in the Destination area, the Virtual Equipment (copy) option.
5. Select from the list the NE or the group of NEs, which you wish to transfer to configuration to.
6. Select Command > Copy Configuration and confirm.

In the Messages area, the start and the end of the operation are displayed as messages.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 247

Configuration Download window
This window allows managing the configuration transfer between equipment.
Area Source
Real Equipment. It displays the real NEs in the list.
Virtual Equipment. It displays the virtual NEs in the list.
NE. List of (real and/or virtual) NEs in the map with the same characteristics (type and values
of the configuration parameters) of the selected NE, FROM which the configuration to transfer
can be copied.
The two selections (Real Equipment and Virtual Equipment) are not mutually exclusive: real NEs
and virtual NEs can be displayed at the same time.
Area Destination
Real Equipment (download). It displays the real NEs in the list.
Virtual Equipment (copy). It displays the virtual NEs in the list.
NE. List of (real and/or virtual) NEs in the map with the same characteristics (type and values
of the configuration parameters) of the selected NE, which the configuration can be copied TO.
The list will not contain the (real or virtual) NE selected in the Source area, as the NE, which the
configuration to be transferred from is taken, is automatically excluded by the list of the NEs
which the configuration can be transferred to.
The two selections (Real Equipment (download) and Virtual Equipment (copy)) are mutually exclu-
sive: you can display only real NEs or only virtual NEs.
Menu bar
Command > Download Configuration. It transfers the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE
to one or more real NEs.
Command > Copy Configuration. It transfers the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE to one
or more virtual NEs.
Action > Refresh. It updates the data in the window.
Area Messages
This area displays the operations in progress as messages.
248 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Reset Equipment Controller
WARNING Command not available for the ELFO, SDH N+1 and FAMxc equipment.
The Reset Equipment Controller command executes the software reset of the equipment.
The operation consists in the re-initialization of all the communication channels (for example, with the su-
pervision system) of the equipment. Its execution causes a temporary disconnection of the equipment from
NMS5LX.
Operations

2. Select Command > Reset Equipment Controller.

NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 249

PMP Clear Alarm Table
The PMP Clear Alarm Table command transfer to the PMP equipment the default table of the alarms
stored in the NMS5LX database.
The files, which contains the tables of the default alarms relevant to each type of NE managed by the
NMS5LX, are copied in the database during the installation of the system.
Operations
Transfer to the PMP the default table of the alarms
Transfer to the PMP the default table of the alarms

1. Select the PMP.
2. Select Command > PMP Clear Alarm Table.

250 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

FAULT
Network Alarm History. It displays/manages the alarm history stored in the NMS5LX database, relevant
to the equipment of the open map.
Network Current Alarms. It displays/manages the alarms active in the equipment of the open map.
Old Alarm History. It displays/manages the alarm history previously saved to file.
NE Alarm History. It displays/manages the alarm history of the equipment.
NE Current Alarms. It displays/manages the alarms active in the equipment.
NE History Log. It displays/manages the alarm list stored on the controller of the equipment.
NE Command Log. It displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the users, stored on the
controller of the equipment.
Alarm Summary. It displays/manages the summary of the alarm history stored in the NMS5LX data-
base, relevant to the equipment of the open map.
Event Statistics. It displays the alarm statistics of all the pieces ofequipment in the network.
Transaction Log. It displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users, who
have changed the configuration of the network, of the supervision system and of the equipment.
Silenced eq. It displays/manages the equipment set in silenced status by the supervision system.
The generic term alarm indicates the alarm/status/event signal.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 251

Network Alarm History
The Network Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event signals
(alarms) stored in the NMS5LX database, relevant to the equipment of the open map.
Operations
Display the history of the alarms in the map
Save/print the alarms list
Copy the alarms list to a text editor
Delete the alarms
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update
Filter the alarms list
Highlight the symbol of the equipment in the map
Verify the time interval between two different alarms
Sort the alarms list
GUI
Alarm History Browser window
See also
Data update modality
Display the history of the alarms in the map

1. Select Fault > Network Alarm History or press .

The Alarm History Browser window displays the alarm history of the equipment in the open map.

2. In the Alarm History Browser window, to print or save to a file:

A group of alarms, select the corresponding records and then File > Print/Save > Selected.
The displayed alarms, select File > Print/Save > Filtered. If no filter is active, the displayed
records correspond to the records stored in the database.

To print the data:
In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer). If you want
to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you wish to use.
252 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

c. Press OK.
b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the info must be saved.
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.


2. In the Alarm History Browser window, to copy in a text editor:
A group of alarms, select the corresponding records and then File > Export > Selected.
The list of displayed alarms, select File > Export > Filtered. If no filter is active, the displayed
The default text editor window opens.
For the use of the text program, refer to the specific documentation.
Delete the alarms

WARNING The operation is not available if the check sign is present in the status bar of the Alarm History
Browser window. To execute the operation, it is necessary first to update the window, selecting the check
sign.
2. In the Alarm History Browser window, to delete from the list and from the NMS5LX database:
A group of alarms, select the corresponding records and Action > Delete > Selected Alarms.
The displayed alarms, select Action > Delete > Filtered Alarms. If the filters are not active,
the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
All the alarms of the database, select Action > Delete > All Alarms.
The records are deleted.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 253


WARNING The operation is not executed if the symbol is present in the status bar of the Alarm History
Browser window. To execute the operation, it is necessary first to update the window, selecting the check
sign.
After a record has been acknowledged, the operation cannot be undone.

2. In the Alarm History Browser window, to acknowledge:
A group of alarms, select the corresponding records and Action > Acknowledge > Selected
Alarms.
The displayed alarms, select Action > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms. If the filters are not
active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.
All the alarms of the database, select Action > Acknowledge > All Alarms.
It is possible to acknowledge an alarm also by a double click of the mouse button.
The User box of the Acknowledged Info window, displays the username of the NMS5UX user who re-
quired the acknowledge of the records. The value of the box is automatically set to the username of
the NMS5UX user who opened the map. The value cannot be changed.
3. Type, in the Trouble Identification Code box, a code identifying the records (alphanumeric string of max
16 characters); it can be used later as search criterion.
4. Type, in the Comment box, some additional information (alphanumeric string of max 500 characters).
5. Press Ok.
If the selected record refers to an alarm:
Detected, but not cleared yet, the record will be marked with the letter S.
Detected and cleared, the record will be marked with the letter C.
Only for the records marked with the letter S, when the relevant alarm is cleared, it will be possible to
acknowledge, by means of this procedure, the record again. After the second acknowledge, the letter
S will be replaced by the letter C.

2. In the Alarm History Browser window, select the record which you wish to display the detail of the ac-
knowledge for.
3. Press and keep pressed the right mouse button.

The Ack Info pop-up window opens showing the following information about the alarm:
TIC: Identification code of the record assigned by the user during the alarm acknowledge.
SET Ack Info area:
User. Username of the NMS5UX user who executed the acknowledgement of the record.
Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hour:min-
utes:seconds>.
CLEAR Ack Info area:
User. Username of the NMS5UX user who executed the acknowledgement of the record.
Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hour:min-
utes:seconds>.
254 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

If the alarm has been acknowledged the first time when it was in detected-cleared status, the data
in the SET Ack Info and CLEAR Ack Info areas are the same.
If the alarm has never been acknowledged, all the fields will be empty.


At the opening of the Alarm History Browser window, the automatic update of the information is inactive
by default.
2. To activate the automatic data update, select Action > Unfreeze Window or the symbol .
3. To deactivate again the automatic data update, select Action > Freeze Window or the symbol .
The Freeze Window and Unfreeze Window commands are displayed alternatively.

2. In the Alarm History Browser window, select View > Set Filter.
In the Filters Setting window, select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.
The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window, displaying a section that con-
tains the following options:
<Severity>. Type of signal (alarm/status/event), activation status of the signal and, for the
alarms, corresponding severity (the colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour as-
sociated to the severity of the alarm or the type of signal). Activating the box:
Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed.
Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed.
Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed.
Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed.
Status (blue), the status signals will be displayed.
Normal (green), the event signals will be displayed.
Active Alarms, the detected alarms will be displayed.
Cleared Alarms, the detected and cleared alarms will be displayed.
Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms.
Activating the box.
Occurred After, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or after
that displayed next to the option.
Occurred Before, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or before
To change the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scroll-
bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar.
In the box located over the bar, selecting the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to change
the date/time with step of one hour, while selecting the Fine Granularity item with step of one
second.
Activating the boxes at the same time and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to de-
termine a time interval.
Match Address. Logical address of the Network Element.
It is possible to set the logic address by means of one of the following ways:
Select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the map and press Add
From Map.
Type the logic address of the NE in the Source box and press Add.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 255

The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Address box.
To delete a single item from the list, select it and press Remove.
To delete all the items at the same time, press Remove All.
Match Object. Physical/logic objects that compose the NE.
Open the Equipment Type menu and choose the type of NE.
Open the Object menu and set the wished object.
It is possible to set only one class of object at a time or all the class contemporarily selecting
the All Objects item.
Match Selected Alarm. Description (Message field) of the selected record.
To set the criterion, select a record in the Alarm History Browser window.
The criterion is not available if no record has been selected or if two or more records are select-
ed.
Match Message String. Description of the alarm.
To set the criterion, type the wished string in the text field.
Activating the Case Sensitive box, distinction will be made between upper and lower case; de-
activating the box, no distinction will be made.
Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Acknowledge status of the alarms.
Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the acknowledged records will be displayed. Further-
more, it is possible to specify:
The identifying code assigned by the user to the record during the acknowledge, activat-
ing the TIC box and typing the code.
The username of the NMS5UX user who acknowledged, activating the User box and typ-
ing the username.
Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the record not yet acknowledged will be displayed.
The Alarm History Browser window displays only the records matching the specific criteria.
Closing the Alarm History Browser window automatically removes the possible active filters.
In the Filters Setting window, there are the push-buttons:
Save.... It saves the set criteria to a file.
Press the push-button to display the Save Filter window.
Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box and press OK.
Load.... It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
Press the push-button to display the Load Filter window.
Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK.
Delete.... It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
Press the push-button to display the Delete Filter window.
Clear Filters. It clears the activation of all the filters, except for the <Severity>, Match Ac-
knowledged, Match Unacknowledged criteria.
Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation.
Help. It opens the on-line manual.
The path displayed in the Selection box cannot be changed.

2. In the Alarm History Browser window, select the alarm relevant to the equipment you wish to highlight.
3. Select View > HighLight Equipment On Map.

In the map, the symbol of the NE is highlighted.
To deselect the symbol, select View > ClearHighlights.
256 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001


2. In the Alarm History Browser window, to determinate the time interval that separates:
The detection of an alarm from its clearing, select a single detected/cleared alarm and then
View > Elapsed Time > Set->Clear Time.
The detection of two alarms, select two different, adjacent or not adjacent, records and then
View > Elapsed Time > Time between Set.
The detection of the oldest alarm with the clearing of the newest alarm, select two different,
adjacent or not adjacent, detected/cleared alarms and then View > Elapsed Time > First Set-
>Last Clear.
The clearing of the oldest alarm with the detection of the newest alarm, select two different,
adjacent or not adjacent, detected/cleared alarms and then View > Elapsed Time >Clear
->Set.
A window opens with the interval expressed in days/hours/minutes/seconds.

2. In the Alarm History Browser window, select the alarm relevant to the wished equipment.
Selecting two or more records relevant to different equipment, it is possible to open contemporarily the
specific Equipment Information windows.
3. Select View > Equipment Info.

The Equipment Information window opens which allows Verify the characteristics and the functional
status of the equipment.

2. In the Alarm History Browser window, select View > Sort Mode.
3. Select, in the Sort by area of Sort Mode window, the first sorting criterion:
Set Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the detection date/time.
* CLEAR Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the clearing date/time. The alarms not
cleared yet will be considered with clearing date/time equal to 0.
4. Select in the Sort by area, the option:

Ascending: the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm, the successive ones
will be listed in descending order.
Descending: the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm, the successive ones
will be listed in ascending order.
5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to the address of the NE which has generated
them, activate the box Group by Address (second sorting criterion).
6. Press Apply (it executes the sorting and closes the window) or Set (it stores the setting, but does not
execute the sorting and closes the window).
If pressed Apply, the Alarm History Browser window will list the records in the set order.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 257

Alarm History Browser window
The Alarm History Browser window opens, where the alarm history of the equipment in the open map is
displayed.
At the opening of the window a filter is applied to the alarms list: only the alarms, whose detection date is
successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed. Besides, by default, the automatic update of
the information is inactive.
A warning message could be displayed, informing that the database contains a number of alarms greater
than N (configurable by Superuser). For this cause, the window will display only the records, in chronolog-
ical order from the newest to the oldest one, until N. The N limit is not a memory limit, but simply a limit
in the display of the alarms. In order to read the alarms successive to N, it is sufficient to delete some
records.
The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE controller.
Parameters
Severity. Type of signal: alarm, status and event and if the signal has been detected or is
cleared; for the alarms also the severity is displayed.
The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording (Tab.11).
Ack. Acknowledge status of the record. If the field is empty, the alarm has not been acknowl-
edged, if the character is:
S, means that the record has been acknowledged when the alarm has been detected but
not cleared yet. In this case, if the alarm is cleared, it is possible to acknowledge the re-
cord again.
C, means that the record has been not acknowledged when the alarm has been detected
and cleared.
Set Time. Date and time of the alarm detection.
Clear Time. Date and time of the alarm clearing.
Address. Logic address of the Network Element.
Type. Type of Network Element.
Object. Name of the physical or logical object which the alarm refers to. The event signals is
not provided with this information.
Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the alarm.
Status bar
Simbolo.
the data are not dynamically updated: they are freezed.
the data are dynamically updated.
the displayed data are not aligned with those stored in the database; to re-align
them, select the symbol itself.
xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total record (yy). If no filter is active,
the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records.
Filters. Indicates possible active filter criteria.
Sort. Order used to list the alarms.
Menu bar
File > Print/Save > Selected. It prints or saves to file the alarms selected in the window.
File > Print/Save > Filtered. It prints or saves to file the alarms displayed in the window.
File > Export > Selected. It copies the alarms selected in the window into a text editor.
File > Export > Filtered. It copies the alarms displayed in the window into a text editor.
Action > Delete. It deletes one or more records from the list and the databases.
258 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Action > Acknowledge. It acknowledges one or more records, so the system memorizes that
the user has seen the alarms.
Action > Freeze Window/Unfreeze Window. The commands are displayed one in alterna-
tive to the other: the first stops the automatic update of the data, the second one reactivates it.
Action > Reread Database. It updates the data in the window.
View > Set Filter. It filters the alarms list.
View > Elapsed Time > Set->Clear Time. Determines the time elapsed between the set of
the selected alarm and its clear.
View > Elapsed Time > Time between Set. Determines the time elapsed between the set of
the two selected alarms.
View > Elapsed Time > First Set->Last Clear. Determines the time elapsed between the set
of the oldest alarm and the clear of the newest alarm.
View > Elapsed Time >Clear->Set. Determines the time elapsed between the clear of the
oldest alarm and the set of the newest alarm.
View > HighLight Equipment On Map. It highlights in the map the symbol of the NE which
the selected record is referred to.
View > Clear Highlights. It removes the highlighted condition from all the symbols marked
by the HighLight Equipment On Map command.
View > Equipment Info. It displays the characteristics and the operating status of the NE
which the selected record is referred to.
View > Sort Mode. It sorts the alarms list.
Tab.11 Key of Severity field
Background colour Wording Description
Green Normal Detected event signal
Blue Status Detected status signal
Light blue Warning Detected alarm with Warning severity
Yellow Minor Detected alarm with Minor severity
Orange Major Detected alarm with Major severity
Red Critical Detected alarm with Critical severity
No background Normal Cleared event signal
No background Status Cleared status signal
No background Warning Cleared alarm with Warning severity
No background Minor Cleared alarm with Minor severity
No background Major Cleared alarm with Major severity
No background Critical Cleared alarm with Critical severity
The information in the Alarm History Browser window are dynamically updated only if the procedure for
the automatic update is active (Activate/deactivate the automatic data update).
At the opening of the Alarm History Browser window, the procedure of automatic update of the information
is, by default inactive (the default setting can be changed by the Superuser).
The presence of the symbol in the status bar of the window indicates that the displayed information
are misaligned with respect to those stored in the database of NMS5LX.
This occurs when:
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 259

Two or more NMS5UX users (each one on a different terminal) have opened the Alarm History
Browser window for the same map and, in a window, some records have been acknowledged or
deleted, the system does not update all the open windows. This is necessary to avoid that the
windows must be continuously refreshed while the users are using them.
One or more records are acknowledged in a Current Alarms Browser window. The record is not
automatically acknowledged also in the Alarm History Browser window, if open.
To update the window, it is sufficient to click on the symbol . It is possible to refresh the window also
changing the order of the display of the records (Sort the alarms list) or applying a filter (Filter the alarms
list).
The setting of the filters or the criteria used to sort the records in a Alarm History Browser window does
not influence the display of the information in the other open Alarm History Browser windows or in the
Current Alarms Browser window.
Modality of recording of the alarms
The alarms are stored in the database of NMS5LX (Alarm History table).
They remain stored for a certain number of days (which can be configured by the Superuser - by default
90 days), after which they are automatically deleted.
Also, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records in the Alarm History table (value that can
be set by the Superuser) that can be stored.
During the day, all the alarms sent by the equipment are stored in the table (even if their number exceeds
the maximum value of records). At midnight, the number of record is checked; if this exceeds the maxi-
mum set number, the system will delete the oldest records (only among the raised and cleared alarms).
If the alarm history contains all active and not cleared alarms and their number exceeds the maximum set
value, the system will NOT delete any record.
When the maximum number of record in the table is exceeded, the message Alarm History occupation ex-
ceeded 100% is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation. The display of the message and
the frequency with which it is displayed can be configured by the Superuser.
In any moment, it is possible to:

To display the occupation status of the table Transaction Log in the Platform Status bar.
Delete the alarms manually. It is suggested to periodically delete and/or store to file the less
meaningful records, so to avoid the saturation of the table.
260 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Network Current Alarms
The Network Current Alarms command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signals (alarms) ac-
tive in the equipment of the open map.
Operations
Display the alarms active in the equipment of the map
GUI
Current Alarm Browser window
See also
Display the alarms active in the equipment of the map

1. Select Fault > Network Current Alarms or press .

The Current Alarm Browser window is displayed.

2. In the Current Alarm Browser window, to print or to save to file:

The displayed alarms, select File > Print/Save > Filtered. If filters are not active, the dis-
played records corresponds to the records stored in the database.

To print the data:

wish to use.
c. Press OK.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 261

saved.
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.

WARNING After having acknowledged a record, the operation cannot be cancelled.
2. In the Current Alarm Browser window, to acknowledge:

A group of alarms, select the corresponding records and then Action > Acknowledge > Se-
lected Alarms.
The displayed alarms, select Action > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms. If filters are not ac-
All the alarms of the database, select Action > Acknowledge > All Alarms.
It is even possible to acknowledge an alarm by means of a double click over it.


At the opening of the Current Alarm Browser window, the automatic update of the information is, by
default, inactive.
2. To activate the automatic data update, select Action > Unfreeze Window or the symbol .
3. To deactivate newly the automatic data update, select Action > Freeze Window or the symbol .
The Freeze Window and Unfreeze Window commands are displayed alternatively.

2. In the Current Alarm Browser window, select View > Set Filter.
The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window, displaying a section containing
the following operation:
Match Severity. Type of signal (alarm/status/event) and, for the alarms, their severity (the col-
our of the box, if active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type
of signal). Activating the box:
262 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm.
Activating the box:
Occurred After, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or after
Occurred Before, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or
before that displayed next to the option.
In the box located over the bar, choosing the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to change
the date/time by steps of one hour, while choosing the Fine Granularity item by steps of one
second.
Activating contemporary the boxes and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determi-
nate a time interval.
Match Address. Logic address of the Network Element.
The logic addresses can be set by one of the following ways:
Select the symbol or the symbols of the interested NEs, directly in the map and press
Add From Map.
The values set in this way will be inserted in the area located next to the Match Address box.
Open the Equipment Type menu and select the type of NE.
It is possible to set only one class of objects at a time or all the classes contemporarily selecting
Match Message String. Description of the selection.
Activating the Case Sensitive box, there will be a distinction between upper and lower cases;
deactivating the box, instead, no distinction will be made.
Match Selected Alarm. Description (Message) field of the selected record.
To set the criterion, select a record in the Current Alarms Browser window.
ed.
Activating the box:
Match Acknowledged, the list will display only the acknowledged records.
Match Unacknowledged, the list will display the not yet acknowledged records.
The Current Alarms Browser window displays only the records matching the activated criteria.
Closing the Current Alarms Browser window automatically removes the possible active filters.
The Filters Setting window contains the push-buttons:
Save.... It saves to file the set criteria.
On the selection of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens.
Load.... It opens the file, where a specific previously saved set of filters is contained.
On the selection of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 263

Delete.... It deletes the file where a specific previously saved set of filters is contained.
Clear Filters. It cancels the activation of all the filters, except for the Match Severity, Match
Acknowledged, Match Unacknowledged criteria.

2. In the Current Alarm Browser window, select the alarm relevant to the equipment you wish to highlight.

The symbol of the equipment is highlighted in the map.


2. In the Current Alarm Browser window, select two different adjacent or not adjacent records
3. Select View > Elapsed Time.

A window with the interval expressed in days/hours/minutes/seconds opens.

2. In the Current Alarm Browser window, select the alarm relevant to the wished equipment
Selecting two or more records relevant to different equipment, it is possible to open contemporarily the
specific Equipment Information windows.
3. Select View > Equipment Info.
The Equipment Information window opens which allows Verify the characteristics and the functional
status of the equipment.
264 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Current Alarm Browser window
The Current Alarm Browser window opens, where the list of the alarms active in the equipment in the map
is displayed.
At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic update of the information is inactive.
Parameters
Severity. Type of signal: alarm, status or event: for the alarms also the severity is displayed.
edged; if the Y character is present, the alarm has been acknowledged.
Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm detection. The date/time is set by the element that
generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE controller.
Object. Name of the physical or logical object which the alarm refers to. The event signals are
Status bar
Symbol:
Filters. Activation of one or more filters.
Menu bar
Action > Freeze Window/Unfreeze Window. The commands are displayed one in alterna-
tive to the other: the first stops the automatic update of the data, the second one reactivates it.
View > Elapsed Time. Determines the time elapsed between the registration of the two se-
lected alarms.
View > Clear Highlights. It removes the highlighted condition from all the symbols highlighted
View > Equipment Info. It displays the characteristics and the operating status of the NE
which the selected record is referred to.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 265

Green Normal Event signal
Blue Status Status signal
Light blue Warning Alarm with Warning severity
Yellow Minor Alarm with Minor severity
Orange Major Alarm with Major severity
Red Critical Alarm with Critical severity
The information in the Current Alarms Browser window are dynamically updated only if the procedure of
automatic update is active (Activate/deactivate the automatic data update).
At the opening of the Current Alarms Browser window, the procedure of automatic update is, by default,
inactive (the default setting can be changed by the Superuser).
266 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Old Alarm History
The Old Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event signals
(alarms) previously saved to file.
Operations
Display the alarm history in the Old History table
Copy the alarms list in a text editor
GUI
Old History Browser window
See also
Alarm History Backup
Alarm History Restore
Display the alarm history in the Old History table

1. Select Fault > Old Alarm History.

The Old History Browser window displays the alarms history of the Old History table of the equipment
in the open map.

2. In the Old History Browser window, to print or to save to a file:

The displayed alarms, select File > Print/Save > Filtered. If filters are not active, the dis-
played records correspond to the records stored in the database.
To print the data:

wish to use.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 267

c. Press OK.
saved.
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
Copy the alarms list in a text editor

2. In the Old History Browser window, to copy in a text editor:

The displayed alarms, select File > Export > Filtered. If filters are not active, the displayed
For the use of the text editor program, refer to the specific documentation.

2. In the Old History Browser window select View > Set Filter.
the following options:
<Severity>. Type of signal (alarm/status/event) and, for the alarms, their severity (the colour
of the box, if active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type of
signal). Activating the box:
Activating the box:
268 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

second.
Add From Map.
Match Selected Alarm. Description (Message) field of the selected record.
To set the criterion, select a record in the Old History Browser window.
ed.
Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the list will display the acknowledged record. Further-
more it is possible to specify:
The username of the NMS5UX user who executed the acknowledge, activating the User
box and typing the username.
Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the records not acknowledged yet will be displayed.
The Old History Browser window displays only the records matching the specific criteria.
Closing the Old History Browser window automatically removes the possible active filters.

Clear Filters. It clears the activation of all the filters, except for the <Severity>, Match Ac-
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 269


2. In the Old History Browser window, select the alarm relevant to the equipment you wish to highlight.

The symbol of the equipment is highlighted in the map.

2. In the Old History Browser window, to determinate the time interval that separates:
The detection of two alarms, select two different adjacent or not adjacent records and then View
> Elapsed Time > Time between Set.
The detection of the oldest alarm with the clearing of the newest alarm, select two different ad-
jacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then View > Elapsed Time > First Set-
>Last Clear.
The clearing of the oldest alarm with the detection of the newest alarm, select two different ad-
jacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then View > Elapsed Time > Clear->Set.

2. In the Old History Browser window, select View > Sort Mode.
3. Select, in the Sort by area of the Sort Mode window, the first sorting criterion:
Ascending; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive ones
Descending; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive ones
5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to their address, activate the box Group by Ad-
dress (second sorting criterion).
270 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

If pressed Apply, the Old History Browser window will list the records in the set order.

2. In the Old History Browser window, select the record which you wish to display the detail of the ac-
knowledge for.
3. Press and keep pressed the right mouse button.

The Ack Info pop-up window opens, where the acknowledge information of the alarm is displayed.
The description of the window is the same of the Information window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 271

Old History Browser window
The Old History Browser window opens, where the alarms history of the Old History table of the equipment
in the open map is displayed.
If, at the opening of the window the table is empty, it is necessary to restore the list of wished alarms from
the backup file saved before (Restore the alarm history from disk).
These alarms will remain available in the Old History table and in the Old History Browser window, until a
different list of alarms is restored.
The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm: in the most cases it is the NE controller.
Parameters
cleared; for the alarms also the severity is displayed. The parameter is represented by a col-
oured box and by a wording (Tab.13).
edged, if the character is:
S, means that the record has been acknowledged when the alarm has been detected but
not cleared yet. In this case, if the alarm is cleared, it is possible to acknowledge the re-
cord again.
C, means that the record has been not acknowledged when the alarm has been detected
and cleared.
Status bar
Symbol:
the displayed data are not aligned with those stored in the database; to re-align
them, select the symbol itself.
Menu bar
272 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

View > Sort Mode. It sorts the list of records.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 273

NE Alarm History
The NE Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/event/status signals (alarms)
relevant ONLY to the selected equipment.
The choice of the command opens the Alarm History Browser window. The description of the window and
the operations that can be executed are the same reported in the par. Network Alarm History.
In the Alarm History Browser window, deactivate the Match Address filter to display the alarm relevant to
other equipment.
If a NE object of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type is selected, the Alarm History Browser window displays
the detail of the equipment of the nodal system. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
274 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NE Current Alarms
The NE Current Alarms command displays/manages the alarm/event/status signals (alarms) active ONLY
in the selected equipment.
The selection of the command opens the Current Alarm Browser window. The description of the window
and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in the par. Network Current Alarms.
In the Current Alarms Browser window to display the alarm relevant to other equipment, deactivate the
Match Address filter.
If a NE object of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type is selected, the Current Alarms Browser window dis-
plays the detail of the equipment of the nodal system. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 275

NE History Log
User profile | Read Only: Entry. ReadWrite: Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
WARNING Command not available for ELFO, SDH N+1 and FAMxc equipment.
The NE History Log command displays/manages the alarm list stored on the equipment controller (NE
Log).
Operations
Display the list of the NE Log of the equipment
Create a NE Log
Create more NE Logs at the same time
Display the content of a NE Log
Delete a NE Log
Delete all the NE Logs of the equipment
Delete the alarms stored in the controller of the equipment
GUI
Equipment History Log Management Main Window
NE Logger Browser window
See also
Management of NE Log
Display the list of the NE Log of the equipment

1. Select one or more pieces of equipment.
2. Select Fault > NE History Log.

3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area of the Equipment History Log Management Main Window,
the equipment for which you wish to verify the NE Log. The area on the right displays the list of the NE
Logs.
If the message No files available for equipment ... is displayed, no NE Log is available for the specific
equipment.
Create a NE Log

276 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area of the Equipment History Log Management Main Window, the
equipment for which you wish to create a NE Log.
4. Press the right mouse button.
5. In the pop-up menu, select:

Send Read/Delete File Request, to create the NE Log and delete the alarms stored in the
controller of the equipment.
Send Read File Request, to create the NE Log, without deleting the alarms.
The created NE Log is displayed in the...history log file area.
NE Log is automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the date_time when it
has been created.
If the Uploaded file is empty. File is not saved message is displayed, the Log file is not created, as no
alarm is stored in the equipment controller.


equipment for which you wish to create a NE Log.
4. Press Read log Files from Equipment.

The created NE Logs are automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the
date_time when they have been created.
alarm is stored in the equipment controller.

1. Select one or more pieces ofequipment.
the equipment for which you wish to verify the NE Log.
In the .history log files area, the list of the NE Logs relevant to the selected equipment will be displayed.
4. Double click on the NE Log for which you wish to verify the content.
The NE Log is displayed in the Selected files list area. The file, in the ...history log files area, is disabled.
5. Repeat the previous step, to insert all the wished NE Logs in the Selected files list area.
6. It is possible to remove from the Selected files list area:

A single file selecting the icon that characterize the file and pressing the right mouse button. A
pop-up menu is displayed. Press Remove From List.
All the files, pressing Clear selections.
7. Press Show selected files records.

The NE Logger Browser window opens, where all the alarms stored on the selected NE Logs are listed.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 277

Delete a NE Log

the equipment for which you wish to delete a NE Log.
In the ...history log files area, the list of the NE Log relevant to the selected equipment will be displayed.
4. Select the NE Log and press the right mouse button.
5. In the pop-up menu select Delete File and confirm.

The file is deleted.
A deactivated file cannot be deleted.


equipment for which you wish to delete all the NE Logs.
4. Select the right mouse button.

5. In the pop-up menu, select the Delete All Files and confirm.
All the NE Logs of the equipment are deleted.


equipment for which you wish to delete the alarms.
4. Select NE Log and press the right mouse button.
5. In the pop-up menu, select Send Delete File Request.
It is possible to delete the alarms stored in the controller of the equipment also during the creation of
a NE Log (Create a NE Log).

1. Display the content of a NE Log.
2. In the NE Logger Browser window, to print or save to a file:
278 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The displayed alarms, select File > Print/Save > Filtered. If no filter is active, the displayed

To print the data:
In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer). If you want
to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you wish to use.
c. Press OK.
b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the info must be saved.
name> directory.
c. Press Ok.


2. In the NE Logger Browser window, to copy in a text editor:
The list of displayed alarms, select File > Export > Filtered. If no filter is active, the displayed
For the use of the text program, refer to the specific documentation.

2. In the NE Logger Browser window, select View > Set Filter.

Match Severity. Type of signal (alarm/status/event), activation status of the signal and, for the
alarms, corresponding severity (the colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour as-
sociated to the severity of the alarm or the type of signal). Activating the box:
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 279

Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms.
Activating the box.
second.
Match Address. Logical address of the Network Element.
Select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the map and press Add
From Map.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Address box.
Open the Equipment Type menu and choose the type of NE.
It is possible to set only one class of object at a time or all the class contemporarily selecting
Message Contains the String. Description of the alarm.
Match Selected Alarm. Description (Message field) of the selected record.
To set the criterion, select a record in the NE Logger Browser window. The criterion is not avail-
able if no record has been selected or if two or more records are selected.
3. Press OK.
The NE Logger Browser window displays only the records matching the specific criteria. Every time the
list is filtered, both the displayed and the hidden records are considered. Closing the NE Logger Browser
window automatically removes the possible active filters.
Apply. It executes the operation and does not close the Filters Setting window.
Clear Filters. It clears the activation of all the filter criteria.

2. In the NE Logger Browser window, to determinate the time interval that separates:
The detection of two alarms, select two different, adjacent or not adjacent, records and then
View > Elapsed Time > Time between Set.
280 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The detection of the oldest alarm with the clearing of the newest alarm, select two different,
adjacent or not adjacent, detected/cleared alarms and then View > Elapsed Time > First Set-
>Last Clear.
The clearing of the oldest alarm with the detection of the newest alarm, select two different,
adjacent or not adjacent, detected/cleared alarms and then View > Elapsed Time >Clear
->Set.

2. In the NE Logger Browser window, select View > Sort Mode.
3. Select, in the Sort by area of Sort Mode window, the first sorting criterion:

Ascending: the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm, the successive ones
Descending: the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm, the successive ones
5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to the address of the NE which has generated
them, activate the box Group by Address (second sorting criterion).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 281

This window allows managing the log files relevant to the NEs of the map.
Area Selected Equipment

List of the equipment selected in the map. Every equipment is identified by a record containing:
Symbol representing the type of equipment.
IP address of the equipment.
Logic address of the equipment.
When the record is selected, the border of the symbol becomes red.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the
nodal system is displayed. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
Area Address history log files

List of the NE Logs present on disk and relevant to a single piece of equipment. Address is the
logical address of the equipment which the logs of the area below refers to.
Each NE Log is identified by a record, where the date (day-month-year) and the time (hour:min-
utes:seconds) of the file creation are contained.
When a Log is inactive (displayed in grey characters), it means that it has been selected to be
displayed.
When the NE Log is removed from the Selected Files List area, the corresponding record be-
comes active again (displayed in black characters).
Area Selected Files List

List of selected NE Logs, for which the alarm detail can be displayed. Every NE Log is identified
by a record containing:
Date and time when the file has been created.
Push-buttons
Read log Files from Equipment. It creates a log file for the selected equipment.
Clear Selections. It removes all the files from the Selected Files List area.
Show selected files records. It opens the NE Logger Browser window to display the alarms
stored in the selected NE Logs.
282 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NE Logger Browser window
The NE Logger Browser window displays the alarms contained in the NE Logs selected in the Equipment
History Log Management Main Window.
Parameters
Address. Logic address of the Network Element which has generated the alarm.
Type. Type of equipment which has generated the alarm.
Status bar
Filters. Indicates possible active filter criteria.
Menu bar
View > Sort Mode. It sorts the alarms list.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 283

NE Command Log
WARNING Command not available for ELFO, SDH N+1 and FAMxc equipment.
The NE Command Log command displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the users,
stored on the controller of the equipment (NE Command Log).
Operations
Display the list of the Command Log of the equipment
Create a Command Log
Create more Command Logs at the same time
Display the content of a Command Log
Delete a Command Log
Delete all the Command Logs of the equipment
Delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of the equipment
GUI
Equipment History Command Log Management Main window
See also
NE Command Log (more info)
Display the list of the Command Log of the equipment


2. Select Fault > NE Command Log.
3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area of the Equipment History Command Log Management
Main window, the NE for which you wish to verify the Command Log: the area on the right displays the
list of the Command Logs.
If the message No files available for equipment ... is displayed, no Command Log is available for the
specific equipment.
Create a Command Log

3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area of the Equipment History Command Log Management Main win-
dow, the equipment for which you wish to create a Command Log.
5. In the pop-up menu, select:

Send Read/Delete File Request, to create the Command Log and delete the list of the oper-
ations stored in the controller of the equipment.
284 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Send Read File Request, to create the Command Log, without deleting the list of the opera-
tions.
The Command Log Filter Win opens.
To save on Command Log:
All the operations, press Read log Files from Equipment.
A group of operations, set one or more parameters in the window, according to the cri-
teria you wish to use to determine the group of operations to save in the Log and, then,
press Read log Files from Equipment.
The available criteria are the following ones:
Source Address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which the
operation has been executed.
To set the criterion type a IP address.
Occurred date. Execution date of the operations.
To set the criterion, activate the box:
Before and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only the
operations whose execution date is equal to or older than the set one.
After and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only the
operations whose execution date is equal to or more recent than the set one.
Activating the boxes at the same time and property setting the dates, it is possible
to set a time interval.
User. Name of the user who has executed the operation.
To set the criterion type in the box the desired use name.
Object Identifier. Name of the physical or logic object of the equipment to which
the operation refers.
To set the criterion type in the box the desired object.
The created Command Log is displayed in the...history log file area.

Command Log is automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the date_time
when it has been created.
operation is stored in the equipment controller.
Create more Command Logs at the same time


dow, the equipment for which you wish to create a Command Log.
4. Press Read log Files from Equipment.
5. In the Command Log Filter Window save on Command Logs:

All the operations, press Read log Files from Equipment.
A group of operation, set one or more parameters in the window, according to the criteria you
wish to use to determine the group of operations to save in the Log and, then, press Read log
Files from Equipment.
The available criteria are the following ones:
Source Address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which the operation
has been executed.
To set the criterion type a IP address.
Occurred date. Execution date of the operations.
To set the criterion, activate the box:
Before and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only the
operations whose execution date is equal to or older than the set one.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 285

After and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only the op-
erations whose execution date is equal to or more recent than the set one.
Activating the boxes at the same time and property setting the dates, it is possible to set
a time interval.
To set the criterion type in the box the desired use name.
Object Identifier. Name of the physical or logic object of the equipment to which the op-
eration refers.
To set the criterion type in the box the desired object.
The created Command Logs are automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the
date_time when they have been created.
operation is stored in the equipment controller.
Display the content of a Command Log

Main window, the NE for which you wish to verify the Command Log.
In the ...history log files area, the list of the Command Logs relevant to the selected equipment will be
displayed.
4. Double click on the Command Log for which you wish to verify the content.
The Commands Log File Information window displays, for every operation, in the column:
Date/Time. Date and time when the operation has been executed.
Source Address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which the operation has
been executed.
Object. Object to which the operation refers.
Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers.
Value Set. Set value.
The presence of the symbol indicates that the information is not available because it is a not signif-
icant one for the type of operation to which it refers.
Delete a Command Log


Main window, the NE for which you wish to delete a Command Log.
In the ...history log files area, the list of the Command Log relevant to the selected equipment will be
displayed.
4. Select the Command Log and press the right mouse button.
5. In the pop-up menu, select Delete File and confirm.

The file is deleted.
286 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Delete all the Command Logs of the equipment

dow, the equipment for which you wish to delete all the Command Logs.
4. Select the right mouse button.
5. In the pop-up menu, select Delete All Files and confirm.

All the Command Logs of the equipment are deleted.
Delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of the equipment


dow, the equipment for which you wish to delete the list of the operations.
4. Select t the right mouse button.
5. In the pop-up menu, select Send Delete File Request.

It is possible to delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of the equipment also during
the creation of a Command Log (Create a Command Log).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 287

Equipment History Command Log Management Main window
This window allows managing the log files of the operations executed by the users on the equipment in the
map.
Area Selected Equipment

List of the equipment selected in the map. Every equipment is identified by a record containing:
When the record is selected, the border of the symbol becomes red.
Area Address history log files

List of the NE Logs on disk and relevant to a single equipment. Address is the logical address
of the equipment which the logs of the area below refers to.
Each Command Log is identified by a record, where the date (day-month-year) and the time
(hour:minutes:seconds) of the file creation are contained.
Push-buttons
Read log Files from Equipment. It creates a log file for the selected equipment and displays
it in the Address history Log files.
288 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NE Command Log (more info)
NE Command Log is a file where the system records the operations executed by the SCT/LMT or NMS5UX
user stored in the controller of the selected equipment.
The Log read from equipment (Command Log) is stored on the disk of the machine and it remains available
for subsequent consultations done by the user.
The list of the Command Log and their contents can be displayed only through the Equipment History Com-
mand Log Management Main window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 289

Alarm Summary
The Alarm Summary command displays/manages the summary of the alarm/status/event signals
(alarms) stored in the NMS5LX database, relevant to the equipment of the open map.
Operations
Display the summary of the map alarms subdivided by severity
Display the alarms stored in the alarm history
Reset the indication of status change
Set the automatic data update
GUI
Siae Alarm Summary window
Display the summary of the map alarms subdivided by severity

1. Select Fault > Alarm Summary.

The Siae Alarm Summary window displays the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity
relevant to the equipment in the map.


2. In the Siae Alarm Summary window, press Filter.
the following option:
Match Severity. Type of signal (alarm/status/event) and, for the alarms, their severity (the col-
our of the box, if active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type
of signal). Activating the box:
The deactivation of a box causes the deletion of the relevant record from the Siae Alarm Sum-
mary window and the display of the Filtered record.
Activating the box:
290 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

second.
Add From Map.
Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the list will display the acknowledged record. Further-
more it is possible to specify:
Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the records not acknowledged yet will be displayed.
Description. Description displayed in the Filters:... area of Siae Alarm Summary window.
To set or change the description, type an alphanumeric string in the box (minimum 1 maximum
128 characters).
The Siae Alarm Summary window displays only the records matching the activated criteria.
Closing the Siae Alarm Summary window automatically removes the possible active filters.
In the window, there are the push-buttons:
Clear Filters. It clears the activation of all the filters, except for the Match Severity, Match Ac-
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 291

Display the alarms stored in the alarm history

2. In the Siae Alarm Summary window, select the option relevant to the type/severity of signal, for which
you wish to display the relevant list stored in the alarm history.
The Alarm History Browser window displays only the alarms of the selected type and severity are dis-
played.
For example, if the Active option (Minor record) is selected, the Alarm History Browser window opens,
with displayed only the active alarms with Minor severity. To display the remaining of the alarm, it is
sufficient to change the filter.
Reset the indication of status change


2. In the Siae Alarm Summary window, press Clear Alert.
The possible asterisks (symbols signalling the status change next to the records) are removed.
Set the automatic data update

2. To ACTIVATE the automatic refresh of the Siae Alarm Summary window, activate the Auto Refresh box.
The data are automatically refresh each N seconds, displayed in the Timeout (sec) box.
To change the parameter, type the new value in the box (numeric value between 30 and 999 seconds).
It is possible to change the value also when the automatic refresh is active. In this case, at next refresh
after the change of the timeout, the new value will be acquired as valid.
3. To DEACTIVATE the automatic refresh of the window, deactivate the Auto Refresh box.
292 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Siae Alarm Summary window
This window allows displaying the summary of the history of the alarms occurred in the map, subdivided
by severity.
Display options
Filters: area reporting the filters (Filter the alarms list) applied to the display of the severity
alarms.
Filters: NONE. There are not filters active.
Filters: <applied filters>. There are indicated filters active.
Auto Refresh: If the box is:

Active, it means that the window is automatically updated each N seconds. The param-
eter N is displayed in the Timeout (sec) box. In this condition the Refresh push-button
is not available.
Inactive, it means that the window is not automatically updated. Press Refresh to up-
date it.
Interval (sec.). Period of time between an automatic update of the data and the next one (min-
imum value = 30 sec.). The parameter is meaningful only when the Auto Refresh box is active.
Alarms
Asterisk. Its presence next to the record indicates that, from when the Siae Alarm Summary
window has been opened or from the last selection of the Clear Alert push-button, a change
occurred: an alarm has been detected or cleared.
Critical. Alarms with Critical severity.

Cleared. Number of detected/cleared alarms with Critical severity.
Active. Number of detected/active alarms with Critical severity.
Major. Alarms with Major severity.

Cleared. Number of detected/cleared alarms with Major severity.
Active. Number of detected/active alarms with Major severity.
Minor. Alarms with Minor severity.

Cleared. Number of detected/cleared alarms with Minor severity.
Active. Number of detected/active alarms with Minor severity.
Warning. Alarms with Warning severity.

Cleared. Number of detected/cleared alarms with Warning severity.
Active. Number of detected/active alarms with Warning severity.
Status. Status signals.

Cleared. Number of detected/cleared status signals.
Active. Number of detected/active status signals.
Normal. Event signals.

Cleared. Number of detected/cleared event signals.
Active. Number of detected/active event signals.
All. All the signals (alarms, status, events).

Cleared. Number of detected/cleared signals.
Active. Number of detected/active signals.
Filtered. All the signals (alarms, status, events) resulted by a filter.

Cleared. Total number of detected/cleared alarms relevant only to the records in the win-
dow.
Active. Total number of detected but not cleared alarms relevant only to the records in
the window.
It is possible that, in the Siae Alarm Summary window, there are not one or more records rele-
vant to the type of signals/severity levels. Their presence is subjected to the activation of filters.
When the box is deactivated, relevant to a type of signal/severity, the Filtered record appears
in the Siae Alarm Summary window. This record displays the total alarms of the only records in
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 293

the window. For example, if in the window there are only the Critical (Cleared 20 - Active 15)
and Major (Cleared 5 - Active 3) records, the Filtered record will indicate the sum of their alarm
(Cleared 25 - Active 18).
Push-buttons
Refresh. Updates the data. The button is not available when the Auto Refresh box is active.
Clear Alert. Resets the signals of status change.
Filter. Filters the alarms list.
294 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Event Statistics
The Event Statistics command displays the statistics of the alarm/status/event signals (alarms) of equip-
ment.
The statistics refer to the alarms occurred on all the pieces of equipment in the network.
Operations
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarm
Delete the alarms
Filter the alarms
GUI
NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval

1. Select Fault > Event Statistics.
2. In the NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window, select Graphics > Networks Event Counters.
An histogram graph opens. The wording above the graph changes depending on the type of displayed
statistics.
Each histogram identifies a day. For each day, the number of detected alarms of all the pieces ofequip-
ment in the network is displayed.
By default, the last 30 days with alarms are displayed. The parameters can be configured by the Su-
peruser.
3. Double click on the histogram of a day to display the statistics of the alarms of that day in periods of
15 minutes.
Each histogram identifies a quarter of hour. For each quarter, the number of alarms, detected by all
the pieces ofequipment in the network, is displayed.
Only the 15 minute periods with alarms are displayed.
Press Up to return to the previous display.
4. Double click on the histogram of a quarter to display the statistics of the alarms of that day/quarter,
subdivided by single equipment.
Each histogram identifies one piece of equipment. For each equipment, the logic address, between
brackets, the equipment type and the number of detected alarms are displayed.
5. Double click on the histogram of the equipment to display the detail of the alarms detected by the
equipment in the specific day/quarter.
Each histogram identifies an alarm. For each alarm, the description of the alarm and the number of
time that the alarm has been detected in the specific period are displayed.
The description of the alarm is the same reported in the Message field of the Alarm History Browser
window and Current Alarm Browser window.
6. Press Up to return to the previous display.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 295

Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment

2. In the NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window, select Graphics > Equipment Event Counters.
An histogram graph opens.
Each histogram identifies one piece of equipment. For each NE, the logic address, between brackets,
the equipment type and the number of alarms, detected and stored in the statistics database, are dis-
played.
The equipment are listed in decreasing order according to the number of detected alarms and only for
the equipment of the network that have generated alarms.
3. Double click on the histogram of the equipment to display the statistics of the relevant alarms subdi-
vided in days.
Each histogram identifies a day. By default, the last 30 days with alarms are displayed. The parameters
can be configured by the Superuser.
4. Double click on the histogram of a day to display the statistics of the alarms of that equipment/day
subdivided in periods of 15 minutes.
Each histogram identifies a quarter.
Only the 15 minutes periods with alarms are displayed.
5. Double click on the histogram of a quarter to display the detail of the alarms detected by the equipment
in the specific day/quarter.
Each histogram identifies an alarm. For each alarm, the description of the alarm and the number of
times that the alarm has been detected in the specific period are detected.
The description of the alarm is the same reported in the Message field of the Alarm History Browser
window and Current Alarm Browser window.
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarm

2. In the NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window, select Graphics > Event Frequency.
An histogram graph opens.
Each histogram identifies an alarm. For each alarm is displayed:
Logical address and, between brackets, type of equipment where the alarm has been detected.
Description of the alarm.
The description of the alarm is the same reported in the Message field of the Alarm History
Browser window and Current Alarm Browser window.
Number of times that the alarm has been detected and stored in the statistics database.
The alarms are listed in decreasing order according to the number of times the alarm has been detected.
3. Double click on the histogram of the equipment/alarm to display the statistics of the alarm detection
subdivided in days.
Each histogram identifies a day. By default, the last 30 days with alarms are displayed. The parameters
can be configured by the Superuser.
4. Double click on the histogram of a day to display the statistic of the detection of the subject alarm/day,
subdivided in periods of 15 minutes.
Each histogram identifies a quarter.
296 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Only the 15 minutes periods with alarms are displayed.
Delete the alarms

WARNING This operation allows deleting ONLY the alarms stored in the statistics database and not in the
general database of NMS5LX (for this operation, go to par. Delete the alarms).
2. In the NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window, to delete from the statistics database:
All the alarms, select Maintenance > Delete All and confirm.
The records are deleted from the database.
A group of alarms, select Maintenance > Filtered Delete.
In the Filtered Delete window, select the boxes corresponding to the filter criteria used to de-
termine the alarms to delete.
The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the options:
Match Date. Date/time.
From the pop-up menu, select the value:
==, to delete the alarms detected at the day/time indicated by the cursor on the
right.
>=, to delete the alarms detected in the days after the day/time indicated by the
cursor on the right and in the day/time itself.
<=, to delete the alarms detected in the days before the day/time indicated by
the cursor on the right and in the day/time itself.
<>, to delete the alarms detected in the days between the two dates/time indi-
cated by the cursor on the right.
To change the date/time indicated by the cursor, move the indicator of the scroll-bar or
select the arrows placed next to the bar (the value is moved at steps of one quarter).
Match Source. Logic address of the equipment.
To set the criterion press Select. Select the wished equipment from the list and press Ok.
The selected equipment is inserted in the area below the Match Source box.
To delete all the items from the list, press Reset.
Match Object. Physical/graphical objects that compose the NE.
It is possible to set only one object class at a time or all the classes at the same time
selecting the All Objects item.
Containing string. Description of the alarm.
Press Delete.
The records are deleted by the database.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 297

Filter the alarms

2. In the NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window, press Filter.

The Filtered Graph Creation window opens.
3. Press the push-button relevant to the statistics which you wish to apply the filters to:
Network Event Counters, statistics of the alarms subdivided by days.
Event Frequency, statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarms.
Equipment Event Counters, statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment.
4. Select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.

Match Date. Date/time.
From the pop-up menu, select the value:
==, to display the alarms detected at the day/time indicated by the cursor on the right.
>=, to display the alarms detected in the days after the day/time indicated by the cursor
on the right and in the day/time itself.
<=, to display the alarms detected in the days before the day/time indicated by the cur-
sor on the right and in the day/time itself.
<>, to display the alarms detected in the days between the two dates/time indicated by
the cursor on the right.
To change the date/time indicated by the cursor, move the indicator of the scroll-bar or select
the arrows placed next to the bar (the value is moved at steps of a quarter).
Match Source box. Logic address of the equipment.
To set the criterion press Select. Select the wished equipment from the list and press Ok.
The selected equipment is inserted in the area below the Match Source box.
To delete all the items from the list, press Reset.
Match Object box. Physical/graphical objects that compose the NE.
It is possible to set only one object class at a time or all the classes at the same time selecting
Containing string box. Description of the alarm.
5. Press OK.
For the selected statistics, only the records that matching the activated criteria are displayed.
Each time the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both displayed and hidden.
When the type of displayed statistics is changed or the NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window is closed, the
possible activation of the filters is automatically removed.
298 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window
This window allows displaying the statistics of the alarm/status/event signals (alarms) of equipment.
Menu bar
Graphics > Network Event Counters. It displays the statistics of the alarms subdivided by
days.
Graphics > Equipment Event Counters. It displays the statistics of the alarms subdivided by
equipment.
Graphics > Event Frequency. It display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarms.
Maintenance > Filtered Delete. It deletes the specific group of the alarms stored in the sta-
tistics database.
Maintenance > Delete All. It deletes all alarms stored in the statistics database.
Push-buttons
Up. It returns to the immediately previous display.
Reload. It updates the data in the window.
Filter. It filters the list of the alarms. When one or more filter criteria are active, an asterisk is
present in the push-button.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 299

Transaction Log
The Transaction Log command displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX us-
ers, who have changed the configuration of the network, of the supervision system and of the equipment.
Operations
Display the list of the operations executed by NMS5UX users
Save/print the list of operations
Delete the operations
Filter the list of operations
GUI
Transaction Browser window
See also
Operation recording modality
Display the list of the operations executed by NMS5UX users

1. Select Fault > Transaction Log.

The Transaction Browser window displays the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users.
Save/print the list of operations


2. In the Transaction Browser window, to print or to save to a file:
All the operations stored in the DB, select File > Print/Save > All records.
The displayed operations, select File > Print/Save > Filtered records. If no filters are active,
An operations group, select the corresponding records and File > Print/Save > Selected re-
cords.
To print the data:

If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the wished printer.
c. Press OK.
b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where information must be saved.
300 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

name> directory.
c. Press Ok.
Delete the operations

2. In the Transaction Browser window, select the operations you wish to delete.
3. Select Action > Delete records and confirm.

Filter the list of operations

2. In the Transaction Browser window, select View > Set Filter.

the following options:
Match user. NMS5UX user who executed the operation.
To set the criterion, select the name of the user from the list.
Match date. Time interval when the operation has been executed.
To set the criterion, move the indicators of the Events occurred on or ... scroll-bars to set the
wished time interval.
In the Transaction Browser window, the operations whose execution date is after that displayed
in the Events occurred on or after field and before that displayed in the Events occurred on or
before field are displayed.
Activating the Granularity boxes located next to the bars (Coarse wording), it is possible to
change the date/time by step of one hour, while deactivating the boxes (Fine wording) by steps
of one seconds.
Match operation. Category or single operation.
Select the wished category in the Categories list.
In the Operations list, the operations associated to the category are displayed.
Select the wished operation.
If no operation is selected in the Transaction Browser window, the records relevant to all the
operations of the category will be displayed.
The categories and the relevant operations are described in Tab.14.
Select the type of NE in the Element area.
Select the wished object in the Objects area.
If no object is selected in the Transaction Browser window the records relevant to all the objects
of the NE will be displayed.
Not all the Network Elements have a list of objects.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 301

Match Field String. Alphanumeric string: in the Transaction Browser window all the records con-
taining the set wording are displayed, in the Element, Object or Information field.
Select the option relevant to the field of the Transaction Browser window where you wish
the filter is applied: Element, Object or Information.
Type the string of characters in the text field.
Pressing Get Selected Transaction, in the text field the value present in the field of the
record highlighted in the Transaction Browser window will be displayed (Element, Object
or Information).
Activating the Exact Match box, only the records containing in the field exactly the set
wording will be considered; deactivating the box the operations that contain in the field
a value, where the set wording is contained too, will be displayed.
Match map. Map which the NMS5UX user who executed the operation is associated to.
To set the criterion, select the name of the map from the list.
The filter is available only by the Superuser.
The Transaction Browser window displays only the records matching the activated criteria.
When the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden one.
The window contains also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the complete list),
Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) and Help (it opens the on-line man-
ual) push-buttons.
Closing the Transaction Browser window automatically removes the possible active filters.
302 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Transaction Browser window
The information in the window corresponds to the operations executed until the command is selected or
the updated is executed.
If the user profile of the user who selected the command is:
Superuser, the list displays the operations executed by the NMS5UX users of all the existing
maps.
Privileged, Advanced, Normal or Entry, the list displays the operations executed by the NMS5UX
users of one's map.
In order to speed up the reading from database and not to display too much old records, at the opening of
the window only the operation executed in the last N days (default N=10 days, configurable by Superuser)
are displayed. This does not mean that the oldest records cannot be displayed, but that a filter is automat-
ically applied.
Menu bar
File > Print/Save. It prints or saves to file the list of the operations.
Action > Delete Records. It deletes the operations.
Action > Refresh Info. It updates the data in the window.
View > Set Filter. It filters the list of operations.
Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the functionality.
Parameters
Operation. Type of operation (see Tab.14).
Time. Date/time when the operation has been executed.
Map Name. Name of the map where the operation has been executed.
User Name. Name of the user who executed the operation.
Element. Network Element involved in the operation.
Object. Name of the physical or graphical object which the operation is referred to.
Information. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the operation. The presence of
the symbol - indicates that the information is not available as not meaningful for the type of
operation which it is referred to.
Status bar
View... Activation of one or more filters.
Text in yellow. Date and time when the window has been opened or refreshed.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 303

Operation recording modality
The list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users records all the operations that have involved any
change of the network configuration (for example, addition of a NE), of the configuration of the supervision
system (for example, addition of a user) or of the configuration of a NE (for example, change of a param-
eter).
The detail of the operation is reported in Tab.14.
The operations are stored in the database of NMS5LX (Transaction Log table).
They remain stored for a certain number of days (which can be configured by the Superuser - by default
90 days), after which they are automatically deleted.
Also, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records in the Transaction Log table (value that
can be set by the Superuser) that can be stored.
During the day, all the operations are stored in the table (even if their number exceeds the maximum value
of records). At midnight, the number of record is checked; if this exceeds the maximum set number, the
system will delete the oldest records.
When the maximum number of records in the table is exceeded, the message Transaction Log occupation
exceeded 100% is periodically displayed warning about the critical situation. The display of the message
and the frequency with which it is displayed can be configured by the Superuser.
In any moment, it is possible to:
Display the occupation status of the table Transaction Log in the Platform Status bar.
Delete the operations manually. It is suggested to periodically delete and/or store to file the less
meaningful records, so to avoid the saturation of the table.
Tab.14 Operations (Transaction Log)
Category Operation Description
Access Access Not Authorized Failed attempt of access to the system (wrong password)
(operation of access to
NMS5LX) Login Login of a user to the system
Logout Logout of a user from the system
NMS - Commands Connect Eq Connection of one or more NEs

(operations relevant to the
connections to NE) Disconnect Eq Disconnection of one or more NEs
Reset-Connect Eq Reset and connection of one or more NEs
NMS - Edit Add Element Creation of the equipment

map) Delete Element Deletion of the equipment
Modify Element Change of the characteristics of the equipment
Network Severity Change Change of the severity of the alarms for as type of NE
304 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NMS - Eq. Manager Backup Config Backup of the NE current configuration

configuration of the NE) Cc Operation Operation executed within Cross Connect Manager
Config Download Transfer of a configuration to a NE
Create Object Creation of an object within a NE
Delete Object Deletion of an object within a NE
Equipment Severity Change Changes of the forward status of alarms/trap for the NE
Periph Download Download of software of a peripheral unit of NE
Reset Eq. Controller Reset of the main controller of the equipment
Set Attributes Change of the operating parameters of the equipment
Software Download Download of the equipment software
Special Action Special operation executed on the equipment
Ts Operation Meaningful operation executed within the Time Slot Manager
NMS - Log Database Backup Backup to disk of the system database

NMS5LX database) Delete Alr History Deletion of records from the Alarm History Browser window
Restore Alr History Restore from disk of a file of Alarm History
Restore Perf Restore from disk of a file of Performance Monitoring database
Save Alr History Saving to disk of the Alarm History database
Save Perf Saving to disk of the Performance Monitoring
NMS - Special Close Port Closing of ports of CommServer-S

CS equipment) Connect CS Connection of a CommServer-S (CS)
Disconnect CS Disconnection of a CommServer-S (CS)
Open Port Opening of ports of CommServer-S
NMS - User Create User Creation of a NMS5UX user

NMS5UX users) Delete User Deletion of a NMS5UX user
Modify User Change of the characteristics of a NMS5UX user
RM - Edit RM - Add Equipment Creation of the equipment in a Ring

(operations relevant to a
Ring configuration) RM - Add Link Creation of a Link in a Ring
RM - Add Path Creation of a Path in a Ring
RM - Delete Equipment Deletion of the equipment in a Ring
RM - Delete Link Deletion of a Link in a Ring
RM - Delete Path Deletion of a Path in a Ring
RM - Modify Equipment Change of the characteristics of the equipment in a Ring
RM - Modify Link Change of the characteristics of a Link in a Ring
RM - Modify Path Change of the characteristics of a Path in a Ring
RM - Schedule Path Scheduling of a Path in a Ring
RM Log RM - Delete Alr History Deletion of records from the RM - Alarm History window of a
(operations relevant to the Ring
Ring Manager database)
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 305

RM Special RM - Path alignment Alignment of a Path in a Ring

Path and NE) RM - Set attributes Change of the characteristics of the equipment in a Ring
RM Users RM - Access Level Change Change of the user privileges for the access to Ring Manager
users of Ring Manager)
PSM - Edit PSM - Add Equipment Creation of the equipment in a PSM Map
configuration of PSM ob- PSM - Add Physical Link Creation of a Link in a PSM Map
jects)
PSM - Add Service Creation of a service in a PSM Map
PSM - Delete Equipment Deletion of the equipment in a PSM Map
PSM - Delete Link Deletion of a Link in a PSM Map
PSM - Delete Service Deletion of a service in a PSM Map
PSM - Modify Equipment Change of the characteristics of the equipment in a PSM Map
PSM - Modify Link Change of the characteristics of a Link in a PSM Map
PSM - Modify Service Change of the characteristics of a service in a PSM Map
PSM Log PSM - Delete Alr History Deletion of one or more records from the PSM - Network Alarm
(operations relevant to the History window of a PSM Map
Packet Service Manager da-
tabase)
PSM Special PSM - Service alignment Alignment of a service in a PSM Map

(operations relevant to ser-
vices and NEs) PSM - Set attributes Change of the characteristics of the equipment in a PSM Map
306 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Silenced eq.
The Silenced Eq. command displays and allows managing the equipment set in silenced status by the su-
pervision system. A NE in silenced status does not forward alarms to the supervision system.
Operations
Display the list of the equipment in silenced status
Force the equipment to exit from silenced status
Highlight the symbol of a NE in the map
WARNING The following operations are identical to those described for the command NE History
Log, with the following difference: to display the Equipment History Log Management Main Win-
dow, select one equipment record in the Silenced Equipment List window and then the command
Action > Alarm Log Window.
Create a NE Log
Delete a NE Log
GUI
Silenced Equipment List window
See also
Alarm storm (more information)
Display the list of the equipment in silenced status

1. Select Fault > Silenced Eq.
2. The Silenced Equipment List window displays the list of the NEs set in silenced status by the supervision
system.
Force the equipment to exit from silenced status

2. In Silenced Equipment List window, select the record of the equipment you wish to exit from silenced
status.
3. Select the command Action > Resume Alarm Forwarding and then Ok to confirm.
The selected record is deleted from the list.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 307

Highlight the symbol of a NE in the map

2. In Silenced Equipment List window, select the record of the equipment whose symbol you wish to high-
light in the map of the supervision system.
3. Select the command Action > Highlight Equipment on Map.
308 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Silenced Equipment List window
This window allows managing the NEs set in silenced state by the supervision system.
Menu bar
Action > Refresh Info. Updates the data in the window and deselects possible selected re-
cords.
Action > Alarm Log Window. Displays the Equipment History Command Log Management
Main window relevant to the selected NE. If no record has been selected, the system shows an
error dialog. Only one record at a a time can be selected.
Action > Resume Alarm Forwarding. Forces the exit of the selected NE from the silenced
status before the waiting period set by the system expires. As consequence of this command,
the NE restarts transmitting possible alarm signals to the supervision system. Only one record
at a a time can be selected.
Action > Highlight Equipment on Map. Highlights and selects the symbol of the NE, corre-
sponding to the record selected in the table, in the map of the supervision system.
Help > On Usage. Opens the help on-line.
Parameters
Customer Id. Name (logic address) of the equipment, set by the operator.
Ip Address. Physical address of the equipment.
Type. Type of considered equipment.
Status. Connection status of the equipment: possible status is Connected, Disconnected or Un-
reachable.
Time. Time and date when the equipment has been silenced.
Counter. Number of events counted in the considered observation period before silencing the
corresponding equipment.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 309

Alarm storm (more information)
To avoid that equipment transmit an excessive number of alarm signals to the supervision system (alarm
storm), the equipment can be silenced.
During installation, the supervision system can be configured in such a way to automatically verify if a giv-
en piece of equipment transmit more than N alarms (N configurable, default = 5000) during a period T (T
configurable, default = 12 hours).
If this occurs, the supervision system sets the considered equipment in status silenced, forbidding it to
forward the alarm traps (equipment is however subjected to continuos polling by the supervision system).
the equipment can exit from the silenced condition in two ways:
Automatically, after that a second period T is elapsed, the system sets the equipment to normal
operating status.
Manually, by forcing of the operator (Force the equipment to exit from silenced status).
310 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

TOOLS
Alarm Not. via e-mail - Conf. It displays/manages the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm
notification via e-mail.
Alarm Notification via e-mail. It acknowledges the reception of a notification by the operator and ena-
bles him to receive again alarm notifications via e-mail.
Command Executor. It executes series of commands stored on file.
NE Monitoring. It executes, for the equipment, the periodic monitoring of parameters.
Auto Discovery. It manages the Auto Discovery functionality for the detection of the equipment in the
network and not managed yet by the supervision system; the automatic creation and the connection
of the discovered NE objects.
Rmon. It displays/manages, for the equipment, the RMON standard (groups: Statistics, History, History
(SIAE) and Alarm).
XML Export. It manages the export of the configuration data of the equipment in XML format.
Cfg File Download. It downloads a configuration file (per attribute type) on one or more network equip-
ment (of the same type) at the same time.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 311

Alarm Not. via e-mail - Conf
The Alarm Not. via e-mail - Conf command allows the operator with profile Superuser displaying and
managing the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification via e-mail.
Operations
Display the operators enabled to receive alarm notifications via e-mail
Add an operator
Change the characteristics of the operators
Delete an operator
Activate/deactivate an operator
Acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail
Create a filter for the alarm notifications via e-mail
GUI
Alarm notification - Operator Management window
See also
Alarm Notification via e-mail functionality
Display the operators enabled to receive alarm notifications via e-mail

1. Select Tools > Alarm Not. via e-mail Conf.

The Alarm notification - Operator Management window displays the list of all the operators enabled to
the reception of the alarm notification via e-mail is displayed.
Add an operator

2. In the Alarm notification - Operator Management window, select Operator > Create.
3. Type, in the Name box of the New operator insert window, the name you wish to assign to the operator
(alphanumeric string of maximum 30 characters).
The same name cannot be assigned to two different operators. After the creation of the operator, the
name cannot be changed.
4. Select the Active box, according to the status you wish to assign to the operator:
Active box ( ). Active operator: he receives the alarm notifications via e-mail.
Inactive box. Inactive operator: he does not receive the alarm notifications via e-mail.
5. Type, in the Password box, the access code relevant to the new operator (alphanumeric string of min-
imum 6 and maximum 21 characters).
For safety reason, an asterisk (*) is displayed for each typed character.
The name/password of the operator will be required by the system to the NMS5UX user with privileged,
advanced, normal or entry profile who selects the Alarm Notification via e-mail command. The cor-
312 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

rect setting of the parameters will allow these NMS5UX users acknowledging the possible reception of
e-mails by the specific operator and enable him again to the e-mail reception.
6. Set the time interval during which the operator, if enabled, must receive the alarm notification via e-
mail. Set one or more of the following parameters according to the wished criteria:
In the Date area, select the option:
Disabled. The date criterion is disabled.
From. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails from the day/month/year displayed
in the relevant field in the window on the right.
Until. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails until the day/month/year displayed
in the relevant field in the window on the right.
From-To. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails from and until the day/month/
year displayed in the relevant field in the window on the right.
In the Hour area, select the option:
Disabled. The criterion is disabled.
From. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails from the hour/minute displayed in
the relevant fields on the right.
Until. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails until the hour/minute displayedin
the relevant fields on the right.
From-To. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails from and until the hour/minute
displayed in the relevant fields on the right.
In the Days of week area, activate the boxes relevant to the days of the week for which you wish
the operator receives e-mails.
The Festivity box refers to all the days of the year corresponding to the festivity days in ones
country. Parameter configurable by Superuser.
7. Set a possible filter relevant to the type of alarm, whose detection must be notified to operator e-mail:
a. Press Select Filter.

b. Select, in the Files list of the Select Filter window, the name of the file you wish to retrieve.
The list displays the files in the predefined directory (displayed in the Selection box). Change
the path, if necessary.
c. Press OK.
If you wish to create a new filter, press Filter. The Filter window opens. The modalities of filter creation
are the same described in par. Create a filter for the alarm notifications via e-mail from step 3.
8. Type the e-mail address of the operator in the EMail box.
9. In the Secondary Operator area, set the data for the reception of the e-mail by a second operator if the
main operator does not acknowledge the reception of the mail:
Type, in the Notification delay box, the time interval (expressed in minutes) elapsed which, if
the main operator has not acknowledge the reception of the mail, this one is forwarded also to
the second operator.
Type, in the Email box, the e-mail address of the second operator.
10.Press Ok.
Change the characteristics of the operators

2. In the Alarm notification - Operator Management window, act in one of the following ways:
Select the operator you wish to change and then Operator > Modify.
Double click on the record relevant to the operator.
The Operator Modify window opens, where the characteristics of the operator are displayed.
3. Make the wished changes. The modality to set the parameters are the same described in par. Add an
operator. It is not possible to change the name of the operator.
4. Press Ok.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 313

Delete an operator

2. In the Alarm notification - Operator Management window, select the operator you wish to delete.
3. Select Operator > Delete.

The Operator delete window displays the characteristics of the operator are displayed.
4. Press Ok.
The operator is removed from the list.
Activate/deactivate an operator

2. In the Alarm notification - Operator Management window, select the wished operator.
3. Select Operator > Modify.
4. In the Operator modify window, to:

ACTIVATE the operator to the reception of the alarm notifications via, activate the Active box
( ).
DEACTIVATE the operator to the reception of the alarm notifications via, deactivate the Active
box.
5. Press Ok.
The new status of the operator is displayed in the Status column.

2. In the Alarm notification - Operator Management window, select the operator you wish to acknowledge.
3. Select Alert > Clear or Clear Alert.

The operator is acknowledged and re-enabled to receive e-mail.
Create a filter for the alarm notifications via e-mail

2. In the Alarm notification - Operator Management window, select Edit > Filters.
3. Type the name of the new filter in the Filter Name box of the Filter window.
4. Set one or more of the following parameters according to the wished filter criteria:
Severity of the alarm. In the Severity area, select the option:
All alarms. The detection of all the alarms will be notified to the operator.
314 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Minor Major Critical. The detection of the alarms with Minor, Major or Critical severity will
be notified to the operator.
Major Critical. The detection of the alarms with Major and Critical severity only will be
notified to the operator.
Critical. The detection of the alarms with Critical severity only will be notified to the op-
erator.
Type of equipment. In the Equipment Type area, activate the Disabled box and select the type
or the types of equipment for which you DO NOT wish that the alarm detection is communicated
to the operator.
Equipment of a map. In the Map area, activate the Disabled box and select the map/maps. The
detection of the alarms of all the selected equipment in the maps WILL NOT be notified to the
operator.
Logic address of the equipment. In the Logical address area, activate the Disabled box and set
the logical address of the NEs whose alarm detection WILL NOT be notified to the operator.
To set a logical address, type the address in the text field and press Add Address. The value is
inserted in the area above.
To delete a single item from the list, select it and press Del Address.
5. Press Save to save the set criteria in a file.

Press the push-button to display the SelectFilter window.
Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Insert name file box.
The system suggests the default directory. Change the path, if necessary. Press OK.
6. Press OK.
In the window there are also the push-buttons:
Load.... It opens the file containing a previously saved specific filter setting.
Delete.... It delete the file containing a previously saved specific filter setting.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 315

Alarm notification - Operator Management window
This window allows managing the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification via e-mail.
Menu bar
Edit > Exit. It closes the window.
Edit > Filters. It creates a filter relevant to the type of alarms whose detection must be notified
to the operator via e-mail.
Edit > Refresh. It updates the information contained in the window.
Operator > Create. It adds an operator.
Operator > Modify. It changes the characteristics of an operator.
Operator > Delete. It deletes an operator.
Alert > Clear. It acknowledges an operator, in such a way that the system stores the informa-
tion that the operator has read the e-mail and reactivates him to receive e-mail.
Parameters
Operator Name. Name of the operator.
Status. Status of the operator:
Active. The operator is active: he receives the alarm notifications via e-mail.
Not Active. The operator is not active: he does not receive the alarm notifications via e-
mail.
Alert. Acknowledge status of the operator:
Active. The operator has received an e-mail and has not acknowledged yet its reception.
Not Active. The operator has not received an e-mail.
Email. E-mail address which the alarm notifications are sent to.
Push-buttons
Exit. It closes the window.
Refresh. It adds the information contained in the window.
Clear Alert. It acknowledges an operator, in such a way that the system stores the information
that the operator has read the e-mail and reactivates him to receive e-mail.
316 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Alarm Notification via e-mail
The Alarm Notification via e-mail command allows acknowledging an operator and enabling him again
to receive alarm notifications via e-mail.
Operations
Related operations

User profile | Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged
WARNING The operation can be executed by the NMS5UX user only if this knows the name and the pass-
word of the operator.
1. Select Tools > Alarm Notification via e-mail.

The Alert Clear window opens.
2. Type the name of the operator you wish to acknowledge in the Operator field.
3. Type the access code of the operator you wish to acknowledge in the Password field.
4. Press Ok.
If the entered data are not correct, the message Alert has been acknowledged and reactivated is dis-
played indicating that the operator has been acknowledged and re-enabled to receive e-mail.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 317

The NMS5LX system manages the sending of e-mail after the detection of an alarm of any equipment in
the network.
The sending of the e-mails is subordinated to the definition of the operators who must receive the e-mails
and to the setting of the sending criteria: enabling for the reception of the e-mails, type of equipment/
alarm, period when the operator is enabled to the reception of the e-mails, etc.
When an operator is enabled, at the first detection of an alarm that corresponds to the sending criteria set
for that operator, he receives an e-mail displaying:
Equipment type Logical address
Alarm description
No more e-mail will be sent to this operator, even if new alarms raise, until when the operator himself (or
the NMS5UX Superuser) does not communicate to the system to have received the e-mail (acknowledge
of the operation) and re-enables the operator himself to receive new e-mails.
An operator can be created/changed/deleted and acknowledged by the NMS5UX Superuser (see Alarm Not.
via e-mail - Conf).
The NMS5UX entry, normal, advanced or privileged user can only, knowing the name and the password of
an operator, acknowledge him in such a way that the system memorizes that the operator has read the e-
mail and enables him to receive e-mails again (Alarm Notification via e-mail).
318 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Command Executor
WARNING If you select one piece of equipment in the map and then the considered command, it is possible
that the system displays the message No Command available for the selected equipment.
This means that ones supervision system, for the type of selected equipment, is not provided with files
containing sequences of SNMP commands.
SIAE MICROELETTRONICA provides, on demand, files containing specific sequences of SNMP commands.
The Command Executor command executes series of SNMP commands stored on file.
Operations
Execute series of SNMP commands stored on file
Display the content of a file of SNMP commands
Display the files of scheduled SNMP commands
GUI
SNMP Command Executor window
Execute series of SNMP commands stored on file

1. Select Tools > Command Executor.

2. If the wished file is not in the directory specified in the Directory box of the SNMP Command Executor
window, type the new path in the box or use the Change Directory push-button.
3. Select, in the Files area, the wished command file.

4. Set the possible parameters, displayed in the and Command File Description area, on the choice of the
file.
The list of parameters changes according to the selected file. Some file do not need the setting of the
parameters.
5. Select the option:

Immediate, if you wish that the sequence of SNMP commands in the file is immediately execut-
ed.
Scheduled, if you wish that the sequence of SNMP commands in the file is executed later.
Press the push-button to display the boxes for the setting of the data (Day, Month, Year) and of
the time (Hour, Min) when you wish to execute the sequence of the commands.
6. Press Start Command.

If, in the previous step, the activated box is:
Immediate, in the Message area, the progress of the operations is displayed.
It is possible to stop the procedure pressing OK in the Command Executor window displayed at
the activation of the operation.
Scheduled, a message is displayed informing that the file has been scheduled and will be auto-
matically started at the set date/time.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 319

Display the content of a file of SNMP commands

2. If the wished file is not in the directory specified in the Directory box of the SNMP Command Executor
window, type the new path in the box or press Change Directory.
3. Select, in the Files area, the wished command file.
4. Select Edit > View Command File.

The View File - window opens where the list of the SNMP commands is displayed.
Display the files of scheduled SNMP commands

2. In the SNMP Command Executor window, press View Scheduled.

The View Scheduled Command window opens, where the scheduled files are listed.
In detail, for each file, it is indicated in the field:
File. Name of the file.
Par 1...Par 5. Possible values set for the parameters required for the execution of the file.
Status. Status of the operation:
Waiting. The file has not been executed yet.
It is possible that, in the Sched Time field, there is a scheduled date/time previous to the
current one. This means that the NE, when the operation was scheduled, was not in the
right condition for the execution of the file (for example, the NE was disconnected or un-
reachable). In this case, the system attempts to re-execute the file at regular intervals.
Running. The execution of the file is in progress.
Completed. The sequence of SNMP commands in the file has been executed successfully.
Sched Time. Date (day-month-year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) for when the execution
of the file has been scheduled.
Start Time. Date (day-month-year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) when the execution of the
sequence is started.
Stop Time. Possible values set for the parameters required for the execution of the file.
3. To delete a file, select the relevant record and then press Delete Command.
The file is deleted from the list
4. To display the progress of the executed operation by a file, select the relevant record and then press
View Detailed Information.
The View File - window opens displaying the list of the displayed operation.
5. To update the information in the window, press Refresh.

The date/time displayed in the status bar of the window opens.
320 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

SNMP Command Executor window
This window allows executing a file of commands on a given equipment.
Menu bar
Edit > View Command File. It displays the content of a file of SNMP commands.
Command file
Directory. Indicates the path where the files are stored. The Change Directory push-button
opens the system window to change this path.
Files. List of available files in the selected path.
Command File Description. Parameters to set for the execution of the SNMP commands rel-
evant to the file selected in Files area.
Equipment Address. Logic address of the equipment.
Equipment type. Type of considered equipment.
Execution options
The option push-buttons define the moment when the commands will be executed:
Immediate, the sequence of SNMP commands in the file is immediately executed.
Scheduled, the sequence of SNMP commands in the file is executed later.
When the push-button is selected, the boxes for the setting of the data (Day, Month,
Year) and of the time (Hour, Min), where you wish to execute the sequence of the com-
mands, are displayed.
Messages area
List of the operations completed during the execution of the command sequence. To delete the
content of the area, move the pointer in the Messages area, click the right mouse button and
select Clear in the context menu.
Push-buttons
Start Command. It starts the execution of the commands (option Immediate) or confirmation
of the scheduling of the commands (option Scheduled).
View Scheduled. It displays the list of the scheduled files.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 321

NE Monitoring
The NE Monitoring command allows assigning a set of parameters to monitor periodically to the equip-
ment. The equipment - parameters to monitor association is defined as measure.
Operations
Display the list of the measures
Create a measure
Display the characteristics of a measure
Delete a measure
Activate a measure
Deactivate a measure
Display the results of a measure
Save the results of a measure
Display the results of a measure stored in a file
Save the results of a measure stored in a file
Delete a file
GUI
NE Monitoring window
See also
NE Monitoring functionality (more info)
Display the list of the measures

1. If you wish to display:

Only the measures relevant to a given piece ofequipment select the wished equipment in the
All the measures relevant to all the pieces ofequipment start the procedure from step 2.
2. Select Tools > NE Monitoring.

If the equipment has been selected before opening the window, the NE Monitoring window lists only
the measures relevant to the selected equipment.
Otherwise, the window lists all the measures executed by the users.
Create a measure

1. It is possible to set the equipment which you wish to assign the parameters to monitor to, selecting it
in the LX Map Manager window.
Otherwise, it will be possible to set the equipment during the procedure of measure creation.
3. In the NE Monitoring window, select Options > Add Measure.
322 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

4. In the Add Measure window, set the equipment, which you wish to assign the parameters to monitor
to, in one of the following ways:
Select the NE Logical Address option and type the logical address of the wished NE in the box
below.
Select the NE IP-Address option and type the IP address of the wished NE in the box below.
If, at step 1, a specific NE has been selected in the box, the IP address of this equipment is automati-
cally displayed.
5. Type, in the Timeout box, the time interval, expressed in seconds, between a reading of the value of
each parameter and the next one.
6. Select, in the Measure Type area, the wished group of parameters.

The user can select predefined groups of parameters. The SIAE MICROELETTRONICA provides, on de-
mand, files with specific groups of parameters.
7. Press Ok.
The measure is added to the list.
Display the characteristics of a measure


Only the measures relevant to a given piece of equipment, select the wished equipment in the
All the measures relevant to all the equipment, start the procedure from step 2.

3. In the NE Monitoring window, select the measure you wish to display the characteristics.
4. Select Options > Measure Properties.

The Measure Properties window opens displaying in the:
<First box>. The logical address of the NE which the set of parameters has been assigned to.
Timeout. Time range, expressed in seconds, between two consecutive reading of the same pa-
rameter.
Measure Type. Group of parameters.
Delete a measure


All the measures relevant to all the pieces ofequipment, start the procedure from step 2.

3. In the NE Monitoring window, select the measure, in status Stopped or Interrupted, you wish to delete.
4. Select Options > Delete Measure.

The measure is deleted from the list.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 323

Activate a measure


All the measures relevant to all the equipment, starts the procedure from step 2.
3. In the NE Monitoring window, select the measure, in status Stopped or Interrupted, you wish to acti-
vate.
4. Select Options > Start Measure.

The measure is activated.
Deactivate a measure


All the measures relevant to all the pieces ofequipment, starts the procedure from step 2.
2. In the NE Monitoring window, select the measure, in status Stopped or Interrupted, you wish to deac-
tivate.
3. Select Options > Stop Measure.

The measure is deactivated.
Display the results of a measure


3. In the NE Monitoring window, select the measure for which you wish to display the results.
4. To display the result in format:

Graphic, Select Options > View Graphics.
The <name of parameters group> - <NE logical address> window opens. Fig.18 shows an ex-
ample.
Table, Select Options > View Exported File.
The Preview:... window opens. Fig.19 shows an example.
324 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Save the results of a measure

1. To display:
3. In the NE Monitoring window, select the measure for which you wish to save the results.
4. To save the result in graphic format:
a. Select Options > View Graphics.

The <name of parameters group> - <NE logical address> window opens. Fig.18 shows an ex-
ample.
b. Select File > Save as.

The Save as window opens.
c. Type the file name in the Selection box.

The system proposes as path the default directory. Change the path, if necessary.
d. Press OK.
5. To save the result in table format:
a. Select Options > View Exported File.

b. Select File > Save as.

c. Type the file name in the Selection box.

d. Press OK.
Display the results of a measure stored in a file

2. In the NE Monitoring window, to display the results in format:

Graphic, select File > Load Graphics.
Table, select File > Load Exported File.
3. Select the wished file in the Files area of the Load...window.

The format of the name of the file is the following: <name of the parameters group>-<NE logical ad-
dress>-<yearmonthday>_<hourminuteseconds>.csv
4. Press OK.
5. If at step 2 you have selected:

File > Load Graphics.
The <parameters group name> - <NE logical address> window opens. Fig.18 shows an example.
File > Load Exported File.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 325

Save the results of a measure stored in a file

2. In the NE Monitoring window, to display the results in format:

Graphic, select File > Load Graphics.
Table, select File > Load Exported File.
3. Select the wished file in the Files area of the Load...window.
4. Press OK.
5. If at step 2 you have selected:

File > Load Graphics.
The <parameters group name> - <NE logical address> window opens. Fig.18 shows an example.
File > Load Exported File.
6. Select File > Save as.

7. Type the file name in the Selection box.

8. Press OK.
Delete a file

2. In the NE Monitoring window, select File > Delete File.
3. Select the wished file in the Files area of the Delete File window.
4. Press OK.
The file is deleted from the disk of the machine.
326 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Fig.18 Graphic display of the data (NE Monitoring)
(1) Menu:
File > Save as. It saves the results of the measure to a file which the user can assign the
wished name and path to.
View > Zoom Minutes > ... It displays the results subdivided by intervals of 5, 15 or 30 minutes.
View > Zoom Hours > ... It displays the results subdivided by intervals of 1, 3, 6 or 12 hours.
View > Zoom Days > ... It displays the results subdivided by intervals of 1, 2, 5, 15 or 30 days.
View > Zoom 100%. It displays the results subdivided by the time interval stored in the file
until the selection of the command.
In the View menu, the asterisk next to a value indicates the current setting.
(2) For each parameter selected in the area below, a graph is displayed.
(3) Each value indicates a different monitored parameter.

To display the results relevant to a parameter, activate the relevant check-box. It is possible to ac-
tivate the display of more parameters at the same time.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 327

Fig.19 Table display of the data (NE Monitoring)
1
2 3
(1) Menu bar:

File > Save as. It saves the results of the measure to a file which the user can assign the
wished name and path to.
(2) Date and time when the parameter value has been recorded.
(3) Monitored parameters in the specific group of measures.
(4) Total number of elements in the window.
328 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NE Monitoring window
This window allows assigning a set of parameters to monitor periodically to the equipment.
Menu bar
File > Load Graphics. It displays, in graph format, the results of a measure saved to file.
File > Load Exported File. It displays, in table format, the results of a measure saved to file.
File > Delete File. It deletes the files where the results of the measures are stored.
Options > Add Measure. It assigns the parameters to monitor to the equipment (creation of
a measure).
Options > Delete Measure. It deletes a measure.
Options > Start Measure. It activates a measure.
Options > Stop Measure. It deactivates a measure.
Options > Measure Properties. It displays the measure properties.
Options > View Graphics. It displays, in graph format, the results of a measure.
Options > View Exported File. It displays, in table format, the results of a measure.
Parameters
Measure. Name of the measure.
NE Logical Address. Logical address of the NEs relevant to the measure.
NE IP-Address. IP address of the NEs relevant to the measure.
Status. Status of the measure:
Started. The measure is active.
Stopped. The measure is inactive.
Interrupted. The measure is interrupted. The Messages column displays the cause of the
interruption.
Message. Self-explanation message specifying possible errors.
Status bar
Filter on: If, before opening the NE Monitoring window, one piece of equipment has been se-
lected, the logical address of the selected equipment is displayed in the status bar of the window.
If the check-box is active, the window will list only the measures relevant to the selected equip-
ment. If the check-box is inactive, the window will list all the measures defined by the user.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 329

NE Monitoring functionality (more info)
The NE Monitoring functionality allows assigning a group of parameters to monitor to one piece of equip-
ment.
The equipment - parameters to monitor is defined measure.
For a single equipment, it is possible to define more measures.
WARNING The user can assign to the equipment only PREDEFINED groups of parameters. SIAE MICRO-
ELETTRONICA provides, on demand, files with specific groups of parameters.
After having created the measure (Create a measure), it is necessary to start it (activation of the monitor-
ing of the parameters - Activate a measure). Periodically, the system will read the parameters and will
record the results until when the measure is not interrupted (Deactivate a measure).
At the start of a measure, a file is automatically created where are recorded the results of the measure
itself. At next start, a new file will be automatically created.
The system stores the file in a predefined directory (default /opt/nms5ux/tools/nms5NeMonitoring/data)
and assigns a name formed by the following parameters <name of the parameters group>-<NE logical
address>-<yearmonthday>_<hourminuteseconds>.csv.
For each measure, a maximum of N files are kept in memory (default N=10, configurable by Superuser).
The system allows, moreover, the contemporary start of N files (default N=10, configurable by Superuser).
The results of the measures can be displayed in graphic or table format (Display the results of a measure/
Display the results of a measure stored in a file).
Moreover, it is possible to save the results of the measures to a file which the user can assign the wished
name and path (Save the results of a measure/Save the results of a measure stored in a file).
330 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Auto Discovery
The command Auto Discovery allows managing the Auto Discovery functionality for the detection of the
equipment in the network and not managed yet by the supervision system, the automatic creation and
connection of the discovered NE objects.
Operations
Verify the settings of Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up)
Configure and activate the Network Scan modality
Deactivate the Network Scan modality
Configure and activate the NE Wake Up modality
Deactivate the NE Wake Up modality
Save the Auto Discovery configuration
Load the Auto Discovery configuration
Display the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Discovery table)
Search the equipment in the Auto Discovery table
Delete one or more pieces of equipment from the Auto Discovery table
Create manually the object of the equipment present in the Auto Discovery table
GUI
Scan Configuration window
Network Element Captured window
See also
Object creation - Auto Discovery functionality
Verify the settings of Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up)

1. Select Tools > Auto Discovery.
2. In the Network Discovery Manager window, select Manager > Scan Configuration.
The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Scan Configuration window, where is indi-
cated the activation status of the two modalities available for the automatic detection of the equipment
(Network Scan and NE Wake UP) and the configuration of the parameters used by the two modalities.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 331

Configure and activate the Network Scan modality

The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Scan Configuration window.
3. Set the IP addresses you wish to periodically scan.
A group of IP addresses can be set in the following way:
a. Type, in the First IP and Last IP boxes, the IP addresses determining the range of values which
will be scanned each cycle.
The range of values is displayed in the Range IP Addresses area.
b. Press Add.
c. Repeat the steps a. and b. to insert all the wished ranges of addresses.
To delete a single item from the Range IP Addresses area, select it and press Delete.
To delete all the items at the same time, press Delete All.
It is possible to set a single IP address in the following way:

a. Type the IP address which will be scanned each cycle in the IP box.
The value is displayed in the Specific IP Addresses area.
b. Press Add.
c. Repeat the steps a. and b. to insert more IP addresses.

To delete a single item from the Specific IP Addresses area, select it and press Delete.
4. Set the execution modality of the cyclic scanning.
It is possible to set the scanning takes place once at a day in the following way:
a. Set the value One Time At Day in the Scan Repetition box.
b. Set the hours:minutes, within 24 hours, when you wish the Auto Discovery scanning takes place
in the Start Time box.
It is possible to set the scanning takes place continuously in the following way:
a. Set the value Continuous in the Scan Repetition box.
b. Set the interval (expressed as hour:minute) between two successive scan operations in the
Timeout Between Scan Cycle box.
5. Type the number of IP addresses (numeric value between 1 and 100) you wish to scan at the same
time in the IP Managed Simultaneously.
6. Type the interval (expressed in seconds) between the simultaneous scanning of a group of IP addresses
and the next one in the Timeout Between Simultaneous IP box.
7. Set, in the Action When Found box, the type of action NMS5LX must execute at the detection of a new
equipment:
Manage. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table, creates
the relevant NE symbol in the map and connects it.
Create Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table and
creates the relevant NE symbol in the map.
Log Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table.
8. Set, in the Selected Map box, the map where the equipment symbol must be possibly created:
a. Press ...
The Select a Map window opens.
b. Select the map from the list.
332 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

c. Press Ok.
9. Type, in the Selected Container box, the name of the container where you wish to create the possible
NE object.
If the container is not present in the set map, when the NE object is created, even the container will
be automatically created.
Remember that the NE object is not created directly in the container but in the path <container set by
the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year when the object is created>
10.If you wish the Network Scan modality is activated:

Immediately, activate the Apply Configuration Immediately option and press Save as Active
Conf.
At the end of the scanning process in progress, press Save as Active Conf.
The parameters Action When Found, Selected Map and Selected Container are in common with the NE
Wake UP modality. A change to them affects even the execution of this modality.
Deactivate the Network Scan modality

3. In the Scan Configuration window, remove all the values in the Range IP Addresses and Specific IP Ad-
dresses areas.
It is possible to delete, from every area, a single item pressing the Delete push-button after having
selected the item, or all the items at the same time pressing Delete All.
4. If you wish the Network Scan modality is deactivated:

Conf.
Configure and activate the NE Wake Up modality


3. In the Scan Configuration window, activate the Manage Wake-up Trap option.
4. Set, in the Action When Found box, the type of action NMS5LX must execute at the detection of a new
equipment:
Manage. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table, creates
the relevant NE symbol in the map and connects it.
Create Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table and
creates the relevant NE symbol in the map.
Log Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table.
5. Set, in the Selected Map box, the map where the equipment symbol must be possibly created:
a. Press ...
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 333

The Select a Map window opens.
b. Select the map from the list.
c. Press Ok.
6. Type, in the Selected Container box, the name of the container where you wish to create the possible
NE object.
If the container is not present in the set map, when the NE object is created, even the container will
be automatically created.
Remember that the NE object is not created directly in the container but in the path <container set by
the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year when the object is created>
7. If you wish the Network Scan modality is activated:

Conf.
The parameters Action When Found, Selected Map and Selected Container are in common with the Net-
work Scan modality. A change to them affects even the execution of this modality.
Deactivate the NE Wake Up modality

3. In the Scan Configuration window, deactivate the Manage Wake-up Trap option.
4. If you wish the Network Scan modality is activated:
Conf.
Save the Auto Discovery configuration

3. In the Scan Configuration window, set or change the execution parameters and the operating status of
Network Scan and NE Wake Up modalities as depicted in par. Configure and activate the Network Scan
modality and Configure and activate the NE Wake Up modality.
4. Press Save As.
5. Set the path and type, in the Selection box, the name of the file (with .cfg extension) where you wish
to save the Auto Discovery configuration.
6. Press Ok.
334 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Load the Auto Discovery configuration

3. In the Scan Configuration window, press Load.
4. Select the file (with .cfg extension) where the wished Auto Discovery configuration is stored.
5. Press Ok.
In the Scan Configuration window, the configuration stored in the file is displayed.
Display the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Discovery table)

2. In the Network Discovery Manager window, select Manager > Network Element Captured.
The Network Element Captured window displays the list of the equipment detected by Auto Discovery
(Network Scan and/or Wake Up modality).
Search the equipment in the Auto Discovery table

3. Type, in the text field next to the Find push-button of the Network Element Captured window, an al-
phanumeric string (case sensitive) corresponding to the value or to part of the value in the ID, IP Ad-
dress, Customer ID, Type, Action or Status column relevant to the equipment you wish to search.
4. Press Find.
The list highlights the first line matching the set searching criterion.
If the list contains more pieces of equipment matching the search criterion, the Find push-button is
replaced by the Next push-button.
5. Press Next to display the next equipment.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 335

Delete one or more pieces of equipment from the Auto Discovery table

3. In the Network Element Captured window, select the equipment you wish to delete.
4. Press Delete.
The pieces of equipment are removed from the list.
Create manually the object of the equipment present in the Auto Discovery table

WARNING Operation available only for equipment detected by Auto Discovery for which no action has been
executed yet (column Action, value Done - see Network Element Captured window).
Auto Discovery functionality is available only for equipment managed by SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
3. In the Network Element Captured window, select the equipment for which you wish to create the rele-
vant NE object.
4. Press Create.
During the operation, the Status column displays the wording In progress.
At the end of the operation, the Action column displays the wording Create.
The NE object is created in the following path:
<map set by the user*> / <container set by the user*> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/
month/year when the object is created>
* Map/container currently set for the Auto Discovery functionality (Scan Configuration window).
336 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Scan Configuration window
This window allows configuring the operating modality of Auto-Discovery functionality.
Fig.20 Scan Configuration window
1
2
4
5
6
(1) Menu bar:

File > Close. It close the window.
Manager > Scan Configuration. It displays the Scan Configuration window.
Command not meaningful for the considered window.
Manager > Network Element Captured. It displays the Network Element Captured window.
(2) Activation status of NE Wake Up modality. If the check-box is:

Active, the NE Wake Up modality is active.
Inactive, the NE Wake Up modality is inactive.
(3) Activation status and configuration parameters of Network Scan modality. Parameter/area:
Range IP Addresses and Specific IP Addresses. Respectively groups of IP addresses and sin-
gle IP addresses cyclically scanned by the Network Scan modality.
The presence or not of values in the two areas causes even the activation or not of the Net-
work Scan modality. In detail, the Network Scan modality is:
Active, when at least one value is present in the Range IP Addresses or Specific IP
Addresses areas
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 337

Inactive, when the Range IP Addresses e Specific IP Addresses areas are empty.
Scan Repetition. Execution modality of the cyclic scanning:
One Time At Day. The scanning is executed once at a day at the time displayed in the
Start Time box.
Continuous. The scanning is cyclically executed each hour:minute displayed in the
Timeout Between Scan Cycle box.
The Start Time and Timeout Between Scan Cycle boxes are displayed alternatively depend-
ing on the value set for the Scan Repetition parameter
IP Managed Simultaneously. Number of IP addresses scanned at the same time.
Timeout Between Simultaneous IP. Time range (in seconds) between a simultaneous scan-
ning of a group of IP addresses and the next one.
(4) Configuration parameters of Network Scan and NE Wake Up modalities. Parameter:

Action When Found. Type of action NMS5LX must execute at the detection of new equip-
ment:
Manage. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table,
creates the relevant NE symbol in the map and connects it.
Create Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery
table and creates the relevant NE symbol in the map.
Log Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery ta-
ble.
Selected Map. Map where the equipment symbol must possibly be created.
Selected Container. Name of the container where you wish to create the possible NE object.
Remember that the NE object is not created directly in the container but in the path <con-
tainer set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year when the object is
created>.
(5) Status of immediate actuation of the new configuration. If the Apply Configuration Immediately op-
tion is:
Active, when the Save as Active Conf push-button is selected, the current configuration
will be transmitted and immediately carried out by the daemon managing the operations of
detection of new equipment.
Inactive, when the Save as Active Conf push-button is selected, the current configuration
will be stored and carried out by the daemon at the end of the current scanning.
(6) Push-button:
Save as Active Conf. Saves the current setting of the execution parameters of Auto Dis-
covery as new active configuration.
Save As. Saves the current setting of the execution parameters of Auto Discovery to a file.
Load Active Conf. Updates the data in the window loading those stored as current config-
uration.
Load. Opens the file containing a specific setting of the execution parameters of Auto Dis-
covery previously saved.
338 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Network Element Captured window
This window allows managing the equipment found by the Auto-Discovery procedure.
Menu bar
File > Close. It close the window.
Manager > Scan Configuration. It displays the Scan Configuration window.
Manager > Network Element Captured. It displays the Network Element Captured window.
Command not meaningful for the considered window.
Parameters
ID. Progressive index of insertion in the table.
IP Address. IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment.
Customer ID. Logic address of the equipment.
Action. Action which has been automatically executed by Auto Discovery at the detection of the
new equipment besides the registration of it in the Auto Discovery table *:
None. No action has been executed.
Create. The corresponding NE object has been created.
Create and Connect. The corresponding NE object has been created and connected.
Change Type Info. No other action has been executed. Auto Discovery notifies that the
considered equipment is already managed by NMS5LX but with a type different from that
detected in the network for the specific IP Address. The new type assumed by the equip-
ment is that displayed in the Type column **.
Status. Status of the action:
In Progress. An action is in progress.
Done. No action is in progress.
NSAP. Value not available for the current version of the system.
Create Date. Date/time when the corresponding NE object has been created.
Connection Date. Date/time when the corresponding NE object has been connected.
Value available and meaningful only for created and connected NE object (column Action, value
Create and Connect).
Map. Map where the corresponding NE object has been created.
Path. Path where the corresponding NE object has been created.
Push-buttons
Find. It searches one or more pieces of equipment in the list.
Reload. It updates the data in the window.
Delete. It deletes the selected pieces of equipment.
Create. It creates the NE object of the equipment for which no action has been executed yet
(column Action, value Done).
* Example. Suppose that an EL series equipment with address 172.22.13.6 is managed by NMS5LX. At a
given moment, the EL equipment in the network is replaced by an ALplus equipment. The address
172.22.13.6 is assigned to the new equipment.
If the user activates the Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up modality and defines that the address
172.22.13.6 is included in the scanned IP addresses, on the detection of the 172.22.13.6 address a notify
of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.
** The update of the Auto Discovery table is dynamic. This means that the detection of a new equipment
is immediately indicated in the window, if this is open.
*** If for the selected equipment the action of creation/connection of the symbol (column Action, value
Create or Create and Connect) has been executed.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 339

Rmon
The Rmon command manages the statistics counters of the equipment Ethernet ports.
Operations
STATISTICS GROUP
Verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of equipment (RMON statistics)

Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics
Capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant
Save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant
HISTORY GROUP
Display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port

Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON statistics
Save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port
HISTORY (SIAE) GROUP
The group History (SIAE) is a proprietary group of SIAE, obtained as extension of the group RMON
standard History, which the following TX commands have been added to: packets: Packets, Multi-
casts, Broadcasts; octets: Octets; use percentage: Utilization.
Display the history of the RMON 15 min statistics of an Ethernet port
Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of RMON 15 min statistics
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of RMON 15min statistics
Save the history of the RMON 15 min statistics of an Ethernet port
HISTORY (PRIORITY/VLAN) GROUP
Display the history of the RMON 15 min (Priority/VLAN) statistics of an Ethernet port
Save the history of the RMON 15 min (Priority/VLAN) statistics of an Ethernet port
ALARMS GROUP
Verify the enabling and the activation criteria for a RMON counter
Enable and define the activation criteria for a RMON counter
Disable an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics)
GUI
Rmon Statistics Viewer window
Rmon History View window
Rmon Aggregate History View window
Rmon Service & Priority History View window
See also
RMon standard (info)
340 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of equipment (RMON statistics)

WARNING Operation available only for equipment in connected status (which LCT/WEB LCT is NOT con-
nected to in Configuration modality) where the equipment software supports the RMON standard.
1. Continue in one of the following ways:

Select one piece of equipment in the map and, then, Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX Statistics.
In the Network Elements area of the Rmon Statistics Viewer window, only the selected equip-
ment is present.
Select Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX Statistics.
The Network Elements area of the Rmon Statistics Viewer window displays all the pieces of
equipment in the map and supporting the RMON standard.
In any moment, it is possible to insert one or more pieces of equipment in the Network Elements area
selecting the relevant symbols in the map and pressing Add From Map or to delete all the pieces of
equipment in the list pressing Clear All.
For all the NE objects of ALplus Node e ALCplus2 Node type, the Network Elements area displays the
detail of the equipment of the nodal system. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
2. In the Network Elements area, select the equipment that manages the wished Ethernet ports.
The Interface Definition... area defines the ports currently active for the count of the RMON statistics.
If the wished port is not active, it can be activated (see Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the
RMON statistics)
3. In the Interface Definition... area, select the port which you wish to verify the counters for.
For each counter, the relevant value is reported in the Value column.
The description of the Ethernet counters (RMON) changes according to the type of selected equipment.
In order to refresh the data press Refresh or activate the Auto Refresh box (the data are automatically
update every second).
Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics


Select the equipment in the map and, then, Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX Statistics.
ment is present.
3. In the Interface Definition... area press the right mouse button and select Add.
The NMS5LX Statistics Enable window opens.
4. Select the Ethernet port you wish to activate in the Interface box.
5. Press Add.
The port is added to the Interface Definition... area.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 341

If the selected port is already active, the message Unable to Perform Operation. Selected Port Already
Used is displayed.
The port will remain active until the user will deactivate it (see Deactivate an Ethernet port from the
count of the RMON statistics).
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics


ment is present.
3. In the Interface Definition... area, select the port you wish to activate.

A pop-up menu opens.
5. Select Delete and confirm.
Capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant


ment is present.
If the wished port is not active, it is possible Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON sta-
tistics).
3. In the Interface Definition... area, select the wished port.

5. Select Capture.
342 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

6. Set, in the Interval (1-60min) box of the Captured Statistics window, the time interval (number be-
tween 1 and 60 minutes) at the end of which the values of the counters must be displayed in the Cap-
tured Statistics window.
7. Press Start.
The status of the capture operation changes from Ready to Running.
To stop the operation press Stop.
Once elapsed the set time interval, the status of the capture operation changes from Running to Com-
plete and the Captured Statistics window displays the values of the counters in the instant when the
time interval is elapsed.
Save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant

1. The user has Capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant.
2. In the Captured Statistics window, press .
3. Set the path and type, in the Selection box of the SelectExportFile window, the name of the file (with
extension .txt) where you wish to save the information.
4. Press Ok.
The file is saved in text format and can be opened by any text editor.
Display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port


Select the equipment in the map and, then, Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX History View.
In the Addresses area of the Rmon History View window, only the selected equipment is present.
Select Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX History View.
The Addresses area of the Rmon History View window displays all the pieces ofequipment in the
map and supporting the RMON standard.
2. In the Addresses area, select the equipment that manages the wished Ethernet ports.
The area below defines the ports currently active for the count of the history of the RMON statistics.
It is possible Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics, if this is not
active yet.
3. Select the port, press the right mouse button and select Graph.
The graph of the statistics history is displayed.
By default, the starting display mode is the following:
Packets box. Counters displayed in the graph: Packets. The graph displays the counters whose
measure unit is the packet: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Oversize,
Fragments, Collision, Jabber, Drop Events.
To hide a counter, deactivate the relevant box in the Graph Summary area. To display it again
in the graph, re-activate the relevant box.
Each counter is identified by a color corresponding to the color of the relevant bar (or line) in
the graph.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 343

To change the counters represented in the graph set, in the Packets box, the Utilization option
(percentile estimate of the real bandwidth used) or Octets (total number of octets).
The description of the Ethernet counters (RMON) changes depending on the selected equipment
type.
Grap Type box. Type of graph: Histogram. Each bar within the observation period has a colour
corresponding to the colour of the relevant counter displayed in the Graph Summary area.
To change the type of graph set, in the Graph Type box, the Line option: the values are repre-
sented by lines; even in this case, the color of the lines represents the counter which the line
itself refers to.
Data type box. Value of the represented counter: Mean of the values sampled within the time
interval represented on abscissa axis (Average option).
To change the parameter set, in the Graph Type box, the Measured option (value represented
on the abscissa axis at the last sampling of the time interval) or Maximum (maximum value,
represented on the abscissa axis, sampled within the displayed time interval).
Abscissa axis. Time interval: Days (date format month/day/year). The graph displays the last
30 days. If the port is enabled from less than 30 days, only the available days are displayed.
The parameter can be configured by the Superuser.
A double click on the area representing one day in the graph displays the statistics of the coun-
ters of the selected day, subdivided in 1-hour period. Pressing the central mouse button, you
return to the previous view.
A double click on the area representing one hour in the graph displays the statistics of the coun-
ters of the selected day/hour, subdivided in 1-minute period. Pressing the central mouse button,
you return to the previous view.
The display of the message No data available indicates that no information is available for the
selected time interval.
Ordinate axis. Measure unit of the counter: number of packets.
The measure unit changes depending on the type of parameters represented in the graph (see
setting of the Packets box in figure).
Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics


3. In the area where the ports are listed, press the right mouse button and select Add Rmon.
The New Control Entry window opens.
4. Select, in the Port box, the Ethernet port you wish to activate.
The remnant parameters in the window cannot be changed. For their description, refer to Fig.22.
5. Press Apply.
The port is added to the list.
The port will remain active until the user will not deactivate it (see Deactivate an Ethernet port from
the count of the history of the RMON statistics).
344 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON statistics


3. Select the port you wish to deactivate.

5. Select Disable Rmon and confirm.
Save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port

1. Select Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX History View.

2. In the Rmon History View window, display the data you wish to save to file (see Display the history of
the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port).
3. Press .
.csv extension) where you wish to save the information.
5. Press Ok.
The data displayed in the window are saved to file.
Display the history of the RMON 15 min statistics of an Ethernet port


Select the equipment in the map and, then, Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX History View 15 min.
In the Addresses area of the Rmon Aggregate History View window, only the selected equipment
is present.
Select Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX History View 15 min.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 345

The Addresses area of the Rmon Aggregate History View window displays all the pieces of equip-
ment in the map and supporting the RMON standard.
The area below defines the ports currently active for the count of the history of the RMON statistics
aggregated on 15 minutes.
If the wished port is not active, it can be activated (see Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the
history of RMON 15 min statistics)
measure unit is the packet.
Group Variables Rx: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Oversize, Frag-
ments, Collision, Jabber, Drop Events.
Group Variables Tx: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts
the graph.
To change the counters represented in the graph set, in the Packets box, the option:
Utilization (percentage estimate of the real used bandwidth), activates the counters Var-
iables Rx: Utilization and Variables Tx: Utilization.
Octets (total number of octets), activates the counters Variables Rx: Octects and Varia-
bles Tx: Octects.
The description of the Ethernet counters (RMON) change depending on the selected equipment
type.
Data type box. Value of the represented counter: Daily Average, average value of the values
sampled during the period of a day.
To change the parameter set, in the Data Type box, the Daily Maximum option (maximum value
sampled during the period of one day) or Total Measured (all the measures sampled along 15
minutes are displayed).
Time box. Time representation: Local Time, data are displayed with reference to local time.
To change the parameter set, in the Time box, the option UTC (data are displayed with reference
to universal time - mean Greenwhich time).
ters of the selected day, subdivided in 15 minute period. The wording relevant to every period
of 15 minutes takes different colour according to the result of the measure itself: Meaningful
(green), Incomplete (yellow), Lost (red), Restarted (orange), Missing (black). Pressing the cen-
tral mouse button, you return to the previous view.
346 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of RMON 15 min statistics


is present.
The area below defines the ports currently active for the count of the history of the RMON statistics on
15 minutes.
3. In the area where the ports are listed, press the right mouse button and select Add Rmon.
4. Select, in the Port box of the New Control Entry window, the Ethernet port you wish to activate.
The remnant parameters in the window cannot be change. For their description, refer to Fig.23.
5. Press Apply.
The port is added to the list.
The port will remain active until the user will not deactivate it (see Deactivate an Ethernet port from
the count of the history of RMON 15min statistics).
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of RMON 15min statistics


is present.
The area below defines the ports currently active for the count of the history of the RMON statistics on
15 minutes.
3. Select the port you wish to deactivate.

5. Select Disable Rmon and confirm.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 347

Save the history of the RMON 15 min statistics of an Ethernet port

1. Select Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX History View 15min.
2. In the Rmon Aggregate History View window, display the data you wish to save to file (see Display the
history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port).
3. Press .
5. Press Ok.
Display the history of the RMON 15 min (Priority/VLAN) statistics of an Ethernet port

WARNING Operation available only for SNMP equipment in connected status (which LCT/WEB LCT is NOT
connected to in Configuration modality) where the equipment software supports the RMON standard.
The measures of the statistics counters RMON 15 min for Priority/VLAN can be activated/deactivated only
in the View/Modify P.M. Status window.

Select the SNMP equipment in the map and, then, Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX History View
Prio/Service.
In the Addresses area of the Rmon Service & Priority History View window, only the selected
equipment is present.
Select Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX History View Prio/Service.
The Addresses area of the Rmon Service & Priority History View window displays all the SNMP
pieces of equipment in the map and supporting the RMON standard.
The area below defines the ports currently active for the count of the history of the RMON statistics
aggregated on 15 minutes and relevant to the different priority/VLAN.
If the wished port is not active, it can be activated (see Activate the PM measures for NEs of the same
type).
measure unit is the packet.
Group Variables Rx: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Oversize, Frag-
Group Variables Tx: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts
the graph.
To change the counters represented in the graph set, in the Packets box, the option:
348 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Utilization (percentage estimate of the real used bandwidth), activates the counters Var-
iables Rx: Utilization and Variables Tx: Utilization.
Octets (total number of octets), activates the counters Variables Rx: Octects and Varia-
bles Tx: Octects.
The description of the Ethernet counters (RMON) change depending on the selected equipment
type.
Data type box. Value of the represented counter: Daily Average, average value of the values
sampled during the period of a day.
To change the parameter set, in the Data Type box, the Daily Maximum option (maximum value
sampled during the period of one day) or Total Measured (all the measures sampled along 15
minutes are displayed).
Time box. Time representation: Local Time, data are displayed with reference to local time.
To change the parameter set, in the Time box, the option UTC (data are displayed with reference
to universal time - mean Greenwich time).
ters of the selected day, subdivided in 15 minute period. The wording relevant to every period
of 15 minutes takes different colour according to the result of the measure itself: Meaningful
(green), Incomplete (yellow), Lost (red), Restarted (orange), Missing (black). Pressing the cen-
tral mouse button, you return to the previous view.
Keeping pressed the right button of the mouse when this is over a time interval, a dynamic win-
dow is displayed which shows the details relevant to the specific period.
Save the history of the RMON 15 min (Priority/VLAN) statistics of an Ethernet port

WARNING Operation available only for SNMP equipment in connected status (which LCT/WEB LCT is NOT
connected to in Configuration modality) where the equipment software supports the RMON standard.
1. Select Tools > Rmon > NMS5LX History View Prio/Service.
2. In the Rmon Service & Priority History View window, display the data you wish to save to file (see Dis-
play the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port).
3. Press .
5. Press Ok.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 349

Verify the enabling and the activation criteria for a RMON counter


ment is present.
2. In the Network Elements area, select the equipment which manages the wished Ethernet ports.
In the Interface Definition... area, the ports currently active for the count of the RMON statistics are
displayed.
It is possible Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics, if it is not active yet.

In the Alarm Definition... area, the alarms currently enabled for the selected port are displayed. Fig.21
shows an example.
Enable and define the activation criteria for a RMON counter

WARNING More alarms can be defined for the same counter. Each alarm will be identified by a different
value of Index (Fig.21).
Operation available only for equipment in connected status (which LCT/WEB LCT is NOT connected to in
Configuration modality) where the equipment software supports the RMON standard.

ment is present.
displayed.
It is possible Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics, if it is not active yet.
4. In the Alarm Definition... area, press the right mouse button.A pop-up menu opens.
5. Select Add.The Alarm Statistics Creation window opens.
6. Set, in the Statistics Value box, the counter to monitor and which you wish to associate the alarm to.
7. Set, in the Measure Type box, the mode to compare the counter value with the threshold:
Absolute Value. The value reported in the last sampling instant of the selected counter will be
directly compared with the set (rising and falling) thresholds.
Delta Value. The value compared with the set (rising and falling) threshold will be the difference
between the counter value at the beginning of the interval and the value at the end of the in-
terval.
350 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

8. Set, in the Startup box, the alarm activation mode used for the first comparison between the counter
value and the thresholds set after that the alarm has been enabled by the user: Rising, Falling and Ris-
ing or Falling.
The description of the values available for this parameter and its interaction with the parameters Alarm
Rising Threshold and Alarm Falling Threshold is reported in par. Management of RMON alarms (group:
Alarm).
9. Set, in the Alarm Interval (minutes) box, the interval (in minutes) after which the data are compared
with the thresholds.
10.Set, in the Alarm Rising Threshold box, the rising threshold used for the comparison of the counter val-
ues with the selected counter: when the value of the compared counter is greater than or equal to this
threshold and the value of the previous comparison is lower, an alarm is generated.
For the first comparison, after that the alarm has been enabled by the user, the alarm activation is
affected by the setting of the Startup parameter. The description of the interaction among the param-
eters Startup, Alarm Rising Threshold and Alarm Falling Threshold is reported in par. Management of
RMON alarms (group: Alarm).
11.Set, in the Alarm Falling Threshold box, the lower threshold used for the comparison of the values of
the selected counter: when the value of the compared counter is lower than or equal to this threshold
and the value of the previous comparison is greater, an alarm is generated.
For the first comparison, after that the alarm has been enabled by the user, the alarm activation is
affected by the setting of the Startup parameter. The description of the interaction among the param-
eters Startup, Alarm Rising Threshold and Alarm Falling Threshold is reported in par. Management of
RMON alarms (group: Alarm).
12.Press Ok.
The alarm is added to the Alarm Definition... area.
The Alarm Statistics Creation window remains open. To close it, press Cancel.
The alarm will remain enabled until when it is not deactivated by the user (see Disable an alarm rele-
vant to a counter (RMON statistics)).
Disable an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics)


ment is present.
displayed.
4. In the Alarm Definition... area, select the alarm you wish to disable.
5. Press the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens.
6. Select Delete and confirm.

The alarm is removed from the list.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 351

Rmon Statistics Viewer window
Questa finestra visualizza la storia delle statistiche RMON per le porte Ethernet selezionate.
Fig.21 Rmon Statistics Viewer window
2
3
(1) Menu bar:

Help > About Application. It opens the manual.
(2) List of NEs. For every equipment, the relevant logical address is displayed.
It is possible to insert one or more pieces of equipment selecting the relevant symbols in the map
and pressing Add From Map or to delete all the pieces of equipment in the list pressing Clear All.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type in the list, the detail of the equipment
of the nodal system is displayed. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
(3) LAN ports of the selected equipment currently selected for the count of RMON statistics. The num-
ber/type of Ethernet ports changes depending on the equipment type.
For each port, is displayed in the column:
Index. Value identifying, in univocal mode, the port in the table of the RMON statistics of the
database.
Interface. Name of the Ethernet port.
Owner. User who has activated the port. User means the user used for the connection to the
equipment, then nms5ux user.
352 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

(4) Alarms active for the selected port. For every alarm, is displayed in the column:
Index. Value identifying univocally the table in the RMON alarms in the database.
Variable. Counter to monitor which the alarms refers to.
Type. Modality used to compare the counter value with the threshold:
Absolute. The value reported in the last instant of sampling of the selected counter is
directly compared with the set (raising and falling) thresholds.
Delta. The value compared with the set (raising and falling) thresholds is the differ-
ence between the counter value at the beginning of the interval and the value at the
end of the interval.
Interval (s.). Interval in seconds after which the data are compared with the thresholds.
Rising. Rising threshold used for the comparison of the values with the selected counter.
Falling. Falling threshold used for the comparison of the values with the selected counter.
Owner. User who has enabled the alarm. User means the user used for the connection to the
equipment, then nms5ux user.
(5) Values of the counters relevant to the selected LAN port. For each counter, the relevant value is
displayed in the Value column. The wording n/a indicates that the value is not available.
The description of the Ethernet counters (RMON) changes depending on the type of selected equip-
ment.
(6) Data refresh. In order to refresh the data press Refresh or activate the Auto Refresh box (the data
are automatically update every second).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 353

Captured Statistics window
This window allows capturing the Ethernet statistics for a port of a NE and exporting them to a text file.
Parameters
Text in the box. Logical address of the equipment
Interface. Ethernet port
Interval (1-60 min). Interval for the calculation of the counters
Status. Status of capture operation:
Ready. Operation not in progress.
Running. Operation in progress.
Complete. Capture operation complete.
Aborted. Operation stopped by the user.
Counters
The Ethernet counters (RMON) change depending on the type of selected NE.
Buttons
The two buttons are displayed in alternative:
Start. It starts the count.
Stop. It stops the count.
354 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Rmon History View window
This window shows the history of the RMON statistics for the selected Ethernet ports.
Fig.22 Rmon History View window
1
2
9 3 4
6
5
(1) Title bar. Value of Index of the LAN port which the graph below refers to.
(2) Menu bar:

(3) Statistics display modality.
The first box indicates the counters represented in the graph:
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 355

Packets. The graph displays the values of the following parameters (if enabled in the Graph
Summary area): Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Oversize, Frag-
Utilization. The graph displays the value of the Utilization parameter only.
Octets. The graph displays the value of the Octets parameter only.
The Graph Type box indicates the type of graph:

Histogram. Histogram graph.
Line. Line graph.
The Data type box indicates the value of the displayed counter:
Measured. Value, at the last sampling instant of the time interval, represented on the ab-
scissa axis.
Average. Average of the values sampled within the time interval represented on the abscissa
axis.
Maximum. Maximum value, sampled within the displayed time interval, represented on the
abscissa axis.
(4) Scroll-bar. Allows displaying the hidden parts of the graph.
(5) List of NEs. For each equipment, the relevant logic address is displayed.
It is possible to insert in the list one or more pieces of equipment selecting the relevant symbols in
the map and pressing Add From Map or deleting all the pieces of equipment in the list pressing
Clear All.
(6) Graphical representation of the statistics history. The graph can be represented by histograms or
by lines (setting of the Graph Type parameter).
The graph does not represent all the counters at the same time. They have been subdivided de-
pending on their own measure unit (setting of the Packets parameter).
To hide a counter, deactivate the relevant box in the Graph Summary area. To display it again in
the graph, re-activate the relevant box.
Each counter is identified by a colour corresponding to the colour of the relevant bar (or line) in the
graph.
At the first display of the data relevant to a window, the last 30 last days are represented. If the
port is enabled from less than 30 days, only the available days are displayed. The parameter can
be configured by the Superuser.
A double click on the area representing one day in the graph displays the statistics of the counters
of the selected day, subdivided in 1-hour period. Pressing the central mouse button, you return to
the previous view.
A double click on the area representing one hour in the graph displays the statistics of the counters
of the selected day/hour, subdivided in 1-minute period. Pressing the central mouse button, you
return to the previous view.
It is possible to display, in a dynamic window, the detail of the counters relevant to the time interval
where the pointer is placed, keeping pressed the right mouse button.
(7) Values of the counters relevant to the selected LAN ports. For each counter, is displayed in the col-
umn:
Variables. In order:
A box whose activation indicates that the counter is currently displayed in the graph,
while its deactivation indicates that the counter is not represented in the graph.
What just said is subjected to the setting of the type of parameters represented in
the graph (see setting of the Packets box in figure).
Counter name. The colour of the wording indicates the color of the bar (or line) which
represents the counter inside the graph.
The description of the Ethernet counters (RMON) changes depending on the selected
equipment type.
356 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Min. Minimum value sampled in the time interval currently displayed in the graph.
Max. Maximum value sampled in the time interval currently displayed in the graph.
The wording n/a indicates that the value is not available.
(8) LAN ports of the selected equipment, currently active for the count of the RMON statistics history.
The number/type of Ethernet ports changes depending on the equipment type.
Index. Value identifying in univocal mode the port in the table of the history of the RMON
statistics of the database.
Port. Name of the Ethernet port.
Interval. Sampling interval used to collect the data of the statistics history. Value set to 60
seconds.
Samples. Total number of samples to collect. The equipment stores these data in a rotation
buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the old one. Value set to 240 sam-
plings, which allow storing 4 hours in the equipment.
Owner. User who has activated the port. User means the user used for the connection to
the equipment, then nms5ux user.
Status. Status of the entry in the table of the history of the RMON statistics of the database.
(9) Button Help. Pressing this push-button a pop-up box is displayed which contains a guide with the
instructions for the use of the commands in the window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 357

Rmon Aggregate History View window
This window displays the chart of the aggregated RMON statistic history.
Fig.23 Rmon Aggregate History View window
1
2
9 3 4
7 8
(2) Menu bar:

Action > Upload Today Data. It uploads the data relevant to the current day.
Action > Upload Yesterday Data. It uploads the data relevant to the previous day.

The first box displayed the counters represented in the graph:
Summary area):
Group Variables Rx: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Over-
size, Fragments, Collision, Jabber, Drop Events.
Group Variables Tx: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts.
Utilization. The graph displays the value of the Utilization parameter only (group Variables
Rx and group Variables Tx).
Octets. The graph displays the value of the Octets parameter only (group Variables Rx and
group Variables Tx).
358 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The Data type box displays the value of the displayed counter:
Daily Average, average of the values sampled during the period of one day.
Daily Maximum, maximum sampled value within the period of one day.
Total Measured, all the sampled 15 minute measures are displayed.
The display relevant to the data types Daily Average and Daily Maximum shows, next to the date,
an asterisk * (which sends to wording for error) if, during that specific day, at least one datum In-
complete (measure not completed), Lost (measure lost), Restarted (measure restarted) or Missing
(measure missing) is present among the sample data.
The box Time displays the time reference used to show the data:
Local Time, data are displayed with reference to the local time.
UTC, data are displayed with reference to the universal time - Greenwich mean time.
(4) Scroll-bar. Use to display the hidden parts of the graph.
(5) List of NEs.

Graphical representation of the statistics history. The graph is a histogram graph.
pending on their own measure unit (setting of Packets parameter).
Each counter is identified by a color corresponding to the color of the relevant bar (or line) in the
graph.
of the selected day, subdivided in 15 minute period. Pressing the central mouse button, you return
to the previous view.
(6) Values of the counters relevant to the selected LAN ports.

For each counter, is displayed in the column:
Variables Rx or Variables Tx. In order:
Counter name. The color of the wording indicates the color of the bar (or line) which
equipment type.
(7) List of NEs. For each equipment, the relevant logic address is displayed.
Clear All.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 359

Index. Value identifying univocally the port in the table of the history of the RMON statistics
of the database.
Port. Name of the Ethernet port.
Interval. Sampling interval used to collect the data of the statistics history. Value set to 60
seconds.
Samples. Total number of samples to collect. The equipment stores these data in a rotation
buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the old one. Value set to 240 sam-
plings, which allow storing 4 hours in the equipment.
Aggregation. The sample values of the counters are aggregated on 15 minutes (15 min) or
are referred to the single minute (No Aggr).
(9) Button Help. Pressing this push-button a pop-up box is displayed which contains a guide with the
instructions for the use of the commands in the window.
360 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Rmon Service & Priority History View window
This window allows managing the history of RMON statistics on 15 minutes for an Ethernet port.
Fig.24 Rmon Service & Priority History View window
1
2
9 3 4
7 8
(2) Menu bar:

Action > Upload Today Data. It uploads the data relevant to the current day.
Action > Upload Yesterday Data. It uploads the data relevant to the previous day.

The first box displays the counters represented in the graph:
Summary area):
Group Variables Rx: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Over-
size, Fragments, Collision, Jabber, Drop Events.
Group Variables Tx: Multicasts, Broadcasts.
Octets. The graph displays the value of the Octets parameter only (group Variables Rx and
group Variables Tx).
The Data type box indicates the value of the displayed counter:
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 361

Daily Average, average of the values sampled during the period of one day.
Daily Maximum, maximum sampled value within the period of one day.
Total Measured, all the sampled 15 minute measures are displayed.
The display relevant to the data types Daily Average and Daily Maximum shows, next to the date,
an asterisk * (which sends to wording for error) if, during that specific day, at least one datum In-
complete (measure not completed), Lost (measure lost), Restarted (measure restarted) or Missing
(measure missing) is present among the sample data.
The box Time displays the time reference used to show the data:
Local Time, data are displayed with reference to the local time.
UTC, data are displayed with reference to the universal time - Greenwich mean time.
(4) Scroll-bar. Use to display the hidden parts of the graph.
(5) Graphical representation of the statistics history. The graph is a histogram graph.
pending on their own measure unit (setting of Packets parameter).
Each counter is identified by a color corresponding to the color of the relevant bar (or line) in the
graph.
of the selected day, subdivided in 15 minute period. Pressing the central mouse button, you return
to the previous view.
(6) Values of the counters relevant to the selected LAN ports.

For each counter, is displayed in the column:
Variables Rx or Variables Tx. In order:
Counter name. The color of the wording indicates the color of the bar (or line) which
equipment type.
(7) List of SNMP NEs. For each equipment, the relevant logic address is displayed.
Clear All.
Index. Value identifying in univocal mode the port in the table of the history of the RMON
statistics of the database.
362 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

VLAN/Priority_Queue. Indication of the Ethernet port and of VLAN/priority for which the
counter counting is active.
Aggregation. The sample values of the counters are aggregated on 15 minutes (15 min) or
are referred to the single minute (No Aggr).
(9) Button Help. Moving the mouse over this push-button, a pop-up box is displayed which contains a
guide with the instructions for the use of the commands in the window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 363

RMon standard (info)
equipment managed by NMS5LX implements the RMon standard with the following modalities:
RMON Standard
Outline on the operation of RMON standard
Management via NMS5LX of statistics counters foreseen by RMon standard
Statistics (Statistics group)
History of the statistics (History group)
History of the statistics aggregated on 15 minutes (History (SIAE) group)
Management of RMON alarms (group: Alarm)
Ethernet counters (RMON)
RMON Standard
RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,
monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
These services are defined in terms of MIB (Management Information Base) groups described in the doc-
ument RFC2819 - Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base, which must be read for any
further detail.
Outline on the operation of RMON standard
The RMON standard is based on two components: an agent (RMON probe) and a client (remote manage-
ment station).
The agent saves the data in its own RMON tables on the network devices (equipment, routers, etc.). The
RMON probes can see only the traffic flowing through themselves and therefore are located on every port
of the Ethernet switch of the device to monitor.
The remote management station communicates with the RMON agent to obtain and correlate the RMon
data. Generally, the station is equipped with an interface (graphic or textual) which allows the display and
the analysis of the collected RMON data.
Management via NMS5LX of statistics counters foreseen by RMon standard
With reference to the previous paragraph, the Rmon functionality allows the analysis of the data collected
by the probes present on every port of the Ethernet switch of the equipment in compliance with RMon
standard.
The probes collect the statistic data, which are stored in the RMON table of the equipment. In any moment,
it is possible to activate (and deactivate) an Ethernet port for the storing of these data by NMS5LX.
Currently, the equipment managed by the NMS5LX system implement the following RMON MIB groups and,
as a consequence, the Rmon functionality offers, through the GUI, the following functionality:
Statistics measured by the RMON probes for each monitored Ethernet port (RMON MIB group:
Statistics).
History of the statistics for each monitored Ethernet port (RMON MIB group: History).
History of the statistics (aggregated on 15 minutes) for each monitored Ethernet port (RMON
MIB group: History (SIAE)).
Management of the alarms associated to the counters of the RMON statistics (RMON MIB group:
Alarm).
Here below a brief description is reported for each group/functionality.
364 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Statistics (Statistics group)
The Rmon functionality can display to the user some statistic information (counters), which allows evalu-
ating the traffic development in input and in output for each single port of the Ethernet switch of the equip-
ment (see Verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of equipment (RMON statistics)).
To display the counters of a port, it is necessary to activate the port (see Activate an Ethernet port for the
count of the RMON statistics). This port will remain active until when the user does not deactivate it (see
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics).
Moreover it is possible to capture the values of the counters at the end of a time interval set by the user
(see Capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant) and then to save them to file
(see Save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant).
The description of the counters changes depending on the type of selected equipment (see Ethernet coun-
ters (RMON)).
When a port is active, the data are displayed in the relevant Rmon Statistics Viewer window only when the
selected equipment is in connected status and the local management program is not connected in Config-
uration modality to the equipment.
The update of the data can be carried out automatically (activating the Auto Refresh option) or manually
(pressing the Refresh push-button).
History of the statistics (History group)
The Rmon functionality can present the time development (history) of the statistics relevant to the coun-
ters in input/output at level of single port of the Ethernet switch of the equipment (see Display the history
of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port).
Operation
At equipment level, the statistics history stores the value of the counters of the Ethernet counter
each 60 seconds (sampling interval). The equipment stores these data in a rotation buffer
where, when full, the new information overwrites the old ones (value set to 240 samples which
allow storing 4 hours in the equipment).
In order to store in the NMS5LX database and display the statistics history of a port, it is nec-
essary to activate the port (see Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the
RMON statistics). This port will remain active until when the user does not deactivate it (see De-
activate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON statistics).
At the activation of the port, the supervision system starts storing the data relevant to the sta-
tistics and makes them available to the user, in form of graph (histogram or line), subdivided
by single Ethernet port of each single equipment.
Counters
For each port, it is possible to display, at the same, time, the counters having the same measure
unit (packets: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Oversize, Fragments,
Collision, Jabber, Drop Events; Octets: Octets; Usage percentage: Utilization).
The user can choose the type of value of the represented counter: Average (mean of the values
sampled within a time interval), Measured (value at the last sampling of a time interval) or Max-
imum (maximum value sample within a time interval).
The values of the counters are represented grouped by time intervals (minutes, hour, days). In
the graph, the last 30 days from the activation of the port can be displayed.
The description of the counters changes depending on the type of selected equipment (see
Ethernet counters (RMON)).
In any moment, it is possible to save the data to file (see Save the history of the RMON statistics
of an Ethernet port).
When a port is active, the data are displayed in the Rmon History View window only when the
selected equipment is in connected status and the local management program is not connected
in Configuration modality to the equipment.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 365

History of the statistics aggregated on 15 minutes (History (SIAE) group)
The Rmon functionality can present the time development (history) of the statistics (aggregated on 15 min-
utes) relevant to the counters in input/output at level of single port of the Ethernet switch of the equipment
(see Display the history of the RMON 15 min statistics of an Ethernet port).
Operation
At equipment level, the statistics history stores the value of the counters of the Ethernet counter
each 15 minutes (sampling interval). The equipment makes available the statistics relevant to
the current day and to the previous day on the same file. The file can be then transferred via
FTP.
In order to store in the NMS5LX database and display the statistics history of a port, it is nec-
essary to activate the port (see Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of RMON
15 min statistics). This port will remain active until when the user does not deactivate it (see
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of RMON 15min statistics).
At the activation of the port, the supervision system starts storing the data relevant to the sta-
tistics and makes them available to the user, in form of graph (histogram or line), subdivided
by single Ethernet port of each single equipment.
Counters
For each port, it is possible to display, at the same, time, the counters having the same measure
unit (packets Rx: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Oversize, Fragments,
Collision, Jabber, Drop Events; packets Tx: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts; Octets Tx and Rx:
Octets; Usage percentage Tx and Rx: Utilization).
The user can choose the type of value of the represented counter: Daily Average, avarage of
the values sampled during the period of one day, Daily Maximum, maximum sampled value dur-
ing the period of oned day, Total Measured, all the measured sampled on 15 minutes are dis-
played.
The values of the counters are represented grouped by time intervals (minutes, hour, days). In
the graph, the last 30 days from the activation of the port can be displayed.
The description of the Ethernet counters (RMON) changes depending on the selected equipment
type.
In any moment, it is possible to save the data to file (see Save the history of the RMON 15 min
statistics of an Ethernet port).
When a port is active, the data are displayed in the relevant Rmon Aggregate History View win-
dow only when the selected equipment is in connected status and the local management pro-
gram is not connected in Configuration modality to the equipment.
Management of RMON alarms (group: Alarm)
By means of the Rmon functionality, one or more alarms can be associated to every counter of every single
port of the Ethernet switch on equipment.
Alarm activation
The activation of the alarm is caused by the exceeding of a (rising or falling) threshold of abso-
lute values or at relative differences.
From the moment the user defines an alarm (see Enable and define the activation criteria for a
RMON counter), the system periodically collects samples of counters from RMON probe and
compares them with previously set thresholds.
If the counter values exceeds the associated threshold, the corresponding alarm is generated
and reported in the current alarm table and in the alarm history of NMS5LX.
The description of the alarm in the list of the current alarms and in the alarm history is RMON
Alarm <index>, where <index> is the value which univocally indicates the alarm in the RMON
alarm table of the database (Rmon Statistics Viewer window).
Hysteresis
366 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

In order to limit the generation of alarms, an hysteresis mechanisms is implemented which gen-
erates an alarm each time a threshold is exceeded in the proper direction and does not generate
other alarms until when the opposite threshold is exceeded as described in RMON alarms man-
agement.
Fig.25 RMON alarms management
Alarm Counter value

(trap SNMP) compared with
Counter (3) the thresholds (2)
value
Rising Trend of
threshold the counter
value in time
Falling
threshold
Sampling Time
interval (1)
(1) The sampling intervals are not synchronized with the instant when the alarm is defined by
the user, but refer to the time of the solar day (00.00, 01.00, 02.00, etc).
For example, if an alarm is defined at 11.40 and the sampling interval defined by the user is 30
minutes, the first usable sampling interval of the counter will be 12.00...12.30.
(2) At the expiry of a sampling interval, depending on the type of mode set by the user for the
comparison with the thresholds, as value of the counter is taken:
The value assumed by the counter at the end of the sampling interval (comparison method
Absolute).
The difference between the value of the counter at the end of the sampling interval and the
value of the counter at the beginning of the sampling interval (comparison method Delta).
Alarm thresholds
For the equipment managed by NMS5LX, when the user enables an alarm, the system starts the
activities to monitor the sampled value with respect to the thresholds. The result of this activity
will be, possibly, the activation or the deactivation of the associated alarm according to the fol-
lowing modalities.
If the threshold AlarmRisingThreshold is set to a value greater than the threshold AlarmFall-
ingThreshold), the alarm is activated if the sampled value is greater than or equal to the thresh-
old AlarmRisingThreshold. The alarm is deactivated when the sampled value becomes lower
than or equal to the threshold AlarmFallingThreshold.
For the first comparison at the end of the first usable sampling interval, after that the alarm has
been enabled by the user, the activation of the alarm is affected by the setting of the Startup
parameter. In detail, if the parameter Startup is set to the value:
Rising or Rising or Falling and the value of the compared value is greater than or equal
to the Rising threshold, the alarm is generated.
Falling and the value of the compared value is greater than or equal to the Rising thresh-
old, the alarm is not generated.
What just described is valid only for the first comparison after the enabling of the alarm. For the
next comparison, the rule described above applies.
Example. Suppose that, for a given alarm, we have set the parameter AlarmRisingThresh-
old=100 and the parameter AlarmFallingThreshold=50. If the Startup parameter has the value:
Rising. At the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the
alarm is immediately activated.
Falling. At the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the
alarm is not activated.
At the end of the next interval, the constraint has not meaning anymore; therefore, if in
that moment the value is greater than the threshold Rising yet, the alarm is immediately
generated.
Rising or Falling. At the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is
120: the alarm is immediately activated.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 367

If the threshold AlarmRisingThreshold is set to a value lower than the threshold AlarmFall-
ingThreshold, the alarm is activated if the sampled value is lower than or equal to the threshold
AlarmRisingThreshold. The alarm is deactivated when the sampled value becomes greater than
or equal to the threshold AlarmFallingThreshold.
For the first comparison at the end of the first usable sampling interval, after that the alarm has
been enabled by the user, the activation of the alarm is affected by the setting of the parameter
Startup. In detail, if the parameter Startup is set to the value:
Rising or Rising or Falling and the value of the compared counter is lower than or equal
to the threshold Rising, the alarm is generated.
Falling and the value of the compared counter is greater than or equal to the threshold
Falling the alarm is not generated.
What just said is valid only for the first comparison after the enabling of the alarm. For the next
comparisons, the general rule described above applies.
Example. Suppose that, for an alarm, we have set the parameter AlarmRisingThreshold=150
and the parameter AlarmFallingThreshold=200. If the parameter Startup has value:
Rising. At the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the
alarm is immediately activated.
Falling. At the end of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the
alarm is not activated.
At the end of the expiry of the next interval, the constraint has not meaning anymore;
therefore, if in that moment the value is lower than the threshold Rising yet, the alarm
is immediately generated.
Rising or Falling. At the end of the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sam-
pled value is 120: the alarm is immediately activated.
Notes
Keeping in mind what described in this chapter, consider however that the operating logic of the
alarms on the equipment managed by NMS5LX foresees that the alarms (SNMP traps) are gen-
erated only on the alarm transitions, that is from Off to On and, then, from On to Off, and that
the initial status of the alarms is however Off.
Therefore, the exceeding of a threshold AlarmFallingThreshold will have, as consequence, the
generation of an alarm only if the event takes place after a transition on the corresponding
threshold AlarmRisingThreshold or the combination of the values of the thresholds is such that
the exceeding of the threshold AlarmFallingThreshold corresponds to the activation of the alarm.
Ethernet counters (RMON)
The definition of the counters changes depending on the type of selected equipment.
This definition is the same reported for the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from an Ethernet
port (LAN Statistics) contained in the user manual of the Manager application relevant to each single equip-
ment type.
The only difference is the name of the counter which, in some cases, change from the RMON counters to
the LAN Statistics counters.
Tab.15 reports the correspondence of the names for the Ethernet RMON counters - Statistics counters.
Tab.16 reports the correspondence of the names for the Ethernet RMON counters - History counters.
The counter Utilization is meaningful only as RMON (History) counter and has the following definition: es-
timate (in hundredths of a percent) of the average use of the port during this sampling interval.
The percentage of use of the radio port is referred to the bit rate of the Switch port (1 Gbit/s) and not to
the available radio band.
The percentage of use of the LAN refers to the real bit rate of the port (10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s or 1 Gbit/s).
368 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Tab.15 Ethernet counters denomination (RMON - Statistics)
Ethernet counters denomination Ethernet counters denomination

RMON - Statistics LAN Statistics
Octects Total Bytes Received
Packets Total Frames Received
Multicasts Multicast Frames Received
Broadcasts Broadcast Frames Received

CRC Errors CRC Align Errors
Undersize Undersize Frames
Oversize Oversize Frames
Fragments Fragments
Collision Collision
Jabber Jabber
Drop Events Dropped Frames
Pkts 64 Octets Frames 64 Octects (Sent+Received)
Pkts 65 to 127 Octets Frames 65-127 Octects (Sent+Received)

Pkts 1024 to 1518 Octets Frames 1024... (Sent+Received)
Tab.16 Ethernet counters denomination (RMON - History)
Ethernet counters denomination Ethernet counters denomination

RMON - History LAN Statistics
Packets Total Frames Received
Multicasts Multicast Frames Received
Broadcasts Broadcast Frames Received

CRC Errors CRC Align Errors
Undersize Undersize Frames
Oversize Oversize Frames

Fragments Fragments
Collision Collision
Jabber Jabber
Drop Events Dropped Frames
Octects Total Bytes Received
Utilization -
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 369

XML Export
WARNING The function XML Export is optional and available only for equipment of type ALFO, ALFOPlus,
ALFOplus80 and series ALS (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2, ALCplus2e).
The command XML Export manages the export of the configuration data of equipment in XML format
(function XML Export). Among the exported data, even the parameters relevant to SD card are included
for the equipment which foresee it.
Operations
MANUAL SAVING OF DATA (SINGLE CREATION OF A XML FILE)
Save the equipment configuration to a XML file
PERIODICAL SAVING OF DATA (DEFINITION OF CRONJOBS WHICH AUTOMATICALLY CREATES THE XML FILES)
Display the active cronjobs (XML Export)

Create a cronjob (XML Export)
Delete one or more cronjobs (XML Export)
MANAGEMENT OF XML, LOG AND HTML FILES
Display the list of the XML files in a given directory

Display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files
Display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files
Convert a XML file to a HTML file
Display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file
Delete the XML, Log or HTML files
Send emails with XML, Log or HTML
GUI
XML Configuration Data Export window
See also
Function XML Export (more info)
Save the equipment configuration to a XML file

WARNING The equipment supporting the function XML Export is equipment of type ALFO, ALFOPlus,
ALFOplus80 and series ALS (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2, ALCplus2e).
For the NE ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node objects in list, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system
is displayed. This equipment is identified by the logical address:
1. Select Tools > XML Export > XML Export Mgmt.
2. In the XML Configuration Data Export window, select Action > Load Equipment.
The XML Configuration Data Export window displays all the equipment, managed by NMS5LX, which
support the function XML Export.
3. Define the equipment which the saving of the configuration is required for:
370 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

All the equipment (which support the function XML Export) managed by NMS5LX, select Action
> Export > All Network.
The equipment selected in the window XML Configuration Data Export:
Select the equipment.
A maximum of 100 pieces of equipment can be selected.
Select Action > Export > Selected NE.
A group of equipment:
Select View > Set Filter.
The Selected Filter window is displayed.
Select the boxes corresponding to the criteria you wish to use to display a specific group
of NEs in the XML Configuration Data Export window:
To set the criterion, type the NE address in the text box.
The jolly character asterisk can be used.
Match Physical Address. IP address of the equipment.
To set the criterion, type the IP address of the NE in the text boxes.
Match Equipment Type. Equipment type.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the NE type.
Match Status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5LX.
Press OK.
The XML Configuration Data Export window displays only the records matching the acti-
vated criteria.
Select Action > Export > Filtered.
The Files_popup window is displayed.
4. Type, in the Selection box, the name of the xml file where the data must be exported.
The system suggests, as path, the default directory. Change the path, if necessary.
5. Press Ok.
The XML file saves the complete configuration only of the equipment in connected status.
In the file, this equipment is listed in alphabetical order with respect to the equipment type and, within
the equipment type, with respect to the logical address of the NE.
Display the active cronjobs (XML Export)

2. In the XML Configuration Data Export window, select Action > Schedule Backup.
The Scheduled Cron Jobs window displays the currently active cronjobs.
More information about the cronjobs are reported in par. Function XML Export (more info).
Create a cronjob (XML Export)

3. In the Scheduled Cron Jobs window, to create a cronjob which is executed with frequency:
Daily, select Actions > Add > Daily.
The Add daily job window is displayed.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 371

Weekly, select Actions > Add > Weekly.
The Add weekly job window is displayed.
Set, in the Day of the week box, the day of the week when you wish the XML file is saved.
Monthly, select Actions > Add > Monthly.
The Add monthly job window is displayed.
Set, in Day of the month (1-31) box, the day of the month when you wish the XML file is saved.
4. Set, in the Time (hh:mm) box, the hour when you wish the cronjob is executed using the following
format hour (0-23) : minute (0-59).
5. Set, in the Export type box, the saving type you wish to execute:
Full Backup.
Differential Backup.
Incremental Backup.
6. The Export Directory box indicates the default directory for the saving of the file.
To change the path, type the new value or press (the Directory Selection window is opened) and
select the new directory.
7. Press OK.
The cronjob is inserted within a list.
More information about the cronjobs and the files created automatically are reported in par. Function
XML Export (more info).
Delete one or more cronjobs (XML Export)

3. In the Scheduled Cron Jobs window, select the cronjobs to delete.
4. Select Actions > Delete and confirm.

The selected records are removed from the list.
Display the list of the XML files in a given directory

1. Select Tools > XML Export > XML File Mgmt.
2. In the XML Configuration Data Export window, select File > List XML Files.
The Selection box of the Directory Selection window indicates the default directory.
3. Change the path, if necessary.
4. Press OK.
The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is renamed in XML Files window where are currently
displayed all the files with extension xml present in the selected directory and in the relevant subdirec-
tories.
372 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001


2. In the XML Configuration Data Export window, select File > List Log Files.
The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is renamed in Log Files where are displayed all the files
with log extension present in the default directory where the log files are automatically saved.
The description of the Log Files window is the same reported in XML Files window except for the com-
mand File > Convert to HTML which is not meaningful and available in the considered context.
More information about the Log files are reported in par. Function XML Export (more info).
Display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files


2. In the XML Configuration Data Export window, select File > List HTML Files.
3. Change the path if necessary.
4. Press OK.
The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is renamed in HTML Files where are displayed all the
files with html extension present in the selected directory and in the relevant subdirectories.
The description of the HTML Files window is the same reported in XML Files window except for the com-
mand File > Convert to HTML which is not meaningful and available in the considered context.
Convert a XML file to a HTML file

2. In the XML Configuration Data Export window, select File > List XML Files.
3. Change the path if necessary.
4. Press OK.
The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is renamed in XML Files where are displayed all the files
with xml extension present in the selected directory and in the relevant subdirectories (XML Files win-
dow).
5. Select the xml files you wish to convert.
6. Select File > Convert to HTML.

The XML to HTML Conversion window is displayed.
The XML File(s) area displays the selected files which will be converted.
7. Set, in the Stylesheet File box, the path/name of the file you wish to use as style sheet for the conver-
sion (file XSL - eXtensible Stylesheet Language).
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press (the Directory Selection window is
opened) and select the file among those available.
8. The Export Directory box displays the default directory for the saving of the converted files.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 373

To change the path, type the new value or press (the Directory Selection window is opened) and
select the new directory.
9. Press Convert!.
For each XML file, a html file is created in the set directory with the same name of the source file. For
example, the file ALplus2_205.xml is converted in the file ALplus2_205.html.
Display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file

2. In the XML Configuration Data Export window, execute one of the following operations:
Select:
File > List Log Files Display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files.
File > List XML Files Display the list of the XML files in a given directory.
File > List HTML Files Display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML
files.
The ... Files window is displayed.
Select the wished file and then File > Open.
Select File > Open...
The Files_popup window is displayed.
Select the wished file (.log, .xml or .html) in the Files list and press OK.
The content of the file is displayed.

Fig.26 shows an example of Log file.
Fig.27 shows an example of XML file.
Fig.28 shows an example of HTML file.
Fig.26 Display of the content of a file .log
374 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Fig.27 Display of the content of a file .xlm
Fig.28 Display of the content of a file .html
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 375

Delete the XML, Log or HTML files

2. In the XML Configuration Data Export window, execute one of the following operations:
Select:
File > List HTML Files Display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML
files.
3. In the ... Files window, select the wished files.
4. Select File > Delete and confirm.

The selected files are removed from the list and from the system disk.
Send emails with XML, Log or HTML

WARNING In order to send the files, it is necessary that the system administrator has properly configured
the mail server.
2. In the XML Configuration Data Export window, select:

File > List HTML Files Display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files.
3. In the ... Files window, select the wished files you wish to attach to the email.
4. Select File > Send email.

The Send Mail window is displayed.
The File(s) to Send area displays the files selected in the previous step.
It is possible to delete all the files pressing Clear Files List.
5. Set the email address in the Destination box.
6. Set the object of the email in the Subject box.
7. Write the text of the email in the Message box.
8. Set the modality to send the files activating/deactivating the options Use tarball file and/or Use gzip
Compression according to what displayed here below.
Use Use gzip Modality to send the files

tarball file Compression
Inactive Inactive A mail is sent for each file in the area File(s) to Send. Each file keeps
its original format (.log, .xml or .html)
Active Inactive A single mail is sent with attached a file of type tarball (.tar) which con-
tains all the files in the area File(s) to Send
Inactive Active A mail is sent for each file in the area File(s) to Send. Each file is com-
pressed with method gzip (.gz)
Active Active A single mail is sent with attached a file of type tarball compressed with
method gzip (.gz)
9. Press Send.
376 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

XML Configuration Data Export window
This window allows exporting the configuration data of the equipment in XML format.
Menu bar
Action > Load Equipment. It displays all the equipment supporting the function XML Export.
Action > Export > All Network. It saves in a single file (in XML format) the complete config-
uration of all the pieces of equipment in connected status, managed by the system and support-
ing the function XML Export.
Action > Export > Selected NE. It saves in a single file (in XML format) the complete config-
uration of all the pieces of equipment in connected status, selected from a list.
Action > Export > Filtered. It saves in a single file (in XML format) the complete configuration
of all the pieces of equipment in connected status, present in the filtered list.
Action > Schedule Backup. It displays the currently active cronjobs.
Help > About Application. Version of the module for the management of the considered func-
tion.
Parameters
IP/Ph Address. IP address of the NE.
Type. Type of NE.
Status. Status of the connection between the NE and the supervision system.
Status bar
Elements: Number of displayed records.
Selected: Number of selected records.
Filter: active. Activation of one or more filters.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 377

Scheduled Cron Jobs window
This window allows scheduling the execution of a cronjob.
Menu bar
Actions > Add > Daily. It creates a cronjob with daily frequency.
Actions > Add > Weekly. It creates a cronjob with weekly frequency.
Actions > Add > Monthly. It creates a cronjob with monthly frequency.
Actions > Delete. It deletes one or more cronjobs.
Actions > Quit. It closes the window.
List of cronjobs
Time. Hour (023): minute (059) when the cronjob must be executed.
Date. Day of the month when the cronjob must be executed. Wording:
Every. Every day (identifies a daily cronjob).
None. Not meaningful (identifies a weekly cronjob).
131. Day of the month (identifies a monthly cronjob).
Day. Day of the week when the cronjob must be executed. Wording:
Every. Every day (identifies a daily cronjob).
Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun. Day of the week (identifies a monthly cronjob).
None. Not meaningful (identifies a monthly cronjob).
Command. Command line for the execution of the cronjob, path where the XML file and the
type of cronjob (#Differential Backup, #Incremental Backup, #Full Backup) must be saved.
378 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

XML Files window
This window allows displaying the XML files.
Menu bar
File > List Log Files. It displays the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files.
File > List XML Files. It displays the list of the XML files in a given directory.
File > List HTML Files. It displays the list of the HTML files obtained from the conversion of
XML files.
File > Open... It displays the content of a file (.log, .xml or .html).
File > Open. It displays the content of the selected file.
File > Delete. It deletes the selected files.
File > Convert to HTML. It converts the selected XML file to a HTML file.
File > Send email. It sends an email with the selected files in attachment.
Help > About Application. Version of the module for the management of the considered func-
tion.
Parameters
Date. Date of the file creation, in the following format:
<day of the week> <month> <day of the month> <hour:minute:second> <year>
File Name. Position and name of the file.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 379

Function XML Export (more info)
The function XML Export allows saving the complete configuration of the equipment managed by NMS5LX
in a file in XML (eXtensible Markup Language) format.
Equipment supporting the function XML Export

Data saved in XML file
Modality of creation of XML files
Log File
Management of XML files
Equipment supporting the function XML Export
The equipment types supporting this function are:

ALFO, ALFOplus and ALFOPlus80
ALS series equipment (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2)
Data saved in XML file
In the XML file is saved the complete equipment configuration which consists in the following data:
Logical address
IP address (LAN and PPP ports) and Routing Table
Equipment configuration:
General parameters: radio protection, IDU type, etc.
Radio parameters.
Switch Ethernet parameters.
Parameters of Tributaries (E1, STM1, LAN)
Cross connections
User Input
User Output
Version of the equipment sw/fw modules and of the WEB LCT software (only for the equipment
supporting it)
Hardware configuration (Part Number, Serial Number and Hw edition of the equipment units).
Modality of creation of XML files
The saving of the equipment data in a XML file can be manually executed by the user (creation of a single
XML file) or automatically by the system (creation of periodical XML files through the definition of cronjobs).
Manual saving
In this modality, the user can save in a single XML file:
The complete configuration of all the pieces of equipment managed by NMS5LX, which
support the function XML Export and which are in connected status when the file is cre-
ated.
The complete configuration of a group of equipment which are in connected status when
the file is created.
The complete configuration of a single equipment in connected status.
The saving can be executed in any moment.
380 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

For this purpose, a wished name and path can be assigned.
If the XML file contains the data of more pieces of equipment, these will be listed in the file in
alphabetical order with respect to the equipment type and, within the equipment type, with re-
spect to the logical address of the NE.
Automatic saving
The function XML Export manages the periodic saving in XML format of the configuration of all
the pieces of equipment managed by the NMS5LX system and which support the function XML
Export.
The periodic saving is managed and automatically executed by the supervision system.
The only operation required to the user is to define the modality used to execute the periodic
saving through the creation of a cronjob.
Cronjob
The cronjobs are commands executed by a crontab, that is a system command which allows
scheduling the operations to repeat in time.
For the function XML Export, the parameters for the creation of a cronjob are:
Frequency with which the cronjob must be executed:
Daily. The user must define the time within the 24 hours when the cronjob must
be executed.
For example, if the value 23:45 is set as time, the cronjob will be executed eve-
ryday at 23:45.
Weekly. The user must define the day of the week (monday, tuesday, etc) and
the time when the cronjob must be executed.
For example, if the value Sun is set for the day and 4:22 is set for the time, the
cronjob will be executed every sunday at 4:22.
Monthly. The user must define the day of the month (1, 2, etc) and the time when
the cronjob must be executed.
For example, if the value 1 is set for the day and 4:42 is set for the time, the cron-
job will be executed every sunday at 4:42 of the first day of every month.
Type of saving you wish to execute:
Full Backup.
At each saving a single XML file is generated containing the complete configura-
tion of all the pieces of equipment.
At each saving the new file will overwrite the previous one.
Differential Backup.
A XML file is generated for every pieces ofequipment (supporting the function
XML Export) which is connected status when the file is saved.
For each equipment, the complete equipment configuration is saved in the first
file generated after the creation of the relevant cronjob.
At every next saving, the system will check if the equipment configuration is
changed with respect to the previous one. If this:
Is changed, a new file is generated which will overwrite the previous one.
In the new file, the differences (changes, deletions, additions) with respect
to the previous configuration will be marked by the field Status *.
Is not changed, the file is not generated; the previous file remains valid
and available.
Incremental Backup.
A single XML file is generated with all the pieces of equipment (supporting the
function XML Export) which is in connected status when the file is saved.
The complete equipment configuration is saved in the first file generated after the
creation of the relevant cronjob.
At every next saving, the system will check if the equipment configuration is
changed with respect to the previous one. If this:
Is changed, a new file is generated which will overwrite the previous one.
In the new file, the differences (changes, deletions, additions) with respect
to the previous configuration will be marked by the field Status *.
Is not changed, the file is not generated; the previous file remains valid
and available.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 381

For the XML containing the data of more equipment, the data will be listed in the file in
alphabetical order with respect to the equipment type and, within the equipment type,
with respect to the logical address of the NE.
* In files of type Differential Backup and Incremental Backup, the differences will be
highlighted by the Status field which, depending on the type of executed change, will as-
sume the value:
Modified. Change of configuration
Not present. Deletion of a NE
Present. Addition of a NE
Path where the files must be saved.
The system proposes a default path. It is suggested to set a different path for each type
of saving. Moreover, even for the same type of saving, it is suggested to create a new
directory for every new cronjob.
Once the cronjob is defined, it will start saving the files. To stop the operation, it is necessary
to delete the cronjob.
Saving the XML files generated by cronjobs

All the XML files automatically generated by cronjobs are saved in the directory set by the user
for the relevant cronjob. Default: /opt/nms5ux/tools/nmsConfigDataExport/Backup.
The file is automatically assigned a name which, depending on the type of saving set for the
relevant cronjob, has the following format:
Type Full Backup. The name FullBackup.xml is assigned to every generated file.
Type Differential Backup. The name format is: NMS5_<hostname>_<ID NE>.xml
Type Incremental Backup.
For the first generated file, after the creation of the relevant cronjob, the name format
is: NMS5_<hostname>_Full_<date>_<time>.xml
For the files generated later, after the detection of changes in the equipment configura-
tion, the name format is: NMS5_<hostname>_Incr_<date>_<time>.xml
where <hostname> indicates the name of the server where NMS5LX is running.
<date> and <time> correspond to the moment when the XML file has been saved. Format:
YYMMDD_HHMM (for example 20100509_1310 means 9 may 2010 time 13:10).
Log File
When a XML file is created (manually or automatically), the relevant log file is automatically created where
are stored the actions executed by the user or by the cronjob.
The log file are saved in the directory /opt/nms5ux/tools/nmsConfigDataExport/log.
A name with the following format is assigned to the log file:

nmsConfigDataExport_<day>_<month>_<year>_<time>_<minute>_<second>.log
Where date and time correspond to the moment when the relevant XML file has been generated.
Management of XML files
The function XML Export is provided with a series of commands to manage XML files which allow to:
Display the list of the XML file in a given directory.
Convert a XML file in a file in HTML format.
Display the list of the HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files.
Display the content of a file (.log, .xml or .html).
Delete one or more files (.log, .xml or .html).
Send an email with one or more files attached (.log, .xml or .html).
382 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Cfg File Download
The command Cfg File Download manages the download of the equipment configuration file.
Operations
Download a configuration file on pieces of equipment of the same type
Download a configuration file on pieces of equipment of the same type

WARNING The command is available only if the icons of one or more NEs in the map. Otherwise the sys-
tems interrupts the operation and displays the message Equipment Address Missing.
The command Cfg File Download allows executing the download of a configuration file on one or more
pieces of equipment of the same type of a network at the same time.
The configuration file (per equipment type) is created by Siae on customers demand. The system folder
containing the configuration files is preset and is selected by the system on the basis of the type of the
selected equipment.
1. Open the map containing the NEs where you wish to download the configuration file.
2. Select the icons of the interested NEs.

The NEs must be of the same type, otherwise the system stops the selection.
3. Select Cfg File Download.
4. Select, if necessary, a set of NEs in the Equipment List area of the Configuration Files Download win-
dow.
5. Press Browse to select the wished configuration file. The name of the file selected for the download
will be displayed in the File Selection box.
6. Press:
Download All, to download the configuration file on all the NEs in the Equipment List area.
Download Selected, to download the configuration file only on the NEs selected in the Equip-
ment List area.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 383

Configuration Files Download window
This window allows managing the download of the equipment configuration file.
Menu bar
Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information and deletes the possible selections in the
window.
Area
Equipment List. It displays the list of the NEs selected in the map before the opening of the
window.
Messages. It displays the messages about the result of the operations in the window.
Parameters
Equipment Type. Read-only box which displays the equipment type of the NEs selected in the
map.
File Selection. It displays the configuration file selected by means of Browse push-button.
Push-buttons
Download All. It downloads the configuration file on all the NEs in the Equipment List area.
Download Selected. It downloads the configuration file only on the NEs selected in the Equip-
ment List area.
Browse. It opens the system window for the selection of the configuration file.
384 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

OPTIONS
Network Severity Code. It displays/manages the network severity level associated to the alarms of the
equipment type.
Equipment Severity Code. It displays/manages the alarm status, the sending status of the traps and
the local severity level of the alarms of the equipment.
NMS5LX System Users. It displays/manages the NMS5UX users.
NMS5LX Logged Users. It displays the list of the NMS5UX users connected to the supervision system
and the list of active application (browser, manager, etc.).
LCT Equipment Users (NEs of series ALS, ALFOplus, ALFOplus80). It manages/displays the LCT users
list of the equipment.
LCT Equipment Users (ALFOplus80HD and AGS20). It manages/displays the LCT users list of
ALFOplus80HD equipment.
LCT Logged Users. It displays the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to theequipment. It
forces the disconnection (logout) of one or more users.
Remote Element Table. It manages/displays the remote equipment list of the equipment.
NE Sw/Fw Download. It updates the software of one or more equipment.
Scheduled Sw Dwl Status. It displays the list of the equipment scheduled for the software update.
NE Sw/Fw Release. It displays the software version of the equipment.
FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download. It updates the software of one or more FAMxc.
FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status. It displays the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software update.
FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release. It displays the software version of a FAMxc.
NMS5UX - Secure Management. It manages the security configuration for ALCplus2e equipment.
NMS5UX - Read PM Server Status. It displays the status of the PM server for systems in Dual Server
configuration.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 385

Network Severity Code
The Network Severity Code command displays/manages the network severity level associated to the
alarms of the equipment type.
Operations
Verify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment type
Change the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment type
GUI
Siae Events Manager window
See also
Alarm severity
Verify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment type

1. Select Options > Network Severity Code.

2. Select the type of equipment in the Equipment area of the Siae Events Manager window.
The area below displays the detail of the alarms and the relevant severity.
The alarms of the user inputs with different Alarm severity management are not present in the list.
Change the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment type

WARNING The change of severity level associated to an alarm is COMMON to all the NEs of the same type.
1. Select Options > Network Severity Code.
2. Select the type of equipment in the Equipment area of the Siae Events Manager window.
3. In the area below, double click on the alarm.

The Modify Event window opens. Box:
Category. Type of NE.
Trap ID. Identifying code of the trap associated to the alarm.
Event Name. Name of the alarm.
Severity. Severity level of the alarm.
4. Select the Severity box and choose the new severity level from the list.
The value of the Category, Trap ID and Event Name parameters cannot be changed.
Pressing Default, the current setting is restored.
5. Press OK.
The new severity level is displayed in the New column of the Siae Events Manager window.
6. Select Action > Apply Changes.

The new value is removed from the New column and displayed in the Severity column.
386 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The network severity level is not communicated to the NE as the new setting influences only the alarm
indication in the NMS5LX supervision system.
Siae Events Manager window
This window allows managing the network severity associated to the alarms of a given type of equipment.
Menu bar
Action > Apply Changes. It confirms the change to the level of alarm severity.
Parameters
Object. Name of the logic group which the alarm belongs to. The asterisk (*) indicates that the
severity level of the alarm has been changed and not definitive yet.
Event Name. Name of the alarm.
Severity. Severity level currently associated to the alarm.
Default. Default severity level associated to the alarm.
New. Severity level selected during the change of the value.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 387

Equipment Severity Code
selected.
The Equipment Severity Code command displays/manages the alarm status, the sending status of the
traps and the local severity level of the alarms of the equipment.
Operations
Verify the alarms characteristics
Enable/disable and configure the alarms
GUI
Equipment Severity Code window
See also
Enable/disable the alarms
Alarm severity
Verify the alarms characteristics


2. Select Options > Equipment Severity Code.
The Equipment Severity Code window displays the list of the alarms relevant the selected equipment.
The information in the window corresponds to the status of the alarm in the moment when the com-
mand or the refresh is executed.
For each alarm, the status (enabled/disabled), the sending status of the relevant trap from the NE to
the NMS5LX system and the local severity level are specified.
The alarms of the user inputs, which have a different Alarm severity management, are not present in
the list.
Enable/disable and configure the alarms


3. In the Equipment Severity Code window, double click on the wished alarm or select the alarm and then
Action > View/Modify Severity.
The View/Modify Severity Code window opens, where it is displayed in the box/area:
Status. Status of the alarm and of the trap sending by the NE to the system. If active the option:
388 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Enabled, the alarm and the sending of trap is enabled.
Trap Disabled, the sending of trap is disabled.
Alarm Disabled, the alarm is disabled.
Severity. Severity level associated to the alarm.
The label (NMS5UX default) indicates the default setting associated to that alarm by the super-
vision system.
4. To change the enabling status of alarm/trap sending and/or the severity level, press the push-button
relevant to the wished value respectively in the Status and/or Severity area.
If the Alarm Disabled option is selected (Status area), the severity level associated to the alarm cannot
be changed.
5. Press Modify.
The possible change of the enabling status of alarm/trap sending is displayed in the Equipment Severity
Code window.


3. In the Equipment Severity Code window, select View > Filter.

The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section that contains the options:
Match Object. Objects which the alarm belongs to.
To set the filter, select the wished object.
Match Status. Sending status of the trap/alarms. Activating the control box:
Enabled, the enabled alarms whose trap sending is enabled will be displayed.
Trap Disabled, the enabled alarms whose trap sending is disabled will be displayed.
Alarm Disabled, the disabled alarms will be displayed.
It is possible to activate more control boxes at the same time.
The Equipment Severity Code window displays only the records matching the activated criteria.
In the window, there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the activation
of the filters and displays the complete list), Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the
operation) and Help (it opens the on-line manual) push-button.
Closing the Equipment Severity Code window automatically removes the possible active filters.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 389

Equipment Severity Code window
This window allows managing the alarm status, the sending status of the traps and the local severity level
of the alarms of the equipment
Menu bar
Action > View/Modify Severity. It displays and changes the enabling status of alarm/trap
sending and/or the severity level associated to the selected alarm.
View > Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria.
Push-buttons
Sort by: The selected option button indicates the criterion used to list the alarms:
Description, sorts the list according to the name of the alarm.
Object, sorts the list according to the object which the alarm is associated to.
Status, sorts the list according to the status of the alarms and of the traps.
Parameters
Object. Name of the object (that represents one or more physical or logical parts of the NE)
which the alarm is associated to.
Status. Status of the alarm and of the trap sending by the NE to the system:
Enabled. The alarm and the sending of trap is enabled.
Trap Disabled. The sending of trap is disabled.
Alarm Disabled. The alarm is disabled.
Status bar
xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If they are not
active filters, the number of displayed records corresponds to the total number of records.
Customer Id. Logic address of the selected NE.
Text in yellow. Date and time when the window has been opened or updated.
390 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NMS5LX System Users
Depending on specific user profile, follow the specific description:

NMS5LX System Users - Superuser
NMS5LX System Users - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged user
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 391

NMS5LX System Users - Superuser

WARNING Only if, for ones system, the Manual login to LX Map Manager window is active, use the proce-
dure depicted in par. Add a NMS5UX user for the creation of a NMS5UX user.
The NMS5LX System Users command displays/manages the NMS5UX users.
Operations
Display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps
Dreate a new map
Add a NMS5UX user
Change the characteristics of the NMS5UX users
Delete a NMS5UX user
GUI
User Management (Superuser) window
Display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps

1. Select Options > NMS5LX System Users.

The User Management (Superuser) window displays the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the ex-
isting map.
Dreate a new map

2. In the User Management (Superuser) window, select Edit > Create Map.
3. Type, in the Map Name box of the Create new map window, the name of the new map (alphanumeric
string of minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters).
4. Select the box Is Super Map if you wish that the new is a Super map.
5. Press OK.
Add a NMS5UX user

2. In the User Management (Superuser) window, select Users > Create.
3. Select, in the Operation System Users list of the Insert new users window, the Linux user whom you
wish to associate the new NMS5UX user.
For each Linux user, it is possible to associate only one NMS5UX user.
392 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The list displays only the Linux users whom no NMS5UX user has been associated yet.
4. The name of the selected Linux user is automatically set in the Login box.
The value cannot be changed.
5. From the Level list, select the push-button relevant to the profile you wish to associate to the new user.
The Superuser option is not available, as it is not possible to create a second user with this profile.
6. Activate the box:

Internet, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the RAN application.
Ring/PSM, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the application:
Ring Manager and allows then the opening of Ring Manager window.
Packet Service Manager and allows then the opening of Packet Service Manager Map win-
dow.
For more information about the application refer to the specific documentation.
7. Define an expiry date for the NMS5UX user (account) in the Expiration data boxes.
A default date is automatically displayed; it is possible to change it typing the day (Day box), the month
(Month box) and the year (Year box) or it is possible not to associate any date activating the Life time
check box.
The default setting can be changed by the Superuser.
8. Select from the Map list, the map which you wish to associate the user to.
All the available maps are listed.
The name of the selected map is displayed in the Map associate box.
If the user you are creating has Advanced or Privileged profile, it is possible to create a new map. To
execute the operation, it is sufficient to type in the Map associate text field the name of the map (al-
phanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters)
9. Press OK.
The user is added to the list of the User Management window.
The limit of users who can be created is determined by one's codeword.
Change the characteristics of the NMS5UX users

2. In the User Management (Superuser) window, select the user.
3. Select Users > Modify.

The Modify users window displays the user characteristics.
4. Make the wished changes.

The modalities for the parameters setting are the same described in the procedure for the creation of
a user.
If the Superuser is selected, the profile cannot be changed.
5. Press OK.
Delete a NMS5UX user

2. In the User Management (Superuser) window, select the user.

The Superuser cannot be deleted.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 393

3. Select Users > Delete.
The Deleted users window displays the user characteristics.
4. Press OK.
The user is deleted from the list: he cannot use the NMS5LX system anymore.
Add a NMS5UX user

WARNING The following procedure must be used when the Manual login to LX Map Manager window is ac-
tive. In fact, in this condition during the creation of the user, it is possible to assign to the NMS5UX user a
name different with respect to the relevant Linux user. Moreover, it is necessary to define the password
because the password of the Linux user is not automatically assigned to the NMS5UX user.

2. In the User Management (Superuser) window, select Users > Create.
3. Select, in the Operation System Users list of the Insert new users window, the Linux user whom you
wish to associate the new NMS5UX user.
For each Linux user, it is possible to associate only one NMS5UX user.
The list displays only the Linux users whom no NMS5UX user has been associated yet.
4. Type, in the Login box, the name of the new user.

The name of the Linux user, selected in the previous step, is automatically displayed; it is possible to
change it typing in the box an alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters.
5. From the Level list, select the push-button relevant to the profile you wish to associate to the new user.
The Superuser option is not available, as it is not possible to create a second user with this profile.
6. Activate the box:

Internet, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the RAN application.
Ring/PSM, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the application:
Ring Manager and then allows the opening of the Ring Manager window.
Packet Service Manager and then allows the opening of the Packet Service Manager Map
window.
For more information about the application refer to the specific documentation.
7. Define an expiry date for the NMS5UX user (account) in the Expiration data boxes.
A default date is automatically displayed; it is possible to change it typing the day (Day box), the month
(Month box) and the year (Year box) or it is possible not to associate any date activating the Life time
check box.
The default setting can be changed by the Superuser.
8. In the Write box (Password area) type the access code you wish to assign to the new user (alphanu-
meric string of minimum 6 and maximum 21 characters).
9. In the Rewrite box, type again the access code

For safety reason, in both the text fields an asterisk (*) is displayed for each typed character.
10.Select from the Map list, the map which you wish to associate the user to.
All the available maps are listed.
The name of the selected map is displayed in the Map associate box.
If the user you are creating has Advanced or Privileged profile, it is possible to create a new map. To
execute the operation, it is sufficient to type in the Map associate text field the name of the map (al-
phanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters)
11.Press OK.
The user is added to the list of the User Management window.
The limit of users who can be created is determined by one's codeword.
394 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

User Management (Superuser) window
This window allows managing all the properties of NMS5UX users.
Menu bar
Edit > Create Map. It creates a new map.
Users > Create. It creates a new NMS5UX user.
Users > Modify. It changes the characteristics of a NMS5UX user.
Users > Delete. It deletes a NMS5UX user.
Parameters
Name. Username of the NMS5UX user
Level. Profile of NMS5UX user: Superuser, Privileged, Advanced, Normal, Entry
Map name. Name of the map containing the NMS5UX user
User. Linux user whom the NMS5UX user is associated to
Expiration time. Expiry date/time of the NMS5UX user (account).
The Not expired wording points out that no expiry date is associated to the user.
Int. Enabling of the user to use the RAN (Remote Access NMS5UX) application. In detail, if the
symbol * (asterisk) is:
Present, the user is enabled.
Absent, the user is not enabled.
Ring/PSM. Enabling of the user to open the Ring Manager window and/or Packet Service Man-
ager Map window). In detail, if the symbol * (asterisk) is:
Server. Name of the machine where the NMS5LX system, used by the user, is installed.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 395

NMS5LX System Users - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged user

The NMS5LX System Users command displays/manages the NMS5UX users.
Operations
Display the characteristics of the user who opened the map
Change the password associated to one's NMS5UX user
GUI
User Management (Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged) window
Display the characteristics of the user who opened the map


The User Management (Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged) window displays the characteristics of the
user who opened the map.
Change the password associated to one's NMS5UX user

WARNING Operation available only if for ones system the Manual login to LX Map Manager window is ac-
tive.
In this condition, the password can be changed because the password of the Linux user is not automatically
assigned to the NMS5UX user.
2. In the User Management (Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged) window, select the record relevant to
one's user.
3. Select Users > Modify.
4. In the Write box (Password area) of the Modify users window type the new access code (alphanumeric
string of minimum 6 and maximum 21 characters).
5. In the Rewrite box, type again the access code.

For safety reason, in both the text fields an asterisk (*) is displayed for each typed character.
6. Press OK.
396 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

User Management (Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged) window
This window allows managing the properties of ones NMS5UX user (with which you are logged to the sys-
tem).
Menu bar
Users > Modify. It changes the characteristics of a NMS5UX user.
User list
Name. Username of the NMS5UX user.
Level. Profile of NMS5UX user: Superuser, Privileged, Advanced, Normal, Entry.
Map name. Name of the map containing the NMS5UX user.
User. Linux user whom the NMS5UX user is associated to.
Expiration time. Expiry date/time of the NMS5UX user (account).
The Not expired wording indicates that no expiry date is associated to the user.
Int. Enabling of the user to use the RAN (Remote Access NMS5UX) application. In detail, if the
symbol * (asterisk) is:
Ring/PSM. Enabling of the user to open the Ring Manager window and/or Packet Service Man-
ager Map window). In detail, if the symbol * (asterisk) is:
Server. Name of the machine where the NMS5LX system, used by the user, is installed.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 397

NMS5LX Logged Users
The NMS5LX Logged Users command displays the list of the NMS5UX users connected to the supervision
system and the list of active application (browser, manager, etc.).
Operations
Display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open
Require the logout of a NMS5UX user
Send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users
Filter the NMS5UX users list
Display the list of the applications active in NMS5LX system
Require the closure of an NMS5LX application
Force the closure of a NMS5LX application
Filter the NMS5LX applications list
GUI
Nms5lx: Logged Users (users list) window
Display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open

1. Select Options > NMS5LX Logged Users.
2. In the Nms5lx: Logged Users (users list) window, select the View Logged Users option.
The window displays the user having a map open.
Require the logout of a NMS5UX user

The window displays the connected users.
3. Select the user you wish to disconnect.
4. Select Action > Request Logout.

In the map opened by the selected user (user B), a confirmation window opens where it is indicated
that the user (user A) has required his disconnection.
In the confirmation window, there are the OK and Cancel push-buttons.
If the user B, within 30 seconds from the closure of the window, press:
OK, agrees the request. The screen of the user A displays a message which informs that the
user B has been disconnected.
Cancel, it does not agree the request. The screen of the user A displays a message which in-
forms that the user B has not agreed to his disconnection from the system.
If the user B, within 30 seconds from the opening of the window, does not press any of the two push-
buttons, the system, according to the operating level of the user which sent the request (user A), acts
as follows:
398 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Operating level of the user A equal of higher than that of the user B.
The user is automatically disconnected.
Operating level of the user A lower that of the user B.
The user is not disconnected.
In both cases, the screen of the user A displays a message that indicates the result of the operation.
If the result of the operation is the disconnection of the selected user (user B), this involves the removal
of the user from the list and the automatic closure of the relevant map (closure of NMS5LX GUI).

WARNING For equipment of type ALFOplus80HD, it is not possible to force the logout of a user logged via
Command Line Interface.
3. Select the user you wish to disconnect.
4. Select Action > Force Logout.

The user is removed from the list and the relevant map is automatically closed (closure of NMS5LX
GUI).
Send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users


3. Select the user you wish to send a message to.
4. Select Action > Send Message.

The Send Broadcast Message window opens.
5. Select the option:

Selected Users, to send the message only to the selected user.
Broadcast, to send a message to all the users in the list.
6. Type the message in the available text area (alphanumeric string of maximum 150 characters).
7. Press Send Message.

The video of the users, whom the message has been sent to, displays the window with the following
text Message from <user>: <text of the message>.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 399

Filter the NMS5UX users list


In the Running Process Filter window, select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.
User Name. NMS5UX user.
To set the filter, select the name of the wished user.
Map Name. Map which the NMS5UX user is associated to.
To set the filter, select the wished map.
The Nms5lx: Logged Users window displays only the records matching the activated criteria.
In the window there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the complete
list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not executes the operation) push-buttons.
Closing the Nms5lx: Logged Users window automatically removes the possible active filters.
Display the list of the applications active in NMS5LX system

2. In the Nms5lx: Logged Users (users list) window, select the View Running Application option.
The information in the table corresponds to the applications running when the command is selected or
the refresh is executed.
The Manager and WEB Craft Terminal applications are displayed only if are ReadWrite The Read Only
pages are not displayed.
The window displays the NMS5LX system applications (manager, browser, etc.) active when the com-
mand is selected (Nms5lx: Logged Users (users list) window).
Require the closure of an NMS5LX application

The window displays the open applications (Nms5lx: Logged Users (users list) window).
3. Select the application you wish to close.

4. Select Action > Request Exit.
In the map where the application is opened (user B), a confirmation window opens where it is indicated
that the user (user A) has required the closure of the application yyy.
In the confirmation window, there are the OK and Cancel push-buttons. If the user B, within 30 sec-
onds from the opening of the window, press the push-button:
OK, agrees to close the application. The screen of the user A displays a message which informs
that the application of the user B has been closed.
400 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Cancel, it does not agree to close the application. The screen of the user A displays a message
which informs that the user B has not agreed to close the application.
If the user B, within 30 sec from the opening of the window, does not press any of the two buttons, the
system, according to the operating level of the user which sent the request (user A), acts as follows:
Operating level of the user A equal of higher than that of the user B.
The application is automatically closed.
Operating level of the user A lower that of the user B.
The application is not automatically closed.
In both cases, the screen of the user A displays a message that indicates the result of the operation.
Force the closure of a NMS5LX application

3. Select the application you wish to close.
4. Select Action > Forced Exit.

The application is deleted from the list.
Filter the NMS5LX applications list


In the Running Process Filter window, select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.
Application Name. Group or single application.
To set the filter:
In the Application Group area, select the wished group.
In the Application Name area the application associated to the group are listed.
Select the wished application.
If no application is selected in the Nms5lx: Logged Users window, the records relevant
to all the applications in the group will be displayed.
The groups where the applications are grouped are:
Application, browser (for example, Alarm history, Current Alarm, etc.) and various appli-
cations (for example Software Download, etc.).
Manager, equipment Manager applications.
User Name. NMS5UX user.
To set the filter, select the name of the wished user.
Map Name. Map which the NMS5UX user is associated to.
To set the filter, select the wished map.
The Nms5lx: Logged Users window displays only the records matching the activated criteria.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 401

In the window there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the complete
list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not executes the operation) push-buttons.
Closing the Nms5lx: Logged Users window automatically removes the possible active filters.
402 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Nms5lx: Logged Users (users list) window
This window displays and allows managing the users who have opened a map in the supervision system.
Menu bar
Action > Request Logout. It requires the disconnection of the selected user.
Action > Force Logout. It forces the disconnection of the selected user in Running status.
Action > Send Message. It sends a message to the selected user or to all the users in Running
status.
Action > Request Exit. Not available/meaningful when the user list is displayed.
Action > Forced Exit. Not available/meaningful when the user list is displayed.
Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information displayed in the window.
Option
View Logged Users. If selected, the window displays only the list of users.
View Running Application. If selected, the window displays only the list of applications.
Users list
Time. Date and time when the user has connected to the system (opening of the LX Map Ma-
nager window).
User Name. Name of the user.
Map. Name of the map used by the user.
Permission. Type of access to the map: Read Only, Read/Write.
Terminal. Address of the terminal where the NMS5LX GUI, used by the user, is running.
Server. Name of the machine where the NMS5LX system is installed.
Status. Status of the user:
Running. The user has been registered by the NMS5LX system (normal operating status
of the user).
Out of NMS5UX. The user has opened the TMNMenu or Login window, but he has not ex-
ecuted the login yet for the access to NMS5LX (transient status of the user).
For the users in Running status, the information in the table are dynamically updated. For the
users in Out of NMS5UX status, it is necessary to require the update pressing Refresh Info.
Status bar
xx of yy. Number of displayed record with respect to the total number of records.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 403

Nms5lx: Logged Users (applications list) window
This window displays and allows managing the applications active in the supervision system.
Menu bar
Action > Request Logout. Not available/meaningful when the application list is selected.
Action > Force Logout. Not available/meaningful when the application list is selected.
Action > Send Message. Not available/meaningful when the application list is selected.
Action > Request Exit. It requires the closure of the selected application.
Action > Forced Exit. It forces the closure of the selected application.
Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information displayed in the window.
Options
View Logged Users. If selected, the window displays only the list of users.
View Running Application. If selected, the window displays only the list of applications.
Parameters
Application Name. Name of the running application.
Logical Addr. Logic and physical address of the equipment, which the relevant equipment win-
dow has been opened for (information valid only for the Manager application).
User Name. Name of the NMS5UX user who are using the operation.
Map Name. Name of the map that the user is using.
Terminal. Address of the terminal where the NMS5LX GUI used by the user is running.
Server. Name of the machine where the NMS5LX system is installed.
Status bar
xx of yy. Number of displayed record with respect to the total number of records.
404 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

LCT Equipment Users (NEs of series ALS, ALFOplus, ALFOplus80)
selected.
The LCT Equipment Users command manages/displays the LCT users list of equipment.
Operations
Display the LCT users list of equipment
Add a user
Modify a user
Delete a user
GUI
LCT User Manager window
See also
User management for NEs of series ALS, ALFOplus and ALFOplus80 (more info)
Display the LCT users list of equipment

WARNING Functionality available only for equipment managed by SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
2. Select Options > LCT Equipment Users.

The LCT User Manager window displays the LCT user list of the equipment.
Add a user

WARNING A maximum of 4 users for each profile (totally maximum 12 users) can be defined for each list.
3. In the LCT User Manager window, press Add User.
4. Type, in the User box of the User Management window, the name of the user (alphanumeric string of
minimum 1 and maximum 8 characters).
The same name cannot be assigned to two different users in the same list. Furthermore, the name of
the user, once assigned, cannot be changed later.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 405

5. Type in the Password box the access code of the user (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum
8 characters).
6. Type again in the Confirm Password box the access code of the user.
7. In the Timeout area select the option:

Timeout if you wish that the user, if he does not execute any operation, is disconnected after
the period of time set in the box Sec.
To change the period of time, activate the Sec. box and type a value between 1 second and
43200 seconds (12h).
No timeout if you wish that the user is not automatically disconnected after a given period of
time.
8. In the Profile area, select the option relevant to the profile you wish to assign to the user:
Read only. This user can check the parameters but it can not forward commands or execute
changing to the equipment configuration.
Read and Write. This user can check the parameters and execute maintenance operations (MAN
OP).
Station Operator. This user can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes
to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: changing the remote equip-
ment list, the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the login and the logout
of a user and all those operations available only to the System user (or NMS5UX).
9. Press Add.
Modify a user


3. In the LCT User Manager window, select the user you wish to change.
4. Press Modify User.

The User Management window opens.
5. Apply the wished changes.

The setting modality of the parameters are the same displayed in par. Add a user.
The user name cannot be changed.
6. Press Modify.
Delete a user

3. In the LCT User Manager window, select the user you wish to delete.
4. Press Remove User and confirm.
406 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

LCT User Manager window
This window displays and allows managing the LCT users connected to the equipment.
Parameters
User Name. Name of the LCT user
Profile. Profile of the LCT user:
Read only. This user can check the parameters but it can not forward commands or ex-
ecute changing to the equipment configuration.
Read Write. This user can check the parameters and execute maintenance operations
(MAN OP).
Station Operator. This user can as check the parameters as send commands or execute
changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: changing the
remote equipment list, the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the
login and the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the System user
(or NMS5UX).
The System and NMS5UX users are not displayed in the LCT User Manager window.
Timeout. Status of the Timeout option. Wording:
No timeout. The option is disabled: the user is not automatically disconnected after a giv-
en period of time.
<number>. The option is enabled: the user, if the program does not execute operation,
is disconnected after the indicated period of time.
Push-buttons
Add User. It adds a LCT user.
Modify User. It changes the characteristics of the selected LCT user.
Remove User. It deletes a LCT user.
Refresh. It updates the information contained in the window.
Status bar
X: Y. Type and logic address of selected NE.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 407

User management for NEs of series ALS, ALFOplus and ALFOplus80 (more info)
The users list is a list of users that can be connected and require the login to the equipment.
If a user is not present in the users list memorized in the controller of the equipment, this user will not be
able to connect and/or to execute the login of that equipment.
With the exception of the System and NMS5UX users, all the other users of the users list relevant to one
piece of equipment have to be set by the NMS5LX system (see Add a user), the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT ap-
plications.
Each equipment (managed by the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT) is equipped with two predefined users:
SYSTEM. User of the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT application with the following features:
User name > System (unchangeable parameter).
Timeout * > No Timeout (changeable parameter).
Profile > System (unchangeable parameter)
Password > Siaemicr (default) (changeable parameter)
The System user is single one for every equipment and he can not be deleted.
NMS5UX. User of the NMS5LX system, with the following features:
User name > NMS5UX (unchangeable parameter).
Timeout * > No Timeout (changeable parameter).
Profile > System (unchangeable parameter)
Password > Predefined (changeable parameter)
The NMS5UX user can not be deleted.
The password and the timeout of the predefined users can be changed only with the local management
programs (SCT/LMT, WEB LCT).
* Timeout. Time period when, if the program does not execute operations, its connection is automatically
stopped. The program manages a polling process to verify the presence of the LCT-equipment connection.
If the equipment does not answer to the polling for the set period (timeout), the user is disconnected and,
as consequence, also the equipment is disconnected.
408 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

LCT Equipment Users (ALFOplus80HD and AGS20)
The LCT Equipment Users command manages/displays the list of user/groups of equipment.
Operations
Display the list of user groups
Add a user group
Modify a user group
Delete a user group
Display the user list
Add a user
Modify a user
Delete a user
GUI
NE User Manager window
See also
User management for ALFOplus80HD and AGS20 (more info)
Display the list of user groups


3. In the NE User Manager window (radio button Users selected), select the radio button Groups. The
system displays the list of the user groups stored on the equipment.
Add a user group


3. In the NE User Manager window (radio button Users selected), select the radio button Groups.
4. Press Add: the Group Settings window is displayed.
5. Type the name of the group (alphanumeric string with min. 4 and max. 30 characters) in the field
Name.
The parameter is case sensitive: pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters.
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different groups present into the same list.
The parameter cannot be changed later.
6. Set, in the filed Profile, the profile you wish to assign to the users who will belong to the group:
Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or
change the equipment configuration with no exception.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 409

Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or exe-
cute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the
user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those oper-
ations available only to the Administrator user.
Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance
operations (MAN OP).
Read Only. The user with this profile can only read the parameters.
7. Define the protocols available to the users associated to the group (parameter Allowed Protocols):
HTTP. HyperText Transfer Protocol: protocol used to transfer hypertext pages on the WEB.
SNMP. Simple Network Management Protocol: protocol which allows monitoring and controlling
the network devices.
If you activate the protocol, select the relevant version:
SNMP V1. First version.
SNMP V2c. Second version.
FTP. File Transfer Protocol: protocol used for the file transfer based on TCP.
The check-box with the check sign next to the protocol name indicates that the protocol will be available
for the session opened by the users of the group, the check-box without check sign indicates that the
protocol will not be available.
8. Press OK.
The new group is inserted in the list and communicated to the equipment.
Modify a user group

WARNING The name (parameter Name) of the group CANNOT be modified.

A group with at least one associated user cannot be modified. First delete the users and then modify the
group.
4. Select the group to modify and press Modify: the Group Settings window is displayed.
5. To modify the profile of the users associated to a group, select the box Profile and then the option:
Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or
change the equipment configuration with no exception.
Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or exe-
cute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the
user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those oper-
ations available only to the Administrator user.
Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance
operations (MAN OP).
The parameter of the last group with profile Administrator cannot be modified.
6. To change the protocols available to the users associated to a group, select the relevant box:
HTTP. HyperText Transfer Protocol: protocol used to transfer hypertext pages on the WEB.
SNMP. Simple Network Management Protocol: protocol which allows monitoring and controlling
the network devices.
If you activate the protocol, select the relevant version:
Disabled. SNMP protocol disabled.
SNMP V1. First version.
SNMP V2c. Second version.
FTP. File Transfer Protocol: protocol used for the file transfer based on TCP.
410 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The check-box with the check sign next to the protocol name indicates that the protocol will be available
for the session opened by the users of the group, the check-box without check sign indicates that the
protocol will not be available.
The parameter cannot be changed if at least one user is associated to the group.
At least one protocol must be active for the group.
7. Press OK.
Delete a user group

WARNING A group with at least one associated user cannot be deleted. First delete the users and then the
group.
This operation is not available if the default group Administrator is selected.

4. Select the group to delete and press Delete: the system deletes the group without asking for confir-
mation.
Display the user list


The NE User Manager window (radio button Users selected) displays the LCT user list of the equipment.
Add a user

WARNING The parameters for the setting of the user name and of the relevant password are case sensitive:
pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters.

In the NE User Manager window (radio button Users selected), press Add: the User Settings window
is displayed.
3. Type the name of the new user (alphanumeric string with min. 4 and max. 30 characters) in the field
Name.
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into the same list.
The parameter cannot be changed later.
4. Press Change.
5. Type the password for the user access into the field New Password (alphanumeric string with min. 4
and max. 30 characters) and in the field Confirm New Password. Press OK.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 411

6. For the parameter Group, set the group which you wish to associate the user to.
The user will inherit the group characteristics: profile and use of the protocols HTTP, SNMP and FTP.
7. Set, in the field Timeout, the timeout of the session opened by the user. Set:
the value 0, if you wish that the session opened by the user is kept open for an indefinite time
period (session timeout disabled).
a value between 1 and 3600 sec. (1h), if you wish that the session opened by the user is auto-
matically terminated once the time limit is reached (session timeout enabled).
8. Press OK.
Modify a user

WARNING The name (parameter Name) and the group (parameter Group) associated to the user can NOT
be changed. To change them, it is necessary to delete the user and create another user with the wished
characteristics.
The parameters for the setting of the user name and of the relevant password are case sensitive: pay at-
tention to uppercase and lowercase characters.

In the NE User Manager window (radio button Users selected), select the wished user and press Mod-
ify or double click on the relevant row.
3. Make the changes.

The setting modes of the parameters are the same indicated in the par. Add a user.
4. Press OK.
Delete a user

WARNING The operation is not available for the user currently in use and for the last user with profile Ad-
ministrator.

In the NE User Manager window (radio button Users selected), select the user to delete.
3. Press Delete.
The system deletes the user without asking for confirmation.
412 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NE User Manager window
This window is used to manage the user groups and the users present on ALFOplus80HD or AGS20 equip-
ment.
Menu bar
Radio buttons
Users. Displays the list of users (button selected by default when the window is opened).
Groups. Displays the list of user groups.
Parameters (table Users)

User. Name of the user.
Group. Group which the user belongs to.
Auth. Parameter currently not supported.

Priv. Parameter currently not supported.
Timeout. Timeout of the session opened by the user:

0. The session opened by the user is kept for an indefinite period of time (session timeout
disabled).
<number of seconds>. The session opened by the user is automatically terminated once
the time limit is reached (session timeout enabled).
Parameters (table Groups)

User. Name of the group.
Profile. Profile of the users belonging to the group:

Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send com-
mands or change the equipment configuration with no exception.
Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands
or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations:
modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a
user and all those operations available only to the Administrator user.
Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only main-
tenance operations (MAN OP).
HTTP. Indicates if the HTTP protocol is available for the users of the considered group:
X, protocol available.
-, protocol unavailable.
HTTPS. Protocol currently not supported.
SNMP. Indicates if the SNMP protocol is available for the users of the considered group:
SNMP V1, the SNMP V1 protocol is available.
SNMP V2, the SNMP V2 protocol is available.
-, the SNMP protocol is not available.
FTP. Indicates if the FTP protocol is available for the users of the considered group:
X, protocol available.
-, protocol unavailable.
SFTP. Protocol currently not supported.
SSH. Protocol currently not supported.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 413

Push-buttons
Add (table Users). Opens the window for the creation of a new user.
Add (table Groups). Opens the window for the creation of a new group.
Modify (table Users). Opens the window for the modification of the user selected in the list.
Modify (table Groups). Opens the window for the modification of the group selected in the list.
Delete (table Users). Deletes the selected user.
Delete (table Groups). Deletes the selected group.
414 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

User management for ALFOplus80HD and AGS20 (more info)
Users list
The user list is a list of the users who can connect and require the login to the equipment by the
WEB LCT application (WEB user) or the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX program (SNMP user).
If a user is not present in the list stored in the equipment controller, he cannot connect and/or
login to the equipment.
Users are subdivided into groups (for details, see successive paragraphs).
Before creating a user, it is necessary to create the group which the user must be associated to.
One group can contain more users, but one specific user can belong only to one group.
At the first connection with the equipment or after a Factory Default operation, a default group
and a default user are available.
The management of the user list (creation, modification and deletion of users) can be performed
by NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system or via the application WEB LCT.
Groups
The users belonging to the list are organized in groups for which it is possible to define a profile
and the enabling to the use of FTP, HTTP and SNMP protocols.
The profile and the authorization of a group will be automatically assigned to the user who is
associated to that group.
The characteristics of a group are:
Name of the group. The name of the group must be unique within a user list.
The names of the group can contain any uppercase or lowercase characters, except for
the following ones: / \[ ] : . | = , + * ? < >.
The name of the group, once assigned, cannot be changed.
Profile which will be automatically assigned to the users associated to the group:
Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send
commands or change the equipment configuration with no exception.
Read/Write. The user with this profile can as read the parameters as send com-
mands or execute changes to the equipment configuration, except for the follow-
ing operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment,
force the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the Admin.
user.
Maintenance. The user with this profile can read the parameters and execute only
maintenance operations (MAN OP).
Read Only. The user with this profile can only check the parameters.
Protocols which will be available to the users assigned to the group:
Protocol HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol), used to transfer hypertext pages on
the WEB.
Protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), which allows monitoring
and controlling the network device. The user can activate the use of the first ver-
sion (SNMPv1) or the second version (SNMPv2c) of the protocol.
Protocol FTP (File Transfer Protocol), for the file transfer based on TCP.
More protocols can be enabled at the same time.
At the first connection with the equipment or after a Factory Default operation, a default group
is available with the following characteristics:
Name: Admin.
Profile: Administrator.
Enabled protocols: HTTP, FTP and SNMP version 1.
The default group can be changed but not deleted.
By means of the supervision system NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX, the user can Display the list of user
groups and, only for users with Administrator profile, Add a user group, Modify a user group or
Delete a user group.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 415

Users
The users belonging to the list are organized in groups for which a profile and the enabling to
the use of the FTP, HTTP and SNMP protocols can be defined.
The profile and the authorization of a group will be automatically assigned to the user who is
associated to that group.
The characteristics of a user are:
Nome/Password. Name and access password, which allow the program recognizing the
user as authorized.
The same user can open more equipment window relevant to different ALFOplus80HD
equipment.
The name of a user must be unique within an user list.
The names/passwords of the users can contain any uppercase or lowercase characters,
except for the following ones: / \[ ] : . | = , + * ? < >.
The name of a user, once assigned, cannot be changed.
Group, which the user is associated to and from which the user inherits the profile and
the enabling to the use of FTP, HTTP and SNMP protocols.
Timeout of the session opened by the user. It is possible to:
Disable the timeout: the session opened by the user will be preserved for an in-
definite period of time.
Enable the timeout: the session opened by the user will be automatically termi-
nated once the set time period is reached.
At the first connection with the equipment or after a Factory Default operation, a default user
is available with the following characteristics:
User: admin
Password: admin
Group: Admin. (default group - see characteristics in previous paragraph).
Profile: Administrator.
Timeout: 300 sec.
WARNING At the first access, it is suggested to immediately change the password of the default
user in order to limit the risk of intrusion via this account.
The default user can be modified or deleted. The only condition is that there must be at least
one other user with Administrator profile in the user list.
By means of the supervision system NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX, the user can Display the user list and,
only for users with Administrator profile, Add a user, Modify a user or Delete a user.
NMS5UX user
For the management of ALFOplus80HD or AGS20 equipment via NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervi-
sion system, it is necessary to create the relevant user by WEB LCT.
This user must be associated to a group with profile Administrator and all the protocols enabled.
For more information about the procedures for the management of users and groups by means
of the application WEB LCT for ALFOplus80HD or AGS20 equipment, refer to the relevant docu-
mentation.
416 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

LCT Logged Users
selected.
The LCT Logged Users command displays the list of the users (WEB LCT and NMS5UX) connected to
equipment.
Operations
Display the list of the users (WEB LCT and NMS5UX) connected to equipment
Force the logout of a LCT user
GUI
Logged Users window
See also
LCT and NMS5UX users (more info)
Display the list of the users (WEB LCT and NMS5UX) connected to equipment

2. Select Options > LCT Logged Users.

The Logged Users window displays the list of the users (WEB LCT and NMS5UX) connected to the NE
when the command is selected.
The information in the table corresponds to the characteristics of the users connected to the equipment
when the command is selected or the refresh is executed.
Force the logout of a LCT user

WARNING If the logout of a NMS5UX user is forced, the supervision system provides to automatically re-
store the connection of the user. It is possible to force the disconnection of an user even by the commands
in the equipment window. Functionality available only for equipment managed by SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
In case of ALFOplus80HD equipment, it is not possible to force the logout of a user connected to the equip-
ment via CLI.
2. Select Options > LCT Logged Users.
3. In the Logged Users window, select the user you wish to disconnect.
4. Select Action > Force Logout and confirm.

At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 417

Logged Users window
This window allows displaying the users connected to the equipment in the map.
Menu bar
Action > Force Logout. It forces the disconnection of the selected user.
Parameters
User Name. Name of the user.
The NMS5UX wording identifies the user of the NMS5LX system or a remote user (different from
LCT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment (Permanent
Login). The other ones identify the LCT users.
Group. Name of the group which the user belongs to.
WARNING Field available only for equipment of type ALFOplus80HD and AGS20.
Profile. User profile.
For the NMS5UX user, the relevant profile used in the NMS5LX GUI is not displayed (Level pa-
rameter), but the profile with which the user is acknowledged by the controller of the equipment
and by the SCT or WEB LCT program: System profile.
Ip Address. IP address of the machine where the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program is running or
the NMS5LX GUI used by the user.
FTP Protocol. Network protocol for file transfer:
FTP. File Transfer Protocol.
SFTP. SSH File Transfer Protocol.
WARNING Field not available for equipment of type ALFOplus80HD and AGS20.
Type. Type of user connected to equipment:
WEB. User connected to the equipment via the SCT/LCT or WEB LCT management pro-
gram.
SNMP. User connected to the equipment via supervision system (NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).
All the NMS5UX users who connect to equipment, independently from their username/
profile with which are recognized by the supervision system, are seen by the equipment
controller as users with username NMS5UX and profile System.
CLI. Users of SM-OS (Siae Microelettronica - Operating System) application, connected
to the equipment via telnet or serial interface. The supervision via CLI is possible only for
equipment of type ALFOplus80HD.
WARNING Field available only for equipment of type ALFOplus80HD and AGS20.
Status bar
X Y. Type (X) and logic address (Y) of the selected NE.
LCT and NMS5UX users (more info)
LCT user
User connected to the equipment via the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT management program.
NMS5UX user
User connected to the equipment via NMS5LX system (see NMS5UX user).
All the NMS5UX users who connect to the equipment, independently from their username/profile by which
are known by the supervision system, are seen by the equipment controller as users with username
NMS5UX and profile System.
418 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Remote Element Table
selected.
ALFO equipment automatically generates the remote equipment list inserting all the pieces of equipment
belonging to the same radio link. Then, for this equipment, the remote equipment list can be displayed but
not changed.
The Remote Element Table command manages/displays the remote equipment list of equipment.
Operations
Display the remote equipment list of equipment
Add a station to the remote equipment list
Rename a station of the remote equipment list
Delete a station from the remote equipment list
Add one piece of equipment to the remote equipment list
Add more pieces of equipment at the same time to the remote equipment list
Change the characteristics of the equipment of the remote equipment list
Delete equipment from the remote equipment list
Move the equipment within the remote equipment list
Save the remote equipment list
Restore the remote equipment list from file
Operations
Remote Element Table window
Remote equipment list (more info)
Example of definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list
Example of definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list
Display the remote equipment list of equipment

2. Select Options > Remote Element Table.

The Remote Element Table window displays the remote equipment list stored in the equipment control-
ler of the selected equipment.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 419

Add a station to the remote equipment list

WARNING A maximum of 30 stations can be inserted in the list.
3. In the Remote Element Table window, select Edit > Add > Station.
4. Type, in the text field of the Add New Station window, the name you wish to assign to the station (al-
phanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters).
WARNING The same name cannot be assigned to two different stations. Moreover, a number or a blank
cannot be used as first character of the name.
5. Press Ok.
The new station is added at the bottom of the list of already existing station.
6. Press Apply and then confirm.

The list is stored in the controller of the equipment.
Rename a station of the remote equipment list


3. In the Remote Element Table window, select the station you wish to rename.
4. Select Edit > Modify > Station.
5. Type, in the text field of the Modify Station window, the new name (alphanumeric string of minimum
1 and maximum 11 characters).
WARNING The same name cannot be assigned to two different stations. Moreover, a number or a blank
cannot be used as first character of the name.
6. Press Ok.
The name of the station is changed.

The list is stored in the controller of the equipment
Delete a station from the remote equipment list

3. In the Remote Element Table window, select the station you wish to delete.
WARNING The deletion of the station causes also the deletion of all the pieces of equipment associated to it.
4. Select Edit > Remove > Station and confirm.

The station is deleted.

420 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Add one piece of equipment to the remote equipment list

WARNING A maximum of 100 pieces of equipment can be inserted in the list.
3. In the Remote Element Table window, select the station which you wish to associate the equipment to.
Equipment can be associated only to a single station.
4. Select Edit > Add > Single Element.

The Apply to station field of the Add Single Element window displays the station which the new equip-
ment will be associated to.
5. Type, in the IP address box, the IP address of the equipment.
WARNING It is not possible to create in the same list (even if in different stations) two pieces of equipment
with the same IP Address.
6. In the Element Type area, select the option relevant to the type of element you wish to insert:
Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program.
Remote link. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program that constitutes the
equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equipment
(which the user has required the connection to).
Element Manager/Remote Node. This option has a several meanings according to the type of
equipment you wish to insert:
ALplus equipment (Nodal Matrix) belonging to a remote ALplus node.
In this case, it will not be necessary to insert in the remote equipment list all the element
of the remote node but, inserting only one element and identifying it with the Remote
Node type, the connection with all the elements of the remote node will be activated at
the connection with the considered equipment. See Example of definition of a remote AL-
plus node in the remote equipment list.
ALCplus2 equipment belonging to a remote ALCplus2 node.
the connection with the considered equipment. See Example of definition of a remote
ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list.
All the types of equipment, except for the above mentioned one.
Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the NMS5LX sys-
tem resides).
Not Managed. Element not managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program.
7. Press OK.
Under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive number> is displayed, with the
characteristics of the new equipment.

Add more pieces of equipment at the same time to the remote equipment list

WARNING A maximum of 100 pieces of equipment can be inserted in the list.

NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 421

The Remote Element Table window opens.
3. Select the station which you wish to associate the equipment to.
Equipment can be associated only to a single station.
4. Select Edit > Add > Multiple Element.

The Apply to station field of the Add Multiple Element window displays the station which the new equip-
ment will be associated to.
Under the field, all the pieces of equipment managed by NMS5LX are listed. For each equipment, the
IP address and the logic address are listed in the order.
The list can be filtered:
a. Pressing Filter
b. In the Load Equipment window, select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.
Match Logical Address box. Logic address of the NE.
Match IP Address box. IP address of the NE.
To set the criteria, type the IP Address of the NE in the text field.
Match connection status box. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5LX.
To set the criterion, press the push-button relevant to the wished status.
Match equipment type box. Equipment type.
To set the criterion, press the push-button relevant to the type of wished equipment.
The table displays only the records matching the activated criteria.
In the window there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the
complete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not executes the operation) push-but-
tons.
6. Select the equipment you wish to add to the remote equipment list.
7. In the Element Type area, select the option relevant to the type of elements you wish to insert:
tem resides).
Under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive number> is displayed, for each
new equipment.

422 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Change the characteristics of the equipment of the remote equipment list

3. In the Remote Element Table window, select the equipment you wish to change.
4. Select Edit > Modify > Element.

The Apply to station field of the Modify Element window displays the station containing the equipment.
5. To change the IP address, type the new value in the IP Address box.
WARNING An IP Address already in the list cannot be assigned to the equipment.
6. To change the element type, select the desired option in the Element Type area:
tem resides).
7. Press OK.
The characteristics of the equipment are changed according to the new setting.

Delete equipment from the remote equipment list

3. In the Remote Element Table window, select the equipment you wish to delete.
4. Select Edit > Remove > Element and confirm.

The equipment is deleted.

NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 423

Move the equipment within the remote equipment list

3. In the Remote Element Table window, select the equipment you wish to move.
4. To move equipment from a station to the other:
a. Select Edit > Move to station.

The Move to station window opens.
b. Select the station where you wish to move the equipment.
c. Press Ok. The equipment is moved to the selected station.
5. To move equipment among the list of equipment of a station:

Select Edit > Exchange > Before, to move the equipment over the previous NE.
Select Edit > Exchange > After, to move the equipment under the next NE.

Save the remote equipment list


3. In the Remote Element Table window, set or change the remote equipment list.
4. Press File > Save To File. The Save to file window opens.
5. Type the name of the file in the proper box (with extension .rel) and set the path where you wish to
save the file.
6. Press OK.
Restore the remote equipment list from file

3. In the Remote Element Table window, select File > Load from File.
The Load from file window opens.
4. Select the file (with extension .rel) where the wished remote equipment list is stored.
5. Press OK. In the Remote Element Table window, the remote equipment list is displayed.
424 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Remote Element Table window
This window allows managing the remote equipment list stored in the controller of the selected NE.
Menu bar
File > Load from file. It restores the remote equipment list from file.
File > Save to file. It saves the remote equipment list to file.
Edit > Add > Station. It adds a station.
Edit > Add > Single Element. It adds one piece of equipment.
Edit > Add > Multiple Element. It adds more pieces of equipment at the same time.
Edit > Remove > Station. It deletes the station.
Edit > Remove > Element. It deletes one piece of equipment.
Edit > Modify > Station. It changes the name of the station.
Edit > Modify > Element. It changes the characteristics of an equipment.
Edit > Exchange > Before. It moves one piece of equipment over the previous one.
Edit > Exchange > After. It moves one piece of equipment under the next one.
Edit > Move to station. It moves one piece of equipment from a station to another one.
Parameters
Station/ For each station, the column reports the name of the station.
No particular meaning is given to the station; it is simply introduced to help the user in the lo-
calization of the equipment.
/Equipment. Name of the equipment.
The program automatically assigns the equipment name during the creation of the equipment
itself. The name of the equipment in the remote equipment list is not displayed in the map below
the relevant symbol. In the map the equipment name, assigned by the user during the creation
of the symbol, is displayed.
IP Address. IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment.
Element Type. Type of equipment:
Remote link. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program that constitutes
the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local
equipment (which the user has required the connection to).
Element Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where
the NMS5LX system resides).
Not Managed. Element not managed by SCT/LMT or WEB LCT.
Node X. Equipment belonging to the ALplus or ALCplus2 local node.
With ALplus local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 pieces of equipment
(ALplus - Nodal Matrix) interconnected by nodal bus, where the considered equipment is
an element. In this case the value X can correspond to A, B or C and indicates the subset.
With ALCplus2 local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 ALCplus2 and/
or ALCplus2e (with Ethernet Enhanced functionality active) pieces of equipment connect-
ed by a TDM Nodal Bus and/or by an Ethernet Nodal Bus, where the considered equip-
ment is an element. In this case the value X can correspond to a number between 1 and
8 and indicates the subset.
Push-buttons
Apply. It applies the changes and closes the window.
Refresh. It updates the information displayed in the window.
Cancel. It closes the window without applying the changes.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 425

Remote equipment list (more info)
Each equipment has a remote equipment list stored in its own controller.
With remote equipment list we mean a list containing all the network remote equipment which you wish
to connect to.
When the user requires the connection to any equipment in the network (local equipment), the local man-
agement program:
SCT/LMT reads, at the connection of this equipment, its remote equipment list and automatically
sends the connection command to all the equipment in the list.
WEB LCT reads, at the connection of this equipment, its remote equipment list and automatically
sends the connection command to the equipment of type Remote Link, in the remote equipment
list of the local equipment.
For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, it is possible to subdivide the equipment
in stations. The station does not have any particular meaning; it has been introduced only to help the user
during the localization of the equipment.
In each remote equipment list, it is possible to create a maximum of 100 pieces of equipment and 30 sta-
tion.
Besides the remote equipment to be connected, the user can insert in the remote equipment list also the
following information:
IP address of the machine where the NMS5LX system resides.
426 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Example of definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list
Suppose to have a network made by two ALplus nodes both of them composed by 3 ALplus pieces of equip-
ment (Nodal Matrix) as depicted in Fig.29.
Fig.29 - Definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list (example 1)
Equipment 1 Equipment 4
172.18.10.1 172.18.10.4
Equipment 2 Nodal bus Equipment 3 Equipment 5 Nodal bus Equipment 6

172.18.10.2 172.18.10.3 172.18.10.5 172.18.10.6
By means of the SCT application the ALplus nodes have been defined: assignment of the station, name of
the node, IP addresses and subset (A, B, C) ad depicted in Fig.30.
To do this, it is sufficient to activate the login to one piece of equipment of the ALplus node and, by means
of the SCT application, to define the characteristics of the equipment composing the node. The program
will automatically configure the characteristics of the ALplus node even in the other two pieces of equip-
ment (station, Equipment ID, Remote Element Table).
Fig.30 - Definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list (example 2)
Station Name: Milan Station Name: Rome
Node Name: Milan Node Name: Rome
IP: 172.18.10.1 IP: 172.18.10.4
Equip ID: Milan.A Equip ID: Rome.A
Equipment 2 Nodal Equipment 3 Equipment 5 Nodal Equipment 6

Station Name: Milan bus Station Name: Milan Station Name: Rome bus Station Name: Rome
Node Name: Milan Node Name: Milan Node Name: Rome Node Name: Rome
IP: 172.18.10.2 IP: 172.18.10.3 IP: 172.18.10.5 IP: 172.18.10.6
Equip ID: Milan.B Equip ID: Milan.C Equip ID: Rome.B Equip ID: Rome.C
Now, suppose you wish to manage locally, through SCT, all the pieces of network equipment connecting
to Equipment 1. To do this, the remote equipment list of the Equipment 1 must be configured as follows:
1. Create the stations Milan and Rome (Add a station to the remote equipment list).
2. Create under the station Milan one pice of equipment of the node Milan, for example Equipment 2 as-
signing to it as Element Type > Managed by SCT (Add one piece of equipment to the remote equipment
list).
3. Create under the station Rome one piece of equipment of the node Rome, for example Equipment 4
assigning to it as Element Type > Element Managed/Remote Node.
4. Save the remote equipment list in the controller of Equipment 1.
At the activation of the connection with Equipment 1, the program will automatically activate the connec-
tion with:
Equipment 1, Equipment 2 and Equipment 3 in Connected/Login modality.
Equipment 4, Equipment 5 and Equipment 6 in Connected/Monitor modality.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 427

Example of definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list
Suppose to have a network made by two ALCplus2 nodes both of them composed by 3 ALCplus2 pieces of
equipment as depicted in Fig.31.
Fig.31 - Definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list (example 1)
172.18.10.1 172.18.10.4
Nodal bus/ Nodal bus/

Equipment 2 LAN Equipment 3 Equipment 5 LAN Equipment 6
172.18.10.2 172.18.10.3 172.18.10.5 172.18.10.6
By means of the SCT application the ALCplus2 nodes have been defined: assignment of the station, name
of the node, IP addresses and subset (1, 2, 3) ad depicted in Fig.32.
To do this, it is sufficient to activate the login with one piece of equipment of the ALCplus2 node and, by
means of the SCT application, to define the characteristics of the equipment composing the node. The pro-
gram will automatically configure the characteristics of the ALCplus2 node even in the other two pieces of
equipment (station, Equipment ID, Remote Element Table, etc.).
Fig.32 - Definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list (example 2)
Station Name: Milan Station Name: Rome
Node Name: Milan Node Name: Rome
IP: 172.18.10.1 IP: 172.18.10.4
Equip ID: Milan.A Equip ID: Rome.A
Equipment 2 Nodal bus/ Equipment 3 Equipment 5 Nodal bus/ Equipment 6

Station Name: Milan Lan Station Name: Milan Station Name: Rome Lan Station Name: Rome
Node Name: Milan Node Name: Milan Node Name: Rome Node Name: Rome
IP: 172.18.10.2 IP: 172.18.10.3 IP: 172.18.10.5 IP: 172.18.10.6
Equip ID: Milan.B Equip ID: Milan.C Equip ID: Rome.B Equip ID: Rome.C
Now, suppose you wish to manage locally, by means of SCT, all the pieces of network equipment connect-
ing to Equipment 1. To do this, the remote equipment list of the Equipment 1 must be configured in the
following way:
1. Create the stations Milan and Rome (Add a station to the remote equipment list).
2. Create under the station Milan one piece of equipment of the node Milan, for example Equipment 2 as-
signing to it as Element Type > Managed by SCT (Add one piece of equipment to the remote equipment
list).
3. Create under the station Rome one piece of equipment of the node Rome, for example Equipment 4
assigning to it as Element Type > Element Managed/Remote Node.
4. Save the remote equipment list in the controller of Equipment 1.
At the activation of the connection with Equipment 1, the program will automatically activate the connec-
tion with:
Equipment 1, Equipment 2 and Equipment 3 in Connected/Login modality.
Equipment 4, Equipment 5 and Equipment 6 in Connected/Monitor modality.
428 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NE Sw/Fw Download
WARNING Command available only if one or more equipment of the same type have been selected, except
for ELFO, SDH N+1 and FAMxc.
The NE Sw/Fw Download command updates the software of one or more pieces of equipment.
Operations
Update the WEB LCT application
GUI
Software Download window
See also
Equipment software (more info)
WEB LCT application (more info)

ATTENZIONE Only for ALFOplus80HD and AGS20 equipment, this procedure allows updating (besides the
equipment software) even the relevant WEB LCT application.
2. Select Options > NE Sw/Fw Download.
3. In the Selection file DWL box of the Software Download window, set the file you wish to use for the
update.
To press Read to display a brief description that illustrates the content of the selected file.
4. Set the type of download you wish to execute. Select the option:
Forced (System Version), to update the software of the equipment controller.
Only different or not present (Boot, WebLct, Peripheral), to update the software of peripheral
units (FPGA file and/or operating code).
WARNING Only for equipment of type AGS10, if the download is executed to the Network Processor and
not to the main controller, this box has name N.P. Bench Switch?
It is possible to activate the box only if a single NE has been selected.
for Download area.
7. Press Start Dwl.

If in the previous step, it has been:
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 429

ing, Downloading, Complete, etc.) are displayed. The operation takes some minutes.
Before starting the update of the NE controller, it executes a compatibility check between the
software that must be sent and the one on the controller itself.
cific type of NE.
be executed.
One record is added for every NE in the Equipment list for download area to the list of equipment
scheduled for the download.
Update the WEB LCT application

WARNING The operation will be successful and is meaningful only if one or more pieces of equipment, sup-
porting the WEB LCT application, is selected. For ALFOplus80HD and AGS20 equipment, this procedure is
not meaningful because the WEB LCT application is included in the System Version.
2. Select Options > NE Sw/Fw Download.
3. In Selection file DWL box of the Software Download window, set the wished file for the update.
Press Read to display a brief description that illustrates the content of the selected file.
4. Select the Only different or not present option.
It is possible to activate the box only if a single NE has been selected.
for Download area.
6. Press Start Dwl.

dress and the type of NE which is updating the WEB LCT, and the status of the operation (Wait-
The operation takes some minutes. If the operation is successful, opening the RelSw window in
the Unit release bench list relevant to the updated memory bench, the WebServerLCT option will
display the new version of WEB LCT.
One record is added for every NE in the Equipment list for download area to the list of equipment
scheduled for download.
430 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Software Download window
This window allows managing the download of the equipment software.
Options
Forced. It updates the software of the equipment controller.
Bench switch? If activated, it starts the switch of the memory benches at the end of the down-
load.
Only different or not present. It updates the software of the peripheral units.
Immediate Download. If selected, it starts the download immediately.
Parameters (area Scheduling data time for Download)

Day. Day for which the download is scheduled.
Month. Month for which the download is scheduled.
Year. Year for which the download is scheduled.
Hour. Hour for which the download is scheduled.
Min. Minute for which the download is scheduled.
Informations (area Equipment List for Download)*

NEs selected in the map for which the equipment software update will be executed. For each
equipment, there are, in order:
Logic address
IP address
Type of NE
NE status when the command has been selected:
Con. The NE is in connected status.
Dis. The NE is in disconnected status.
Nev_Con. The NE is in disconnected status (never been connected).
Unrea. The NE is in unreachable status.
Mant. The NE is in maintenance status (operation in progress).
Lom_Mon. The LCT program is connected to the NE in Monitoring modality.
Lom_Conf. The LCT program is connected to the NE in Configuring modality.
SwDl. The download of the software is in progress.
Push-buttons
Select (area Selection file DWL). It opens the window for the selection of the file to download.
Read (area Selection file DWL). It displays a brief selection of the selected file.
Start Dwl. It starts the software update.
Cancel. It closes the window.
Scheduling. It displays the list of the NEs scheduled for the software update.
* Double click on one NE: the RelSw window opens, where the version of the software present in the mem-
ory benches of the NE is displayed.
<node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value between 1 and 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 431

Overview
With equipment software we mean the set of all the software necessary for the management of
the whole NE (software of the main controller and software of the peripheral units).
The equipment software resides on the main controller which have two memory benches: one
working and the other in stand-by.
Each bench can house a version (also different) of equipment software.
It is possible to update the software of only one memory bench at a time. NMS5LX automatically
updates the software of the memory bench not in progress or not present.
Execution scheduling
The software update can be immediately executed (only if a single NE is selected) or can be
scheduled for a given date/time (suggested option).
In the first case, the operation is executed in real time. In the second case, it is scheduled and
the system will execute the update at the date/time scheduled by the user.
In both cases, the execution of the download for each selected NE is subjected to the following
conditions:
The NE must be in connected status.
The local management program in Configuration modality must not be connected to the
NE.
No other operation must be running.
If the software update is immediately executed and the NE is not in one of the above mentioned
conditions, the operation is not executed.
Even if the update is scheduled and in the moment (date/time) when it was schedule the NE is
not in one of the above mentioned conditions, the operation is not executed, but in this case the
system, at regular intervals, will verify the condition of the NE until:
The NE is in the correct condition and then the download is executed.
The NE is removed from the list of NEs scheduled for the download.
Files
The files for the software update are identified by the extension dwl and by a name composed
by 8 characters. In detail:
1st character identifies the technology (S=SDH, P=PDH, M=PMP/IPBOX, K=CommServ-
er).
2nd character identifies the equipment type (R = Radio, M = Multiplex, ComS =
CommServer).
3rd, ... 6th character identify the product number.
7th, 8th character identify the most meaningful digits of the version.
432 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

WEB LCT application (more info)
The WEB LCT application allows a user connecting to equipment via his own machine (pc, workstation, etc.)
using the operating system and the Web browser at his disposal.
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller.
The update of WEB LCT, as for the equipment software, can be executed immediately or scheduled for a
given date/time.
The update modality is the same described for the equipment software (see Update the WEB LCT applica-
tion).
The files for the WEB LCT update are identified by the extension dwl.
For ALFOplus80HD equipment, the procedure to update WEB LCT is not meaningful because WEB LCT ap-
plication is included in the System Version.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 433

Scheduled Sw Dwl Status
The Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command displays the list of the equipment scheduled for the software
update.
Operations
Display the list of equipment scheduled for the software update
Delete one or more NEs from the list
Stop the software update
Save the list of the scheduled equipment
Schedule the software download
Re-read the release of NE firmware
Switch the memory bench
Filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment
GUI
Scheduling Download window
See also
Display the list of equipment scheduled for the software update

1. Select Options > Scheduled Sw Dwl Status.

The Scheduling Download window displays the list of the equipment scheduled for the software update
and/or the switching of the memory benches of the controller.
The presence of the symbol - indicates that the information is not available as not meaningful for the
current status of the operation.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal sys-
tem is displayed. This equipment is identified by the logic address:
Delete one or more NEs from the list

2. In the Scheduling Download window, to delete:

All the NEs in the list, except for those whose software update is in progress (Status field -
Downloading wording), select File > Deleted All.
The NEs for which the download procedure has been already executed (Status field - Completed
wording), select File > Deleted Completed.
The selected NEs except for those whose software update is in progress (Status field - Down-
loading wording), select the equipment and then File > Deleted Select.
The equipment is removed from the list.
434 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Stop the software update

2. In the Scheduling Download window, select the equipment for which the software update is in progress
(Status field - Downloading wording).
3. Select File > Abort.

The operation is stopped.
In the Status column, for the selected NE, the Interrupted wording is displayed.
Save the list of the scheduled equipment

2. In the Scheduling Download window, select File > Export.
3. Type, in the File box of the Export window, the path and the name of the file where you wish to save
the data.
When the window is opened, the default path (/opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application name>) and a
name with the following format are proposed:
ExpSwDwl_<day>-<month>-<year>_<hour>-<minutes>.csv
Where date and time refers to the moment when the Export window has been opened, for example
ExpSwDwl_22-4-2010_11-30.csv.
4. Press OK.
Schedule the software download

1. Select Options > SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status.
2. In the Scheduling Download window, select the interested download operation.
3. Select Command > Reschedule.
4. In the New Scheduling, fill the fields Day, Month, Year, Hour and Min. with the values relevant to the
moment when you wish to re-schedule the selected operation.
5. Press OK.
Re-read the release of NE firmware

2. In the Scheduling Download window, select the interested download operation.
3. Select Command > Read Release.

The system displays, for the NE corresponding to the selected download, the release of the firmware
on the benches.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 435

Re-execute the software update


The Scheduling Download window opens.
2. Select the equipment for which the operation of software update is failed (field Status - wording Inter-
rupted).
3. Select Command > Retry interrupted.

The WinRip window opens.
4. Set the date (day, month, year) and the time (hour, minute) when you wish to re-execute the software
update.
5. Press Ok.
In the Scheduling Download window, the selected records pass to status Waiting.
Switch the memory bench


2. In the Scheduling Download window, select the equipment for which you wish to execute the switching
of the memory benches.
The operation will be successful only for the equipment for which the software update has been cor-
rectly executed (field Status - wording Completed).
3. Select Command > Bench Switch.

The Scheduling Download window displays the list of the NEs for which the switching of the memory
bench must be executed.
4. If you wish that the switching is:

Immediately executed, press Bench switch immediate.
The operation starts.
To stop the operation press Abort.
At the end, the column Result displays the result of the operation.
Scheduled to be executed in a second moment, press Bench switch scheduling.
The WinRip window opens.
Set the date (day, month, year) and the time (hour, minute) for which you wish to execute the
operation.
Press OK.
In the Scheduling Download window, one record is added for every NE scheduled for the bench
switch.
436 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment

2. In the Scheduling Download window, to SORT the list, select:

Order > by Name. It sorts the list according to the logical address of the NE.
Order > by Sched. Time. It sorts the list according to the moment when the operation has
been scheduled (from the most recent to the less recent).
Order > by Type. It sorts the list according to the NE type.
Order > by Status. It sorts the list according to the status of the connection between NE and
supervision system.
Order > by User. It sorts the list according to the name of the operator who has scheduled the
operation (increasing alphabetical order).
Order > by Dwl File. It sorts the list according to the name of the download file (increasing
alphabetical order).
The sign next to the option indicates the criterion currently in use.
When the Scheduling Download window is opened, independently from the previous setting, the equip-
ment is listed in alphabetical order according to the logical address of the NE.
3. To FILTER the list, select Filter > Filter.

In the Filter window, the available criteria are the following:
Customer ID. Name (logical address) of the equipment for which the operation has been sched-
uled.
User. Operator who has scheduled the operation.
Name. Logic address of the NE.
Type. Equipment type.
Status. Status of the operation.
To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status. In detail:
Download. Equipment for which the operation has not been executed yet.
Downloading. Equipment for which the operation is in progress.
Completed. Equipment for which the software update has been successfully executed.
Interrupted. Equipment for which the software update has been interrupted or is failed.
Bench Swh OK. Equipment for which the switching of the memory benches has been suc-
cessfully executed.
Bench Swh Err. Equipment for which the switching of the memory benches is failed.
Press Reset filter to cancel the activation of the filters.
4. Press OK.
The Scheduling Download window displays only the records matching the activated criteria.
Closing the Scheduling Download window automatically removes the possible active filters.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 437

Scheduling Download window
This window allows managing the scheduling of the download of the equipment software.
Menu bar
File > Deleted All. It deletes all the NEs in the list, except those for which the software update
is in progress.
File > Deleted Selected. It deletes the selected NEs, except those for which the software up-
date is in progress.
File > Deleted Completed. It deletes the NEs for which the download procedure has been al-
ready executed.
File > Export. It saves the list of the scheduled equipment.
File > Abort. It stops the procedure of software update.
Sort. It displays the list of criteria used to sort the list of NEs. The sign next to the option indi-
cates the criterion currently used.
Filter > Filter. It filters the list of the equipment.
Command > Bench Switch. It executes the switching of the memory benches of the equip-
ment for which the sw update has been correctly executed (equipment in status Completed).
Command > Reschedule. It opens the New Scheduling window to set the new date (day/
month/year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) to execute the same operation.
Command > Read release. It reads the information relevant to the firmware on NE benches.
Command > Refresh. It updates the data displayed in the window.
Command > Equipment Info. It opens the Equipment Information window Verify the charac-
teristics and the functional status of the equipment.
Parameters
Equipment. Logic address of the NE.
Type. Type of NE.
Ne Status. Current status of NE. Possible values:
Disconnected. Equipment is disconnected.
Unreachable. Equipment is unreachable.
Maintenance. Manual operations are active on the equipment.
Lom Config. Local terminal is connected to the equipment in configuration modality.
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. Equipment is in alarm status and the most serious alarm
has severity Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.
Scheduling Time. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) for when the op-
eration is scheduled.
Start Time. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) when the operation is
started.
Duration. Duration (expressed in hour:minutes:seconds) of the operation.
F. The presence of the x indicates that, during the download, all the software of the controller
of the equipment is updated.
O. The presence of the x indicates that, during the download the software of peripheral units
(FPGA file and/or operating code) is updated.
B. The presence of the x indicates one of the following conditions:
If the x is present, even for the option F, this means that, at the end of download, a
switch of the memory bench is automatically executed or has been executed, in such a
way that the bench whose software has been updated will be used.
If the x is not present even for the option F, this means that only the switch of the mem-
ory bench will be executed or has been executed.
P. Column not managed.
NP. Field meaningful only for AGS10 equipment. This equipment is provided with two types of
controller (main controller and Network Processor). The operator can download even only one
of the two files: one for the software of the main controller and one for the Network Processor.
438 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

According to the file selected for download, the system acknowledges the involved controller
and, at the end of the operation, in the field NP:
Displays x to signal that the operation of software download has been executed to Net-
work Processor.
Does not display x to signal that the operation of software download has been executed
to the main controller.
Op. Status. Status of the operation of download and/or switching of the memory bench:
Downloading. The operation is in progress.
Waiting. The operation has not been executed yet. It is possible that, in the Time Sched-
uling field, a scheduling date/time previous to the current one is displayed. This means
that the NE, when the operation has been scheduled, was not in the right condition for
the execution of the operation. In this case, the system attempts the operation at regular
time interval.
Completed. The software update has been successfully executed.
Interrupted. The software update has been interrupted or the operation is failed.
In this case, it is suggested to execute or re-schedule the software update.
Bench Swh OK. The bench switching has been successfully executed.
Bench Swh Err. The switching of the memory bench is failed.
User. Operator who has scheduled the operation.
Release. Release of the controller bench currently active.
File. Name of the file (with extension .dwl) used for the download.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 439

Bench Switch window
This window allows managing the switch of the memory benches.
Parameters
Equipment. Logical address.
Ip. IP address.
Type. NE type.
Bench.... Name of the file and version of the software on memory benches 1 (Bench 1) and 2
(Bench 2).
State.... Operating status of the memory bench 1 (State 1) and 2 (State 2):
running. The software of the considered memory bench is running.
loaded. The software is on the bench but is not running (standby).
notLoaded. The software of the memory bench is not present.
downloading. The software update of the memory bench is in progress.
Result. Status of the operation of memory bench switching:
Starting. The operation is in progress.
Waiting. The operation has not been executed yet.
Abort. The operation has been interrupted.
Bench Swh OK. The operation has been successfully executed.
Bench Swh Err. The operation is failed.
Not Loaded. The operation is failed because one of the memory bench does not contain
the software.
440 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NE Sw/Fw Release
selected.
The NE Sw/Fw Release command displays the software version of the equipment.
Operations
Display the software version of the equipment
Update the software of equipment
Switch the operation of the memory benches of the controller (equipment)
Delete the software in the standby memory bench
GUI
RelSw window
See also
Display the software version of the equipment

2. Select Options > NE Sw/Fw Release.

The RelSw window displays the software version of the equipment.
Update the software of equipment

WARNING The system automatically updates the software of the not running or not present memory bench
(Status box- loaded or not loaded wording).
The operation cannot be executed when the software update is already in progress (Status box - down-
loading wording).
3. Press Download in the RelSw window.
4. In the Selection file DWL box of the Software Download window, set the file you wish to use for the
update.
It is possible to type the path and the filename or press Select (the Select file for download window
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 441

To display a brief description that illustrates the content of the selected file, press Read.
5. Set the type of download that you wish to execute. Select the option:
Forced, to update the software of the equipment controller.
Only different or not present, to update the software of peripheral units (FPGA file and/or appli-
cation code).
for Download area.
8. Press Start Dwl.

The operation takes some minutes.
Before starting the update, the NE controller executes a compatibility check between the soft-
ware that must be sent and that on the controller itself.
cific type of NE.
be executed.
Set a date/time for the execution of software update, the Software Download window is closed.
One record is added for every NE in the Equipment list for download area to the list of the sched-
uled equipment for the download.
Switch the operation of the memory benches of the controller (equipment)

WARNING Operation impossible when the software update is in progress or when the software is not pre-
sent in a bench.
3. Press Switch bench in the RelSw window.

A window opens where the operations that the system executes during the benches switching are dis-
played in form of message.
At the end of the operation, the bench in running status is forced to loaded status and vice versa. The
operation causes an automatic disconnection and re-connection of the NE. If the re-connection is not
successful, the NE assumes the unreachable status and, at regular intervals, the supervision system
will attempt the re-connection command.
442 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Delete the software in the standby memory bench

WARNING The software on the memory bench cannot be deleted when the software update is in progress.
3. Press Clear bench in the RelSw window.

A window is displayed where the operations, which the system executes during the deletion of the
bench in standby, are displayed (as messages).
At the end of the operation, the bench which was in standby status (wording loaded) passes to the sta-
tus not loaded. The relevant Release box will be empty.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 443

RelSw window
The first row in the window displays the logic address, the IP address and type of the selected equipment.
Parameters
Release (area Equipment Release Bench). Name of the file and version of the software respec-
tively on memory bench 1 and 2.
Status (area Equipment Release Bench). Operating status of the memory benches:
running. The software of the considered memory bench is running.
loaded. The software is on the bench but is not running (standby).
not loaded. The software of the memory bench is not present.
downloading. The update of the software of the memory bench is in progress.
Push-buttons
Download. It executes the download of the software on the stand-by bench.
Clear bench. It deletes the software on the stand-by memory bench.
Switch bench. It executes the switch of the memory benches.
ok. It executes the operations and closes the window.
help. It opens the relevant help on-line.
Information
Unit. Name of the card or of the part of NE where the controller (code) or the programmable
device (FPGA file) is present.
Element. Name of the software. It generally indicates the type of component:
FW_boot. Boot code. This part of code cannot be updated, in fact it has not memory
benches.
FW_appl. Application code.
conf_... or fpga... Configuration file of the programmable devices.
Actual release. Version of the code or FPGA file on the controller (main or of peripheral unit).
Release bench x. Version of the software on the memory bench x of the main controller.
444 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download
WARNING Command available only if one or more FAMxcs are selected.
The FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download command updates the software of one or more FAMxc.
Operations
GUI
Insert (FAMxc) window
See also
Equipment software (FAMxc) (more info)

1. Select the FAMxc.
2. Select Options > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download.

3. In the File Selection box of the Insert (FAMxc) window, set the file you wish to use for the update.
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Browse (the fileSelection... window
If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/tftpdir directory, it is necessary to copy
tion, to find the file for the update in the home/tftpdir directory.
4. Set date and time when you wish to schedule the operation in Date/Time Scheduled for Download box.
5. Activate the Switch Bench and Restart box if you wish that, at the end of download, the memory bench
is switched and the equipment is restarted automatically.
The setting applies to all the pieces of equipment in the Equipment List area. If you wish to carry out
a different setting for the equipment in the list:
c. Activate/deactivate the Switch Bench and Restart box of the Equipment Bench Releases window
as you wish.
d. Press Ok.
The wording Modified is displayed in the record of the selected NE (area Equipment List).
During the execution of the operation for the considered equipment, the setting of the parameter
Switch Bench and Restart of the Insert will not be considered, but the setting of the same parameter
in the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered.
6. If enabled, type the access code of the equipment in the Password box.
If the Superuser has set the access code of the equipment in the configuration file of the system, in
order to access the equipment it is not necessary to insert the code. It is sufficient to activate the Pass-
word Default box.
The set password applies for all the equipment in the Equipment List area. If one piece of equipment
has a different password, it is necessary to set it in the following way:
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 445

c. Type the access code of the equipment in the Password box of the Equipment Bench Releases
window.
d. Press Ok.
The wording Modified is displayed in the record of the selected NE (area Equipment List).
During the execution of the operation for the considered equipment, the setting of the password in the
Insert will not be considered, but that set in the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered.
7. Press OK.
The Software Download window is closed.
In the list of the scheduled NE for the download, a record is added for every NE in the Equipment List.
446 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Insert (FAMxc) window
This window allows managing the software of FAMxc equipment.
Menu bar
Action > Bench Info. It displays the information about the memory bench.
Push-buttons
Browse. Press to select the file.
OK. Executes the operation and closes the window.
Cancel. Closes the window without executing the operation.
Parameters
Day. Day for which the software update is scheduled.
Month. Month for which the software update is scheduled.
Year. Year for which the software update is scheduled.
Hour. Hour for which the software update is scheduled.
Min. Minute for which the software update is scheduled.
Switch Bench and Restart. If activated, after the download it executes the switch of the mem-
ory benches and restarts the equipment.
Password Default. Activates the use of the password in the configuration file created by the
Superuser.
Password. Code to access the equipment.
Information
Area Equipment List displays the NEs selected in the map for which the equipment software up-
date is executed. For every equipment are displayed, in order:
Logic address
NE type
IP address
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 447

With equipment software we mean the software of the main controller, which has two memory benches:
one working and the other in stand-by.
Each bench can house a version (also different) of equipment software.
It is possible to update the equipment software of only one memory bench at a time. The NMS5LX auto-
matically updates the software of the memory bench not on progress or not present.
The update of the equipment software can be only scheduled and will be the system to carry out the update
on the date/time scheduled by the user.
The execution of the download for each selected NE is subjected to the following conditions:
The NE must be in connected status.
The local management program must not be connected to the NE.
No other operation must be running.
If, in the moment (date/time) when the operation was schedule, the NE is not in one of the above men-
tioned conditions, the operation is not executed, but in this case the system, at regular intervals, will verify
the condition of the NE until:
The NE is in the correct condition and then the download is executed.
The NE is removed from the list of NEs scheduled for the download.
448 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status
The FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command displays the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the soft-
ware update.
Operations
Display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software update
Delete one or more pieces of equipment from the list (FAMxc)
GUI
FAMxc Scheduled Software Download window
See also
Display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software update

1. Select Options > FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status.

The FAMxc Scheduled Software Download window displays the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the soft-
ware update.
Delete one or more pieces of equipment from the list (FAMxc)

1. Select Options > FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status.
2. In the FAMxc Scheduled Software Download window, to delete:

The NEs for which the download procedure has been already executed (Status field - Completed
wording), select File > Deleted Completed.
The selected NEs except for those whose the software update is in progress (Status field -
Downloading wording), select the equipment and then File > Deleted Select.
The equipment is removed from the list.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 449

FAMxc Scheduled Software Download window
This window allows managing the scheduling of the update of FAMxc equipment software.
Menu bar
File. It closes the window
Command > Delete Completed. It deletes the NEs for which the download procedure has been
already executed.
Command > Delete Selected. It deletes the selected NEs except for those for which the software
update is in progress.
Option > Refresh. It refreshes the information in the window
Option > View Error. It displays the characteristics of the scheduled NE. In order:
Logic address of the NE (Equipment).
IP address of the server (Ip Server).
Name of the file used for the download (File).
Result of the operation (Error).
Parameters
Equipment. Logic address of the NE
Eq Type. Type of NE
Bench Switch. The wording:
Yes, indicates that, at the end of download, the switch of the memory bench and the re-
start of the equipment are automatically executed.
No, indicates that, at the end of download, the switch of the memory bench and the re-
start of the equipment are not executed.
Time Scheduled. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) when the software
update is scheduled.
Time start. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) when the software up-
date will start
Elapsed Time. Duration (expressed in minutes, seconds) of the download operation
Status. Status of the download operation:
Downloading. The software update is in progress.
Scheduled. The software update has not been executed yet.
It is possible that, in the Time Scheduling field, a scheduling date/time previous to the
current one is displayed. This means that the NE, when the operation has been sched-
uled, was not in the right condition for the execution of the download. In this case, the
system attempts to update the software at regular time interval.
Completed. The software update has been successfully executed.
Incomplete. The software update has been partially executed or the operation is failed.In
this case, it is suggested to reschedule the software update.
File Name. Name of the file used for the download.
450 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release
WARNING Command available only if a FAMxc in connected status has been selected.
The FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release command displays the software version of a FAMxc.
Operations
Display the software version of FAMxc equipment
Switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc
GUI
Equipment Bench Releases window
See also
Display the software version of FAMxc equipment


2. Select Options > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release.
3. In the Equipment Bench Releases window, press Read Info.

The Equipment Bench Releases window indicates the version of the equipment software.
Switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc


2. Select Options > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release.
3. In the Equipment Bench Releases window, press Read Info to display the current settings.
4. Select the bench you wish to use at the restart of the equipment (option Bench1 or Bench2 - parameter
Restart Bench Selection).
At the end of the operation, the selected bench will be displayed in the Netx Boot On Bench box.
5. Type in the Password box, if enabled, the access code of the equipment.
If the Superuser has se the access code of the equipment in the configuration file of the system, it is
not necessary to insert the code to access the equipment. It is sufficient to activate the Password De-
fault box.
6. Press Restart.
The equipment is restarted and the Equipment Bench Releases window is closed.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 451

Equipment Bench Releases window
This window allows managing the software versions on the memory benches of FAMxc equipment.
Parameters
x.x.x.x. Logic address of the selected equipment.
Bench y Release. Version of the software on bench y.
Current Bench. Memory bench currently in use.
Next Boot on Bench. Memory bench used at next equipment boot.
Options
Switch bench on Restart. It executes the bench switch at the next equipment restart.
Password Default. It uses the default code stored in the configuration file for the access to the
equipment.
Restart Bench Selection. Memory bench used at equipment restart.
Push-buttons
Read Info. It displays the equipment software version.
Restart. It closes the window and restarts the equipment.
OK. It closes the window and applies the changes.
Cancel. It closes the window without applying the changes.
452 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NMS5UX - Secure Management
WARNING Command available only for ALCplus2e equipment.
The command NMS5UX- Secure Management allows setting and saving to file the security configuration
for ALCplus2e equipment in the open map which manage this functionality.
Operations
Verify the equipment security configuration
Change the security protocols managed by the equipment
Set the security parameters of the equipment in Secure mode
Set the file transfer protocol
Save the configuration of the security parameters
GUI
NE Security Configuration window
Verify the equipment security configuration

1. Select the command Options > NMS5UX - Secure Management.

The NE Security Configuration window is displayed.
Change the security protocols managed by the equipment


In the NE Security Configuration window, the parameter Secure Protocols indicates the security proto-
cols of the equipment:
Available. The equipment manages the FTP and Telnet protocols (Not Secure Mode) and the
SFTP and SSH protocols (Secure Mode).
Unavailable. The equipment manages only the FTP and Telnet protocols (Not Secure Mode).
Exclusive. The equipment manages only the SFTP and SSH protocols (Secure Mode).
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press:
Configure All to apply the set configuration to all the ALCplus2e in the left area of the window.
Configure Selected to apply the set configuration only to the ALCplus2e selected in the left
area of the window (only the single selection is allowed).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 453

Set the security parameters of the equipment in Secure mode

WARNING Operation meaningful only if the equipment is in Secure Mode (Secure Protocols parameter
Available or Exclusive value).
2. To set the version of the SSH (Secure SHell) protocol managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select
the box (parameter SSH Version):
v1. Version 1 of SSH protocol.
Option meaningful only when the equipment works as SSH server.
Option not available when the value None is selected for the Cipher Algorithm parameter.
v2. Version 2 of SSH protocol.
Option meaningful only when the equipment works as SSH client.
The active box ( ) indicates that the specific version 2 of the SSH protocol is managed by the equip-
ment; the inactive box indicates that the version is not managed.
3. To set the public key asymmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select
the box (parameter SSH Host Key):
DSA (only v2). DSA (Digital Signature Algorithm) key cypher algorithm.
Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of SSH protocol.
RSA. RSA key cypher algorithm.
The active box ( ) indicates that the specific key is manage; the inactive box that the key is not man-
aged.
It is not possible to deactivate both the keys.
4. To set the algorithm for the authentication of the messages managed by the equipment in Secure Mode,
select the box (parameter Authentication):
None. No authentication algorithm.
HMAC - SHA-1. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) based on hash code
(HMAC).
HMAC - SHA1 - 96. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 with 96 bit digest based on hash code
(HMAC).
HMAC - MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.
The active box ( ) indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the algorithm
is not managed.
If the None box is active, no algorithm is managed.
The activation of None box automatically deactivates all the other boxes. The activation of at least one
box HMAC... automatically deactivates the box None.
5. To set the symmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select the box
(parameter Cipher Algorithm):
None. No cypher algorithm.
3DES - CBC. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based on the rep-
etition of DES algorithm for three times.
AES 128, 192, 256 (only v2) - CBC. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm
with 128 bit key (AES 128), 192 bit key (AES 192) or 256 bit key (AES 259).
Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of the SSH protocol.
The active box ( ) indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the algorithm
is not managed.
If the None box is active, no algorithm is managed.
The activation of None box automatically deactivates all the other boxes. Moreover it deactivates the
option V1 (parameter SSH Version).
The activation of at least one 3DES.../AES...box automatically deactivates the box None.
6. Press:
454 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Set the file transfer protocol


In the NE Security Configuration window, the parameter Mode indicates the network protocol for the
file transfer used by the equipment:
FTP. Network protocol for the file transfer: File Transfer Protocol.
Option available only if the equipment is in Not Secure Mode (parameter Secure Protocols, val-
ues Available or Unavailable).
SFTP. Network protocol for the secure file transfer: SSH File Transfer Protocol.
Option available only if the equipment is in Secure Mode (parameter Secure Protocols, values
Available or Exclusive).
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press:
Save the configuration of the security parameters

WARNING The supervision system can be configured (by means of the system file .cfg) to automatically
set (at the connection) the security settings (contained in the file) on all the pieces of equipment which
support his functionality.

In the NE Security Configuration window, set the wished configuration of the security parameters ac-
cording to what described in Change the security protocols managed by the equipment, Set the security
parameters of the equipment in Secure mode and Set the file transfer protocol.
2. Press Save Configuration. The configuration set in the window is saved and proposed as default cot
the next opening of the window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 455

NE Security Configuration window
This window allows setting and saving to file the security configuration for ALCplus2e equipment.
Menu bar
Equipment area
Displays the ALCplus2e equipment in the work map which support the functionality to configure
the security protocols. This list allows the selection of only one element.
Parameters
Secure Protocols. Management of the security protocols of the equipment:
Available. The equipment manages the protocols FTP and Telnet (Not Secure Mode) and
the protocols SFTP and SSH (Secure Mode).
Unavailable. The equipment manages only the protocols FTP and Telnet (Not Secure
Mode).
Exclusive. The equipment manages only the protocols SFTP e SSH (Secure Mode).
SSH Version. Version of SSH (Secure SHell) protocol managed by the equipment in Secure
Mode:
V1. Version 1 of SSH protocol.
Option meaningful only when the equipment acts as SSH server.
V2. Version 2 of SSH protocol.
Option meaningful only when the equipment acts as SSH client.
The box active ( ) indicates that the specific version of the SSH protocol is managed; the box
inactive that the version is not managed.
Authentication. Algorithm for the authentication of the messages managed by the equipment
in Secure Mode:
None. No authentication algorithm.
HMAC - SHA-1. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) based on hash
code (HMAC).
HMAC - SHA1 - 96. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 con digest of 96 bit based on hash
code (HMAC).
HMAC - MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash
code.
If the box None active ( ), no algorithm is managed. The activation of the other boxes indi-
cates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box indicates that it is not managed.
SSH Public Key. Public key algorithm used for the authentication (equipment in Secure Mode)
SSH Host Key. Public key asymmetrical cipher algorithms managed by the equipment in Secure
Mode:
DSA (only v2). DSA (Digital Signature Algorithm) key cipher algorithm.
RSA. RSA key cipher algorithm.
The active box ( ) indicates that the specific key is managed; the inactive box that it is not man-
aged.
Cypher Algorithm. Public key symmetrical cipher algorithms managed by the equipment in Se-
cure Mode:
None. No cipher algorithm.
3DES - CBC. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cipher algorithm based on the
repetition of the algorithm DES for three times.
AES 128, 192, 256 (only v2) - CBC. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) block cipher
algorithm with 128 bit (AES 128), 192 bit (AES 192) or 256 bit (AES 259) key.
If the box None is active ( ), no algorithm is managed. The activation of the other boxes indi-
cates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that it is not managed.
456 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Secure Protocols (area File Transfer). Network protocol for the file transfer used by the equip-
ment:
FTP. Network protocol for the file transfer: File Transfer Protocol
SFTP. Secure network protocol for the file transfer: SSH File Transfer Protocol.
Area Messages
Displays messages on the result of the operations.
Push-buttons
Configure All. Applies the set configuration to all the equipment in the list.
Configure Selected. Applies the set configuration to the equipment selected in the list.
Save Configuration. Saves the executed configuration.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 457

NMS5UX - Read PM Server Status
WARNING Command available only for system in Dual Server configuration.
The command NMS5UX - Read PM Server Status opens a system editor window which displays the sta-
tus of the PM server. Every line displayed in the window shows the date and time of the last check.
458 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NMS5UX - Feature Keys Mngt
The command NMS5LX - Feature Keys Mngt allows displaying the status of the feature keys on the NEs
present in the considered map.
Operations
Display the feature keys present on the NEs of the current map
Download the file of the feature keys to equipment
GUI
Feature Keys Manager window
Display the feature keys present on the NEs of the current map

1. Select one or more NEs in the map.

The command is available if at least one NE is selected.
2. Select Options > NMS5LX - Feature Keys Mngt.
3. Select, in the Equipment area of the Feature Keys Manager window, the NE for which you wish to dis-
play the enabling status of the feature keys (right part of the window):
Enabled (green), the feature keys is enabled on thr selected NE.
Disabled (red), the feature keys is not available on thr selected NE.
Download the file of the feature keys to equipment

WARNING The download of the file of feature keys operates in incremental mode. The functionalities al-
ready enabled on the equipment are not disabled: the system adds the feature keys of the file to those
already present on the equipment.
1. Select one or more NEs in the map.

The command is available if at least one NE is selected.
2. Select Options > NMS5LX - Feature Keys Mngt.
3. In Feature Keys Manager window, select the radio button corresponding to the wished download mode:
File Mode. The system allows selecting for the download a single file of feature keys relevant to
the specific equipment selected in Equipment area.
Dir Mode. The system allows selecting for the download a whole directory containing the files of
feature keys of the different equipment present in the Equipment area.
4. If the radio button selected at step 3 has been:

File Mode, select the interested NE in the Equipment area.
Dir Mode, select one or more NEs in the Equipment area.
5. Press Search FK File. The system displays the system window fileSelectionBox. If the radio button
selected at step 3 has been:
File Mode, select the wished file of feature keys.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 459

Dir Mode, select the directory containing the files of feature keys. In this case, the system will
associate each file to the corresponding equipment, executing the download automatically.
6. Press OK in fileSelectionBox window.
7. Press Download. The system starts the download. The progress of the operation is displayed in the
area Messages.
460 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Feature Keys Manager window
This window allows displaying the functionalities enabled on the NEs selected in the current map and
downloading the file of the feature keys.
Menu bar
Area Equipment
Displays the logical address of equipment selected in the map before the opening of the window.
Area Feature Keys

Displays the status of the functionalities for the equipment selected in the Equipment area.
Disabled (red background). The functionalities corresponding to the feature key is disa-
bled.
Enabled (green background). The functionalities corresponding to the feature key is en-
abled.
- (blue background). The status of the functionality is unknown.
Radio buttons
File Mode. The system allows selecting for the download a single file of feature keys relevant
to the specific equipment selected in Equipment area.
Dir. Mode. The system allows selecting for the download a whole directory containing the files
of feature keys of the different equipment present in the Equipment area.
Push-buttons
Search FK File. Opens the system window where selecting the file/directory to download.
Download. Downloads the selected file/directory.
Close. Closes the Feature Keys Manager window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 461

MISC
Alarm History Backup. It saves to disk and/or tape the alarm history stored in the Alarm History table.
Alarm History Restore. It restores the alarm history previously saved to disk/tape and copies it in the
Old History table.
Alarm History Delete Backup. It deletes the alarm history saved on disk.
Performance Monitoring Backup. It saves to disk and/or tape the results of the PM measures stored in
the Performance Monitoring table.
Performance Monitoring Restore. It restores the results of the PM measures previously saved to disk/
tape and copies it in the Old Performance Monitoring table.
Performance Monitoring Delete. It deletes the results of the PM measures saved to disk.
NMS5LX Global Database Backup. It saves to disk and/or tape the information contained in the NMS5LX
database.
NMS5LX Global Database Restore. It restores the information contained in the system database and
previously saved to disk/tape.
Proxy Configuration Parameters. It configures operating parameters of Proxy Agents.
462 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The Alarm History Backup command saves to disk and/or tape the history of the alarm/status/event sig-
nals (alarms) stored in the Alarm History table relevant to the equipment in all the maps.
Operations
Backup the alarm history
Backup the alarm history

1. Select Misc > Alarm History Backup.
2 In the Alarm History Backup window, activate the:

Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the Alarm History table on tape
(DAT tape).
Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the table on the machine disk (workstation or
server).
If the user activates both the boxes, the system saves the data as on disk as on tape.
3 If the user has activated the:

Backup To Tape box, insert the tape in the DAT drive of the machine.
The wording [/dev/rmt/Om], placed on the side if the box, indicates that the contents of the
table will be overwritten on the possible data already on DAT. This setting can not be changed.
Backup To Disk box, type, in the text field, the name of the file where the user wants to save
the contents of the table.
Press Browser to select the name of an already existing file (in this case, the content of the file
will be overwritten by the new data).
The File name field shows the predefined path where the file is saved. The setting cannot be
changed.
4. Press OK.
The content of the table is saved to a file on the disk and/or tape.
Then, to display the content of the file, it will be necessary to restore it (Alarm History Restore) and
open the Old History Browser window (Old Alarm History).
To display the content of the Alarm History table open the Alarm History Browser window (Network
Alarm History).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 463

The Alarm History Restore command restores the history of the alarm/status/event signals (alarms)
previously saved to disk/tape and copies it in the Old History table.
Operations
Restore the alarm history from disk
Restore the alarm history from tape
Restore the alarm history from disk

1. Select Misc > Alarm History Restore.

2. Select, in the Files list of the Alarm History Restore window, the name of the file you wish to restore.
The list shows the files in the predefined directory (displayed in the Selection box). It is the same used
by the system to automatically save the files during the backup procedure.
3. Press OK.
If the operation is successful, a confirmation window opens.
The restored data will overwrite those in the Old History table. Its contents can be displayed in the Old
Alarm History window.
Restore the alarm history from tape


At the command-line prompt of the terminal window, type: cd/tar xv.
The backup file is copied on the machine disk. In detail, it is copied in the preset directory, the same
where the system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure.
To display the contents of the file, the use has to copy it in the Old History and to open the Old Alarm
History window.
464 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Alarm History Delete Backup
The Alarm History Delete Backup command deletes the backup files, relevant to the signals of alarm/
status/event, saved by the Alarm History Backup command to the disk of the machine.
Operations
Delete the backup files of the alarm history
Delete the backup files of the alarm history

1. Select Misc > Alarm History Delete Backup.
2. Select, in the Files list of the Alarm History Delete window, the name of the file you wish to delete.
The list shows the files in the predefined directory (displayed in the Selection box). It is the same where
the system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure.
Even if it is possible to set a different directory, the system allows deleting files only in the predefined
directory.
3. Press OK.
If the operation is successful, a confirmation message opens.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 465

Performance Monitoring Backup
The Performance Monitoring Backup command saves to disk and/or tape the results of the PM meas-
ures stored in the Performance Monitoring table relevant to the equipment in all maps.
The results are saved subdivided by month.
Operations
Save the PM measures (backup)
Save the PM measures (backup)

1. Select Misc > Performance Monitoring Backup.
2. In the Selected Month menu of the Pm Backup window, select the month you wish to save.
The last 6 months mapped in the database are available in the list.
3 Activate the:
Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the Performance Monitoring table
on tape (DAT tape).
Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the table on the disk of the workstation or server.
4 If the user has activated the:
Backup To Tape box, insert the tape in the DAT drive of the machine
The wording [/dev/rmt/Om], placed on the side if the box, indicates that the contents of the
table will be overwritten on the possible data already on DAT. This setting can not be changed.
Backup To Disk box, type, in the text field, the name of the file where the user wants to save
the contents of the table.
Press Browser to select the name of an already existing file (in this case the contents of the file
will be overwritten with the new data).
In the File name field, the system shows the pre-defined path where the system saves the file.
This setting can not be changed.
5. Activate the Delete Table box if you wish that the content of the Performance Monitoring table after the
saving to file is automatically deleted.
WARNING The operation is available only to the Superuser.
6. Press OK.
If the operation is successful, a confirmation window opens and the content of the table is saved to a
file of the disk and/or tape.
Then, in order to display the content of the file, it will be necessary to restore it (Performance Monitor-
ing Restore) and open the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window (Old Performance Monitor-
ing).
To display the content of the Performance Monitoring table open the Graphic Performance Monitoring
window.
466 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Performance Monitoring Restore
The Performance Monitoring Restore command restores the results of the PM measures previously
saved to disk/tape and copies it in the Old Performance Monitoring table.
Operations
Restore the PM measures from disk
Restore the PM measures from tape
Restore the PM measures from disk

1. Select Misc > Performance Monitoring Restore.

2. Select, in the Files list of the Pm Restore window, the name of the file you wish to restore.
The list shows the files in the predefined directory (displayed in the Selection box). It is the same where
the system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure.
3. Press OK.
If the operation is successful, a confirmation window opens.
The restored data will overwrite those in the Old Performance Monitoring table. Its contents can be dis-
played in the Graphical Performance Monitoring - OLD window.
Restore the PM measures from tape

1. Open a windows terminal.
2. At the command-line prompt of the windows terminal, type: cd/tar xv.

The backup file is copied on the machine disk. In detail, it is copied in the pre-defined directory, the
same where the system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure.
To display the contents of the file, the use has to copy it in the Old Performance Monitoring table and
to open the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 467

Performance Monitoring Delete
The Performance Monitoring Delete command deletes the backup files, relevant to the PM measures,
saved by the Performance Monitoring Backup command on the disk of the machine.
Operations
Delete the backup files of the PM measures
Delete the backup files of the PM measures

1. Select Misc > Performance Monitoring Delete.
2. Select, in the Files list of the Pm Delete window, the name of the file you wish to delete.
The list displays the file in the predefined directory (displayed in the Selection box). It is the same
where the system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure.
Even if it is possible to set a different directory, the system allows deleting the files only in the prede-
fined directory.
3. Press OK.
If the operation is successful, a confirmation message opens.
468 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NMS5LX Global Database Backup
The NMS5LX Global Database Backup command saves to disk and/or tape the information contained in
the NMS5LX database where the data relevant to all the maps and all the existing equipment are stored.
Operations
Save the database (backup)
Save the database (backup)

1. Select Misc > NMS5LX Global Database Backup.
2 In the Database Backup window, activate the:

Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the database on the machine disk (workstation or
server).
On the side of the box, the pre-defined path is displayed where the system saves the file. This
setting cannot be changed.
Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the database on the DAT tape.
The wording [/dev/rmt/Om], placed on the side if the box, indicates that the contents of the database
will be overwritten on the possible data already on DAT. This setting can not be changed.
3 If the user has activated the Backup To Tape box, insert the tape in the DAT drive of the machine.
4. Press OK.
Then, it will be possible to restore the information saved executing the procedure Restore the database.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 469

NMS5LX Global Database Restore
The NMS5LX Global Database Restore command restores the information contained in the system da-
tabase and previously saved to disk/tape.
Operations
Restore the database
Restore the database

WARNING The restore of the data cannot be executed if the NMS5LX system is running.
Before closing the LX Map Manager window:
1. Select NMS5LX Global Database Restore.

A help page is displayed, illustrating the procedure to restore the database.
470 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Proxy Configuration Parameters
The Proxy Configuration Parameters command allows configuring a maximum of 10 IP addresses (trap
destination), identifying high-level supervision systems, for the reception of the SNMP traps sent by the
Proxy Agent of NMS5LX.
Operations
Add a destination of the SNMP traps
Delete a destination of the SNMP traps
Change the password for the SNMP traps
GUI
Proxy Configurator window
Add a destination of the SNMP traps

WARNING This operation allows adding a destination (IP address of a upper-level supervision system) for
the SNMP traps sent by the Proxy Agent. A maximum of 10 destination IP addresses can be configured.
1. Select Misc > Proxy Configuration Parameters.

The Proxy Configurator window is displayed.
2. Select Edit > Add...
3. In the Destination IP address field of the Add Trap Destination window, type the IP address of the su-
pervision system which the SNMP traps are sent to.
4. Type the number of the port of the supervision system, which the SNMP traps are sent to, in the Port
field or let the default value (porta 162).
Delete a destination of the SNMP traps

2. Select, in the Trap Destination area of the Proxy Configurator window, the row relevant to the trap des-
tination you wish to delete. Only single selection can be made.
3. Select Edit > Delete and confirm.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 471

Change the password for the SNMP traps

The password represents the SNMP community in the traps. It is used to protect the system against the
SNMP get and set operations executed by the upper level supervision systems. When the NMS5LX system
is installed, the value of the password is the default one set by Siae.
The high-level supervision system receives a reply, by NMS5LX server, to the requests of set and get op-
erations only if the packets sent to the Proxy Agent SNMP contain the correct value of SNMP community.
This operation allows the user changing the value of this password.
2. In the Proxy Configurator window, select Options > NMS5UX Write Community.
3. In the Change Password window, type the old password in the Old Password field.
4. Type the new wished password in the New Password field.

The field cannot be let empty (minimum length of 1 character).
5. Type again the new wished password in the Repeat New Password field.
If the string typed in the Repeat New Password field is different from that typed in the New Password
field, the system displays an error message.
6. Press Ok and confirm.
472 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Proxy Configurator window
This window allows the configuration of the operating parameters of the Proxy agent.
Menu bar
Edit > Add. It opens the Add Trap Destination for the configuration of the destinations of the
SNMP traps.
Options > NMS5UX Write Community. It opens the window for the configuration of the SNMP
community.
Parameters
IP Address. IP address of the upper level system, destination of the SNMP traps.
Port. Port of the upper level system, destination of the SNMP traps.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 473

RING MANAGER
WARNING The Ring Manager menu is available only if the Ring Manager application have been installed.
For the use of the Ring Manager application refer to the specific documentation.
The RM-Add Ring, RM-Delete Ring and RM-Modify/View Ring commands are used to represent
graphically the Ring objects in the maps and to provide to NMS5LX system the parameters to manage and
control them.
Before using them, it is suggested to read the par. Graphic network representation where the modalities
to configure correctly and rapidly one's supervision system are described.
The Ring objects are used to identify subnetworks of PDH and SDH equipment which implement Paths. For
an easy description, in this manual the wording Ring will be used to indicate these subnetworks, while the
Ring objects will be simply defined Ring objects.
Edit > RM-Add Ring. It creates Ring objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map.
Edit > RM-Delete Ring. It deletes a Ring symbol from the map.
Edit > RM-Modify/View Ring. It displays/changes the characteristics of a Ring object.
Fault > RM-Network Alarm History. It displays/manages the alarm history of the equipment in the Rings
managed by the supervision system.
Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm. It displays/manages the alarms active in the equipment in the
Rings managed by the supervision system.
Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary. It displays/manages the summary of the alarm history of the
equipment in the Rings managed by the supervision system.
Fault > RM-Element Alarm History. It displays/manages the alarm history of the equipment in the spe-
cific Ring.
Fault > RM-Element Current Alarm. It displays/manages the alarms active in the equipment in the spe-
cific Ring.
Fault > RM-Element Alarm Summary. It displays/manages the summary of the alarm history of the
equipment in the specific Ring.
Locate > RM-Ring Browser. It displays the list of the Rings managed by the supervision system.
Locate > RM-Path Browser. It displays the list of the Path in the Rings of the current map.
Locate > RM-Equipment Browser. It displays the list of the equipment in the Rings of the current map.
474 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Edit > RM-Add Ring
WARNING Before creating an object, it is suggested to read the par. Rules for the creation of the objects.
The RM-Add Ring command creates Ring objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map.
Operations
Create Ring objects
Create Ring objects

WARNING It is possible to create all the wished Ring objects.
wish to create the Ring.
2. Select Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Add Ring.
3. Type the name of the Ring (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 character and maximum 32 characters)
in the Label box of the Add Ring window.
The name will be displayed under the object symbol and will constitute the name of the window that is
opened at the double selection of the symbol.
4. In the Comment area, type possible information relevant to the object (max 100 characters).
The Ring is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window. Move the symbol in any
If the created Ring symbol is already present in a map, it automatically will acquire the status and the
characteristics of the existing object.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 475

Edit > RM-Delete Ring
The RM-Delete Ring command deletes a Ring symbol from the map.
Operations
Delete a Ring object from the map
Delete a Ring object from the map

WARNING If a Ring object is present only in one map, can be deleted only if it does not contain objects
(equipment, Link, Path, etc.).
If the same Ring object is present in more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol even if it contains ob-
jects, except for the last copy for which the above mentioned rule is valid: it can be deleted only if empty.
1. In the LX Map Manager window select the Ring object you wish to delete.
2. Select Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Delete Ring or press the right mouse button, select Delete and
confirm.
476 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Edit > RM-Modify/View Ring
User profile | ReadOnly: Entry, Normal. Read-Write: Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The RM-Modify/View Ring command displays/changes the characteristics of a Ring object.
Operations
Verify/change the parameters of a Ring object
Verify/change the parameters of a Ring object

User profile | ReadOnly: Entry, Normal. Read-Write: Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
WARNING It is not possible to assign the same name to two different Ring objects.
If the same Ring object has been created in two different maps, at the changing of the parameter values
of such a Ring object in a map, the system automatically changes the values of the parameters relevant
to the same object in the other map.
1. In the LX Map Manager window, select the wished Ring object.
2. Select Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Modify/View Ring or press the right mouse button and select
Modify/View.
The Ring Properties window displays, in the box/area:
Label. Ring name.
Type. Ring symbol.
It is possible to change the Label and Comment parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the
same one described in par. Create Ring objects.
In the LX Map Manager window, the Ring assumes the new characteristics.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 477

Fault > RM-Network Alarm History
The RM-Network Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event sig-
nals (alarms) stored in the Ring Manager database, of the equipment in the Rings managed by the super-
vision system.
Operations
Display the alarm history of the equipment in the Rings
Save the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History)
Delete the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History)
Acknowledge the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History)
Align the RM alarms to those of NMS5LX (RM-Network Alarm History)
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (RM-Network Alarm History)
Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History)
Sort the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History)
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Alarm History)
GUI
RM - Alarm History window
Acknowledge Information window (RM - Alarm History)
See also
Data update modality (RM-Network Alarm History)
Alarm recording modality (RM-Network Alarm History)
Display the alarm history of the equipment in the Rings

1. Select Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm History.

The RM - Alarm History window opens, where the alarm history stored in the Ring Manager database,
of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the NMS5LX is displayed.
At the opening of the window, a filter is applied to the alarms list: only the alarms, whose detection
date is successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed. Besides, by default, the automatic
information update is inactive.
A warning message could be displayed, informing that the database contains a number of alarms great-
er than 5000. For this cause, the window will display only the records, in chronological order from the
newest to the oldest one, until 5000. The 5000 limit is not a memory limit, but simply a limit in the
display of the alarms. In order to read the alarms successive to 5000, it is sufficient to delete some
records or change the filters.
WARNING For the NE objects of ALplus Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is dis-
played. This equipment is identified by the logic address <node name>.A, <node name>.B, <node
name>.C. The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE
controller.
478 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Save the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History)

2. In the RM - Alarm History window, to save to a file:

A group of alarms, select the records and then File > Save > Selected.
The displayed alarms, select File > Save > Filtered. If no filter is active, the displayed records
correspond to the records stored in the database.
The Save File window opens.
3. Type, in the Selection box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved.
4. Press Ok.
Delete the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History)

2. In the RM - Alarm History window, to delete from the list and from the database of supervision system:
A group of alarms, select the records and then Actions > Delete > Selected Alarms.
The displayed alarms, select Actions > Delete > Filtered Alarms. If the filters are not active,
All the alarms of the database, select Actions > Delete > All Alarms.
Acknowledge the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History)

WARNING After a record has been acknowledged, the operation cannot be undone.
Each alarm can be acknowledged twice: the first time when the alarm is detected. When the alarm clears,
the character X is removed from the record and the user can acknowledge it the second time. In this second
case (if already set during the first acknowledge), the value of the Trouble Identification Code parameter
cannot be changed.

2. In the RM - Alarm History window, to acknowledge:
A group of alarms, select the records and then Actions > Acknowledge > Selected Alarms.
The displayed alarms, select Actions > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms. If the filters are not
All the alarms of the database, select Actions > Acknowledge > All Alarms.
The Acknowledge Alarm window opens.
The User box displays the username of the NMS5UX user who required the acknowledge of the records.
The value of the box is automatically set to the username of the NMS5UX user who opened the map.
3. Type in the Trouble Identification Code box a code identifying the records (alphanumeric string of max
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 479

4. Type in the Comment box some additional information (alphanumeric string of max 500 characters).
5. Press Ok.
The record will be labelled with the letter X.
If more records are selected for the operation, the setting of the Trouble Identification Code and Com-
ment parameters are for all the records.
If one or more detected and cleared alarms are selected, the setting of the Trouble Identification Code
and Comment parameters applies both for the set event (SET) and for the clear event (CLEAR).
Align the RM alarms to those of NMS5LX (RM-Network Alarm History)

2. In the RM - Alarm History window, select Actions > Alarm Synchronization.

The information in the database of Ring Manager and relevant to the alarms are re-aligned to that in
the database of NMS5LX.
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (RM-Network Alarm History)


At the opening of the RM - Alarm History window, by default, the automatic information update is in-
active.
2. To activate the automatic data update, select the symbol.
3. To deactivate again the automatic data update, select the symbol.
Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History)


The RM - Alarm History window opens.
2. Select View > Filter.

In the Filter window, select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.
alarms, their severity (the colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour associated to
the severity of the alarm or the type of signal). Activating the box/option:
ACTIVE, the detected signals will be displayed.
480 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

CLEARED, the detected and cleared signals will be displayed.
ALL, the detected signals only and the detected and cleared signals will be displayed.
Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm. Activating the box.
second.
Match Path. Alarms of the equipment implementing specific Paths.
It is possible to set the Path by means of one of the following ways:
In the RM - Path Browser window, select one or more Path and press Add Path from
Path Browser.
Type the name of the Path in the text field and press Add.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Path box.
To delete a single item from the list, select it and press Remove Selected.
Match Ring. Alarms of the equipment present in the specific Rings.
To set the criterion, in the Ring List area, select one or more Rings and press Add.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the Match List area.
Match Link. Alarms of the equipment connected from the specific Link.
It is possible to set the Link by means of one of the following ways:
Select one or more Link, directly in the Ring Manager window and press Add Link from
Map.
Type the name of the Link in the text field and press Add.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Link box.
Match Equipment. Logical address of the Network Element.
Select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the Ring Manager window
and press Add Equipment From Map.
Type the logical address in the text field and press Add.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Equipment box.
Match Message. Description of the alarm (Message field).
It is possible to set the criterion by means of one of the following ways:
Type the wished string in the text field
Activating the Case Sensitive box, distinction will be made between upper and lower
case; deactivating the box, no distinction will be made.
Select a record in the RM - Alarm History window and press Get Message from selected
Alarm.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 481

The RM - Alarm History window displays only the records matching the specific criteria.
Closing the RM - Alarm History window automatically removes the possible active filters.
The window contains the push-buttons:
Delete....It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
Clear. It clears the activation of all the filters.
Sort the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History)


2. In the RM - Alarm History window, select View > Sort Criteria.
3. Select, in the Sort by area, the first sorting criterion:

Registration, the alarms will be sorted according to the date/time of recording in the Ring Man-
ager database.
SET Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the detection date/time.
CLEAR Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the clearing date/time. The alarms not
4. Select in the Order area, the option:

Last on TOP; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive
ones will be listed in descending order.
Last on BOTTOM; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive
ones will be listed in ascending order.
5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to their address, activate the Group Equipment
box (second sorting criterion).
The RM - Alarm History window will list the records in the set order.
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Alarm History)

2. In the RM - Alarm History window, select the record which you wish to display the detail of the acknowl-
edge for.
482 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Press and keep pressed the right mouse button.
A pop-up window opens.
Select View > Acknowledge Information.
The Acknowledge Information window opens.
The content of both the windows is the same and is that depicted in Acknowledge Information window
(RM - Alarm History).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 483

RM - Alarm History window
Menu bar
File > Save. It saves to file the alarms list.
Actions > Delete. It deletes one or more records from the list and database.
Actions > Acknowledge. It acknowledges one or more records, in such a way that the system
memorizes that the user has seen the alarms.
Actions > Refresh. It updates the data in the window.
Actions > Alarm Synchronization. It re-aligns the alarms table between NMS5LX and Ring
Manager.
View > Filter. It filters the alarms list.
View > Sort Criteria. It sorts the list of records.
View > Acknowledge Information. It displays the acknowledge information of the alarms.
Parameters
edged. If the X character is present the record has been acknowledged.
Each alarm can be acknowledged twice: the first time when the alarm is detected. When the
alarm clears, the character X is removed from the record and the user can acknowledge it the
second time.
In any moment, it is possible to display the acknowledge information of an alarm moving to the
record and pressing the right mouse button. A pop-up window is displayed with the detail of the
acknowledge. The content of the window is the same described in par. Display the acknowledge
information of an alarm (RM-Network Alarm History).
SET Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm detection

CLEAR Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm clearing
Address. Logic address of the alarmed Network Element or System indication.

In the column Address is displayed the System label when the signal refers to an event gener-
ated by the Ring Manager application. The events of this type are the loss of configuration align-
ment between the databases of Ring Manager and NMS5LX, the start or the stop of anyone of
the platform processes of Ring Manager and the stop of all the platform.
Type. Type of Network Element
Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the alarm
Status bar
Symbol.
Filters. Activation of one or more filters
484 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 485

Acknowledge Information window (RM - Alarm History)
This window displays the acknowledge information for the alarms stored in Ring Manager database.
Parameters
Trouble Identification Code. Identification code of the record assigned by the user during the
alarm acknowledge.
User (area SET Acknowledge Information). Username of the NMS5UX user who has acknowl-
edged the record when the alarm was in detected status.
User (area CLEAR Acknowledge Information). Username of the NMS5UX user who has acknowl-
edged the record when the alarm was in detected and cleared status.
Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hours:minutes:sec-
onds>.
in the SET:... and CLEAR:... areas are the same.
486 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Data update modality (RM-Network Alarm History)
The information in the RM - Alarm History window are dynamically updated only if the procedure for the
automatic update is active (Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (RM-Network Alarm History)).
At the opening of the RM - Alarm History window, the procedure of automatic information update is, by
default inactive (the default setting can be changed by the Superuser).
The setting of the filters or the criteria used to sort the records in a RM - Alarm History window does not
influence the display of the information in the other open RM - Alarm History windows or in the RM - Current
Alarms window.
Alarm recording modality (RM-Network Alarm History)
The alarms are stored in the database managed by Ring Manager application (database of Ring Manager).
The application stores to disk all the alarms up to a limit N (configurable by Superuser - default 50000).
When this limit is reached, the system automatically removes the oldest X alarms (X configurable by Su-
peruser - default 1000).
During this period, it is possible Delete the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) manually. It is suggested
to periodically delete and/or store to file the less meaningful records, so to avoid the saturation of the da-
tabase.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 487

Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm
The RM - Network Current Alarm command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signals (alarms)
active in the equipment in the Rings managed by the supervision system.
Operations
Display the alarms active in the Ring equipment
Save the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm)
Acknowledge the alarms (RM-Network Current Alarm)
Align the RM alarms to those of NMS5LX (RM-Network Current Alarm)
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (RM-Network Current Alarm)
Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm)
Sort the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm)
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Current Alarm)
GUI
RM - Current Alarms window
Acknowledge Information window (RM - Current Alarms)
See also
Data update modality (RM-Network Current Alarm)
Display the alarms active in the Ring equipment

1. Select Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm.

The RM - Current Alarms window displays the list of the alarms active in the equipment present in the
Rings managed by the supervision system.
WARNING At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic information update is inactive.
For the NE objects of ALplus Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is displayed.
This equipment is identified by the logic address <node name>.A, <node name>.B, <node name>.C.
Save the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm)

2. In the RM - Current Alarms window, to save to file:

The displayed alarms, select File > Save > Filtered. If filters are not active, the displayed re-
cords corresponds to the records stored in the database.
3. Type, in the Selection box of the Save File window, the path and the name of the file where the infor-
mation must be saved.
4. Press Ok.
488 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Acknowledge the alarms (RM-Network Current Alarm)

2. In the RM - Current Alarms window, to acknowledge:

The displayed alarms, select Actions > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms. If filters are not ac-
The User box of the Acknowledge Alarm window displays the username of the NMS5UX user who re-
5. Press Ok.
If more records are selected for the operation, the settings of the Trouble Identification Code and Com-
ment parameters applies for all the records.
Align the RM alarms to those of NMS5LX (RM-Network Current Alarm)


2. In the RM - Current Alarms window, select Actions > Alarm Synchronization.
The information in the database of Ring Manager and relevant to the alarms are realigned to that in the
database of NMS5LX.
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (RM-Network Current Alarm)


At the opening of the RM - Current Alarms window, the automatic information update is inactive by
default.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 489

Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm)

2. In the RM - Current Alarms window, select View > Filter.

Match Severity. Type of signal (alarm/status/event) and for the alarms their severity (the colour
of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the
type of signal). Activating the box/option:
Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms. Activating the box:
second.
Match Path. Alarms of the equipment that implement specific Paths.
Path Browser.
Map.
490 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

case; deactivating the box, no distinction will be made
Select a record in the RM - Current Alarm window and press Get Message from select-
ed Alarm.
Activating the box:
Match Acknowledged, the acknowledged records will be displayed.
Match Unacknowledged, the record not yet acknowledged will be displayed.
The RM - Current Alarms window displays only the records matching the specific criteria.
Closing the RM - Current Alarm window automatically removes the possible active filters.
Sort the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm)

2. In the RM - Current Alarms window, select View > Sort Criteria.

Registration, the alarms will be sorted according to the date/time of recording in the Ring Man-
ager database.

Last on TOP; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive
Last on BOTTOM; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 491

The RM - Current Alarms window will list the records in the set order.
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Current Alarm)

2. In the RM - Current Alarms window, select the record which you wish to display the detail of the ac-
knowledge for.

The content of both the windows is the same and is that of Acknowledge Information window (RM -
Current Alarms).
492 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

RM - Current Alarms window
This window displays the list of the alarms active in the equipment present in the Rings managed by the
supervision system.
Menu bar
Actions > Alarm Synchronization. It aligns the alarms table between NMS5LX and Ring Man-
ager.
Parameters
Severity. Type of signal: alarm, status and event; for the alarms also the severity is displayed.
edged; if the X character is present, the alarm has been acknowledged.
ated by the Ring Manager application. The events of this type are the loss of configuration align-
ment between the databases of Ring Manager and NMS5LX, the start or the stop of anyone of
the platform processes of Ring Manager and the stop of all the platform.
Object. Name of the physical or logical object which the alarm refers to. The event signals are
Status bar
Symbol:
Filters. Activation of one or more filters
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 493

Acknowledge Information window (RM - Current Alarms)
This window displays the acknowledge information for the alarms active in the Rings of the supervision
system.
Parameters
alarm acknowledge.
Time (area SET Acknowledge Information). Moment when the record has been acknowledged
<day-month-year hours:minutes:seconds>.
Comment (area SET Acknowledge Information). Additional information.
Area CLEAR Acknowledge Information. Area not meaningful in this context.
494 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Data update modality (RM-Network Current Alarm)
The information in the RM - Current Alarm window are dynamically updated only if the procedure for the
automatic update is active (Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (RM-Network Current Alarm)).
At the opening of the RM - Current Alarm window, the procedure of automatic information update is, by
default inactive (the default setting can be changed by the Superuser).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 495

Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary
The RM-Network Alarm Summary command displays/manages the summary of the alarm history of the
equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system.
Operations
Display the summary of the alarm of Ring equipment subdivided by severity
Filter the alarm list (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
Open the filter file (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
Save a filter file (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
Delete the filter file (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
Display the alarm history (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
Reset the indication of status change (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
Change the title of RM - Alarm Summary window
GUI
RM - Alarm Summary window
Display the summary of the alarm of Ring equipment subdivided by severity

1. Select Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary.

The RM - Alarm Summary window displays the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity
relevant to the equipment present in the Rings is displayed.
date is successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed.
In the window the information is dynamically updated.
Filter the alarm list (RM-Network Alarm Summary)

2. In the RM - Alarm Summary window, select View > Filter.

ACTIVE, the detected signals will be displayed.
496 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

ALL, the detected signals only and the detected and cleared signals will be displayed.
Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms. Activating the box.
second.
Match Path. Alarms of the equipment that implement specific Paths.
Path Browser.
Map.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 497

The RM - Alarm Summary window displays only the records matching the specific criteria.
When the list is filtered, both the displayed and the hidden ones records are considered.
Closing the RM - Alarm Summary window automatically removes the possible active filters.
Open the filter file (RM-Network Alarm Summary)

2. In the RM - Alarm Summary window, select File > Load.
3. Select the wished file in the Files list of the Load Filter window.
4. Press OK.
The filter contained in the RM - Alarm Summary window is applied.
Save a filter file (RM-Network Alarm Summary)

2. In the RM - Alarm Summary window, select File > Save.
3. Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box of the Save Filter window.
4. Press OK.
The filter currently applied to the window and the window title are saved to the file.
Delete the filter file (RM-Network Alarm Summary)

2. In the RM - Alarm Summary window, select File > Delete.
3. Select the wished file in the Files list of the Delete Filter window.
4. Press OK.
The file is removed from the disk.
498 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Display the alarm history (RM-Network Alarm Summary)

2. In the RM - Alarm Summary window, select the option relevant to the type/severity of signal, for which
you wish to display the relevant list stored in the alarm history.
The RM - Alarm History window, where only the alarms of the selected type and severity, whose detec-
tion date is successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed.
For example, if the Active option (Minor record) is selected, the RM - Alarm History window opens, with
displayed only the active alarms with Minor severity whose detection date is successive to the midnight
of the current day. To display the remaining of the alarms, it is sufficient to change the filter.
Reset the indication of status change (RM-Network Alarm Summary)

2. In the RM - Alarm Summary window, select Options > Clear Flag.

The flags are removed.
Change the title of RM - Alarm Summary window


2. In the RM - Alarm Summary window, select Options > Window Title.
3. Type, in the text field of the Window Title window, the new title for the RM - Alarm Summary window.
4. Press OK.
The window immediately gets the new title.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 499

RM - Alarm Summary window
This window displays the summary of the history of the alarms, relevant to the equipment in the Rings,
subdivided by the severity level.
WARNING It is possible that, in the RM - Alarm Summary window, there are not one or more records rel-
evant to the type of signals/severity levels. Their presence is subjected to the activation of filters.
Fig.33 RM - Alarm Summary window
1
2
3 4 5 6
(1) Title bar. By default, the window title is RM - Alarm Summary. It can be changed as you wish (see
Change the title of RM - Alarm Summary window).
(2) Menu bar:

File > Load. It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained.
File > Save. It saves the set filters to a file.
File > Delete. It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is con-
tained
Options > Window Title. It changes the title of the window.
Options > Clear Flag. It resets the indication of status change.
(3) Indication of status change. The presence of the flag next to the record indicates that, from when
the RM - Alarm Summary window has been opened or from the last selection of the Options >
Clear Flag command, a change occurred: an alarm has been detected or cleared.
(4) Criterion used to subdivide the alarms. Record:

Critical. Alarms with Critical severity.
Major. Alarms with Major severity.
Minor. Alarms with Minor severity.
Warning. Alarms with Warning severity.
Status. Status signals.
Normal. Event signals.
Total. All the signals (alarms, status, events).
(5) Number of alarms detected but not cleared yet. Option:

Active (Critical record). Detected alarms with Critical severity.
Active (Major record). Detected alarms with Major severity.
500 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Active (Minor record). Detected alarms with Minor severity.
Active (Warning record). Detected alarms with Warning severity.
Active (Status record). Detected status signals.
Active (Normal record). Detected event signals.
Active (Total record). Total number of detected signals.
(6) Number of alarms detected and cleared. Option:

Cleared (Critical record). Detected/cleared alarms with Critical severity.
Cleared (Major record). Detected/cleared alarms with Major severity.
Cleared (Minor record). Detected/cleared alarms with Minor severity.
Cleared (Warning record). Detected/cleared alarms with Warning severity.
Cleared (Status record). Detected/cleared status signals.
Cleared (Normal record). Detected/cleared event signals.
Cleared (Total record). Total number of detected/cleared signals.
(7) Status bar. Indication xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total record (yy).
If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 501

Fault > RM-Element Alarm History
WARNING Command available only if a single Ring has been selected in the LX Map Manager window.
The RM-Element Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event sig-
nals (alarms) stored in the Ring Manager database, relevant the equipment present ONLY to the selected
Ring.
The selection of the command opens the <Ring name> Alarm History window.
The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in par. Fault
> RM-Network Alarm History.
502 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Fault > RM-Element Current Alarm
WARNING Command available only if a single Ring in the LX Map Manager window has been selected.
The RM-Element Current Alarm command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signals (alarms)
active in the equipment present ONLY to the selected Ring.
The selection of the command opens the <Ring name> Current Alarm window.
The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in the par.
Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 503

Fault > RM-Element Alarm Summary
WARNING Command available only if a single Ring in the LX Map Manager window has been selected.
The RM-Element Alarm Summary displays/manages the summary of the alarm history of the equipment
present ONLY to the selected Ring.
The selection of the command opens the RM - Alarm Summary window.
The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in par. Fault
> RM-Network Alarm Summary.
504 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Locate > RM-Ring Browser
The RM-Ring Browser displays the list of the Rings managed by NMS5LX.
Operations
Display the list of the Rings managed by the system
Open the Ring Manager window
Search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring
GUI
Ring Browser window
Display the list of the Rings managed by the system

1. Select Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Ring Browser.

The Ring Browser window displays the list of the Rings managed by the supervision system NMS5LX is
displayed.
Open the Ring Manager window


2. In the Ring Browser window, select the Ring.
3. Select Options > Open ring.

The Ring Manager window of the selected Ring, opens.
If the message Cannot open ring created in another map is displayed, it is not possible to open the Ring
Manager window as the selected Ring is not present in the current map.
The Ring Manager window can be opened also by a double click on the Ring record.
Search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring

2. In the Ring Browser window, select the Ring you wish to highlight.
3. Select Options > Find ring.

In the LX Map Manager window, the symbol of the selected Ring is highlighted.
If the message Cannot highlight ring created in another map is displayed, it is not possible to highlight
the symbol as the selected Ring is not present in the current map.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 505

Ring Browser window
This window displays the list of the Rings managed by the supervision system.
Menu bar
File > Refresh. It updates the data in the window.
Options > Find ring. It searches and highlights in the map the symbol of a Ring.
Options > Open ring. It opens the Ring Manager window.
List of Rings
For each Ring the name corresponding to the name of the relevant Ring symbol in the map is
displayed. The list of the Rings is in alphabetical order.
Status bar
Ring Number. Total number of Ring.
506 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Locate > RM-Path Browser
The RM-Path Browser command displays the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map.
The Path terms indicates a bidirectional route between a source node and a destination node and is iden-
tified by an input channel on the source node and an output channel on the destination node. For more
information refer to the Ring Manager documentation.
Operations
Display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map
Save the list of the Path
Delete one or more Paths
Delete the protection of a Path
Add the protection to a Path
Activate the management of a Path
Deactivate the management of a Path
Switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection
Display the active alarms in the Path equipment
Display the alarm history relevant to the Path equipment
Display/change/save the information relevant to a Path
Display/change the configuration of a Path
Display/change the configuration of a Path protected
Highlight a Path in Ring Manager window
Highlight the Ring symbol containing a Path in the map window
Filter/sort the list of the Path
Operations
RM - Path Browser window
RM - Path Description window
Path: Configuration Parameters window
Path: Protection Parameters window
Display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map

1. Select Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser.

The RM - Path Browser window displays the list of the Paths present in the Rings of the current map.
Save the list of the Path

2. In the RM - Path Browser window, to save to file:

A group of Paths, select the records and then File > Save > Selected.
The displayed Paths, select File > Save > Filtered. If no filter is active, the displayed records
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 507

4. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.
Delete one or more Paths

It is not possible to delete:

A Path in Not Actuated status. Force the Path in Off line status or wait for the successful reali-
zation of the Path and then delete the Path.
A managed Path (On line), if the system has detected a condition of Configuration Mismatch.
First remove the mismatch condition (refer to Ring Manager manual) and then delete the Path.
A Path with at least one of the NEs implementing the Path in status disconnected, unreachable,
maintenance, connected with LCT present in Configuration modality or if a NMS5UX user has
opened the relevant equipment GUI (Equipment window). Force the Path in Off line status or
wait for all the pieces of equipment implementing the Path are in connected status and then de-
lete the Path.
The deletion of an not managed Path (Off line) involves the removal of the Path only from the DB of Ring
Manager, while the deletion of a managed Path (On line) involves the removal of the Path from the DB and
the removal of the relevant cross-connections from the equipment implementing the considered Path.
If a protected Path is selected, this operation deletes the whole Path (paths A and B).
2. In the RM - Path Browser window, select the record you wish to delete.
3. Select Edit > Delete Path and confirm.

The records are deleted from the list, from the supervision system database and from the equipment
if in connected status.
Delete the protection of a Path

It is not possible to delete:

A route (A/B) of a Path in Not Actuated status. Force the Path in Off line status or wait for the
successful realization of the Path and then delete the protection.
A route (A/B) of a managed Path (On line) if the system has detected a condition of Configura-
tion Mismatch. First remove the mismatch condition (refer to Ring Manager documentation) and
then delete the protection.
A route (A/B) of a Path, if at least one of the NEs implementing the connection A or B is in status
disconnected, unreachable, maintenance, connected with LCT present in Configuration modality
or if a NMS5UX user has opened the relevant equipment GUI (Equipment window). Force the
Path in Off line status or wait for all the equipment implementing the route (A/B) are in connect-
ed status and then delete the protection.
The deletion of a protection of an unmanaged Path (Off line) involves the removal of the Path only from
the database of Ring Manager, while the deletion of the protection of a managed Path (On line) involves
the removal of the protection from the DB and the removal of the relevant cross-connections from the
equipment implementing the considered protection.
2. In RM - Path Browser window, select the wished protected Path (Protection option - Protected value).
3. Select Edit > Delete Path Protection > PATH-A or PATH-B (according to the route you want to de-
lete) and confirm.
508 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Add the protection to a Path

The operation executed on a managed Path (On line) involves the creation of the protection in the database
of Ring Manager and the creation of the relevant cross-connections for the equipment implementing the
considered protection.
2. In the RM - Path Browser window, select the Path you wish to protect (Protection option - Not protected
value).
3. Select Edit > Add Path Protection and confirm.

If the operation is successful, the value Protected is displayed in the record of the considered Path (op-
tion Protection). If the operation fails, an error message is displayed.
Activate the management of a Path

2. In the RM - Path Browser window, select the Path not managed (Path Status option - Off line value).
3. Select Edit > Path on line and confirm.

The status assumed by the managed Path is displayed in the record of the considered Path (option Path
Status - value Running, Warning, etc.).
An error message is displayed if troubles occur during the operation.
For instance, if one piece of equipment implementing the Path is in disconnected status, at the end of
the operation the Path will pass to Not Actuated status and a message will indicate that it was not pos-
sible to realize the Path because the equipment (logic address) is disconnected.
Deactivate the management of a Path

2. In the RM - Path Browser window, select the Path managed (Path Status option - Not Actuated, Failure,
Incomplete, Degraded, Warning, Disabled or Running value).
3. Select Edit > Path off line and confirm.

At the end of the operation, the Path is not managed by the system anymore (option Path Status -
value Off line).
Switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection

2. In the RM - Path Browser window, select the protected Path (Protection option - Protected value) whose
names of the two paths (A/B) you wish to switch.
3. Select Edit > Naming Switch A/B -> B/A.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 509

The path named A is renamed as B and vice versa.
To display the new situation, it is necessary to open the Ring Manager window containing the consid-
ered Path.
Display the active alarms in the Path equipment

2. In the RM - Path Browser window, select the Paths for which you wish to display the current alarms in
the relevant equipment.
3. Select Fault > Current Alarm.

The RM - Current Alarms window opens with Match Path filter active.
The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are reported in par. Fault > RM-
Network Current Alarm.
Display the alarm history relevant to the Path equipment

2. In the RM - Path Browser window, select the Paths for which you wish to display the alarm history in
the relevant equipment.
3. Select Fault > Alarm History.

The RM - Alarm History window opens with Match Path and After (alarms whose detection date is suc-
cessive to the midnight of the current day) filters active.
The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are reported in par. Fault > RM-
Network Alarm History.
Display/change/save the information relevant to a Path

User profile | Read Only: Entry, Normal. Read-Write: Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
2. In the RM - Path Browser window, execute one of the following operations:

Double click on the wished Path.
Select the wished Path and then the Options > Path: Information.
The RM - Path Description window displays the info relevant to the Path.
The operations which can be executed with the items in the window are indicated here below.
To change the name of the Path
a. In the Path Name text field, type the new value (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 maximum
100 characters).
b. Press Apply.
To save on file the characteristics of the Path
a. Select File > Save Path Information.

510 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

b. Type, in the Selection box, the path and the name of the file where the info must be saved.
c. Press Ok.
To display the alarms active in the equipment implementing a Path

a. Select Fault > Current Alarm.
The RM - Current Alarms window opens with Match Path filter active.
The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are reported in par. Fault
> RM-Network Current Alarm.
To display the alarm history relevant to the equipment implementing the Path
a. Select Fault > Alarm History.

The RM - Alarm History window opens with Match Path and After (alarms whose detection date
is successive to the midnight of the current day) filters active.
The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are reported in par. Fault
> RM-Network Alarm History.
Display/change the configuration of a Path

2. In the RM - Path Browser window, select the wished Path.
3. Select Options > Path: Configuration Parameters.

The Path: Configuration Parameters window displays the configuration of the Path.
Depending on the equipment type (source/destination), the window will display some configuration pa-
rameters relevant to the tributary channel of input to the source equipment of the Path (area Source
NE) and to the tributary of output from the destination equipment of the Path (area Destination NE).
Here below are displayed the operations which can be executed using the items in the window.
To activate/deactivate the tributary

a. In the Tributary Enable box, set the use of the tributary:
Disable. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this case, the alarms are in-
hibited and LOS alarm becomes active if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however
connected.
Enable. The tributary is active (tributary used). In this case, the controller does not in-
hibit the alarms.
Disable No Inv. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this case, the alarms
are inhibited and LOS alarm is NOT given if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however
connected.
b. Press Apply.
To activate/deactivate the tributary loops
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
a. Select the loop to be activated (or deactivated).

The loop assumes the state complementary to the previous one (if activated, it becomes deac-
tivated and vice versa).
b. Press Apply.
The activation of, at least, one loop causes the activation of the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment
is switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the loops are
deactivated.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 511

To change the J2 Path Trace parameters
a. In the Trace Type box, set the Path Trace status:

Disable. The control of the Path Trace is disabled.
Enable. The control of the Path Trace is enabled.
b. In the Trace Sent box, type the new characters string in transmission.
c. In the Trace Expected box, type the new characters string in reception.
d. Press Apply.
To change the Signal Label parameters
a. In the Trace Expected box, set the specification which the received Signal Label value is referred
to.
b. In the Trace Sent box, set the specification which the transmitted Signal Label value is referred
to.
c. Press Apply.
Display/change the configuration of a Path protected

2. In the RM - Path Browser window, select the Path protected (Protection option - Protected value).
3. Select Options > Path: Protection Parameters.

The Path: Protection Parameters window displays the configuration of a Path protected.
Here below are listed the operations which can be executed using the items in the window.
To change the management of the switching between the Path A and Path B
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
a. In the Forced Switch box relevant to the wished equipment (source/destination), set:
Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms.
Force PATH-A. The equipment is forced to use the Path A for the service.
Force PATH-B. The equipment is forced to use the Path B for the service.
b. Press Apply.
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then
turned on again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking in account the
preceding setting.
To change the management of the preferential Path
a. In the Preferential box relevant to the wished equipment (source/destination), set:

Not Revertive, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment
does not use a Path in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.
Revertive PATH-A, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equip-
ment use the Path A.
Revertive PATH-B, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equip-
ment use the Path-B.
b. Press Apply.
512 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Highlight a Path in Ring Manager window

2. In the RM - Path Browser window, select the Path you wish to search and highlight.

Select Options > Path: Highlight.
Press the right mouse button and select Highlight Selected Path.
If not already open, the Ring Manager window is displayed containing the selected Path. The Path is
highlighted in the window.
Highlight the Ring symbol containing a Path in the map window


2. In the RM - Path Browser window, select the Path.
3. Select Options > Ring: Highlight.

The map window highlights the Ring symbol containing a Path.
Filter/sort the list of the Path


2. In the RM - Path Browser window, select View > Filter.
In the Path Browser: Filter window, select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.
Match Path Status. Status of the Path (the color of the box, when active, reflects the color as-
sociated to the status). Activating the box:
Not Actuated (red), the Paths, which the realization is failed for, will be displayed.
Failure (red), the Paths with locked traffic will be displayed.
Incomplete (orange), the Paths, which the realization of one of the two routes (A or B)
is failed for, will be displayed. Value meaningful only for protected Paths.
Degraded (yellow), the Paths, whose traffic on the mail route regularly transits while the
stand-by route is not available, will be displayed. Value meaningful only for protected
Paths.
Warning (light blue), will the displayed the Paths for which:
No alarm information is available for, at least, one of the equipment implementing
the Path (status Warning).
The input or output channel of the Path itself is disabled (status Disabled).
Running (green), the Paths, whose traffic regularly transits, will be displayed.
Off Line (brown), the not managed Paths will be displayed.
Match Path on Ring. Paths present in the specific Rings.
To set the criterion, select one or more Rings in the area on the right and press Add.
The values set in this way are inserted in the area on the left.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 513

Match Path Through Equipment. Path implemented by specific equipment.
It is possible to set the equipment by means of one of the following ways:
and press Add From Map.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Path Through Equipment
box.
To delete a single item from the list, select it and press Delete.
Match Path Through Link. Paths passing through specific Links.
Select one or more Link, directly in the Ring Manager window and press Add from Map.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Path Thought Link box.
To delete a single item from the list, select it and press Delete.
Sort by. Criterion used to sort the list in increasing alphabetic order: numbers from 0 to 9, letters
from A to Z).
To set the criterion, activate the option:
Path Name. The Paths will be sorted with respect to the Path name.
Path Source. The Paths will be sorted with respect to the logic address of the source NE.
Path Destination. The Paths will be sorted with respect to the logic address of the desti-
nation NE.
Path Protection. The Paths will be sorted with respect to the protection.
The RM - Path Browser window displays only the records matching the specific criteria.
Closing the RM - Path Browser window automatically removes the possible active filters.
514 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

RM - Path Browser window
This window allows managing the Paths present in the Rings of the current map.
Menu bar
File > Save. It saves the list of the Path to file.
Edit > Select All. It selects all the displayed Paths.
Edit > Delete Path. It deletes one or more Path from the list and database
Edit > Delete Path Protection. It delete from the list and database, the protection of one or
more Paths.
Edit > Add Path Protection. It adds the protection to a Path.
Edit > Path on line. It activates the management of a Path.
Edit > Path off line. It deactivates the management of a Path.
Edit > Naming Switch A/B -> B/A. It switches the names of the Paths associated in a pro-
tection.
Fault > Current Alarm. It displays the alarms active in the equipment implementing a Path
and related to the Path.
Fault > Alarm History. It displays the history of the alarms relevant to the equipment imple-
menting a Path and related to a Path.
Options > Path: Information. It displays/changes/saves the information relevant to a Path.
Options > Path: Configuration Parameters. It displays/changes the configuration of a Path.
Options > Path: Protection Parameters. It displays/changes the configuration of a Path pro-
tected.
Options > Path: Highlight. It highlights a Path in the Ring Manager window.
Options > Ring: Highlight. It highlights the Ring symbol containing a Path in the map window.
View > Filter. It filters/sorts the list of the Path.
Status summary bar

Status label and box. For every status, the name and the number of Paths in that specific status
in the list is reported. The status Disabled is associated to status Warning.
For each box, if the displayed number is 0, the box is grey. When the number is different from
0, the background of the box assumes the colour associated to the status.
For the description of statuses and colours, see Tab.19.
The selection of a box allows filtering the list of Path using, as criterion, the selected status.
When the filter activated, the bar displays the Clear Severity Filter push-button. Selecting it,
you can remove the filter and display all the Paths in the list.
Parameters
Path Status. Status of the Path (Tab.19).
Path Name. Path name assigned by the user to the path during its creation or change. The user
can assign to the Path the wished name or name the Path, according to Rec. ITU-T M.1400, with
the following format <logic address of source NE (max 12 characters)> - <logic address of des-
tination NE (max 12 characters) <connection type>s<connection progressive number (max 2
characters)>.
Source. Node source of the Path (equipment logical address and relevant input channel).
Destination. Node destination of the Path (equipment logical address and relevant output
channel).
Protection. Protection status of the Path.
WARNING A double click on a Path displays the RM - Path Description window.
Status bar
Filters: Activation of one or more filters.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 515

Tab.19 Path status

Red Not Actuated Path for which the actuation is failed
Red Failure The traffic on the Path is blocked.
Orange Incomplete Paths for which the actuation of one of the two routes (A or B) is failed.
Value is meaningful only for protected Paths.
Yellow Degraded The traffic on the main route of the Path transits regularly.The stand-
by is not available. Value is meaningful only for protected Paths.
Light blue Warning The alarm information is not available for at least one of the two NEs
implementing the Path.
Light blue Disabled The input or output channel of the Path is disabled.
Green Running The traffic on the Path transits regularly.
Brown Off line The Path is not managed
516 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

RM - Path Description window
This window displays the value of the parameters which characterize the selected Path.
Menu bar
File > Save Path Information. It saves the Path characteristics to file.
Fault > Current Alarm. It displays the alarms active in the equipment implementing the Path.
Fault > Alarm History. It displays the history of the alarms relevant to the equipment implement-
ing the Path.
Parameters
Path. Path name assigned by the user to the path during its creation or change. The user can
assign the wished name to the Path or name the Path, according to the Rec. ITU-T M.1400, using
the following format <source NE logic address (max 12 characters)> - <destination NE logic ad-
dress (max 12 characters) <connection type>s<connection progressive number (max 2 char-
acters)>.
Source. Logical address of the source equipment of the Path and relevant input channel (read-
only field).
Destination. Logical address of the destination NE of the Path and relevant output channel
(read-only field).
Type. The green box indicates the Path type:
Protected. Protected Path.
Single. Unprotected Path.
Loop. Presence of a cross-connection re-closed on itself (loop).
Status. Status of creation of the cross-connection between input channel and output channel
on the equipment:
Actuated. Connection actuated.
Not Actuated. Connection not actuated yet.
Off line. Connection not managed (Path in Off line status).
Equipment. Logical address of the equipment.
In Channel. Input channel of the Path on the equipment.
Out Channel. Output channel of the Path on the equipment.
Message. This field displays, for the not actuated connections (option Status - value Not Actu-
ated) the cause of the missed actuation:
Not Connected. Equipment in disconnected status.
Maintenance Status. Equipment in maintenance status.
Unreachable. Equipment in unreachable status
LCT in Configuration Mode. Equipment in connected status which the LCT program in
Configuration modality is connected to.
NMS5UX in Configuration Mode. Equipment for which the NMS5UX user has opened the
relevant equipment GUI (Equipment window).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 517

Path: Configuration Parameters window
This window displays the configuration parameters of the selected Path. The list of displayed options de-
pends on the equipment type.
Menu bar
Equipment source/destination of the Path

Source NE/Destination NE. Respectively source equipment/destination equipment of the
Path.
Channel. Tributary channel used.
NE Name. Logic address of the equipment.
NE Type. Equipment type. The Virtual... label indicates the virtual NE objects (Ring Manager).
IP Address. IP address. The Virtual... label indicates the virtual NE objects (NMS5LX).
IDU Type. IDU type (for example 2RU, etc.)
Configuration. Configuration type (for example Drop Insert, Terminal, etc.)
Capacity. Equipment capacity.
IDU Nb. Number of equipment constituting the node (only for NEs of ALplus Node type).
Area 2Mbit/s Tributary

Tributary Enable. Used status of the tributary:
Disable. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this case, the alarms are in-
hibited and LOS alarm becomes active if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however
connected.
Enable. The tributary is active (tributary used). In this case, the controller does not in-
hibit the alarms.
Disable No Inv. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this case, the alarms
are inhibited and LOS alarm is NOT given if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however
connected.
Tributary Loop. Activation status of the loop:
Line Internal
side side Loop
loop loop inactive
active active
Area J2 Path Trace

Trace Type. Path Trace status:
Disable. The control of the Path Trace is disabled.
Enable. The control of the Path Trace is enabled.
Trace Sent. Transmitted string of control characters
Trace Expected. The string of characters to be controlled in reception.
Area Signal Label

Trace Expected. Specification, which the received Signal Label value is referred to.
Trace Sent. Specification which the transmitted Signal Label value is referred to.
Push-button bar
Apply. It executes the changes made to the configuration parameters.
Refresh. It updates the data in the window.
518 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Path: Protection Parameters window
This window displays the parameters which characterize the protection of the selected Path.
WARNING The Path is a BIDIRECTIONAL route. In figure, for explanation clearness, we consider an hypo-
thetical route entering in the input channel of the source equipment and exiting from the output channel
of the destination equipment.
Fig.34 Path Protection Parameters window
1
2
3
4 5
7 8
(1) Menu bar. The command File > Close closes the window.
(2) Path A: Output channel on source NE (on the left of label Path A) and input channel on destination
NE (on the right of label Path A).
(3) Current status of the switch between Path A and Path B. The status of the switch is displayed when
the NE is connected to the management system.
(4) Logical address of source NE (above) and input channel of the Path in source NE (below).
(5) Logical address of destination NE (above) and output channel of the Path in destination NE (below).
(6) Path B: Input channel on source NE (on the left of label Path A) and output channel on destination
NE (on the right of label Path A).
(7) Management of protection on source NE:

Preferential: modality used to manage the function of preferential Path for source NE:
Not Revertive, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equip-
ment does not use a Path in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.
Revertive PATH-A, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the
equipment use the Path A.
Revertive PATH-B, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the
equipment use the Path-B.
Forced switch: modality used to manage the switch between Path A and Path B for source
NE:
Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the
alarms.
Force PATH-A. The equipment is forced to use the Path A for the service.
Force PATH-B. The equipment is forced to use the Path B for the service.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 519

(8) Management of protection on destination NE. The meaning of the parameters is the same of note 8.
(9) Push-buttons:
Apply. It applies the changes made to the configuration parameters.
Refresh. It updates the data in the window.
520 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Locate > RM-Equipment Browser
The RM-Equipment Browser command displays the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the cur-
rent map.
Operations
Display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map
Filter the equipment list (RM-Equipment Browser)
Highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager window
GUI
RM - Equipment Browser window
Display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map

1. Select Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Equipment Browser.

The RM - Equipment Browser window displays the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the cur-
rent map.
The information corresponds to the characteristics/operating status of the equipment when the RM -
Equipment Browser window has been opened or updated.
The presence of the - symbol indicates that the information is not available as not meaningful for the
status and/or the type of equipment, which is referred to.
A double click on an equipment record opens the Ring Manager window containing the equipment. The
equipment is highlighted in the Ring Manager window.
Filter the equipment list (RM-Equipment Browser)

2. In the RM - Equipment Browser window, select View > Filter.

In the Eq. Browser: Filter window, select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.
Match Name. Logic address of the NE.
To set the criteria, type the logical address of the NE in the text field.
The text field for the typing of the equipment name is case sensitive. Then pay attention to the
typing of the upper-case letters and of the lower-case letters.
Match Type. Equipment type.
Match Ring. Equipment present in the specific Rings of the current map.
To set the criterion, in the right area, select one or more Rings and press Add.
The set values in this way will be inserted in the left area.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 521

Match Physical Address. Type (real or virtual) and physical address of equipment.
Real, activate the IP Equipment option and type the IP address of the wished NE in the
text fields.
The RM - Equipment Browser window displays only the records matching the activated criteria.
Closing the RM - Equipment Browser window automatically removes the possible active filters.
Highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager window

2. In the RM - Equipment Browser window, select the equipment you wish to highlight.
3. Select Options > Find equipment.

If not already open, the Ring Manager window is displayed containing the selected equipment. The
equipment is highlighted in the window.
The operation can be executed even by a double click on the equipment record in the RM - Equipment
Browser window.
522 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

RM - Equipment Browser window
This window displays the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map.
Menu bar
Options > Find equipment. It searches and highlights the equipment symbol in the relevant
Ring Manager window.
View > Filter. It updates the information contained in the window.
Parameters
Name. Logical address of the equipment.
Type. Type of equipment. The wording Virtual indicates that the record refers to a virtual NE
(Ring Manager).
Ring. Ring name in which the equipment is present
Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and NMS5LX
Alarm. Operating status (alarms) of the equipment.
The severity level of the alarm present in the equipment opens. When more alarms of different
severity are present, the level relevant to the more serious alarm is displayed.
Physical Address. Physical address of the equipment. The wording VIRTUAL EQ. indicates that
the record refers to a virtual NE (NMS5LX or Ring Manager).
Status bar
Filter. Activation of one or more filters.
Other information. Date and time when the window has been opened or updated.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 523

PSM
WARNING The PSM menu is available only if the Packet Service Manager application has been installed.
For the use of the Packet Service Manager application refer to the specific documentation.
The Edit-Add PSM Map, Edit-Delete PSM Map and Edit-Modify/View PSM Map commands are used
to represent graphically the PSM Map objects in the maps and to provide the relevant management7control
parameters to NMS5LX system.
Before using these commands, it is suggested to read Graphic network representation, where the modal-
ities to configure correctly and rapidly one's supervision system are described.
The PSM Map objects are used to identify subnetworks of radio equipment with Ethernet LAN tributaries
which implement network services.
Edit > Add PSM Map. It creates PSM Map objects for the graphic representation of the network in the
map.
Edit > Delete PSM Map. It deletes the symbol of a PSM Map object from the map.
Edit > Modify/View PSM Map. It displays/changes the characteristics of a PSM Map object.
Fault > PSM-Network Alarm History. It displays/manages the alarm history of the equipment in the PSM
Map objects managed by the supervision system.
Fault > PSM-Network Current Alarm. It displays/manages the alarms active on the equipment in the
PSM Map objects managed by the supervision system.
Fault > PSM-Element Alarm History. It displays/manages the alarm history of the equipment in the spe-
cific PSM Map objects.
Fault > PSM-Element Current Alarm. It displays/manages the alarms active in the equipment in the
specific PSM Map objects.
Locate > PSM-Map Browser. It displays the list of the PSM Map objects managed by the supervision
system.
Locate > PSM-Equipment Browser. It displays the list of the equipment in the PSM Map objects of the
current map.
524 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Edit > Add PSM Map
WARNING Before creating an object, it is suggested to read the par. Rules for the creation of the objects.
The Add PSM Map command creates PSM Map objects for the graphic representation of the network in
the map.
Operations
Create PSM Map objects
Create PSM Map objects

WARNING It is possible to create all the wished PSM Map objects.
1. Move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you wish to create the PSM Map object.
2. Select PSM > Edit > Add PSM Map.
3. Type the name of the PSM Map object (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 character and maximum 32
characters) in the Label box of the Add Packet Service Manager Map window.
The name will be displayed under the object symbol and will constitute the name of the window opened
by the double click on the object symbol.
4. Type, in the Comment area, possible information relevant to the object (max 100 characters).
The PSM Map object is displayed in the New Object Area of the LX Map Manager window. Move the
symbol in any point of the View area.
If the created PSM Map symbol is already present in a map, it automatically will acquire the status and
the characteristics of the existing object.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 525

Edit > Delete PSM Map
The Delete PSM Map command deletes a PSM Map symbol from the map.
Operations
Delete a PSM Map object from the map
Delete a PSM Map object from the map

WARNING If a PSM Map object is present only in one map, it can be deleted only if it does not contain
objects (equipment, Link, Ethernet network services, etc.).
If the same PSM Map object is present in more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol even if it contains
objects, except for the last copy for which the above mentioned rule is valid: it can be deleted only if empty.
1. In the LX Map Manager window, select the PSM Map object you wish to delete.
2. Select PSM > Edit > Delete PSM Map or press the right mouse button, select Delete and confirm.
526 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Edit > Modify/View PSM Map
User profile | Read Only: Entry, Normal. ReadWrite: Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
The Modify/View PSM Map command displays/changes the characteristics of a PSM Map object.
Operations
Verify/change the parameters of a PSM Map object
Verify/change the parameters of a PSM Map object

User profile | Read Only: Entry, Normal. ReadWrite: Advanced, Privileged, Superuser
WARNING It is not possible to assign the same name to two different PSM Map objects.
If the same PSM Map object has been created in two different maps, the change of the values of the pa-
rameters of this PSM Map object in a map involves the automatic change of the values of the parameters
relevant to the same object in the other map.
1. In the LX Map Manager window, select the wished PSM Map object.
2. Select PSM > Edit > Modify/View PSM Map or press the right mouse button and select Modify/
View.
The Service Manager Map Properties window displays in the box/area:
Label. PSM Map name.
Type. PSM Map symbol.
It is possible to change the Label and Comment parameters. The modality used to set the parameters
is the same one described in par. Create PSM Map objects.
In the LX Map Manager window, the PSM Map object assumes the new characteristics.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 527

Fault > PSM-Network Alarm History
The PSM-Network Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event sig-
nals (alarms), stored in the Packet Service Manager database, generated by the equipment present in the
PSM Maps objects managed by the supervision system.
Operations
Display the alarm history of the equipment in PSM Map objects
Save the alarms list (PSM-Network Alarm History)
Delete the alarms (PSM-Network Alarm History)
Acknowledge the alarms (PSM-Network Alarm History)
Align the alarms of Packet Service Manager to those of NMS5LX (PSM-Network Alarm History)
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (PSM-Network Alarm History)
Filter the alarms list (PSM-Network Alarm History)
Sort the alarms list (PSM-Network Alarm History)
Display the alarm acknowledge information (PSM-Network Alarm History)
GUI
PSM - Alarm History window
Acknowledge Information window (PSM - Alarm History)
See also
Data update modality (PSM-Network Alarm History)
Alarm recording modality (PSM-Network Alarm History)
Display the alarm history of the equipment in PSM Map objects

1. Select PSM > Fault > PSM-Network Alarm History.

The PSM - Alarm History window displays the alarm history, stored in the Packet Service Manager da-
tabase, generated by the equipment in the PSM Map objects managed by NMS5LX.
date is successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed. Besides, by default, the automatic
information update is inactive.
A warning message could be displayed, informing that the database contains a number of alarms great-
er than 5000. For this cause, the window will display only the records, in chronological order from the
newest to the oldest one, until 5000. The 5000 limit is not a memory limit, but simply a limit in the
display of the alarms. In order to read the alarms successive to 5000, it is sufficient to delete some
records or change the filters.
Save the alarms list (PSM-Network Alarm History)

2. In the PSM - Alarm History window, to save to a file:

A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Save > Selected.
528 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

The displayed alarms, select File > Save > Filtered. If no filter is active, the displayed records
3. Type, in the Selection box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved.
4. Press Ok.
Delete the alarms (PSM-Network Alarm History)

2. In the PSM - Alarm History window, to delete from the list and from the database of supervision system:
A group of alarms, select the records and Actions > Delete > Selected Alarms.
The displayed alarms, select Actions > Delete > Filtered Alarms. If the filters are not active,
All the alarms of the database, select Actions > Delete > All Alarms.
Acknowledge the alarms (PSM-Network Alarm History)

WARNING After a record has been acknowledged, the operation cannot be undone.
Each alarm can be acknowledged twice: the first time when the alarm is detected. When the alarm clears,
the character X is removed from the record and the user can acknowledge it the second time. In this second
case (if already set during the first acknowledge), the value of the Trouble Identification Code parameter
cannot be changed.

2. In the PSM - Alarm History window, to acknowledge:
The displayed alarms, select Actions > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms. If the filters are not
The Acknowledge Alarm window opens.
The User box displays the username of the NMS5UX user who required the acknowledge of the records.
The value of the box is automatically set to the username of the NMS5UX user who opened the map.
5. Press Ok.
If more records are selected for the operation, the setting of the Trouble Identification Code and Com-
ment parameters are for all the records.
If one or more detected and cleared alarms are selected, the setting of the Trouble Identification Code
and Comment parameters applies both for the set event (SET) and for the clear event (CLEAR).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 529

Align the alarms of Packet Service Manager to those of NMS5LX (PSM-Network Alarm
History)

2. In the PSM - Alarm History window, select Actions > Alarm Synchronization.
The information in the database of Packet Service Manager and relevant to the alarms is aligned to that
in the database of NMS5LX.
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (PSM-Network Alarm History)


At the opening of the PSM - Alarm History window, by default, the automatic information update is in-
active.
Filter the alarms list (PSM-Network Alarm History)

2. In the PSM - Alarm History window, select View > Filter.

ACTIVE, the detected and not cleared signals will be displayed.
ALL, the detected signals, both active and cleared, will be displayed.
Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm. Activating the box.
second.
530 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Match Service. Criterion not available in this context.
Match Map. Alarms of the equipment present in the specific maps.
To set the criterion, in the Service Map List area, select the wished map and press Add. Repeat
this operation for all the maps you wish to include in the filter.
To set the criterion, select one or more Link, directly in the Packet Service Manager Map window
and press Add Link from Map.
It is possible to delete all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All.
To set the criterion, select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the Packet
Service Manager Map window and press Add Equipment From Map.
Type the wished string in the text field.
case; deactivating the box, no distinction will be made.
Select a record in the PSM - Alarm History window and press Get Message from select-
ed Alarm.
The PSM - Alarm History window displays only the records matching the specific criteria.
Closing the PSM - Alarm History window automatically removes the possible active filters.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 531

Sort the alarms list (PSM-Network Alarm History)

2. In the PSM - Alarm History window, select View > Sort Criteria.

Registration, the alarms will be sorted according to the date/time of recording in Packet Service
Manager database.
Last on TOP. The first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive
Last on BOTTOM. The first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive
The PSM - Alarm History window will list the records in the set order.
Display the alarm acknowledge information (PSM-Network Alarm History)

2. In the PSM - Alarm History window, select the record which you wish to display the detail of the ac-
knowledge for.

The content of both the windows is the same and is that of Acknowledge Information window (PSM -
Alarm History).
532 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

PSM - Alarm History window
This window displays the alarm history, stored in the Packet Service Manager database, generated by the
equipment in the PSM Map objects managed by NMS5LX.
Menu bar
Actions > Delete. It deletes one or more records from the list and database.
Actions > Acknowledge. It acknowledges one or more records, in such a way that the system
memorizes that the user has seen the alarms.
Actions > Refresh. It updates the data in the window.
Actions > Alarm Synchronization. It re-aligns the alarms table between NMS5LX and Packet
Service Manager.
List of alarms
edged. If the X character is present the record has been acknowledged.
Each alarm can be acknowledged twice: the first time when the alarm is detected. When the
alarm clears, the character X is removed from the record and the user can acknowledge it the
second time.
In any moment, it is possible to display the acknowledge information of an alarm moving to the
record and pressing the right mouse button. A pop-up window is displayed with the detail of the
acknowledge. The content of the window is the same described in par. Display the alarm ac-
knowledge information (PSM-Network Alarm History).
SET Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm detection.
CLEAR Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm clearing.
ated by Packet Service Manager. The events of this type are the loss of configuration alignment
between the databases of Packet Service Manager and NMS5LX, the start or the stop of anyone
of the platform processes of Packet Service Manager and the stop of the whole platform.
Status bar
Symbol.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 533

534 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Acknowledge Information window (PSM - Alarm History)
This window displays the detail of the acknowledgement of the selected alarm.
Parameters
alarm acknowledge.
User (area CLEAR Acknowledge Information). Username of the NMS5UX user who has acknowl-
edged the record when the alarm was in detected and cleared status.
Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hours:minutes:sec-
onds>.
in the SET:... and CLEAR:... areas are the same.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 535

Data update modality (PSM-Network Alarm History)
The information in the PSM - Network Alarm History window are dynamically updated only if the procedure
for the automatic update is active (Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (PSM-Network Alarm
History)).
At the opening of the PSM - Network Alarm History window, the procedure of automatic information update
is inactive by default (this setting can be changed by the Superuser).
The setting of the filters or the criteria used to sort the records in a PSM - Alarm History window does not
influence the display of the information in the other open PSM - Network Alarm History windows or in the
PSM - Network Current Alarms window.
Alarm recording modality (PSM-Network Alarm History)
The alarms are stored in the database managed by Packet Service Manager application.
The application stores to disk all the alarms up to a limit N (configurable by Superuser - default 50000).
When this limit is reached, the system automatically removes the oldest X alarms (X configurable by Su-
peruser - default 1000).
During this period, it is possible Delete the alarms (PSM-Network Alarm History) manually. It is suggested
to periodically delete and/or store to file the less meaningful records, so to avoid the saturation of the da-
tabase.
536 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Fault > PSM-Network Current Alarm
The PSM - Network Current Alarm command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signals (alarms)
active in the equipment present in the PSM Map objects managed by the supervision system.
Operations
Display the alarms active in the equipment in PSM Map objects
Save the alarms list (PSM-Network Current Alarm)
Acknowledge the alarms (PSM-Network Current Alarm)
Align the alarms of Packet Service Manager to those of NMS5LX (PSM-Network Current Alarm)
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (PSM-Network Current Alarm)
Filter the alarms list (PSM-Network Current Alarm)
Sort the alarms list (PSM-Network Current Alarm)
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (PSM-Network Current Alarm)
GUI
PSM - Current Alarms window
Acknowledge Information window (PSM - Current Alarms)
See also
Data update modality (PSM-Network Current Alarm)
Display the alarms active in the equipment in PSM Map objects

1. Select PSM > Fault > PSM-Network Current Alarm.

The PSM - Current Alarms window displays the list of the alarms active in the equipment present in the
PSM Maps managed by the supervision system is displayed.
At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic information update is inactive.
Save the alarms list (PSM-Network Current Alarm)

2. In the PSM - Current Alarms window, to save to file:

The displayed alarms, select File > Save > Filtered. If filters are not active, the displayed re-
cords corresponds to the records stored in the database.
4. Press Ok.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 537

Acknowledge the alarms (PSM-Network Current Alarm)

2. In the PSM - Current Alarms window, to acknowledge:

The displayed alarms, select Actions > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms. If filters are not ac-
The User box of the Acknowledge Alarm window displays the username of the NMS5UX user who re-
5. Press Ok.
If more records are selected for the operation, the settings of the Trouble Identification Code and Com-
ment parameters applies for all the records.
Align the alarms of Packet Service Manager to those of NMS5LX (PSM-Network Cur-
rent Alarm)

2. In the PSM - Current Alarms window, select Actions > Alarm Synchronization.
The alarm information in the database of Packet Service Manager is aligned to that in the database of
NMS5LX.
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (PSM-Network Current Alarm)


When the PSM - Current Alarms window is opened, the automatic information update is inactive by de-
fault.
538 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Filter the alarms list (PSM-Network Current Alarm)

2. In the PSM - Current Alarms window, select View > Filter.

Match Severity. Type of signal (alarm/status/event) and for the alarms their severity (the colour
of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the
type of signal). Activating the box/option:
Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms. Activating the box:
second.
Match Service. Criterion not available in this context.
Match Map. Alarms of the equipment present in specific maps.
To set the criterion, in the Service Map List area, select the wished map and press Add. Repeat
this operation for all the maps you wish to include in the filter.
To set the criterion, select one or more Link, directly in the Packet Service Manager Map window
and press Add Link from Map.
To set the criterion, select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the Packet
Service Manager Map window and press Add Equipment From Map.
case; deactivating the box, no distinction will be made
Select a record in the PSM - Network Current Alarm window and press Get Message
from selected Alarm.
Activating the box:
Match Acknowledged, the acknowledged records will be displayed.
Match Unacknowledged, the record not yet acknowledged will be displayed.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 539

The PSM - Current Alarms window displays only the records matching the specific criteria.
Closing the PSM - Current Alarm window automatically removes the possible active filters.
Sort the alarms list (PSM-Network Current Alarm)

2. In the PSM - Current Alarms window, select View > Sort Criteria.

Registration, the alarms will be sorted according to the date/time of recording in Packet Service
Manager database.

Last on TOP. The first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive
Last on BOTTOM. The first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive
6. Press OK or Apply. The PSM - Network Current Alarms window will list the records in the set order.
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (PSM-Network Current Alarm)

2. In the PSM - Current Alarms window, select the record which you wish to display the detail of the ac-
knowledge for.

In the pop-up window, select View > Acknowledge Information.
The content of both the windows is the same and is that of PSM - Current Alarms window.
540 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

PSM - Current Alarms window
This window displays the list of the alarms active in the equipment present in the PSM Maps managed by
the supervision system is displayed.
Menu bar
Actions > Alarm Synchronization. It aligns the alarms table between NMS5LX and Packet
Service Manager.
View > Acknowledge Information. It displays the alarm acknowledge information.
Parameters
Severity. Type of signal: alarm, status and event; for the alarms also the severity is displayed.
edged; if the X character is present, the alarm has been acknowledged.
ated by Packet Service Manager application. The events of this type are the loss of configuration
alignment between the databases of Packet Service Manager and NMS5LX, the start or the stop
of any of the platform processes of Packet Service Manager and the stop of the whole platform.
Status bar
Symbol.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 541

Acknowledge Information window (PSM - Current Alarms)
This window displays the detail of the acknowledgement of the selected current alarm.
Parameters
alarm acknowledge.
Time (area SET Acknowledge Information). Moment when the record has been acknowledged
<day-month-year hours:minutes:seconds>.
Comment (area SET Acknowledge Information). Additional information.
Area CLEAR Acknowledge Information. Area not meaningful in this context.
542 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Data update modality (PSM-Network Current Alarm)
The information in the PSM - Network Current Alarm window are dynamically updated only if the procedure
for the automatic update is active (Activate/deactivate the automatic data update (PSM-Network Current
Alarm)).
At the opening of the PSM - Network Current Alarm window, the procedure of automatic information update
is, by default inactive (the default setting can be changed by the Superuser).
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 543

Fault > PSM-Element Alarm History
WARNING Command available only if a single PSM Map object is selected in the LX Map Manager window.
The PSM-Element Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event sig-
nals (alarms) stored in Packet Service Manager database, relevant the equipment present ONLY to the
selected PSM Map object.
The selection of the command opens the <PSM Map name> Alarm History window.
Fault > PSM-Network Alarm History.
544 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Fault > PSM-Element Current Alarm
WARNING Command available only if a single PSM Map object is selected in the LX Map Manager window.
The PSM-Element Current Alarm command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signals (alarms)
active in the equipment present ONLY in the selected PSM Map object.
The selection of the command opens the <PSM Map name> Current Alarm window.
Fault > PSM-Network Current Alarm.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 545

Locate > PSM-Map Browser
The PSM-Map Browser displays the list of PSM Map objects managed by NMS5LX.
Operations
Display the list of PSM Map objects managed by NMS5LX
Open the Packet Service Manager Map window
Search and highlight in the map the symbol of a PSM Map object
Filter the list of PSM Map objects
GUI
Service Map Browser window
Display the list of PSM Map objects managed by NMS5LX

1. Select PSM > Locate > PSM-Map Browser.

The Service Map Browser window displays the list of the PSM Map objects managed by the supervision
system.
Open the Packet Service Manager Map window

2. In the Service Map Browser window, select the wished PSM Map object.
3. Select Options > Open Service Map.

The Service Map Browser window relevant to the selected PSM Map opens.
If the message Cannot open Service Map created in another map is displayed, the Packet Service Man-
ager Map window cannot be opened because the selected PSM Map object is not present in the current
map.
The Packet Service Manager Map window can be opened even by a double click on the record of the
PSM Map object.
Search and highlight in the map the symbol of a PSM Map object

2. In the Service Map Browser window, select the PSM Map object you wish to highlight.
3. Select Options > Find Service Map.

In the LX Map Manager window, the symbol of the selected PSM Map object is highlighted.
546 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

If the message Cannot highlight Service Map created in another map is displayed, the symbol of the
selected PSM Map object cannot be highlighted because the selected PSM Map object is not present in
the current map.
Filter the list of PSM Map objects

2. In the Service Map Browser window, type the letters/numbers present in the name of the wished PSM
Map objects in the text box (status bar).
3. Press Filter.
The Service Map Browser window displayed only the PSM Map objects whose name contains the set
letters/numbers.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 547

Service Map Browser window
This window displays the list of the PSM Map objects managed by the supervision system.
Menu bar
Options > Find Service Map. It highlights in the map the symbol of a PSM Map.
Options > Open Service Map. It opens the Service Manager Map window.
List of PSM Map

For each PSM Map the name corresponding to the name of the relevant PSM Map symbol in the
map is displayed. The list of PSM Map objects is displayed in alphabetical order.
Status bar
Service Map Nb: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy).
If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records.
Filter. Box Filter the list of PSM Map objects.
548 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Locate > PSM-Equipment Browser
The PSM-Equipment Browser command displays the list of the equipment present in the PSM Map ob-
jects of the system.
Operations
Display the list of equipment present in the PSM Map objects of the system
Filter the equipment list (PSM-Equipment Browser)
Highlight the equipment symbol in PSM Manager map
GUI
PSM - Equipment Browser window
Display the list of equipment present in the PSM Map objects of the system

1. Select PSM > Locate > PSM-Equipment Browser.

The PSM - Equipment Browser window displays the list of the equipment present in the PSM Map objects
of the current map.
The information corresponds to the characteristics/operating status of the equipment when the PSM -
Equipment Browser window has been opened or updated.
The presence of the - symbol indicates that the information is not available as not meaningful for the
status and/or the type of equipment, which is referred to.
A double click on the equipment record opens the Packet Service Manager Map window containing the
equipment.
Filter the equipment list (PSM-Equipment Browser)

2. In the PSM - Equipment Browser window, select View > Filter.

In the Eq. Browser: Filter window, select the boxes corresponding to the wished filter criteria.
Match Name. Logic address of the NE.
To set the criteria, type the logical address of the NE in the text field.
The text field for the typing of the equipment name is case sensitive. Then pay attention to the
typing of the upper-case letters and of the lower-case letters.
Match Type. Equipment type.
Match PSM Map. Equipment present in the specific PSM Map objects of the current map.
To set the criterion select the wished PSM Map object in the right area and press Add. The se-
lected object will be inserted in the left area. Repeat this operation for all the wished PSM Map
objects.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 549

Match Physical Address. Type (real or virtual) and physical address of equipment.
Real, activate the IP Equipment option and type the IP address of the wished NE in the
text fields.
The PSM - Equipment Browser window displays only the records matching the activated criteria.
Closing the PSM - Equipment Browser window automatically removes the possible active filters.
Highlight the equipment symbol in PSM Manager map

2. In the PSM - Equipment Browser window, select the equipment you wish to highlight.
3. Select Options > Find equipment.

If not already open, the Packet Service Manager Map window is displayed containing the selected equip-
ment.
The operation can be executed even by a double click on the equipment record in the PSM - Equipment
Browser window.
550 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

PSM - Equipment Browser window
This window displays the list of the equipment present in the PSM Map objects of the system maps.
Menu bar
Options > Find equipment. It highlights the equipment symbol in the relevant Packet Service
Manager Map window.
View > Filter. It allows filtering the equipment list according to specific criteria.
Parameters
Name. Logical address of the equipment.
Type. Type of equipment. The wording Virtual indicates that the record refers to a virtual NE.
Service Map. Name of the map where the equipment is present.
Alarm. Operating status (alarms) of the equipment. The severity level of the alarm present in
the equipment opens. When more alarms of different severity are present, the level relevant to
the more serious alarm is displayed.
Physical Address. Physical address of the equipment. The wording VIRTUAL EQ. indicates that
the record refers to a virtual NE (NMS5LX).
Status bar
Filter. Indicates which filters are active in the window.
Other information. Date/time when the window has been opened/refreshed.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 551

HELP
About NMS5LX. It displays the version of the NMS5LX system installed on one's machine.
License Information. It displays the details of the codewords relevant to its own supervisory system.
Display Legend. It displays the legend of the colours of the objects in the LX Map Manager window.
NMS5LX Software Module. It displays the list of the programs composing the NMS5LX software pack-
age.
System Administrator. It opens the NMS5LX system administrator manual.
Overview. It opens the NMS5LX user manual.
Manager. It opens the equipment user manual.
552 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

About NMS5LX
The About NMS5LX command displays the version of the NMS5LX system installed on one's machine.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 553

License Information
The License Information command allows Display the detail of the codewords.
Operations
Display the detail of the codewords
Display the detail of the codewords

1. Select Help > License Information.

The License Information window displays the following parameters:
Codeword. Version of the codewords present on its own NMS5LX system.
Max User. Maximum number of NMS5UX users that can open the NMS5LX GUI (using the same
map or different maps).
Max Network Element. Maximum number of equipment that can be managed at the same time
by NMS5LX system.
Expiration Time. Possible expiring date of the codewords.
The wording - indicates that the codewords do not have an expiring date.
Network Element Type. Types of the equipment managed by its own NMS5LX system.
554 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Display Legend
The Display Legend command displays the meaning of the colours.
Operations
Display the legend of the object colours
Display the legend of the object colours

1. Select Help > Display Legend.

The Display Legend window displays the colours which the objects of the LX Map Manager window can
assume.
Each colour represents a status or alarm condition which, colours being equal, can vary depending on
the type of object which is referred to.
Tab.4, for each object, shows the colours which the relevant icon can assume and the description of
the condition they represent.
Fig.35 Legend of the colours of the equipment symbols
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 555

NMS5LX Software Module
The NMS5LX Software Module command displays the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5LX
software package.
Operations
Display the programs constituting the NMS5LX software
Print the list of programs
GUI
NMS5UX Version window
Display the programs constituting the NMS5LX software

1. Select Help > NMS5LX Software Module.

The NMS5UX Version window displays the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5LX software
package.
Print the list of programs

1. Select Help > NMS5LX Software Module.

2. In the NMS5UX Version window, select File > Print.
The content of the window is printed on the default printer.
556 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NMS5UX Version window
This window displays the list of programs constituting the software package of the supervision system.
Menu bar
File > Print. It prints the content of the widow on the default printer.
Parameters
Program. Program name.
Version. Program version.
Dimension. Program dimensions expressed in byte.
Date. Program issue date.
Path. Program path on the server/workstation.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 557

System Administrator
The System Administrator command opens the NMS5LX system administrator manual.
558 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Overview
The Overview command opens the NMS5LX user manual.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 559

Manager
The <equipment type> Manager command opens the user manual relevant to the specific equipment
type.
In the Help menu, only the manuals of the equipment managed by one's NMS5LX will be available.
560 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

APPENDICES
Menus and commands

Operations list
Assistance service
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 561

MENUS AND COMMANDS
Tab.22 shows the menus and the commands in the LX Map Manager window.
The list can be configured by the Superuser. For more information refer to NMS5UX Administrator Manual.
Some commands are optional and could be not available in the specific menu of ones NMS5LX system.
562 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Tab.22 Menus/commands (LX Map Manager window)
Menus Commands
Refresh
Map Properties
Submap Properties
Map
Import/Export
Change Map
Exit
Map (only for Super-map)
Container
Network Element
Virtual Network Element
Add Generic Symbol
Link
Physical Link
Label
Network From File
Delete
Network Element
Edit
Container
Modify/View Generic Symbol
Link
Label
Information
Graphical Symbol Properties
Find
Vertical
Arrange Symbols
Horizontal
Generate Info for Web
Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers
Show/Hide Graphical Links
Show/Hide Physical Links
Show Labels/Show Capacity
View Show/Hide Map Tree
Show/Hide Platform Status
Show/Hide Link Label
Pan and Zoom
Performance Monitoring Read
Performance Monitoring
Performance
Old Performance Monitoring
View/Modify P.M. Status
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 563

Menus Commands
Equipment Info
Software Inventory
OAM Status
E1 Browser
Configuration Equipment Port Configuration
NE PPP Interfaces
NE Routing Table
Hw Inventory
NE Backup/Restore
Equipment List Locate
Locate Proxy Equipment List
Physical Link Browser
Network Element
Line Test
Container
Network Element
Connect
Container
Network Element
Disconnect
Container
Force NE Disconnect
Command Ping
Network Element
Alarm Re-alignment
Container
Network Element
Configuration Upload
Container
Configuration Download
Reset Equipment Controller
PMP Clear Alarm Table
Old Alarm History
NE Alarm History
NE Current Alarms
Fault NE History Log
NE Command Log
Alarm Summary
Event Statistics
Transaction Log
Silenced eq.
564 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Menus Commands
Alarm Not. via e-mail - Conf
Command Executor
NE Monitoring
Auto Discovery
NMS5LX History View
Tools
NMS5LX History View 15 min.
Rmon
NMS5LX Statistics
NMS5LX History View Prio/Service
XML Export Mgmt
XML Export
XML File Mgmt
Cfg File Download
Network Severity Code
Equipment Severity Code
NMS5LX System Users
NMS5LX Logged Users
LCT Equipment Users (NEs of series ALS, ALFOplus, ALFOplus80)
LCT Logged Users
Remote Element Table
Options NE Sw/Fw Download
Scheduled Sw Dwl Status
NE Sw/Fw Release
FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download
NMS5UX - Read PM Server Status
NMS5UX - Feature Keys Mngt
Alarm History Delete Backup
Performance Monitoring Backup
Misc Performance Monitoring Restore
Performance Monitoring Delete
NMS5LX Global Database Backup
NMS5LX Global Database Restore
Proxy Configuration Parameters
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 565

Menus Commands
Edit > RM-Add Ring
Edit Edit > RM-Delete Ring
Edit > RM-Modify/View Ring
Fault > RM-Network Alarm History
Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm
Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary
Ring Manager Fault
Fault > RM-Element Alarm History
Fault > RM-Element Current Alarm
Fault > RM-Element Alarm Summary
Locate > RM-Ring Browser
Locate Locate > RM-Path Browser
Locate > RM-Equipment Browser
Edit > Add PSM Map
Edit Edit > Delete PSM Map
Edit > Modify/View PSM Map
Fault > PSM-Network Alarm History
PSM Fault > PSM-Network Current Alarm
Fault
Fault > PSM-Element Alarm History
Fault > PSM-Element Current Alarm
Locate > PSM-Map Browser
Locate
Locate > PSM-Equipment Browser
About NMS5LX
License Information
Display Legend
Help NMS5LX Software Module
System Administrator
Overview
Manager
566 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

OPERATIONS LIST
Numbers
2Mbit/s tributary
Activate/deactivate the loops ..............................................................................................183
Activate/deactivate the use .................................................................................................182
Verify the status ................................................................................................................182
Verify/change the label ......................................................................................................182
ACL
Add a rule to the IP Access Control List ................................................................................186
Enable/disable the use of the IP Access Control List ...............................................................187
Remove a rule from the IP Access Control List .......................................................................187
Acquire the configuration of one or more pieces of equipment ......................................................244
Acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers ...........................................245
Activate a measure (NE Monitoring) ..........................................................................................324
Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON 15min statistics .........................347
Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics ...................................344
Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics ......................................................341
Add a map to a Super-map ......................................................................................................125
Add a NMS5UX user ................................................................................................................392
Add a station to the remote equipment list ................................................................................420
Add more pieces of equipment at the same time to the remote equipment list ................................421
Add the equipment to the remote equipment list ........................................................................421
Activate/deactivate an operator ...........................................................................................314
Add an operator ................................................................................................................312
Change the characteristics of the operators ...........................................................................313
Create a filter ...................................................................................................................314
Delete an operator ............................................................................................................314
Display the enabled operators .............................................................................................312
Re-enable an operator (entry, normal, advanced, privileged user) ............................................317
Re-enable an operator (Superuser) ......................................................................................314
Alarm Summary
Display the alarms stored in the alarm history .......................................................................292
Display the summary of the map alarms subdivided by severity ...............................................290
Filter the alarms list ...........................................................................................................290
Reset the indication of status change ...................................................................................292
Set the automatic updating of the data .................................................................................292
Align the information present in the databases of NMS and RAN ...................................................138
Align the symbols ...................................................................................................................137
Alternate the display of label and capacity on the links of the map ................................................143
Auto Discovery
Configure and activate the NE Wake Up modality ...................................................................333
Configure and activate the Network Scan modality .................................................................332
Create manually the object of the equipment present in the table ............................................336
Deactivate the NE Wake Up modality ...................................................................................334
Deactivate the Network Scan modality .................................................................................333
Delete the equipment from the table ....................................................................................336
Display the found equipment ...............................................................................................335
Load the configuration .......................................................................................................335
Save the configuration .......................................................................................................334
Search the equipment in the table .......................................................................................335
Verify the settings (Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up) ..........................................................331
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 567

B
Backup the alarm history .........................................................................................................463
Capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant ..............................................342

Change the characteristics of one piece of equipment of the remote equipment list .........................423
Change the characteristics of the NMS5UX users ........................................................................393
Change the Logical Address of the equipment ............................................................................191
Change the password associated to ones NMS5UX user ..............................................................396
Communication ports
Supervision parameters (verify/change) ...............................................................................190
Configuration file
Download on NEs of the same type ......................................................................................383
Connect one or more pieces of equipment .................................................................................236
Connect the equipment of one or more containers ......................................................................237
Create a measure (NE Monitoring) ............................................................................................322
Create a new map ..................................................................................................................392
Create an object ..................................................................................................................... 31
Create objects
Container .........................................................................................................................120
Container, NE, Link and Label objects described in a file .........................................................124
Generic Symbols ...............................................................................................................122
Graphical Link ...................................................................................................................123
Label ...............................................................................................................................124
NE ...................................................................................................................................121
Physical Link .....................................................................................................................123
PSM Map ..........................................................................................................................525
Ring ................................................................................................................................475
Virtual NE .........................................................................................................................122
Deactivate a measure (NE Monitoring) ......................................................................................324

Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON 15min statistics ...................347
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON statistics ............................345
Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics ................................................342
Deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file (HW Inventory) ..................................................202
Default Gateway (NE)
Delete ..............................................................................................................................197
Display ............................................................................................................................186
display .............................................................................................................................196
Set, change ......................................................................................................................197
Delete a file (NE Monitoring) ....................................................................................................326
Delete a measure (NE Monitoring) ............................................................................................323
Delete a NMS5UX user ............................................................................................................393
Delete a PSM Map object from the map .....................................................................................526
Delete a station from the remote equipment list .........................................................................420
Delete an object ...................................................................................................................... 31
Delete an object from the map .................................................................................................128
Delete one or more pieces of equipment from the list (FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) .................449
Delete one or more pieces of equipment from the list (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ...........................434
Delete one piece of equipment from the remote equipment list .....................................................423
Delete the backup files of the alarm history ...............................................................................465
Delete the backup files of the PM measures ...............................................................................468
Delete the software present in the memory bench in standby of the equipment ..............................443
568 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Disable an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics) .............................................................351
Disconnect one or more pieces of equipment ..............................................................................238
Disconnect the equipment of one or more containers ..................................................................239
Display the backup files of the equipment present in themap ........................................................204
Display the characteristics of a measure (NE Monitoring) .............................................................323
Display the characteristics of the user who opened the map .........................................................396
Display the content of a file of SNMP commands .........................................................................320
Display the detail of the codewords ...........................................................................................554
Display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different ..............................................191
Display the files of scheduled SNMP commands ..........................................................................320
Display the hardware of the equipment in the map .....................................................................200
Display the history of the RMON 15 min (Priority/VLAN) statistics of an Ethernet port ......................348
Display the history of the RMON 15 min statistics of an Ethernet port ............................................345
Display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port .......................................................343
Display the legend of the object colours ....................................................................................555
Display the list of the active NMS5LX applications .......................................................................400
Display the list of the equipment scheduled for the software updating ...........................................434
Display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software update ....................................................449
Display the list of the measures (NE Monitoring) .........................................................................322
Display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps ............................................392
Display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open .........................................................398
Display the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to the equipment ..................................417
Display the programs constituting the NMS5LX software ..............................................................556
Display the remote equipment list of the equipment ....................................................................419
Display the results of a measure (NE Monitoring) ........................................................................324
Display the results of a measure stored into a file (NE Monitoring) ................................................325
Display the software version of a FAMxc equipment ....................................................................451
Display the software version of the equipment ...........................................................................441
Display the symbol graphic parameters .....................................................................................135
Display/hide the Map area ................................................................................................. 30, 144
Display/hide the names of the Link objects ................................................................................146
Display/hide the physical links in the map ..................................................................................142
Display/hide the platform status bar .......................................................................................... 42
Enable and define the activation criteria for a RMON counter ........................................................350
Enable/disable and configure the equipment alarms ....................................................................388
Equipment
Activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time ..............................................217
Add/remove a prefix to the logical address of the equipment ...................................................215
Connect ...........................................................................................................................221
Delete and rewrite the equipment table ................................................................................216
Disconnect .......................................................................................................................222
Display the list ..................................................................................................................212
Filter/sort the list ..............................................................................................................213
Get the configuration .........................................................................................................223
Open the equipment window ...............................................................................................214
Re-align the alarms ...........................................................................................................223
Save/print the list ..............................................................................................................212
Start the Command Executor application ..............................................................................224
Transfer the configuration ...................................................................................................224
Update the software ..........................................................................................................217
Update the software (FAMxc) ..............................................................................................218
Verify in which map the equipment symbol is present .............................................................215
Verify the configuration/operating status ..............................................................................214
Verify the equipment information ........................................................................................215
Verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to the equipment ......................................................221
Verify the reachability ........................................................................................................221
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 569

Verify the results of the PM measures ..................................................................................216
Verify/change the LCT users list ..........................................................................................220
Verify/change the status/severity of the alarms and the trap forwarding status ..........................219
Equipment information, display ................................................................................................162
Event Statistics
Delete the alarms ..............................................................................................................297
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarm ..........................................................296
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment ...................................................296
Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval ................................................295
Filter the alarms ................................................................................................................298
Execute series of SNMP commands stored on file ........................................................................319
Execute the Line Test for one or more pieces of equipment ..........................................................234
Execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers ...............................................235
Execute the Ping of the equipment ................................................................................... 190, 241
Execute the software reset of an equipment ...............................................................................249
Export the inventory data in csv format (Software Inventory) .......................................................167
Feature keys
Displays the features enabled on the equipment ....................................................................459
Download the file of feature keys to equipment .....................................................................459
Filter the alarms list (Equipment Severity Code) .........................................................................389
Filter the NMS5LX applications list (NMS5UX Logged Users) .........................................................401
Filter the NMS5UX users list (NMS5UX Logged Users) ..................................................................400
Filter/order the list of the equipment/units (Equipment Port Configuration) ....................................191
Filter/sort the list of the equipment/units (Software Inventory) ....................................................166
Filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) .....................................437
Force the closure of an NMS5LX application ...............................................................................401
Force the logout of a LCT user ..................................................................................................417
Force the logout of a NMS5UX user ...........................................................................................399
Force the software disconnection of one or more equipment .........................................................240
Highlight the remote equipment connected by the physical link ..................................................... 40
Lock/unlock a backup file ........................................................................................................206
Manage the informative notes of a NE symbol ............................................................................133

Management LAN port
Enable/disable ..................................................................................................................189
Map
Add a map ........................................................................................................................115
Associate/remove the background to a container ...................................................................109
Change map .....................................................................................................................115
Close the LX Map Manager window ......................................................................................118
Compare the objects of a file with the objects of a map/container ............................................113
Compare the objects of different maps/containers .................................................................112
Copy the objects of a file to a map/container ........................................................................111
Copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container ............................................110
570 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Customizing the display settings ..........................................................................................108
Delete a map ....................................................................................................................116
Save the objects of a map/container ....................................................................................111
Update the LX Map Manager window ....................................................................................107
Modify an object ..................................................................................................................... 31
Move an object ....................................................................................................................... 31
Move one piece of equipment within the remote equipment list ....................................................424
NE Command Log
Create a Command Log ......................................................................................................284
Create more Command Logs at the same time ......................................................................285
Delete a Command Log ......................................................................................................286
Delete all the Command Logs of the equipment .....................................................................287
Delete the list of operations stored in the equipment controller ................................................287
Display the content of a Command Log .................................................................................286
Display the list of the Command Log of the equipment ...........................................................284
NE History Log
Copy the alarms list to a text editor .....................................................................................279
Create a NE Log ................................................................................................................276
Create more NE Logs at the same time .................................................................................277
Delete a NE Log ................................................................................................................278
Delete all the equipment NE Logs ........................................................................................278
Delete the alarms stored in the equipment controller ..............................................................278
Display the content of a NE Log ...........................................................................................277
Display the NE Logs of the equipment ..................................................................................276
Save/print the alarms list ...................................................................................................278
Sort the alarms list ............................................................................................................281
Verify the time interval between two different alarms .............................................................280
Acknowledge the alarms .....................................................................................................254
Activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data ...........................................................255
Copy the alarms list to a text editor .....................................................................................253
Display the acknowledge information of an alarm ...................................................................254
Display the history of the alarms in the map .........................................................................252
Highlight in the map the symbol of the equipment .................................................................256
Modality of recording of the alarms ......................................................................................260
Verify the configuration/functional status of the equipment .....................................................257
Activate/deactivate the automatic data update ......................................................................262
Display the alarms active in the equipment of the map ...........................................................261
Verify the configuration/functional status of the equipment .....................................................264
Network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific equipment type
Change ............................................................................................................................386
Verify ..............................................................................................................................386
OAM
OAM-FM Domain, define .....................................................................................................169
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 571

OAM-FM Domain, remove ...................................................................................................170
OAM-FM Domain, verify the characteristics ...........................................................................169
Old Alarm History
Copy the alarms list into a text editor ...................................................................................268
Display the alarm history ....................................................................................................267
Open a Telnet session .............................................................................................................191
Open the equipment window ....................................................................................................164
Performance
Activate the PM measures for NEs of the same type ..............................................................156
Activate/deactivate a PM measure point for one piece of equipment .........................................157
Deactivate the PM measures for NEs of the same type ...........................................................157
PM alarms for one piece of equipment, verify/modify the activation thresholds ..........................158
Update the results of the PM measures of the equipment ........................................................149
Verify the operating status of the PM measure points for NEs of the same type ..........................156
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute record - Old Performance Monitoring) ..155
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (15 minute record) ............................................151
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour record - Old Performance Monitoring) ......154
Verify the results of the PM measures of a NE (24 hour record) ...............................................150
Physical Link
Change the name ..............................................................................................................229
Delete ..............................................................................................................................230
Display the list ..................................................................................................................229
Filter the display of the list .................................................................................................230
PPP communication ports (NE)
display ..................................................................................................................... 185, 195
Print the list of programs (NMS5UX Software module) .................................................................556
Proxy Agent
Display the managed equipment ..........................................................................................227
Verify/change the configuration parameters ..........................................................................227
PSM-Equipment Browser
Display the list of the equipment present in the PSM Map objects of the system .........................549
Filter the equipment list .....................................................................................................549
Highlight the equipment symbol in Packet Service Manager Map ..............................................550
PSM-Network Alarm History
Align the alarms of Packet Service Manager to those of NMS5LX ..............................................530
Display the alarm history of the equipment in the PSM Map objects ..........................................528
Modality of the updating of data ..........................................................................................536
Save the alarms list ...........................................................................................................528
PSM-Network Current Alarm
Align the alarms of Packet Service Manager to those of NMS5LX ..............................................538
Display the alarms active in the equipment in the PSM Map objects ..........................................537
572 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

PSM-Service Map Browser
Display the list of the PSM Map objects managed by NMS5LX ..................................................546
Filter the list of the PSM Map object .....................................................................................547
Open the Packet Service Manager Map window ......................................................................546
Search and highlight in the map the symbol of a PSM Map object .............................................546
Re-align the alarms of one or more pieces of equipment ..............................................................242

Re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers ...................................................243
Re-execute the software update (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ........................................................436
Rename a station of the remote equipment list ...........................................................................420
Request Read-Write access to a map ......................................................................................... 41
Require the closure of an NMS5LX application ............................................................................400
Require the logout of a NMS5UX user ........................................................................................398
Require the updating of the data to the equipment controller .......................................................165
Re-read the release of NE firmware (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ....................................................435
Re-schedule the software download (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ...................................................435
Reset and connect one or more Legacy pieces of equipment .........................................................190
Restore the alarm history from disk ..........................................................................................464
Restore the alarm history from tape ..........................................................................................464
Restore the database ..............................................................................................................470
Restore the equipment configuration .........................................................................................205
Restore the PM measures from disk ..........................................................................................467
Restore the PM measures from tape ..........................................................................................467
Restore the remote equipment list from file ...............................................................................424
Ring Manager
Delete a Ring object from the map .......................................................................................476
Verify/change the parameters of a Ring object ......................................................................477
RM-Equipment Browser
Display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map ..................................521
Filter the equipment list .....................................................................................................521
Highlight the equipment symbol in Ring Manager window ........................................................522
RM-Network Alarm History
Align the RM alarms to those of NMS5LX ..............................................................................480
Display the alarm history of the equipment in the Rings ..........................................................478
RM-Network Alarm Summary
Change the title of RM - Alarm Summary window ...................................................................499
Delete the filter file ............................................................................................................498
Display the alarm history ....................................................................................................499
Display the summary of the alarms of the Ring equipment subdivided by severity ......................496
Open the filter file .............................................................................................................498
Reset the indication of status change ...................................................................................499
Save a filter file .................................................................................................................498
RM-Network Current Alarm
Align the RM alarms to those of NMS5LX ..............................................................................489
Display the alarms active in the Ring equipment ....................................................................488
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 573

RM-Path Browser
Activate the management of a Path .....................................................................................509
Activate/deactivate the tributary .........................................................................................511
Activate/deactivate the tributary loops .................................................................................511
Add the protection to a Path ...............................................................................................509
Change the management of the preferential Path ..................................................................512
Change the management of the switching between the Path A and Path B .................................512
Change the name of the Path ..............................................................................................510
Deactivate the management of a Path ..................................................................................509
Delete one or more Paths ...................................................................................................508
Delete the protection of a Path ............................................................................................508
Display the active alarms in the Path equipment ....................................................................510
Display the alarm history relevant to the equipment implementing the Path ..............................511
Display the alarm history relevant to the Path equipment ........................................................510
Display the alarms active in the equipment implementing a Path .............................................511
Display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map ..........................................507
Display/change the configuration of a Path ...........................................................................511
Display/change the configuration of a Path protected .............................................................512
Display/change/save the information relevant to a Path ..........................................................510
Filter/sort the list of the Path ..............................................................................................513
Highlight a Path in Ring Manager window ..............................................................................513
Highlight, in the map window, the Ring symbol containing a Path .............................................513
Modify the J2 Path Trace parameters ....................................................................................512
Modify the Signal Label parameters .....................................................................................512
Save on file the characteristics of the Path ............................................................................510
Save the list of the Path .....................................................................................................507
Switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection ........................................................509
RM-Ring Browser
Display the list of the Rings managed by the system ..............................................................505
Open the Ring Manager window ...........................................................................................505
Search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring ............................................................505
Routing Table (NE)
Add an element .................................................................................................................196
Delete an element .............................................................................................................197
display ..................................................................................................................... 186, 196
Save periodically the data to file (HW Inventory) ........................................................................202

Save the data to file (HW Inventory) .........................................................................................201
Save the database (backup) ....................................................................................................469
Save the equipment configuration (backup) ...............................................................................205
Save the history of the RMON 15min statistics of an Ethernet port ........................................ 348, 349
Save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port ..........................................................345
Save the list of the scheduled equipment (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ............................................435
Save the PM measures (backup) ..............................................................................................466
Save the remote equipment list ................................................................................................424
Save the results of a measure (NE Monitoring) ...........................................................................325
Save the results of a measure stored into a file (NE Monitoring) ...................................................326
Save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant .....................................343
Save/print the list of the equipment/units (Software Inventory) ....................................................163
Search a symbol in the map ....................................................................................................136
Security
Change the security protocols managed by the equipment ......................................................453
Save the configuration of the security parameters ..................................................................455
Set the file transfer protocol ...............................................................................................455
Set the security parameters of the equipment in Secure mode .................................................454
Verify the equipment security configuration ..........................................................................453
Send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users ........................................................................399
574 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Set the size of the containers windows ......................................................................................139
Show/hide the graphical links in the map ...................................................................................141
Show/hide the platform status bar ............................................................................................145
Silenced Equipment
Display the silenced equipment ...........................................................................................307
Force the equipment to exit from silenced status ...................................................................307
Highlight the symbol of a NE in the map ...............................................................................308
SNMP trap
Add a destination ..............................................................................................................471
Change the password .........................................................................................................472
Delete a destination ...........................................................................................................471
Stop the updating of the software (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ......................................................435
Switch the memory bench (Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ................................................................436
Switch the operation of the equipment controller memory benches ...............................................165
Switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc .............................................451
Switch the operation of the memory benches of the equipment controller ......................................442
Transaction Log
Delete the operations .........................................................................................................301
Display the list of the operations executed by NMS5UX users ..................................................300
Filter the list of operations ..................................................................................................301
Save/print the list of operations ..........................................................................................300
Transfer the equipment configuration to one or more pieces of real equipment ...............................246
Transfer the equipment configuration to one or more virtual pieces of equipment ............................247
Transfer to the PMP the default table of the alarms .....................................................................250
Update the equipment software ................................................................................. 165, 429, 441

Update the equipment software (FAMxc) ...................................................................................445
Update the WEB LCT application ...............................................................................................430
Users (ALFOplus80HD)
Add a user ........................................................................................................................411
Add a user group ...............................................................................................................409
Delete a user ....................................................................................................................412
Delete a user group ...........................................................................................................411
Display the list of the user groups ........................................................................................409
Display the user list ...........................................................................................................411
Modify a user ....................................................................................................................412
Modify a user group ...........................................................................................................410
Users (ALS, ALFOplus, ALFOplus80)
Add a user ........................................................................................................................405
Delete a user ....................................................................................................................406
Display the list of LCT users ................................................................................................405
Modify a user ....................................................................................................................406
Verify the alarms characteristics of the equipment ......................................................................388

Verify the configuration/functional status of the equipment ..........................................................164
Verify the enabling and the activation criteria for a RMON counter ................................................350
Verify the settings of the communication ports of the equipment ..................................................185
Verify the software version of equipment in the map ...................................................................163
Verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of the equipment (RMON statistics) ....................................341
Verify the symbol information ..................................................................................................133
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 575

Verify the units list of the equipment in the map .........................................................................163
Verify/change the parameters of a PSM Map object .....................................................................527
Verify/modify the a Label object ...............................................................................................132
Verify/modify the E1 channels of a Physical Link object ...............................................................131
Verify/modify the label of a Physical Link object .........................................................................131
Verify/modify the parameters of a Container object ....................................................................129
Verify/modify the parameters of a Generic Symbol object ............................................................130
Verify/modify the parameters of a graphical Link object ...............................................................130
Verify/modify the parameters of a Network Element object ..........................................................129
XML
Convert a XML file into a HTML file .......................................................................................373
Create a cronjob ...............................................................................................................371
Delete one or more cronjob ................................................................................................372
Delete the XML, Log or HTML files ........................................................................................376
Display the active cronjobs .................................................................................................371
Display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file ......................................................................374
Display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files .....................................373
Display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files ..........................................373
Display the list of the XML files in a given directory ................................................................372
Save the equipment configuration to a file ............................................................................370
Send email with XML, Log or HTML files ................................................................................376
576 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the com-
pany manufacturing the product.
NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 577

578 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

NMS 5 Linux

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

NMS 5 Linux

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

NMS5LX

NMS5LX SYSTEM ................................................................................................................ 20

Main functionalities ....................................................................................................... 20

Equipment managed by NMS5LX .................................................................................... 24

System release ............................................................................................................ 24

Hardware/software requirements .................................................................................... 25

Maximum number of equipment managed by NMS5LX ....................................................... 25

Maximum number of NMS5UX users................................................................................ 25

LX MAP MANAGER WINDOW ................................................................................................ 26

Title bar ...................................................................................................................... 27

Tool bar ...................................................................................................................... 28

Map area ..................................................................................................................... 29

View area .................................................................................................................... 30

New Object area........................................................................................................... 31

Status bar ................................................................................................................... 41

Platform Status bar....................................................................................................... 42

NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 1

EQUIPMENT WINDOW ......................................................................................................... 44

ALPLUS NODAL WINDOW .................................................................................................... 45

ALCPLUS2 NODAL WINDOW................................................................................................. 46

RING MANAGER WINDOW ................................................................................................... 47

PACKET SERVICE MANAGER MAP WINDOW ............................................................................ 48

NMS5UX USER ................................................................................................................... 49

Relation between LINUX user and NMS5UX user ............................................................... 49

Predefined NMS5UX user ............................................................................................... 49

Characteristics of a NMS5UX user ................................................................................... 49

Expiry of a NMS5UX user ............................................................................................... 54

Manual login to LX Map Manager window ......................................................................... 54

Function of Inactivity Check - User.................................................................................. 54

ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ-WRITE/READ ONLY) ................................................................... 55

Update of LX Map Manager window in Read Only modality.................................................. 55

Passage from Read Only modality to Read-Write Modality .................................................. 56

Function of Inactivity Check - RW map ............................................................................ 56

Modality of access to the equipment window .................................................................... 56

Modality of access to the nodal window ........................................................................... 57

Modality of access to Ring Manager window ..................................................................... 57

Modality of access to Packet Service Manager Map window................................................. 58

SUPER MAP ....................................................................................................................... 59

DUAL SERVER CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................... 60

START/CLOSE THE GUI ....................................................................................................... 62

Start-up of NMS5LX GUI................................................................................................ 62

First start-up of NMS5LX GUI ......................................................................................... 64

Closing of NMS5LX GUI ................................................................................................. 65

Automatic closing of NMS5LX GUI ................................................................................... 65

GRAPHIC NETWORK REPRESENTATION ................................................................................. 66

2 NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001

Rules for the creation of the objects ................................................................................ 68

Objects creation - Edit menu .......................................................................................... 71

Objects creation - Add Network From File functionality ...................................................... 77

Object creation - Auto Discovery functionality................................................................... 83

EQUIPMENT CONNECTION ................................................................................................... 89

Connection procedure ................................................................................................... 89

Commands for the connection management ..................................................................... 89

Connection status of the equipment ................................................................................ 91

Local management program WEB LCT ............................................................................. 93

NMS5LX 6.6.0 - MN.00326.E - 001 3

Management via Command Line Interface (only for ALFOplus80HD) .................................... 94

ALARM MANAGEMENT ......................................................................................................... 96

Acquisition of the alarms ............................................................................................... 96

Dynamic display of the alarms........................................................................................ 96

Display of the current alarms and of the alarm history ....................................................... 97

Saving the alarms......................................................................................................... 97

Enable/disable the alarms.............................................................................................. 99